Civil Tutorial

Civil/Survey Tutorial by Eagle Point
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the
part of the vendor. The software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and may
be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Eagle Point has carefully prepared this program package, including research, development, and testing to
ascertain its effectiveness and accuracy. However, no warranty of any kind is made with respect to this
program package or its related material, except as may be expressly stated in the licensing agreement or
other contractual document. In no event is Eagle Point liable for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with, or arising out of, the furnishing, performance, or use of this program package.
The installation program used to install Eagle Point software, InstallShield, is licensed software provided
by InstallShield Software Corporation.
ColorFast™, RoadCalc™, LANDCADD™, Virtual Simulator™, as well as the ColorFast™ and Eagle Point
logos, are unregistered trademarks of Eagle Point.
AutoCAD® is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
MicroStation® is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.
Windows® and DOS® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other registered or
unregistered trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Copyright © Q3, 2005, by Eagle Point. All rights reserved.
CIVIL/SURVEY
TUTORIAL TA B L E
OF
CONTENTS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Lesson Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1 Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point ................. 5

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . 8
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Degree of Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Planimetric Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Horizontal Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Stationing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Planimetric Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Dry Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wet Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Default CAD Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Prototype Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Eagle Point Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Node (Field Code) Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
New Field Code/Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Attribute Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2 Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Table of Contents i
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Import the Data Collection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Specifying the Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Edit the Instrument File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Reducing the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3 Lesson 3 – Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating a Survey Adjustment File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Survey Adjustment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specify Nodes for Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjusting the Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Create Error Ellipses and Update Graphic . . . . . . . . . . 47
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4 Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics . . . . . 49

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Import the Data Collection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Specifying the Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3-D Line Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating Line Work Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cross-Section Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reducing the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5 Lesson 5 – COGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Placing Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Create Lot Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating a Nodes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
6 Lesson 6 – Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
ii Civil/Survey Tutorial
Setting up the Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Annotating the Turtle Creek Court Alignment . . . . . . . 97
Annotate Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Create Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Annotate Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Create Node Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Create Legal Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Inserting a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7 Lesson 7 – Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Create a Custom Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Specifying Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Importing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8 Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Setting Up a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Importing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Check for Crossing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Triangulate a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reviewing Surface Model Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Create Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Labeling the Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Placing Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Placing a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Manipulating the CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Removing Unwanted Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9 Lesson 9 – Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Drawing a Feature Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Project Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Create a Surface Model of Slope Projections . . . . . . 159
Calculate Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Balance Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Analyze Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Table of Contents iii

Flow Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10 Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Entering Alignment PI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Entering Alignment Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Entering Alignment Superelevation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Entering Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Defining Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Cross-Sections from Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Generating Subsurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Entering Profile VPI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Entering Profile Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Spot Checking the Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Managing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Constructing the Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
BitWear Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Shoulder Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Binder Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
AggBase Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Subgrade Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Cut Condition Ditch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mirroring the Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Defining the Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Editing Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Running the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Reviewing Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Creating Cross-Section Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Creating Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
11 Lesson 11 – RoadCalc Urban Road . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Add a Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Managing and Associating Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
iv Civil/Survey Tutorial
Converting Alignments from Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Editing the Alignment Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Defining Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Cutting Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating Profile Tangents Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Creating Vertical Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Constructing the Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Curb Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Sidewalk Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Aggregate Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Subgrade Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Defining the Typical Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Adding the Typical Section to the Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Copying Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Editing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Associate Alignments and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Setting up the Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Setting up the Conditions Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Specifying Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Run the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
12 Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation Work . . . . 279
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Defining the Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Existing Pavement Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Entering the Design Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Processing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setting up the Conditions Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Typical Section Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Slope Condition Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Running the Design Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13 Lesson 13 – Surface Modeling Advanced Topics 297

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Setting Up a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Triangulate Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Merging Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Table of Contents v
Creating and Annotating Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
14 Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Create a Storm Sewer Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating Libraries of Standard Network Components. 315
Structure Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Inlet Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Copy and Modify Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Pipe Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Copy and Modify Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Establishing Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Network Settings – Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Network Settings – Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Network Settings – Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Eagle Point Precision Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Network Settings – HEC-22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Settings – Junction Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Network Settings – Pipe Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Creating a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Locate Outfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Create Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Convert Objects to Reach/Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Modifying the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Adding Lines to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Extract Ground Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Editing the Network Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Editing Network Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Editing the Network Junction Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Global Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Rainfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Creating a Rainfall Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Storm Sewer Network Design and Calculations . . . . . 348
Design Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Hydraulic Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
15 Lesson 15 – Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Create a Sanitary Sewer Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Drawing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
vi Civil/Survey Tutorial
Creating Libraries of Standard Network Components . . . . . . 364
Structure Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Pump Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Pipe Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Establishing Network Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Settings – Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Settings – Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Settings – Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Settings – Junction Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Settings – Pipe Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Creating Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Locate Outfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Create Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Convert Objects to Reach/Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Editing the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Editing the Network Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Editing Network Pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Editing the Network Junction Flows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Global Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Design Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Hydraulic Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Plan and Profile Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Custom Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
16 Lesson 16 – Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Creating a RoadCalc Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Entering Alignment PI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Entering Alignment Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Entering Alignment Superelevation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Defining Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Cross-Sections from Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Cross-Section Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Entering Profile VPI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Entering Profile Curve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Copying the Typical Section for the Rural Road to the
Typical Section Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Copying the Typical Section from the Typical Section Library
to Use for Hwy 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Slopes Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Condition Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Editing Design Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Running the Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Table of Contents vii

Layout of the Horizontal Geometry for the
Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Creating an Intersection for 001 – Rural Road Sub-project
and 004 – Hwy 73 Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Adjusting the Boundary Stations for the Intersection . . . . . . . 435
Placing Pavement Control Lines in the CAD Graphic . . . . . . 436
Placing a Curve Return Between Pavement Control Lines . . 438
Adding a Lane Transition to the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Breaking and Removing Pavement Control Lines Along the
ural Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Adding Triangular Islands to the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Designing the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Creating Area Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Creating a Curb Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Creating a Parallel Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Attaching a Parallel Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Attaching a Curb Component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Defining Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Maintaining Water Flow Through the Intersection . . . 463
Creating Ditches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Creating a Culvert Under the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Finishing the Design of the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Project Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Defining a Boundary for the Intersection Surface Model . . . . 472
Reviewing the Design of the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . 473
Check Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Display Flowlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Find Ponding Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Edit the Profile on the Edge of Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Preview Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Preview Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
Intersecting Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
17 Lesson 17 – Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Overview and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Creating an Additional Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Open Additional Drawing and Watershed Modeling
Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Preparing CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Creating Layer Groups (Level Groups) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Isolate Layer/Level Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Creating Watersheds & Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Create a New Sub-basin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Convert Objects to Sub-basin – Closed Object . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Convert Objects to Sub-basins – Eagle Point Boundary . . . . 493
Create Existing Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Convert Objects to Land Use – Closed Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Resolve Land Use Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Create Developed Land Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
viii Civil/Survey Tutorial

Convert Objects to Land Use – Eagle Point Boundary . . . . . 503
Create Scenarios and Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Create Scenario Undeveloped Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Create Scenario Developed Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Create Scenario Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Set an Active Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Creating Unit Hydrographs – Existing Onsite . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Edit/Create Unit Hydrograph – Existing Onsite . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Creating Unit Hydrograph – Developed Onsite . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Create Unit Hydrograph 1 Developed 001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Create Flood Hydrographs – Undeveloped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrograph – Existing On-Site
2 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Copy Computed Flood Hydrographs – Existing On-Site 10,
25, and 100 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Edit Computed Flood Hydrographs – Existing On-Site 10,
25, and 100 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Create Flood Hydrographs – Developed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Modify Hydrograph Symbol Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed
Subdivision 2 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Copy Flood Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision 10, 25,
and 100 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed
Subdivision 10, 25, and 100 Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Combine Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed
Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Edit/Create Combined Hydrographs – Developed
Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Create Reservoir/Detention Pond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Linear Storage Approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Reservoir/Detention Pond Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Edit/Create Reservoir Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Discharge Structure/Pond Outfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Edit/Create Outlet Structures – Trapezoidal Weir . . . . . . . . . 529
Edit/Create Outlet Structures – Stand Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Edit/Create Reservoir Discharge Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Reservoir Routing Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Create Routing Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Edit/Create Reservoir Routing Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Output Graphics – Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Output Graphics – Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Regional Hydrograph Results for Stream Flow . . . . . 540
Create Regional Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Edit/Create Santa Barbara Urban Hydrographs – Regional
EX_001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
EX_002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
EX_003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
EX_004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Table of Contents ix
EX_005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Routing Hydrographs – EX_001 & EX_002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Combine Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Adjust Hydrograph Symbol Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Culvert Rating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Create Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Edit/Create Culvert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
x Civil/Survey Tutorial
INTRODUCTION
The Civil/Survey Tutorial is job based, meaning that you work through a
job (also known as an Eagle Point Project) as if you were working with the
INTRO TO
software in a production environment. There are two ways to use this
tutorial material effectively. The first is to complete the tutorial in sequence
for a comprehensive overview of the Eagle Point software. The second is
to run specific parts of the tutorial as individual lessons. For example, to
learn about making a surface model, you can go to that lesson of the
tutorial and work through just that process. Running the tutorial as
individual lessons allows you to learn about specific Eagle Point modules
EP
and commands.
In this chapter:
Lesson Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction 1
Lesson Contents
Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point: This lesson shows you how to start and set up the project settings for
the tutorial project. This lesson takes approximately 30 minutes to complete.
Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics: In this lesson you download a raw data file (as stored by an
electronic data collector). The data file contains information which is used as survey control for a
subdivision. This lesson takes approximately 25 minutes to complete.
Lesson 3 – Survey Adjustment: This lesson builds upon the data created from the previous lesson.
Using the control traverse, which was downloaded in Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics, the Least
Squares method is used to adjust the control traverse. This lesson takes approximately 25 minutes to
complete.
Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics: This lesson shows you some of the more advanced
features of Data Collection. It shows you how to download a topographic data file with line work. This
data is used to locate the lot corners for the subdivision. This lesson takes approximately 30 minutes to
complete.
Lesson 5 – COGO: The lesson shows you how to utilize the different traverse commands to input
alignments and field book data. Various COGO commands are used to manipulate the geometry that
exists in the drawing. This lesson takes approximately 50 minutes to complete.
Lesson 6 – Drafting: The commands discussed in this lesson illustrate how to annotate various objects
in the drawing. This lesson takes approximately 40 minutes to complete.
Lesson 7 – Data Transfer: This lesson shows you how to create a custom filter (or format) for specially
formatted data. This custom format is then used to import a file that is used to create a surface model in
Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics. This lesson takes approximately 20 minutes to complete.
Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics: This lesson discusses most of the major points of the Surface
Modeling module. In this lesson, you create a surface model from points and line data found within the
confines of the tutorial project. This lesson takes approximately 60 minutes to complete.
Lesson 9 – Site Design: In this lesson you create a building pad for one of the lots. We discuss
projecting slopes, calculating volumes, balancing volumes, and analyzing the site using slope analysis.
This lesson takes approximately 50 minutes to complete.
Lesson 10 – RoadCalcTM (Rural): This lesson covers the basics of RoadCalc™. You are presented the
steps to create a two lane rural road.
Lesson 11 – RoadCalc™ (Urban): This lesson covers the more advanced features of RoadCalc™
including special alignments and profiles. An urban subdivision road is discussed including the creation
of a cul-de-sac.
Lesson 12 – RoadCalc™ (Rehabilitation): Here we discuss using RoadCalc™ when doing rehabilitation
work. This lesson covers the removal and replacement of an urban street.
Lesson 13 – Surface Modeling Advanced Topics: In this lesson, the steps needed to merge surface
models together to form a finished (or more accurately, a proposed) surface model are covered. You
make a surface model from graphical data produced from a roadway project and examine how to
merge several surface models together at one time. Once the proposed model has been finished, you
create proposed contours and annotate them so the annotation can be distinguished from other contour
annotation in the project.
Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers: In the Storm Sewers tutorial you design a storm sewer network for Turtle
Creek Court. You pick up the surface drainage for Turtle Creek Court and discharge it into the creek on
the south edge of the site. You specify the invert elevations for the network and a few of the pipe
diameters. The remainder of the pipe diameters are designed by the system.
Lesson 15 – Sanitary Sewers: In the Sanitary Sewers tutorial you design a small sanitary sewer
network with a forcemain. You are required to use a forcemain due to topography and easement
restrictions. The pipe inverts and pipe sizes are specified. You analyze the network you create.
2 Civil/SurveyTutorial
Lesson 16 – Intersection Design: In the Intersection Design tutorial you explore the steps needed to
create a roadway using the RoadCalc™ product and then design the intersection of two roadways.
Introduction
Lesson 17 – Watershed Modeling: In this lesson, the design work deals with the site hydrology using
Watershed Modeling. Using the subdivision layout and the original ground surface model created in
earlier lessons, defined sub-basins and land uses are used to define watersheds. Hydrographs will be
created for the undeveloped site conditions and the developed site conditions.
Assumptions
Before you begin the Civil/Survey Tutorial, there are a few items that Eagle Point is taking for granted.
Make sure that your operating system is fully functional. What that means is that you must be working
in a 32-bit operating system (such as Windows NT, Windows 2000, or Windows XP) with at least 64
megabytes of RAM.
Make sure that you have a mouse or digitizer (or some other pointing device) that is functional.
Make sure that your CAD software is installed properly and functioning correctly. Throughout the tutorial
lessons, you see references to the generic phrase of “CAD graphic.” This phrase is used in place of
“AutoCAD drawing” and “MicroStation design file”, as well as when referring to BricsCad files when
describing what your CAD program is displaying to you.
Make sure you have a sufficient amount of free hard-drive space available for “file swapping” that may
be performed by your operating system, CAD product and/or Eagle Point. This amount should be a size
that is roughly ten times your drawing size. If your drawing size is anticipated to be two megabytes, you
should have at least 20 megabytes of free hard drive space.
Make sure you have Eagle Point installed and fully functional.
Make sure that you are familiar with the basics of the CAD program you have configured for use with
Eagle Point.
Scenario
The tutorial is based on the following scenario.
You work for Design Solutions Unlimited, a company based out of Dubuque, Iowa. The company has
been in business for about fourteen years and started as a small surveying firm. Over the years, the
company has expanded to include a design department.
Design Solutions Unlimited has just been awarded a contract to expand an existing subdivision and
design a rural highway near the subdivision. Because of your experience and qualifications in both the
survey and design departments of the company, you have been selected as the project manager for
this project. You are responsible for all of the survey information that comes in from the field and also
for the design information that leaves the office.
The survey team performs a control survey and a topographic survey of the development area. These
individual surveys are downloaded into Eagle Point software and their information is used for the design
of the project. During the design of the project, you create a new rural highway (Highway 73), a new
urban street (Turtle Creek Court) and resurface an existing urban street (Foxfield Lane).
Introduction 3
LESSON 1 –
STARTING EAGLE LESSON
POINT
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Opening a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CAD Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Prototype Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Eagle Point Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 5

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Select the desired tutorial lesson.
! Start Eagle Point software.
! Add a project.
! Open a project.
! Enter project properties and settings.
! Create a Node library and attribute style.
Overview
The Civil/Survey tutorials consist of a number of individual lessons that cover many of the powerful
and most asked about features in the Eagle Point product line. For your convenience, Eagle Point has
made it possible to start the tutorial at any lesson you desire. The first part of Lesson 1 walks through
the steps that allow you to choose which tutorial lesson to work in. Read through the overview of each
lesson to determine where you would like to begin. If you choose a lesson other than Lesson 1, go to
that lesson in the manual.
Lesson 1 also covers the steps needed to start an Eagle Point project and how to establish project
settings. The settings are parameters that pertain to a specific project. An example of a setting is the
method you might want to use when displaying angular information (the angle format). Options that are
available include decimal degrees, degrees, minutes and seconds, and radians. Another setting is the
amount of precision that should be displayed for the various types of measured information. The
precision setting is used for display and reporting only as all calculations are performed to double-
precision accuracy (sixteen places to the right of the decimal point). All of the system settings can be
saved to a Prototype Settings Library so that you can customize the software to your requirements.
Once you have the settings defined and saved to the Prototype Settings Library, the named collection
of settings can be used as your organization’s default settings for other Eagle Point projects.
Throughout the tutorials, Eagle Point has tried to maintain consistent terminology when referring to
commands or actions that are taken when using the CAD engine you are configured for. As an
example, you see references throughout the tutorial to the term “CAD graphic.” In those areas where
CAD interaction is requested, Eagle Point provides instruction sets for the various types of CAD
products. You may notice, however, that some of the dialog box screen captures explicitly show
drawing (*.DWG) files. For MicroStation (or other non-AutoCAD/BricsCad users), substitute the “CAD
graphic” file type of your CAD package in areas where you notice drawing (*.DWG) conventions.
6 Civil/Survey Tutorial
Getting Started
! This section takes approximately two minutes to complete.
Default Tutorial Folder Installation Paths
Operating System File Path

XP C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Eagle Point Software\EGPT\Tutorial
Lesson 1 – Starting
Windows 2000 and Earlier C:\Program Files\Eagle Point Software\EGPT\Tutorial
Eagle Point
" Various operating systems and/or settings specified by your network administrator
may cause the Tutorial folder to be installed in a location that differs from the default
paths listed here.
1. To begin the tutorial, select Start " Programs " Eagle Point " Administrator Program.
The Eagle Point Administrator tool bar displays.
Figure 1-1 Configure Menu
2. From the Eagle Point Administrator tool bar, select Configure " Tutorial Project.
The Configure Tutorial Project dialog box (below) displays. This allows you to indicate an alternate
path for the Tutorial data files. By configuring your tutorial project, Eagle Point allows you to work
on copies of the Tutorial files (leaving the original data files untouched).
3. Select the desired tutorial lesson from the Lesson drop list of the Configure Tutorial Project
dialog box (below).
A general description is displayed for the selected lesson.
Figure 1-2 Configure Tutorial Project Dialog Box
4. After a lesson is selected, specify the folder in which you would like the tutorial data to be
placed. If you indicate a path that does not exist on the computer, the portion of the path that
does not exist is created as necessary.
The path may be to any folder you desire. For example, if Eagle Point has been installed to a
shared network folder and several tutorials are to be run from one copy of the software, you can
work the tutorial locally by specifying a path on your local computer. It is recommended that you
avoid placing the tutorial projects in the TUTORIAL folder.

5. After specifying the desired lesson and path, click on OK to prepare the tutorial data for the
lesson you have indicated. If you wish to use a path that already exists on the computer, you
can use the Select Tutorial Project Location icon to the right of the edit field to search and
select the proper path. By clicking on OK, the Configure Tutorial Project dialog box closes if
the folder exists. When you input a folder that does not exist, a dialog box displays and you
are asked if you want to create that folder. If the path shown is correct for the data files, click
on Yes. By clicking on Yes, the folder is created and the Configure Tutorial Project dialog
box closes. If the path is not correct, click on No and re-input the desired path.
6. Click on the Close icon to close the Eagle Point Administrator tool bar.
Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project

! This section takes approximately three minutes to complete.
1. Start the Eagle Point software by selecting Start " Programs " Eagle Point, or by double-
clicking on the Eagle Point icon on your desktop.
The Eagle Point menu (Figure 1-3, below) displays and the Open dialog box (Figure 1-4, below)
displays. Eagle Point works with projects that consist of at least one CAD graphic and its
associated data files.
Figure 1-3 Eagle Point Tool Bar
Figure 1-4 Open Dialog Box
2. Click on the Create New Project/Sub-project icon on the Open dialog box.
This displays the New dialog box (below).
Eagle Point
Figure 1-5 New Dialog Box
3. From the New dialog box, select Eagle Point Project from the list of available items and click
on the Next button.
This displays the New Project dialog box (below).
Figure 1-6 New Project Dialog Box
4. Type Eagle Point Tutorial as the description for the Tutorial in the Project Description
edit field. The description provides a method that allows you to easily distinguish between
the different projects (or jobs) you have defined for use.
# For your projects, you may want to use a project ID number and description such as: 98-12345 Hwy 21
Realignment.
5. Indicate the path to the folder that contains the main CAD graphic that is associated with the
project description. The main CAD graphic for the tutorial is found in the folder indicated
earlier (see Getting Started on page 7). To avoid making typing mistakes, click on the Select
a Drawing icon to the right of the Project Drawing edit field and navigate to the folder
location you specified in the Configure Tutorial Project dialog box (Figure 1-2 on page 7).
# If you are running Eagle Point for MicroStation, the word “Drawing” in the New Project dialog box
displays as “Design File.”
6. Select the CAD graphic file (CIVTUTOR) found in the PROJECT folder location you specified
in the Getting Started section, and click on Open.
7. Select Eagle Point Meters Default from the Prototype Settings drop list (the Civil/Survey
Tutorial is in metric units).
8. Since you had selected an existing CAD graphic for this project, the Prototype Drawing
option is disabled (grayed out). When creating a project with a new CAD graphic or project
drawing, Eagle Point allows you to indicate an existing CAD graphic that serves as a
prototype for the new CAD graphic. If you wish to make changes to any of the items, you

may make them in this dialog box or in previous dialog boxes by clicking on the Back
button. When you are confident that each of the values you have indicated in the New
Project dialog box is correct, click on the Finish button.
Opening a Project
! This section takes approximately one minute to complete.
1. Select Eagle Point Tutorial from the list of available projects in the Open dialog box (below).
2. Click on OK.
The Open dialog box is dismissed; however, the Eagle Point menu bar remains open. The CAD
product associated with the main CAD graphic is launched.
3. AutoCAD/BricsCad users, click on your CAD engine File menu and select Save.
Project Settings
The Eagle Point tool bar (Figure 1-3 on page 8) is where the tutorial project information is controlled.
This menu contains commands that allow you access to the settings, tools, and modules needed to
complete the project. You define various project parameters through the System pull down menu.
These parameters are overall settings for the entire project and are associated to the specific project
that is open. However, Eagle Point allows you to save commonly used settings to a named prototype
collection that can be used when new projects are started. In other words, you can create default
project settings and use those settings from project to project.
Units
Select Units from the System pull down menu to display the Units dialog box (Figure 1-8 on page 11).
The Units command allows you to indicate how Eagle Point should accept incoming data and how it
should generate outgoing data. For example, you can set the input unit for angular measurements as
degrees, minutes, and seconds and set the output unit for angular measurements to radians. As was
mentioned earlier, all of the system settings (including Units) can be saved to a Prototype Settings
Library.
Figure 1-8 Units Dialog Box
Eagle Point
Angular
1. Select Angular from the Category drop list, as shown above in the Units dialog box.
Here you select the category of unit(s) you want to adjust.
2. For both input and output, make sure Degrees, Minutes, Seconds are selected from their
respective drop lists.
3. Click on Apply to save the changes made in the dialog box.
This project now uses input angles in DDD.MMSS format and output angles in the same format.
Degree of Curvature
1. Select Degree of Curvature from the Category drop list.
This allows you to specify how Degree of Curvature measurements should be based.
2. Select Arc Definition from the Input/Output drop list.
3. Type 10.00 in the Length edit field.
This value specifies that degree of curvature measurements shall be based on 10-meter arc-
lengths.
4. Click on Apply to save the changes made in the Units dialog box.
Linear
1. Select Linear from the Category drop list in the Units dialog box (Figure 1-8, above).
This allows you to review the type of linear units associated with this project. If you recall, you had
specified Eagle Point Meters Default as the project’s Prototype Settings value when you created
the project. Next, you look at some more settings in Units.
Planimetric Area
1. Select Planimetric Area from the Category drop list.
This determines what area unit information is used as input and output values.
2. For both input and output, make sure Square Meters are selected from their respective drop
lists.
3. Click on OK to save the changes and dismiss the Units dialog box.

Formats
Select Formats from the System menu to display the Formats dialog box (Figure 1-9, below).
The Formats command allows you to indicate how Eagle Point displays the values for horizontal
direction, Node numbers, and alignment stationing. For example, you can set the direction of horizontal
angles to be displayed as an azimuth value or as a bearing value. As was mentioned earlier, all of the
system settings (including formats) can be saved to a Prototype Settings Library.
Figure 1-9 Formats Dialog Box
Horizontal Direction
1. Select Horizontal Direction from the Category drop list in the Formats dialog box (Figure 1-9,
above).
2. Select North Azimuth from the Format drop list.
This establishes the default method of displaying directions.
Nodes
1. Select Nodes from the Category drop list in the Formats dialog box.
The Nodes format allows you to select either numeric only or alphanumeric Node ID’s. Eagle Point
allows Nodes to be identified in the traditional sequential numeric method or with a letter/number
combination.
2. Select Numeric from the ID Format drop list.
3. Make sure Point Protection is toggled on.
When enabled, Eagle Point checks the Node number of a Node that is being placed against the
Node numbers that have already been specified. If a Node ID duplication is detected, you are
provided with a number of alternatives that can help solve the Point Protection issue.
Stationing
1. Select Stationing from the Category drop list in the Formats dialog box.
This sets the style of alignment stationing annotation in the project.
2. Select +000 from the Format drop list.
3. Click on OK to save the changes and dismiss the Formats dialog box.
For more detailed information on Formats, see the Eagle Point Menu documentation.
Precision
Select Precision from the System menu to display the Precision dialog box (below).
The Precision command allows you to set the display precision for a wide variety of measurements,
including angular, linear, area, and volume calculations. The precision setting is applied when
displaying information or when creating reports. All software calculations are done to double-precision
accuracy (sixteen places to the right of the decimal point). As was mentioned earlier, all of the system
settings (including Precision) can be saved to a Prototype Settings Library.
Eagle Point
Figure 1-10 Precision Dialog Box
Angular
1. Select Angular from the Category drop list.
This allows you to set the precision for reported angles.
2. Set the Decimal slider to 4.
3. Select Nearest Second from the Degrees, Minutes, Seconds drop list.
Linear
1. Select Linear from the Category drop list.
This allows you to set the precision for the reported linear distances, coordinates, and elevations.
2. Move the slider bars so that Distance is set to 4, Northing/Easting is set to 3 and Elevation is
set to 2. You can also type in the numbers in the edit fields left of the sliders.
Planimetric Area
1. Select Planimetric Area from the Category drop list.
This allows you to set the precision for the reported areas.
2. Move the slider bars so that Square Meters is set to 2 and Hectares is set to 4.

Dry Volume
1. Select Dry Volume from the Category drop list.
This allows you to set the reported precision for dry volumes.
2. Move the slider bars so that Cubic Meters is set to 4 and Liters is set to 2.
Wet Volume
1. Select Wet Volume from the Category drop list.
This allows you to set the reported precision for wet volumes.
2. Move the slider bars so that Cubic Meters is set to 4, Liters is set to 2, and Hectare-Meters is
set to 4.
Station/Offset
1. Select Station/Offset from the Category drop list. This allows you to set the reported
precision for both alignment stationing and offsets.
2. Move the slide bars so that both Station and Offset are set to 3.
3. Click on OK to save the changes and dismiss the Precision dialog box.
4. For more detailed information on Precision, see the Eagle Point Menu documentation.
Scales
When working with CAD, common practice is to create your project to “real-world” dimensions (at a 1:1
scale). In other words, a line that is 347 meters in length in the real world is drawn as 347 units in your
CAD graphic. When it comes to create plotted output, a user-defined plot scale is applied to your CAD
graphic. As a means to help establish proper text size(s) and vertical exaggeration factors for profile
and cross-section drawings, Eagle Point allows you to establish plot scales prior to any actual plotting.
1. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Tools " Plot Scales.
The Plot Scales dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 1-11 Plot Scales Dialog Box
2. Type 100 in the Horizontal Scale edit field.

This tells Eagle Point that one plotted unit on paper represents 100 units (in our case, meters) in
your CAD graphic.
3. Type 10 in the Vertical Scale edit field.
This tells Eagle Point that one plotted unit on paper represents 10 units (in our case, meters) in
your CAD graphic.
4. Click on OK to commit your settings and dismiss the Plot Scales dialog box.
CAD Settings
Eagle Point provides a tool whereby you can set default CAD parameters for the majority of CAD
Eagle Point
objects that are constructed by Eagle Point. There is a branching “tree-view” control on the left side of
the dialog box that separates all of the objects that are constructed in CAD by module. The CAD
settings that display on the right of the box are for the active (or highlighted) item that is in the tree-view
control. If you create a new collection of Prototype Settings, the current default CAD settings are
applied with the new Prototype Settings (which, in turn, can be applied to a new project).
AutoCAD and AutoCAD-compatible products such as BricsCad contain the following settings: Layer,
Color, Linetype, Line Width, Override with Active Attributes, Text Option, Plotted Size, Drawing Scale,
Style, and Use Style’s Height.
MicroStation contains the following settings: Level, Color, Style, Custom Style, Weight, Override with
Active Attributes, Text Unit, Plotted Size, Plot Scale, Font, and Use Font’s Height.
Default CAD Settings

1. Select System " Default CAD Settings to view the appropriate dialog box (below).
Figure 1-12 AutoCAD/BricsCad Default CAD Settings Dialog Box

Figure 1-13 MicroStation Default CAD Settings Dialog Box
2. Set a consistent text size for any incoming annotation that can be placed later in Lesson 6 –
Drafting. Scroll through the list of available product modules and click on the plus sign to
the immediate left of Drafting.
3. Highlight the annotate alignment entry.
4. In the Text grouping, make sure Plotted mm is selected from the Option drop list.
5. Type 5 in the Plotted Size edit field.
6. Click on the Global Modify button.
An Alert box displays, asking you to confirm this action.
7. Click on Yes to confirm this command.
The specified text size is applied to all items that place text in the default CAD Settings listing.
8. Click on OK when you have finished to dismiss the Default CAD Settings dialog box.
For more detailed information on Default CAD Settings, see the Eagle Point Menu documentation.
Prototype Settings
1. Select System " Prototype Settings to display the Prototype Settings dialog box (below).
This command allows you to create a prototype of the system settings for use in new projects,
thereby allowing you to customize the software to your requirements. Once you have established
the desired Eagle Point settings for a project, you can save that group of settings to the Prototype
Settings Library. When you start a new project, your named group of settings is available so you do
not have to re-enter your preferred project settings with each new project.
Figure 1-14 Prototype Settings Dialog Box
2. Click on the Create New Prototype icon to create a new group of settings and show the New
Prototype dialog box (below).
Figure 1-15 New Prototype Dialog Box
3. You must supply a meaningful description of this named collection of settings. Type
Eagle Point
Tutorial Metric Settings in the Description field.
# This named setting may already exist if the tutorial project has already been completed.
4. Select Eagle Point Tutorial from the Project drop list.
You are using the prototype settings from the selected project, in this case the tutorial, to create the
new prototype settings.
5. Indicate the name of a desired prototype CAD graphic to use when this named collection of
settings is used.
Leave the default value in place for this new collection of prototype settings.
6. Click on OK to create this prototype setting and dismiss the dialog box.
7. Click on Close to dismiss the Prototype Settings dialog box. Now that you have
successfully created a new entry in your Prototype Settings Library, explore how you can
put these settings to use by repeating the process you followed to create a new Eagle Point
project.
8. Select File " New to display the New dialog box (below).
9. From the New dialog box, select Eagle Point Project from the list of available items and click
on the Next button.
This displays the New Project dialog box (Figure 1-6 on page 9).
Normally, you would type the description for the project in the Project Description edit field. You do
not do this at this time.
Normally, you would indicate the path to the folder that contains the main CAD graphic that is
associated with the project description. You do not do this at this time.
10. Select Tutorial Metric Settings (the new prototype you created earlier) from the Prototype
Settings drop list.
That is all you need to do to use a prototype setting when you create a new project.

11. Since you do not create a new project at this time, click on Cancel to dismiss the New
Project dialog box.
Eagle Point Nodes

! This section takes approximately 10 minutes to complete.
An Eagle Point Node (hereafter referred to as a Node) typically consists of a CAD point object with
additional information (such as a symbol and identification label) that further describes the point. The
symbol that gets used for the Node is an AutoCAD/BricsCad block or MicroStation cell. Eagle Point
comes with a collection of predefined symbols that can be put to use immediately. In addition, Eagle
Point allows you to modify existing or add new symbols to this default symbol collection. Additional text
items (called attributes) are attached to the Node to help identify the various Nodes in your CAD
graphic. The Node can contain some or all of the following attributes: point number, description,
Northing, Easting, elevation, station, and offset.
Common practice is to group a set of commonly used Nodes into a library. Further, Eagle Point allows
you to create different styles of attribute combinations that display only the information in which you are
interested. For example, you might define one attribute style to consist of point number and elevation
attributes and another style to consist of point number, Northing, and Easting attributes. As a result,
Eagle Point is highly customizable and can be adopted to suit almost any need.
When surveys are being performed in the field, the survey crew typically identifies the type of shot they
are collecting (whether it be through hand-written field notes or electronic data collectors/field books).
For example, suppose a survey crew is locating a cross-cut mark that had been etched into a section of
roadway pavement. Rather than spelling out cross-cut mark in the survey notes, common practice is to
identify the shot by an abbreviated code. This field code then helps the office personnel know what the
point represents in the field. The Eagle Point Node (Field Code) Library makes it possible to create a
Node definition that includes (among other things) a symbol, attribute style and Field Code.
Node (Field Code) Library

1. Select System " Node (Field Code) Library to display the Node (Field Code) Library dialog
box (below).
Figure 1-17 Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the Manage Field Code Libraries icon located to the right of the Current Field Code
Library drop list.
The Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box (below) displays.
Eagle Point
Figure 1-18 Manage Field Code Libraries Dialog Box
3. Click on the New Field Code Library icon.

The New Field Code Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 1-19 New Field Code Library Dialog Box
4. In the Description edit field of the New Field Code Library dialog box, type Tutorial
Symbol Library.
5. Click on the Select an Existing Field Code Library icon to the right of the Field Code Library
edit field.
6. Locate the file CIVTUTOR.SYM, which is the supplied tutorial symbol library. Highlight the
file and click on the Open button.
This file is found in the folder specified in Getting Started on page 7. (If Eagle Point was installed to
a folder other than the default folder, substitute the actual path to the folder for the default path just
mentioned. See Getting Started on page 7 for more information.)
7. MicroStation users, you also need to identify a Cell Library that contains the cell symbols
you want to associate to your Field Code Library. Click on the Select an Existing Cell Library
button to the immediate right of the Cell Library edit field and locate the supplied tutorial cell
library that has a file name of CIVTUTOR.CEL. Click on the Open button.
This file is found in the folder specified in Getting Started on page 7. (If Eagle Point was installed to
a folder other than the default folder, substitute the actual path to the folder for the default path just
mentioned. See Getting Started on page 7 for more information.)
8. The Field Code library you are adding has already been defined with the symbols and Field
Codes you use for this project. Should you want to quickly create your own Field Code
library which uses the symbols you have created, you could toggle on the Automatically
Add Blocks from Directory option (Automatically Add Cells from Cell Library for
MicroStation users). You do not need to do this at this time, so make sure this toggle is off.
Click on OK in the New Field Code Library dialog box.
9. Highlight the Tutorial Symbol Library in the Description field. Click on OK in the Manage
Field Code Libraries dialog box to accept your new Field Code library and dismiss the
Manage Field Code Libraries dialog box.
10. Confirm the Tutorial Symbol Library is the current field code library by clicking on the
Current Field Code Library drop list and selecting the Tutorial Symbol Library from the
available list.

The Nodes associated with this library display in the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box list.
11. Globally change the attribute style for the Node definitions in this listing. Click on the Global
Modify button.
The Global Modify dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 1-20 Global Modify Dialog Box
12. Toggle on the Attribute Style option. Select EP Default (Metric) from the Attribute Style drop
list.
13. For AutoCAD/BricsCad users, toggle on Layer and type Points. For MicroStation users,
toggle on Levels and type Level 60.
14. Click on OK to commit this change and close the Global Modify dialog box.
New Field Code/Node

1. Click on the New Field Code icon to open the New Field Code dialog box (below).
Figure 1-21 New Field Code Dialog Box
2. Type SAP (short for Survey Angle Point) in the Field Code edit field. This is the field code the
survey crew would use when identifying the shots they collect in the field.
3. Supply a default description for this field code. Type Traverse Point in the Description
edit field.
As Nodes are brought into the CAD graphic, the default description is applied to the Nodes unless
a description for the Node was identified in the field when the shot was collected.
4. Type TRI in the Symbol edit field.
This is the name of the Node symbol you want to associate to the field code you entered earlier.
5. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad, type Control in the Layer edit field. If you are using
MicroStation, type 1 in the Level edit field.
Eagle Point
6. Make sure Symbol and Point is selected from the Placement drop list.
7. From the Attribute Style drop list, select Survey Control Points (Metric).
8. Leave the other fields set to their default value. Click on OK to accept your New Field Code
and dismiss the New Field Code dialog box.
Attribute Styles
1. Click on the Attribute Styles button in the lower left-hand corner of the Node (Field Code)
Library dialog box.
The Attribute Styles Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 1-22 Attribute Styles Library Dialog Box
2. You now create a new attribute style based on the Survey Control Points (Metric) attribute
style. Highlight Survey Control Points (Metric) and click on the New Attribute Style icon.
The New Attribute Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 1-23 New Attribute Style Dialog Box
3. Type Control Point in the Name edit field.

4. The following table shows the list of attributes whose Annotate setting should be set to on.
The table also shows the values for some of the properties that can be associated with each
attribute. You can alter the properties of attributes in the table below.
Annotate Settings That Should Be Set to On
Attribute Text Justifi- Delta Delta AutoCAD/ MicroStation Style

Size cation X Y BricsCad Level
Layer
Point 2.5 BL 5.0 2.0 PNTCTRLNO 62 Standard
Number
Description 2.5 ML 5.0 0.0 PNTCTRLDES 63 Standard
Northing 2.5 BR -5.0 .375 PNTCTRLCOOR 60 Standard
Easting 2.5 TR -5.0 -.375 PNTCTRLCOOR 60 Standard
Elevation 2.5 TL 5.0 -2.0 PNTCTRLELV 61 Standard
5. You can toggle the Annotate setting of an attribute by highlighting the attribute and clicking
on the On/Off button. Make sure each of the attributes listed in Table 1 have their Annotate
settings set to On and set the remainder to Off. Make sure this is done before proceeding.
The label of the button changes to be the opposite of the current Annotate setting. If the Annotate
setting is set to Off you are not able to modify the properties of the attribute items.
6. Highlight an attribute listed in the table named Annotate Settings That Should Be Set to On
(above) and click on the Modify Attribute Style icon.
The Modify Attribute Item dialog box (below) displays. You can also double-click on the Attribute
Item to display the Modify Attribute Item dialog box.
Figure 1-24 Modify Attribute Item Dialog Box
7. Set the remaining attribute properties listed in the table Annotate Settings That Should Be
Set to On (above) and click on OK when you have completed a specific attribute. Repeat
this procedure for each attribute listed in the table.
8. Once you have correctly entered the desired attribute information, click on OK on the New
Attribute Style dialog box.
This creates the new attribute style and dismisses the New Attribute Style dialog box. You should
now see a new attribute style called Control Point listed in the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.
9. Click on Close to dismiss the Attribute Styles Library dialog box.
10. Click on Close to dismiss the Node (Field Code) Library dialog box.
This concludes Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point. Additional information on those commands not
covered by this tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line help.
Summary
During this lesson, you learned how to:
! Select the desired tutorial lesson.
! Start Eagle Point software.
! Add a project.
! Open a project.
! Enter project properties and settings.
Eagle Point
! Create a Node library and attribute style.

LESSON 2 – DATA
COLLECTION BASICS LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Import the Data Collection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Specifying the Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Edit the Instrument File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Reducing the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics 25

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Download a job from a collector file.
! Specify some reduction settings.
! Edit the instrument file.
! Reduce the file into the CAD graphic.
Overview
In this lesson you use the Data Collection product to import the control points for the subdivision. The
file that you import is a Sokkia SDR 20 file that contains data that is downloaded and reduced. You first
learn the method to import the Sokkia data file. You then look at the reduction settings that you may
specify. The next thing you do is edit the instrument file. Finally, you reduce the file that places Eagle
Point Nodes into the CAD graphic. Some of the more advanced Data Collection options are discussed
in Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics, which begins on page 49.
Getting Started
! This section takes approximately seven minutes to complete.
If you are starting this lesson after having finished Lesson 1, you can skip this section and move directly
to the next session entitled Import the Data Collection File (below).
Since this lesson builds on the information from the previous lesson, you should first perform some
steps that bring the tutorial data “up-to-speed” for this lesson. If you have not already done so, follow
each of the steps discussed in the following sections of Lesson 1.
! Getting Started on page 7
! Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project on page 8
! Opening a Project on page 10
Import the Data Collection File

In this section, you import a Sokkia SDR 20 file into Data Collection. Though you are not downloading
directly from the electronic field book (hereafter referred to as a data collector), the steps you illustrate
are similar to the process of downloading directly from the data collector. The file you import contains
the measurements collected in the field and this data is stored in the “proprietary” Sokkia data format.
The data that is stored in proprietary formats is referred to as raw data. You then “reduce” the raw data
and convert the information into the CAD graphic. Complete the following steps to import the Sokkia
file.
1. Zoom out in the CAD graphic so that it resembles the site shown in the following figure.
Make sure that all of the Layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or Levels (MicroStation) are turned on
and visible, with the exception of layers/levels 25 and 26.
Collection Basics
Lesson 2 – Data
Figure 2-1 CAD Drawing
2. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Data Collection.
This launches the Data Collection menu bar.
3. In Data Collection, select Jobs " Import ASCII File.
The Import ASCII File dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 2-2 Import ASCII File Dialog Box
You must supply a meaningful name for the information contained within this Data Collection job.
4. Type Subdivision Traverse in the Job Name edit field.
5. Click on the Select File to Import icon to the right of the File Name edit field.

The Open dialog box (below) displays.
6. Navigate to the PROJECT folder location you specified when you configured the tutorial
project (see Getting Started on page 7 for more information).
7. Select TUTOR02.DC from this folder.
8. Click on the Open button to accept the file selected.
9. From the Format drop list, select Sokkia SDR2X.
The file you selected is in a Sokkia SDR 20 format. The Sokkia SDR2X format that was selected
works for any of the Sokkia “20-series” collectors.
10. Make sure the Create Legal Backup File toggle is on.
Enabling this option creates a read-only copy of the raw instrument file that cannot be edited
through Eagle Point software.
This file is a copy of the information as it was downloaded directly from the collector. This file can
be a useful source of information especially if there have been changes to the instrument file should
questions arise about the surveyed data.
11. Click on OK to import the file and dismiss the Import ASCII File dialog box.
Specifying the Reduction Settings

! This section takes approximately six minutes to complete.
Before you reduce the file, you need to specify some settings that control how the job is reduced. Some
of the settings that can be specified include:
! Whether to draw line work or not
! Erase the nodes when you re-reduce a job
! Use shot averaging
Complete the following steps to specify these settings.
1. In Data Collection select Options " Reduction Settings.
The Reduction Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 2-4 Reduction Settings – Collector Tab Dialog Box
When the Reduction Settings dialog box first displays, the Collector tab is active. This tab allows
you to specify the default collector format when you download from a collector or import a file. You
Collection Basics
Lesson 2 – Data
also have the ability to select a custom translator if your format is not available in the list of
supported formats. Do not make any changes to this section of the Reduction Settings dialog box.
2. Click on the Graphics tab.
The Reduction Settings dialog box – Graphics tab (below) displays.
Figure 2-5 Reduction Settings Dialog Box – Graphics Tab
3. On this tab make sure the Draw Line Work, Erase on Re-Reduce, Auto Zoom, and Place
Nodes toggles are all on.
The Draw Line Work toggle controls whether line work is placed into the CAD graphic or not. If the
toggle is off, any linework information in the data collection file is ignored.
When enabled, the Erase on Re-Reduce toggle erases all of the lines and Nodes associated with
the selected Data Collection job file when (and if) you re-reduce the job.
When enabled, the Auto Zoom toggle automatically zooms the CAD graphic so you see the extents
of the Data Collection job when it is reduced.
When enabled, the Place Nodes toggle places Nodes in the CAD graphic using the corresponding
field codes found in the Node (Field Code) Library. If this toggle is off, only the line data (if any) is
brought into the CAD graphic.

4. From the Default Field Code drop list, select 70 PLUS.
This Field Code is used if a Field Code identified for a shot collected in the field is not found in the
specified Node (Field Code) Library.
5. If you need to change any of the settings on this page, click on Apply to save the settings. If
nothing has changed, the Apply button is inactive.
6. Click on the Line Work tab.
The Reduction Settings dialog box – Line Work tab (below) displays.
Figure 2-6 Reduction Settings Dialog Box – Line Work Tab
7. On this tab, make sure all of the options are toggled on, with the exception of the Use Line
Name as counter option. Following are descriptions of the options. Click on Apply to save
the settings.
If nothing has changed, the Apply button is inactive.
The Use Line Library option allows you to use linework configurations that are specified in the Data
Collection Line Library. The Line Library allows you to add named lines that can be configured with
specific properties (including the line’s color and line style).
The Add undefined lines to Line Library option, when enabled, adds lines that were shot in the Data
Collection file, that are not in the Line Library. The lines that are added are created with the default
settings.
When enabled, the Draw 3-D Lines option draws Data Collection linework to the elevations of the
shots collected in the field. When this toggle is off, all of the line work comes in at the active
elevation of the CAD graphic.
When enabled, the Use 3-D Line Template option allows you to use lines that are defined in 3-D
Line Templates. Examples of 3-D Line Templates could be as simple as “back-of-curb” and gutter
line pairs to more involved urban roadway patterns showing sidewalk edges, curb faces, gutters,
edges-of-pavement, and median lines. Each time a line name is encountered that is associated to a
3-D Line Template, the lines in the 3-D Line Template are drawn. You would generally use 3-D Line
Templates to create line patterns that parallel the line they are based on (such as creating back-of-
curb shots based on collected edge of pavement shots).
The Use Field Code as Line Name option allows you to have Data Collection draw lines between
Eagle Point Nodes whose field codes are the same as a named line. In this case, the lines are
drawn in the order that the field codes display in the Data Collection job file. An example would be
a field code of CL that is also a line name of CL.
The Use Line Name as counter option allows you to specify only one line name in your Line Work
Library and have numbered instances of the same line name placed. The field code that is entered
is used as the line name in the Line Work Library. The number that follows the draw designator is
the counter for the line name. All counters that are the same are connected until a stop designator
is entered. The counter allows you to increment the line name without having the additional line
names in the Line Work Library. For example, if EP is the line name in the Line Work Library, you
may have a series of shots coded as EP.1 and EP.2 that are two distinct lines, but they would be
placed according to the settings specified for the EP line name.
If the Use Cross-Section Patterning option is enabled, collections of lines that form a cross-section
pattern are drawn if the cross-section pattern has been defined. Similar to the Use 3-D Line
Template option just described, this option allows you to draw a collection of lines without having to
remember the names of each line that is in the cross-section pattern. You would generally use the
Use Cross-Section Patterning option if the lines that make up the cross-section pattern do not
always parallel one another.
When enabled, the Use Pattern Lines option allows you place collected linework that has custom
blocks (cells in MicroStation) or text inserted in the lines when the job is reduced.
8. Click on the Shot Averaging tab.
The Reduction Settings dialog box – Shot Averaging tab (below) displays.
Collection Basics
Lesson 2 – Data
Figure 2-7 Reduction Settings Dialog Box – Shot Averaging Tab
9. On this tab, make sure the Use Shot Averaging toggle is on.
Leave the Placement Priority options at their default values. These values allow you to identify the
relative priority for each option if a Node location is arrived at through any of the available methods.
Suppose the instrument data file collected in the field contains both inputted coordinates and raw
measured data for a Node with the same ID value. The coordinates that are used when the data
collection job is reduced are the inputted coordinate values under default conditions. This is
because (under default conditions) coordinates that are entered into the collector take precedence
over field measurements. If the raw instrument data file contains different measurement types for
the same point, this is reported after processing is complete. Shots of lower priority also have the
point coordinates reported to allow for error checking. If the coordinates of a reduced point have
been averaged, this is reported after processing is complete. The averaged coordinate values, as
well as the standard deviations for the averaged point, are also reported.
The Input Coordinates option allows you to set the priority of any coordinates that were keyed into
the collector. These coordinates are usually identified by the data tags YC: (Northing), XC:
(Easting), and ZC: (elevation) when viewed in the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.
The Raw Measured Data option allows you to set the priority of any raw field measurement
recorded in the field from an occupied station. These measurements are usually identified by the
data tags HZ: (horizontal circle reading), VT: (vertical angle), and DS: (slope distance) when viewed
in the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.
The Collector Reduced Data option allows you to set the priority of any raw data that has been
averaged and reduced by the collector. These records are usually identified by the data tags AZ:

(computed azimuth) or HH: (computed horizontal circle reading), HD: (horizontal distance), and VD:
(vertical distance) when viewing the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.
The Collector Computed Coordinates option allows you to set the priority of any coordinates that
were computed by the collector. These coordinates are usually identified by the data tags YY:
(Northing), XX: (Easting), and ZZ: (elevation) when viewed in the formatted file. Set the priority from
the drop list.
10. Make sure that the Average Occurrences option (in the Occupied Station Priority group) is
toggled on.
You may select the occupied stations to use in the event of a duplicate Node ID occurrence from
another setup location. Each occupied station can be averaged using the prioritization stated
above, but each time the same point number occurs, it is averaged with other coordinates of the
same point number. To prevent the occupied station(s) from being over-averaged from other shots
in the file, the first occurrence or the last occurrence may be held without being averaged.
11. Click on OK to save the settings and dismiss the Reduction Settings dialog box.
Edit the Instrument File

In this section you illustrate the steps that one would follow to edit the instrument file. The instrument
file is the file that was originally downloaded from the data collector. It is also referred to as the “raw”
file. Prior to reducing the instrument file, you may find it desirable to make changes or corrections to the
data it contains (possibly due to errors, omissions or oversights in the field). Editing the instrument file
allows you to correct mistakes before reducing the file into the CAD graphic. In this case, edit the value
of an incorrect field code that was used in the field to a value that should have been used. You do not
need to worry about making modifications to the instrument file since you enabled the Create Legal
Backup File option when you created the Data Collection job.
1. In Data Collection, select Jobs " Edit Instrument File.
The Edit Instrument File dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 2-8 Edit Instrument File
2. Select Subdivision Traverse from the Job Name drop list.

3. Select Notepad from the Name drop list. Notepad and Wordpad are automatically available if
they were specified as a part of your Windows installation process.
The path and file name of the editor you select should display in the File Name edit field. The File
Name edit field allows you to enter the folder and file name of the editor that you want to run. If you
elect to use your own type of editor (such as a word processing program), you must make sure to
save the edited file to an ASCII (or MS-DOS text) format. Failure to do so may allow your word
processor program to introduce special characters into the instrument file that may cause the
reduction process to fail.
4. Click on the Edit button to edit the instrument file.
The file displays in Notepad as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-9 Notepad File
Collection Basics
Lesson 2 – Data
5. Edit two lines in the instrument file. This change alters the symbol that is placed in the CAD
graphic when the file is reduced. Change the value that is highlighted in the following figure
to 65.
Figure 2-10 Notepad File for Changing Value

6. See the next figure for the next Field Code you modify. Highlight the existing Field Code
shown and replace it with 65.
Figure 2-11 Notepad File for Next Field Code
7. After you have successfully performed these two modifications in Notepad, select File "
Save. Close the Notepad application.
8. Click on Close on the Edit Instrument File dialog box.
Reducing the File

The final step in getting the data from the collector to the CAD graphic is to reduce the imported file (or
job). When you select the Reduce option from the Jobs menu, you can preview the file before bringing
the file into the CAD graphic. Preview your control file and then bring the data into the CAD graphic.
1. In Data Collection, select Jobs " Reduce.
The Reduce Job dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 2-12 Reduce Job Dialog Box
2. From the listing in the Reduce Job dialog box, select Subdivision Traverse.
3. Click on the Preview button to preview the points before they are brought into the CAD
graphic.
The Preview Objects dialog box (below) displays. This gives you the ability to check for obvious
visual errors in the file before you actually bring the points into the CAD graphic.
Collection Basics
Lesson 2 – Data
Figure 2-13 Preview Objects Dialog Box
4. When you are finished reviewing the points, click on Close.

5. You are ready to reduce the file into the CAD graphic. Click on OK to reduce the file.
The data displays in the CAD graphic as shown in the following figure.
Figure 2-14 CAD Graphic
As each Data Collection job is reduced or previewed, detailed information about the action is
presented to you in the Query Warnings dialog box.
6. Click on Close to dismiss the Query Warnings dialog box.
7. Close the Data Collection menu bar.
This concludes Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics. Additional information on those commands not
covered by this tutorial can be found in Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics, which begins on
page 49, as well as in the on-line documentation and/or on-line Help.

Summary
! Download a job from a collector file.
! Specify some reduction settings.
! Edit the instrument file.
LESSON 3 – SURVEY
ADJUSTMENT LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Creating a Survey Adjustment File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Survey Adjustment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Specify Nodes for Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjusting the Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3
Create Error Ellipses and Update Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Lesson 3 – Survey Adjustment 37

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Add a new Survey Adjustment file.
! Specify the adjustment settings.
! Enter the Nodes in the traverse that are to be adjusted.
! Adjust the traverse using the Compass method and Least Squares method.
! Show the error ellipses.
! Update the graphics.
Overview
In this lesson you cover the major points of the Survey Adjustment product. You add a Survey
Adjustment file to the manager and then specify some settings used to adjust a survey traverse. The
settings include which adjustment method to use and whether to the adjust angles, sideshots, and
elevations of the points that comprise the traverse. In the case of adjustment through Least Squares,
you are able to specify acceptable tolerances and standard deviations for the points that make up the
traverse. After this, you specify which Nodes to include in the adjustment and then compare the
adjustment results of the traverse using two methods: the Compass method and the Least Squares
method. After you adjust the traverse using Least Squares, you generate and examine the error
ellipses and then update the CAD graphics with the adjusted traverse.
As a bit of background theory about the adjustment methods you examine, the Compass rule (which is
also known as the Bowditch rule) adjusts angles and distances based on the length of each leg of a
course compared to the total length of the traverse. This method is relatively easy to calculate by hand
and gives approximately the same results as the Lease Squares method. The Least Squares method of
adjustment applies probability theory to simultaneously adjust the angles and distances. This method
requires a closing angle and can be quite tedious to calculate by hand.
Survey Adjustment allows you to adjust closed and open traverses using five different methods:
Compass, Crandall, Least Squares, Transit, and None (the “None” option allows you to balance the
angles and/or elevations of the specified data prior to performing an adjustment).
Getting Started
to the next exercise entitled Creating a Survey Adjustment File on page 39.
steps that bring the tutorial data up to speed for this lesson. If you have not already done so, follow
Creating a Survey Adjustment File
When using Survey Adjustment, one of the first tasks you need to complete is to define a Survey
Adjustment file that contains the information and settings involved in the adjustment process. This
allows you to select the file and perform numerous adjustments using the different adjustment methods
at your disposal. You are also able to generate reports of selected traverses by highlighting the file in
the Survey Adjustment file manager.
1. With the tutorial drawing loaded, zoom around the area shown in the figure below.
Lesson 3 – Survey
Adjustment
Figure 3-1 Zoom Area
2. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Survey Adjustment.
This launches the Survey Adjustment menu bar.
3. In Survey Adjustment, select Prepare " Manage Files.
The Manage Survey Adjustment Files dialog box (below) displays. The list of available files is
blank. You are going to add a new file to the listing.
Figure 3-2 Manage Survey Adjustment Files Dialog Box
4. Click on the New Survey Adjustment File icon.

The New Survey Adjustment File dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-3 New Survey Adjustment File Dialog Box
5. Make sure the Survey Adjustment File option is selected.

The other options allow you to select an existing COGO batch file, Data Collection file, Survey
Adjustment File, or SDMS (AASHTO) file as the information to adjust.
6. In the Survey Adjustment File edit field, type Subdivision Traverse Points as the
description for the file.
7. Click on OK to add the file description to the manager and dismiss the New Survey
Adjustment File dialog box.
8. Make sure that the Subdivision Traverse Points entry in the Manage Survey Adjustment
Files dialog box listing is highlighted.
Doing so makes this entry the Active File. This means that any specified settings or any
adjustments that are made affect the information in the Active File.
9. Click on Close to close the Manage Survey Adjustment Files dialog box.
Survey Adjustment Settings

You now specify some settings that allow you to control how the traverse information is adjusted.
Indicate the method Survey Adjustment uses to correct the information and whether it should adjust
angles, elevations, and/or sideshot information. In the first scenario, you use the Compass method and
adjust only the angular measurements. Later, you examine another scenario that involves adjustment
using the Least Squares method.
1. In Survey Adjustment, select Prepare " Settings.
The Survey Adjustment Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-4 Survey Adjustment Settings Dialog Box
2. Make sure the Adjustment Options tab on the Survey Adjustment Settings dialog box is
current. Select Compass as the adjustment method.
3. In the Adjustment Options section, toggle Angles on. Make sure the Closed Traverse option
is selected from the Angles drop list.
4. Make sure the Elevations and Sideshots toggles are off.
5. Leave the Maintain option for Curve Adjustments at the default value.
This option allows you to specify what curve parameter to hold when running adjustments through a
curved leg of a traverse.
6. Click on Apply to save the Adjustment Options settings.
Lesson 3 – Survey
7. Click on the Least Squares tab of the Survey Adjustment Settings dialog box.
Adjustment
The dialog box resembles the figure below.
Figure 3-5 Survey Adjustment Settings – Least Squares Tab
8. Since you did not select Least Squares as the adjustment method (you chose the Compass
method), these options are inactive.
These settings are discussed in the on-line documentation and on-line help for Survey
Adjustment.
9. Click on OK to save the settings that have been entered and dismiss the Survey Adjustment
Settings dialog box.

Specify Nodes for Entry
! This section takes approximately five minutes to complete.
In this section you specify the Nodes that comprise the traverse you want to adjust. Each Node that is
entered has a corresponding backsight Node or direction. After all of the Nodes are entered, specify a
closing Node and angle for the traverse. Follow the steps below to enter the Nodes that are part of the
traverse to be adjusted.
1. In Survey Adjustment, select Entry " By Nodes.
The Entry By Nodes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-6 Entry By Nodes Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Traverse/Sideshot Node icon.

The New Traverse Node dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-7 New Traverse Node Dialog Box
3. From the Beginning Node ID edit field, type 3001 for the value.
This indicates to Survey Adjustment that the beginning point of your traverse starts at Node
number 3001.
4. In the Backsight section of the dialog box, select the Node option from the Define By drop
list.
5. Type 3000 in the Node ID edit field.
This indicates to Survey Adjustment that you are backsighting Node number 3000.
6. Click on OK to commit the initial setup point and backsight orientation for the traverse and
dismiss the New Traverse Node dialog box.
The setup node and backsight Node are added to the Entry By Nodes dialog box and the New
Traverse Nodes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-8 New Traverse Nodes Dialog Box
7. Select Range from the Selection Method drop list.

You are able to specify a range of Nodes that are included in the traverse. The program then
assumes that the next Node uses the previous Node as the backsight (in other words, Node 3001
backsights Node 3000, Node 3002 backsights Node 3001 and so on).
8. Type 3002 in the From Node ID edit field.
9. Type 3014 in the To Node ID edit field.
10. Click on Apply to add the nodes in this range to the Entry By Nodes dialog box.
11. Click on Close to dismiss the New Traverse Nodes dialog box.
The figure below shows the Entry By Nodes dialog box after all of the traverse Nodes have been
entered.
Lesson 3 – Survey
Adjustment
Figure 3-9 Entry By Nodes Dialog Box, With Traverse Nodes Entered
You are now ready to enter the closing information.

12. Click on the Closing Information button.

The Closing Information dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-10 Closing Information Dialog Box
13. Click on the Closing Data button on the Closing Information dialog box.
The Closing Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-11 Closing Data Dialog Box
14. In the Closing Point Node ID edit field, type 3001.

This is the point that you shot that closes the traverse if all measurement errors were removed.
15. Select Node from the Closing Orientation Foresight drop list.
16. In the Closing Orientation Node ID edit field, type 3002.
This is the Node that you sighted and turned which forms the last turned angle of the traverse. The
illustration in the figure below provides an example of what is happening when entering the closing
data.
Figure 3-12 Closing Angle Data Entered
17. Select Angle Right from the Closing Angle Type drop list.
This instructs Survey Adjustment that the closing angle that was measured in the field was turned
to the right from the backsight orientation.
18. In the Angle edit field, type 78.4702.
This is the recorded angular value that was measured in the field for this angle and correlates to a
78°47'02" angle.
19. Click on OK to commit the values and dismiss the Closing Data dialog box.
The closing information is detailed in the Closing Information dialog box (below).
Lesson 3 – Survey
Adjustment
Figure 3-13 Closing Information Dialog Box
20. After reviewing the data, click on Close to dismiss the Closing Information dialog box.
21. Click on Close to dismiss the Entry By Nodes dialog box.
Adjusting the Traverse

In this section you adjust the traverse information using two methods: the Compass method and the
Least Squares method. Start with the Compass method.

1. In Survey Adjustment, select Compute " Adjustment.
At this point, the Compass adjustment is made and the Adjustment dialog box (below) displays. If
you recall, you selected the Compass method earlier in the Survey Adjustment Settings section
beginning on page 40.
Figure 3-14 Adjustment Dialog Box
When you highlight a line in the Unadjusted Traverse listing, the corresponding line in the Adjusted
Traverse listing is also highlighted.
This makes it possible to perform a line by line comparison between unadjusted and adjusted data.
2. Click on the Closure Data button to check the closure data.
The Closure Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-15 Closure Data Dialog Box
3. After reviewing the closure data, click on Close to dismiss the Closure Data dialog box.
4. Click on Close to dismiss the Adjustment dialog box.
Now that you have adjusted the traverse using the Compass method, adjust the traverse using the
Least Squares method.
5. Select Prepare " Settings.
The Survey Adjustment Settings dialog box (Figure 3-4 on page 41) displays.
6. Select Least Squares as the adjustment method from the Survey Adjustment Settings dialog
box.
7. Click on OK to save the settings that have been entered and dismiss the Survey Adjustment
You now run the adjustment of the traverse using Least Squares.
8. In Survey Adjustment, select Compute " Adjustment.
At this point, the Least Squares adjustment is made and the Adjustment dialog box (below)
displays.
Figure 3-16 Adjustment Dialog Box
Again you can perform a line by line comparison between unadjusted and adjusted data by
highlighting a line in the Unadjusted Traverse listing and inspecting the corresponding Adjusted
Traverse line.
Lesson 3 – Survey
9. Click on the Closure Data button to check the closure data.
Adjustment
10. After reviewing the closure data, click on Close to dismiss the Closure Data dialog box.
11. Click on Close to dismiss the Adjustment dialog box.
Create Error Ellipses and Update Graphic

After reviewing the closure data, it has been determined that the adjustment results from the Least
Squares analysis provide you with the best results. In this section, you create error ellipses from the
Least Squares adjustment that provide you with a graphical representation of the probable location of
our Least Squares process. After you have drawn the error ellipses, you update the CAD graphic with
the new Node locations based on the Least Squares adjustment results.
1. In Survey Adjustment, select Compute " Show Error Ellipses. You may be prompted if you
want erase existing error ellipses for this Survey Adjustment file. Since you do not have any,
click on No.

The error ellipses are placed into the CAD graphic as shown in Figure 3-17 below. When the error
ellipses are placed in the CAD graphic, they are placed on the layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or level
(MicroStation) as defined in the Survey Adjustment option of the Eagle Point System – Default CAD
Settings command.
Figure 3-17 Error Ellipses
You may be prompted to specify whether you want to create an Error Ellipse Report.
2. Select No.
After you have looked at the error ellipses, select the Erase Error Ellipses option from the
Compute menu in Survey Adjustment. The error ellipses are removed from the CAD graphic.
You are now ready to update the Node locations in the CAD graphic based on the Least Squares
adjustment.
3. In Survey Adjustment, select Compute " Update Graphics.
The traverse Nodes in the CAD graphic are updated as shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-18 Updated Traverse Nodes
4. Close the Survey Adjustment menu bar.

This concludes Lesson 3 – Survey Adjustment. Additional information on those commands not covered
by this tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or On-line Help.
Summary
! Add a new Survey Adjustment file.
! Specify the adjustment settings.
! Enter the Nodes in the traverse that were to be adjusted.
! Adjust the traverse using the Compass method and Least Squares method.
! Show the error ellipses.
! Update the graphics.
LESSON 4 – DATA
COLLECTION LESSON
ADVANCED TOPICS
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Import the Data Collection File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Specifying the Reduction Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3-D Line Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating Line Work Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Cross-Section Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Reducing the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics 49

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Import a job.
! Specify reduction settings.
! Specify a line library.
! Specify a 3-D line template.
! Specify cross-section patterning.
Overview
In this lesson you download and reduce a job that has topographic information for Turtle Creek Court.
You download a coordinate job from a file that contains raw ASCII coordinate information.
This lesson focuses on some more advanced options in Data Collection that were not covered in
Lesson 2: line work, cross-section patterns, and 3-D line templates. The edge of pavement, curb, and
gutter lines along Turtle Creek Court are drawn in the CAD graphic using these features. The line work
that is developed is three-dimensional and is used to create a surface model of the roadway.
The line work option allows you to specify individual CAD properties for the different lines that are
collected from the field. When you reduce a job that contains line work information, Data Collection is
capable of formatting each line with particular CAD properties that you have specified.
The cross-section pattern option works in conjunction with the line work option to place lines into the
CAD graphic. However, rather than collecting individual lines in the field, the survey crew collects a
consistent pattern of lines (from “station to station”) along a roadway corridor and identifies each line by
its pattern group name.
The 3-D line template option allows you to generate multiple lines from a single line collected in the
field. The end result is similar to the cross-section pattern option with the main difference that the 3-D
line template option creates lines that are at a parallel offset from the collected line. This is particularly
useful when one is collecting gutter lines in the field and wishes to generate curb and edge of pavement
lines in the office.
Within this lesson, you work through these options and illustrate how they can work with one another.
Getting Started
to the next session entitled Import the Data Collection File on page 51.
Import the Data Collection File
In this section you import a coordinate file into Data Collection. Though you are not downloading
directly from the collector, the steps you illustrate are similar to the process of downloading directly from
the data collector. The “raw” file you import is reduced, which brings the file’s information into the CAD
graphic. Use the following steps to import a coordinate file.
1. Zoom in to the CAD graphic so the image looks similar to what is shown in the following
figure. Make sure all of the Layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or Levels (MicroStation) are turned
on and visible, with the exception of Layers/Levels 25 and 26.
Figure 3-1 Zoom Example
2. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Data Collection.
Collection Advanced
Lesson 4 – Data
This launches the Data Collection menu bar.
Topics
3. In Data Collection, select Jobs " Import ASCII File.
The Import ASCII File dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-2 Import ASCII File Dialog Box
4. Supply a meaningful name for the information contained within this Data Collection job.
Type Turtle Creek Court in the Job Name edit field.
5. Click on the Select File to Import icon to the right of the File Name edit field.

6. Navigate to the PROJECT folder location you specified when you configured the tutorial
project (see Getting Started on page 7 for more information).
7. Select TUTOR04.DC from this folder.
8. Click on the Open button to accept the file selected.
9. From the Format drop list, select Coordinate.
The file you selected is in a coordinate format.
10. Make sure the Create Legal Backup File toggle is on.
Enabling this option creates a read-only copy of the raw instrument file that cannot be edited
through the Eagle Point software product. Since this file is a copy of the information as it was
originally entered in the collector, it can be a useful source of information should questions arise
about the surveyed data.
11. Click on OK to import the file and close the Import ASCII File dialog box.
Specifying the Reduction Settings

Before you reduce the file, you need to specify some settings that control how the job is reduced. Some
of the settings that can be specified include:
! Whether to draw line work or not
! Erase the nodes when you re-reduce a job
! Use shot averaging
Perform the following steps to specify these settings.
1. In Data Collection, select Options " Reduction Settings.
The Reduction Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-4 Reduction Settings Dialog Box
When the Reduction Settings dialog box first displays, the Collector tab is active. This tab allows
you to specify the default collector format when you download from a collector or import a file. You
also have the ability to select a custom translator if your format is not available in the list of
supported formats.
2. Select the Coordinate option if it is not already active.
3. Click on Apply to save the settings.
If nothing was changed on the tab, Apply is inactive.
4. Click on the Graphics tab.
The Reduction Settings – Graphics tab (below) displays.
Collection Advanced
Lesson 4 – Data
Topics
Figure 3-5 Reduction Settings – Graphics Tab Dialog Box
5. On this tab make sure the Draw Line Work, Erase on Re-Reduce, Auto Zoom, and Place
Nodes toggles are all on.
The Draw Line Work toggle controls whether line work is placed into the CAD graphic or not. If the
toggle is off, any linework information in the data collection file is ignored.
When enabled, the Erase on Re-Reduce toggle erases all of the lines and Nodes associated with
the selected Data Collection job file when (and if) you re-reduce the job.
When enabled, the Auto Zoom toggle automatically zooms the CAD graphic so you see the extents
of the Data Collection job when it is reduced.

When enabled, the Place Nodes toggle places Nodes in the CAD graphic using the corresponding
Field Codes found in the Node (Field Code) Library. If this toggle is off, only the line data (if any) is
brought into the CAD graphic.
6. From the Default Field Code drop list, select 70 PLUS.
This Field Code is used if a Field Code identified for a shot collected in the field is not found in the
specified Node (Field Code) Library.
If nothing was changed on the tab, Apply is inactive.
8. Click on the Line Work tab.
The Reduction Settings – Line Work tab dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-6 Reduction Settings – Line Work Tab Dialog Box
9. On this tab, make sure all of the options are toggled on with the exception of Use Line Name
as counter (which should be toggled off).
Below are descriptions of the options.
If nothing is changed, the Apply button is grayed out.
The Use Line Library option allows you to use linework configurations that are specified in the Data
Collection Line Library. The Line Library allows you to add named lines that can be configured with
specific properties (including the line’s color and line style).
The Add undefined lines to Line Library option, when enabled, adds lines that were shot in the Data
Collection file that are not in the Line Library. The lines that are added are created with the default
settings.
When enabled, the Draw 3-D Lines option draws Data Collection linework to the elevations of the
shots collected in the field. When this toggle is off, all of the line work comes in at the active
elevation of the CAD drawing.
When enabled, the Use 3-D Line Template option allows you to use lines that are defined in 3-D
Line Templates. Examples of 3-D Line Templates could be as simple as “back-of-curb” and gutter
line pairs to more involved urban roadway patterns showing sidewalk edges, curb faces, gutters,
edges-of-pavement, and median lines. Each time a line name is encountered that is associated
with a 3-D Line Template, the lines in the 3-D Line Template are drawn. You would generally use 3-
D Line Templates to create line patterns that parallel the line they are based on (such as creating
back-of-curb shots based on collected edge of pavement shots).
The Use Field Code as Line Name option allows you to have Data Collection draw lines between
Eagle Point Nodes whose field codes are the same as a named line. In this case, the lines are
drawn in the order that the field codes display in the Data Collection job file. An example would be
a field code of CL that is also a line name of CL.
The Use Line Name as counter option allows you to specify only one line name in your Line Work
Library and have numbered instances of the same line name placed. The field code that is entered
is used as the line name in the Line Work Library. The number that follows the draw designator is
the counter for the line name. All counters that are the same are connected until a stop designator
is entered. The counter allows you to increment the line name without having the additional line
names in the Line Work Library. For example, if EP is the line name in the Line Work Library, you
may have a series of shots coded as EP.1 and EP.2 that are two distinct lines, but they would be
placed according to the settings specified for the EP line name.
If the Use Cross-Section Patterning option is enabled, collections of lines that form a cross-section
pattern are drawn if the cross-section pattern has been defined. Similar to the Use 3-D Line
Template option just described, this option allows you to draw a collection of lines without having to
remember the names of each line that is in the cross-section pattern. You would generally use the
Use Cross-Section Patterning option if the lines that make up the cross-section pattern do not
parallel one another.
When enabled, the Use Pattern Lines option allows you place collected linework that has custom
blocks (cells in MicroStation) or text inserted in the lines when the job is reduced.
11. Click on the Shot Averaging tab.
The Reduction Settings – Shot Averaging tab (below) displays.
Collection Advanced
Figure 3-7 Reduction Settings – Shot Averaging Tab Dialog Box
Lesson 4 – Data
12. On this tab make sure the Use Shot Averaging toggle is on.
Topics
13. Leave the Placement Priority options at their default values.
These values allow you to identify the relative priority for each option if a Node location is arrived at
through any of the available methods. Suppose the instrument data file collected in the field
contains both inputted coordinates and raw measured data for a Node with the same ID value. The
coordinates that are used when the data collection job is reduced are the inputted coordinate
values under default conditions. This is because (under default conditions) coordinates that are
entered into the collector take precedence over field measurements. If the raw instrument data file
contains different measurement types for the same point, this is reported after processing is
complete. Shots of lower priority also have the point coordinates reported to allow for error
checking. If the coordinates of a reduced point have been averaged, this is reported after
processing is complete. The averaged coordinate values, as well as the standard deviations for the
averaged point, are also reported.
The Input Coordinates option allows you to set the priority of any coordinates that were keyed into
the collector. These coordinates are usually identified by the data tags YC: (Northing), XC:
(Easting), and ZC: (elevation) when viewed in the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.

The Raw Measured Data option allows you to set the priority of any raw field measurement
recorded in the field from an occupied station. These measurements are usually identified by the
data tags HZ: (horizontal circle reading), VT: (vertical angle), and DS: (slope distance) when viewed
in the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.
The Collector Reduced Data option allows you to set the priority of any raw data that has been
averaged and reduced by the collector. These records are usually identified by the data tags AZ:
(computed azimuth) or HH: (computed horizontal circle reading), HD: (horizontal distance), and VD:
(vertical distance) when viewing the formatted file. Set the priority from the drop list.
The Collector Computed Coordinates option allows you to set the priority of any coordinates that
were computed by the collector. These coordinates are usually identified by the data tags YY:
(Northing), XX: (Easting), and ZZ: (elevation) when viewed in the formatted file. Set the priority from
the drop list.
14. Make sure that the Average Occurrences option in the Occupied Station Priority group is
toggled on.
You may select the occupied stations to use in the event of a duplicate Node ID occurrence from
another setup location. Each occupied station can be averaged using the prioritization stated
above, but each time the same point number occurs, it is averaged with other coordinates of the
same point number. To prevent the occupied station(s) from being “over-averaged” from other shots
in the file, the first occurrence or the last occurrence may be held without being averaged.
15. Click on OK to save the settings and close the Reduction Settings dialog box.
3-D Line Templates

In this section you look at the 3-D Line Templates feature in Data Collection. This feature allows you to
place multiple lines in the CAD graphic at once from a line definition collected in the field. In this
example, you look at one of the templates used for the curb and gutter lines along Turtle Creek Court.
When you place the edge of pavement line, the gutter flow-line, top of curb, and back of curb lines are
placed.
1. In Data Collection, select Options " 3-D Line Templates.
The 3-D Line Templates dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-8 3-D Line Templates Dialog Box
2. Since you do not have any 3-D Line Templates defined, you define some now. Click on the
New 3-D Line Template icon.
The New 3-D Line Template dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-9 New 3-D Line Template Dialog Box
3. Supply the name for the 3-D Line Template you wish to create. Type CURBL in the Template
Name edit field.
The name you supply can be up to 9 characters long.
Define the individual settings that comprise this 3-D Line Template.
4. Click on the New 3-D Line Template icon.
The New 3-D Line Template Breakpoint dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-10 New 3-D Line Template Breakpoint Dialog Box
Since the survey crew collected the edges of pavement in the field, you do not need to recreate that
linework in your 3-D Line Template. Therefore, the first “point” of your 3-D Line Template is that of
the gutter flowline.
5. Type -0.1524 in the Offset edit field (remember your project is metric-based) which is the
metric equivalent of a 6-inch gutter.
Collection Advanced
Lesson 4 – Data
6. Type -0.0254 in the Elevation edit field, which is equivalent to a 1-inch gutter drop.
7. Make sure the Line Name toggle is On and type LGUT in the Line Name edit field.
Topics
8. Click on Apply to commit these settings and add the 3-D Line Template Breakpoint
configuration.
Type the values found in the table below to complete the CURBL 3-D Line Template configuration.
Values Used to Complete the CURBL 3-D Line Template
Offset Elevation Line Name Action

-0.1778 0.1270 LFOC Apply
-0.3302 0.1270 LBOC Apply
9. Once the values in the table above have been entered, click on Cancel to close the New 3-D
Line Template Breakpoint dialog box.
10. Click on OK to close the New 3-D Line Template dialog box.

11. Once the 3-D Line Templates dialog box redisplays, click on the New 3-D Line Template icon
so you can define the CURBR 3-D Line Template.
12. Type CURBR in the Template Name edit field.
13. Click on the New 3-D Line Template button.
14. Type the values found in the table below to complete the CURBR 3-D Line Template
configuration.
Values Used to Complete the CURBR 3-D Line Template
Offset Elevation Line Name Action

0.1524 -0.0254 RGUT Apply
0.1778 0.1270 RFOC Apply
0.3302 0.1270 RBOC Apply
15. Once the values in the table above have been entered, click on Cancel to close the New 3-D
Line Template Breakpoint dialog box.
16. Click on OK to close the New 3-D Line Template dialog box.
17. Click on Close to close the 3-D Line Templates dialog box.
Creating Line Work Entries

! This section takes approximately four minutes to complete.
The Line Work option in Data Collection allows you to specify CAD properties for line information that
was collected in the field. As a result, when a Data Collection job is reduced, each line that has been
defined in the Line Work library is drawn with particular CAD properties. Additional properties to the
CAD properties can be established, such as the ability to specify the elevation the line gets drawn to as
well as how the Surface Modeling product interprets the line.
1. In Data Collection, select Options " Line Work.
The Line Work dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-11 Line Work Dialog Box
2. Click on the Line Libraries button.
The Line Libraries dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-12 Line Libraries
3. A line library should already exist in the listing. Highlight the library in the listing (if it is not
already highlighted). This defines the current line library that Data Collection uses.
4. Click on OK to close the Line Libraries dialog box.
5. Click on the New Line icon.
The New Line dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-13 New Line Dialog Box
Collection Advanced
6. Based upon the CAD program you are using, specify new line parameters as shown in the
Lesson 4 – Data
following table.
Topics
The 3-D Line Template that you select consists of three lines: the flow-line of a gutter, the top of
curb, and the back of curb. When Data Collection places the line with the name you just specified
here, it actually places the three lines defined in the 3-D Line Template. Click on Apply to save the
settings after you have entered the data for one line name and continue to the next line name.
AutoCAD/BricsCad
Name EPL CL EPR
Layer EPAVE CENTERLINE EPAVE
Color BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER
Line Type BYLAYER BYLAYER BYLAYER
Width 0 0 0
Masking INCLUDE INCLUDE INCLUDE
Type 3-D Line Template Line 3-D Line Template

AutoCAD/BricsCad
Template CURBL ---- CURBR
Placement 3-D 3-D 3-D
Elevation ---- ---- ----
MicroStation
Name EPL CL EPR
Level 11 1 11
Color 1 1 1
Style 0 0 0
Weight 0 0 0
Masking INCLUDE INCLUDE INCLUDE
Type 3-D Line Template Line 3-D Line Template
Template CURBL ---- CURBR
Placement 3-D 3-D 3-D
Elevation ---- ---- ----
7. After all of the settings are specified for the last line, click on OK to save the settings and
dismiss the New Line dialog box.
8. Click on Close to dismiss the Line Work dialog box.
Cross-Section Patterns
In this section you define a cross-section pattern to be used when reducing your linework information. A
cross-section pattern contains several lines that are collected along a (roadway) cross-section. For
example, a pattern may contain left curb, left pavement edge, centerline, right pavement edge, and right
curb. Rather than have the survey crew collect and identify each of these line names separately, a
single cross-section pattern can be created that contains each of these lines. Each time the pattern
name is specified in the field, Data Collection assumes that instance to be the next line in the pattern.
The following steps outline how to create a cross-section pattern.
1. In Data Collection, select Options " Cross-Section Patterns.
The Cross-Section Patterns dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-14 Cross Section Patterns Dialog Box
Create one pattern that uses the lines that were added to the Line Work library.
2. Click on the New Cross-Section Pattern icon.
The New Cross-Section Pattern dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-15 New Cross Section Pattern Dialog Box
3. In the Pattern Name edit field, type XSC.

This is the description of the lines the survey crew would indicate in the field.
4. In the Description edit field, type 3 Line Cross-Section.
5. Select Zigzag as the method of collection.
This method tells Data Collection to restart with the first line in the pattern when the last line in the
pattern is placed.
You are now ready to define the individual lines in the pattern. You have three lines in the cross-
section pattern: CURBR, CL, and CURBL.
6. Click on the New Associated Line icon.
The New Associated Line dialog box (below) displays.
Collection Advanced
Figure 3-16 New Associated Line Dialog Box
Lesson 4 – Data
7. From the From Library drop list, select EPR and click on Apply.
Topics
8. From the From Library drop list, select CL and click on Apply.
9. From the From Library drop list, select EPL. Click on OK to commit the settings and close
the New Associated Line dialog box.
When the New Cross-Section Pattern dialog box redisplays, notice that the three lines are now in
the Associated Lines list.
10. Click on OK to save the settings and close the New Cross-Section Pattern dialog box.
11. Click on Close to close the Cross-Section Patterns dialog box.

Reducing the Job
In this section, you reduce the coordinate file you downloaded earlier. When the file is reduced,
linework is placed into the CAD graphic that represents the curb lines along the streets in your
subdivision. The following steps outline the reduction process.
1. In Data Collection, select Jobs " Reduce.
The Reduce Job dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 3-17 Reduce Job Dialog Box
2. From the listing in the Reduce Job dialog box, select Turtle Creek Court.
3. Click on the Preview button to preview the points before they are brought into the CAD
graphic.
The Preview Objects dialog box (below) displays. This gives you the ability to check for errors in the
file before you actually bring the points into the CAD graphic.
4. When you are done reviewing the information, click on Close to dismiss the Preview Object
dialog box.
You are ready to reduce the file into the CAD graphic.
5. Click on OK to reduce the file.
The data displays in the CAD graphic as shown in the figure below. Note that if Data Collection
encounters any unexpected problems with the data or in the way that it was collected, the errors
are summarized in the Query Warnings dialog box.
Figure 3-19 Graphic Example
6. Click on Close to close this dialog box if it displays.
Collection Advanced
7. Close the Data Collection menu bar.
Lesson 4 – Data
This concludes Lesson 4. Additional information on those commands not covered by this tutorial can be
Topics
found in Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics, which begins on page 25, as well as in the on-line
documentation and/or on-line Help.
Summary
! Import a job.
! Specify reduction settings.
! Specify a line library.
! Specify a 3-D line template.
! Specify cross-section patterning.

LESSON 5 – COGO
In this lesson:
LESSON
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Placing Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Alignment Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Field Data Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Place Nodes by Station/Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Creating Lots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5
Create Lot Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Creating a Nodes Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Lesson 5 – COGO 65
Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Specify some of the entry options used in COGO.
! Place a Node.
! Traverse in an alignment using Traverse Alignment.
! Place a Node by station/offset.
! Locate some points from a field book using the Field Data Traverse command.
! Convert closed figures to Eagle Point Lots.
! Generate a Lot Report of the new lots in the subdivision.
! Create a report of the Nodes in the CAD graphic.
Overview
This lesson covers some of the more commonly used COGO (Coordinate Geometry) commands found
within Eagle Point. This module is used to locate some of the new property corners in your subdivision.
Start by specifying some input options that may be used to place Nodes into the CAD graphic. After
these options are specified, you are shown how to place Nodes into the CAD graphic based on a
variety of different methods. Then, input traverse information for the Turtle Creek Court alignment.
Following the creation of the alignment, convert closed objects or areas bounded by lines into a lot, and
then generate lot reports for the subdivision. Finally, develop a Node report that summarizes the
coordinates and elevations of the selected Nodes in the CAD graphic.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after finishing Lesson 4, you can skip this section and move directly to
Entry Options on page 67.
Entry Options
The Entry Options command in COGO provides settings that allow you to tailor data entry methods to
your particular tastes. Some of the options that can be set include direction and angle types, default
values for Node placement and mapcheck precision. Look at some of these options in the following
steps.
1. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " COGO.
This launches the COGO menu bar.
2. In COGO, select Settings " Entry Options command.
The Entry Options dialog box (below) displays.
3. Make sure the Defaults tab is active.
Figure 5-1 Entry Options Dialog Box – Default Tab
4. Select Absolute from the Direction Type drop list.

This specifies that when a direction is defined in COGO, the default method of specifying it would
be as an azimuth direction.
5. Select Horizontal from the Distance Options drop list.
This specifies the default method of distance entry.
6. Select Angle Right from the Angle Type drop list.
This specifies the default format that COGO expects turned angles to be in.
7. Make sure the Start Procedural Commands With Settings Dialog Box option is toggled off.
When enabled, COGO commands that involve any of these options would be preceded with a
dialog box that allows the options to be changed.
8. Click on Apply to save the settings specified on this tab.
9. Click on the Instrument tab. Lesson 5 – COGO
The Entry Options dialog box – Instrument tab (below) displays.
Figure 5-2 Entry Options Dialog Box – Instrument Tab
10. Type 1.5 in the Instrument Height edit field.

This setting allows you to specify the default instrument height value. Recall that this project has
been specified as a metric project.
11. Type 1.5 in the Target Height edit field.
This setting allows you to specify the default target (prism) height value.
13. Click on the Node Placement tab.
The Entry Options dialog box – Node Placement tab (below) displays.
Figure 5-3 Entry Options Dialog Box – Node Placement Tab
14. Type 500 in the Value edit field of the Node ID component.
This specifies that when Nodes are placed into the CAD graphic, they shall start with an ID value of
500.
15. For the Elevation component, make sure Constant is selected as the Input Option and type 0
(zero) in the Value edit field.
This specifies that the default elevation of placed nodes shall be a consistent value of 0 (making the
Nodes useful for horizontal location and not so much for elevation).
16. From the Value drop list of the Field Code component, select 78 SCIR.
As Nodes are placed using COGO commands, the symbol associated with this Field Code is used
as the Node symbol.
17. For the Description component, make sure Default Description is selected as the Input
Option and type Prop. Corner in the Value edit field.
This specifies that the default description of placed nodes shall be a consistent value of “Prop.
Corner.”
18. Make sure the Description Prefix and Description Suffix toggles are off.
These options allow you to assign a prefix or suffix text string to the description of each Node when
it is placed. As an example, when enabled, one might use Tree as a suffix. You could supply
descriptions of 12", 24", 36", etc. The Nodes that would be placed would have descriptions of 12"
Tree, 24" Tree, 36" Tree and so forth.
20. Click on the Mapcheck tab.
The Entry Options dialog box – Mapcheck tab (below) displays.
Figure 5-4 Entry Options Dialog Box – Mapcheck Tab
21. Make sure the Angle precision is set to Nearest Second by adjusting the slider.
This setting specifies the angular precision Mapcheck uses when checking angle closure. For
those not familiar with the term, Mapcheck is a method by which one can check the closure of an
area when considering the “annotated” dimension values of the region’s sides.
22. Set the Distance precision to 3 by adjusting the slider.
This specifies the distance precision Mapcheck uses when checking linear closure.
23. Set the Coordinate precision to 3 by adjusting the slider.
This setting is purely for display purposes on the Mapcheck report.
24. Change the Closure precision to 4 by adjusting the slider.
Again, this setting is purely for display purposes on the Mapcheck report.
25. Make sure the Run Traverses Through Radius Points option is toggled on.
This option specifies that the Mapcheck traverse be run through the radius point of any curves that
are present on the traverse. The Mapcheck angle and distance precision are used when traversing
through the radius point. When disabled, Mapcheck runs through the chord of curves on the
traverse, applying angle and distance precision to the chord segment of each curve.
See the COGO documentation for more information on these options.
27. Click on the Audit Trail tab.
Lesson 5 – COGO
The Entry Options dialog box – Audit Trail tab (below) displays.
Figure 5-5 Entry Options Dialog Box – Audit Trail Tab
28. The two options here specify whether to print Node descriptions and/or Node field codes to
an Audit Trail. The Audit Trail is a report that most COGO commands create to record the
information that was modified during that command. Make sure that both options are
toggled on.
29. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the Entry Options dialog box.
Placing Nodes
When you need to place a Node into the CAD graphic, Eagle Point provides several Node placement
commands that have been tailored to specific applications. Nodes can be placed by reducing field
information through Data Collection, importing them through Data Transfer, or by placing them
individually through COGO. The COGO Place Node command allows you to place Nodes by identifying
a location graphically or by indicating the coordinate location. You locate a Node that is used as a
reference point when alignment information for Turtle Creek Court is entered later in this lesson. The
Node location you specify is the point where Turtle Creek Court and Forsythe Avenue tie together.
1. To begin, zoom in around your site as shown in the following figures.
Figure 5-6 Zoom In On This Area
Figure 5-7 Zoomed Area
2. In COGO, select Nodes " Place Nodes.

The Place Nodes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-8 Place Nodes Dialog Box
3. Verify that the Node ID edit field contains a value of 500. If it is not, change the value so it is
500.
This is the default starting Node number you had specified earlier in the Entry Options section.
4. Place your cursor in (or set focus to) the Northing edit field.
At this point, notice that the “Pick in CAD” (or PIC) button is active. When using commands that
expect coordinate entry, you can graphically pick the location using the PIC button when focus is
set to a Northing or Easting field.
5. Precisely enter the Northing and Easting coordinates for the Node by typing the coordinate
information. Type the coordinates as shown below.
Lesson 5 – COGO
Northing 49864.309
Easting 418405.217
6. Make sure the Elevation value is set to 0.
This is the default Node elevation you had specified earlier in the Entry Options section.
7. Make sure the Field Code is set to 78 SCIR. If it is not, select 78 SCIR from the Field Code
drop list.
This is the default Field Code you had specified earlier in the Entry Options section.
8. In the Description edit field, type P.I. for the description of the Node you are about to
place.
9. Click on Apply.
The Node is placed in the CAD graphic as shown below.
Figure 5-9 Example of Nodes Placed in Graphic
10. Click on Close to close the Place Nodes dialog box.
Alignment Traverse
The Alignment Traverse command in COGO allows you to enter traverse information and create
horizontal alignments that contain combinations of lines, arcs, and spirals. You use this command to
create the Turtle Creek Court centerline alignment. The following steps illustrate how this is
accomplished.
1. In COGO, select Survey " Alignment Traverse option.
The Alignment Traverse dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-10 Alignment Traverse Dialog Box
2. When working with the Alignment Traverse command, you are able to specify a name and
starting station for the alignment you are about to create. Type Turtle Creek Court CL in
the Alignment Name edit field.
If needed, the Defined Alignments button allows you to select an existing alignment that has
already been created and modify that alignment.
3. Type 0 in the Beginning Station edit field.
The Station Data button allows you to define station equations for the alignment. You do not do this
at this time.
4. Click on the Next button to move to the next dialog box of the Alignment Traverse command
(below).
Figure 5-11 Alignment Traverse – Starting Point Dialog Box
You are about to specify the starting location for the traverse.
5. Type 500 in the Node ID edit field.
This is the ID number of the Node you placed earlier using the Place Nodes command.
6. Press the Tab key so that focus leaves the Node ID field.
Notice that all of the information pertaining to Node 500 is filled in to the Alignment Traverse dialog
box.
7. Click on the Next button to display the next dialog box of the Alignment Traverse command.
8. Click on the Next button once again to display the next dialog box of the Alignment Traverse
command as shown below.
We already have Node 500 placed at the start. We do not need another Node placed.
Lesson 5 – COGO
Figure 5-12 Alignment Traverse – Parameters Dialog Box
9. Click on the Direction Options button.
The Direction Options form of the Alignment Traverse dialog box (below) displays. This allows you
to define the tangent direction.
Figure 5-13 Alignment Traverse – Alignment Tangent Direction Dialog Box
Notice the default value specified in the Options drop list should be Absolute (the value specified
earlier in the Entry Options section). Also note that the value specified in the Direction Type drop list
should be North Azimuth. You had specified this as a default option from the Horizontal Direction
discussion in the Formats section of Lesson 1.
10. If either of these options is not specified, select them now. In the Direction edit field, type
263.3919.
This is the same as 263° 39' 19".
11. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the dialog box.
12. Type 16.520 in the Tangent Distance edit field on the Alignment Traverse dialog box.
This is the distance to a point of curvature (P.C.) that is found on the alignment.
13. Press the Tab key and notice that the Station of Next Point edit field is automatically updated
with the calculated station value.
14. Click on Apply.
The Alignment Traverse – Starting Point dialog box (Figure 5-11 on page 73) displays.
15. Leave the values as they are, except type P.C. in the Description edit field.
This is the description of the point you are about to place.
16. Click on OK to commit the changes and place this portion of the Turtle Creek Court CL
alignment.
As mentioned earlier, you just located and defined a point of curvature. You continue the Alignment
Traverse command but switch into a “curve” mode.
17. Click on the Draw Circular Curve icon on the Alignment Traverse dialog box.
The Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-14 Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve Dialog Box
As you can see from the dialog box, the Tangent Direction value is already given. Also notice you
can specify any one of a number of different curve parameters that help define the curve.
18. Type 60.960 in the Radius edit field and press the Tab key.
19. Notice that the Degree of Curve (Arc) and Degree of Curve (Chord) values are calculated and
immediately reported back to you.
20. Make sure the direction of the curve is toggled to Clockwise.
Only one other curve parameter needs to be supplied to define the curve.
21. Type 36.012 in the Length of Curve edit field and press the Tab key.
All of the remaining curve parameters are calculated and reported back to you.
22. Click on Apply to commit the curve settings and place the curve in the alignment.
The Alignment Traverse dialog box (below) displays, allowing you to control the Nodes (and their
information) that are placed along the curve.
Lesson 5 – COGO
Figure 5-15 Alignment Traverse – Place Alignment Dialog Box
23. The Radius Point, Point of Tangency, and Point of Intersection toggles should all be on.
Leave the default values as they are. If desired, you may change many of the Node
parameters (including the ability to indicate if the Node should be placed at all) using the
Curve Node Options button.
24. Click on OK to commit the settings and place the curve Node information.
The Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve dialog box (Figure 5-14 on page 75) redisplays.
25. Click on the Draw Tangent icon.
The Alignment Traverse – Parameters dialog box (Figure 5-12 on page 73) redisplays. The Tangent
Direction value is automatically calculated from the curve parameters just entered.
26. Type 45.690 in the Tangent Distance edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the distance to the point of curvature of the next curve.
27. Click on Apply.
28. Type P.C. in the Description edit field.
This is the description of the point you are about to place. Notice that the Node ID automatically
increments for you.
alignment.
30. Click on the Draw Circular Curve icon.
The Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve dialog box (Figure 5-14 on page 75) displays again.
32. Make sure the direction of the curve is toggled to Counterclockwise.
The Alignment Traverse – Place Alignment dialog box (Figure 5-15 on page 75) displays.
The Alignment Traverse – Parameters dialog box (Figure 5-12 on page 73) displays.
The Tangent Direction value is automatically calculated from the curve parameters just entered.
38. Click on Apply.
alignment.
The Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve dialog box (Figure 5-14 on page 75) displays again.
43. Make sure the direction of the curve is toggled to Clockwise.
45. Press Apply to commit the curve settings and place the curve in the alignment.
The Alignment Traverse – Place Alignment dialog box (Figure 5-15 on page 75) displays again.
The Alignment Traverse – Parameters dialog box (Figure 5-12 on page 73) redisplays.
49. Click on Apply.
alignment.
You are ready to define the next curve.
The Alignment Traverse – Draw Curve dialog box (Figure 5-14 on page 75) displays.
54. Make sure the direction of the curve is toggled to Counterclockwise.
The Alignment Traverse – Place Alignment dialog box displays (Figure 5-15 on page 75).
You are now ready to enter in the final tangent.
58. Click on the Draw Tangent icon on the Alignment Traverse dialog box.
The Alignment Traverse – Parameters dialog box (Figure 5-12 on page 73) redisplays.
60. Click on Apply.
61. Type E.O.P. in the Description edit field.
This is the description of the point that defines the End of Project for the alignment.
alignment.
Lesson 5 – COGO
You have finished entering the alignment information for Turtle Creek Court.
63. Click on Close to dismiss the Alignment Traverse dialog box.
64. You may wish to zoom out so you can see all of the Turtle Creek Court alignment.
The figure below shows the completed Turtle Creek Court alignment.
Figure 5-16 Completed Turtle Creek Court Alignment
Field Data Traverse

The Field Data Traverse command allows you to place traverse point information from data in a field
book. This is the most commonly used command to place topographic data by backsighting points or
known directions and turning angles and distances to place Nodes. You also have the ability to enter
sideshots. You locate some additional lot corners using this command. The following steps outline one
procedure to locate these corners.
1. The first step is to zoom into the site so you can see the traverse graphically while you enter
the traverse data. Zoom in on the area in the site as shown in the figures below.
Figure 5-17 Area to Zoom
Figure 5-18 Zoomed Area

Lesson 5 – COGO
2. In COGO, select Survey " Field Data Traverse.
The Field Data Traverse dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-19 Field Data Traverse Dialog Box
You traverse in the back lot boundary for the new lots along Turtle Creek Court. Then, shoot
additional sideshots to locate some of the lot corners.
3. In the Occupied Node ID edit field, type 3355.
The Batch Processing button option provides you with the ability to record the data you are about to
enter to an external text file. This provides you with the benefit of being able to review or correct
any information you may have entered and to also “reprocess” (or replay) the batch file without the
need to reenter the data.
4. Click on the Entry Options button to change the way you specify directions.
The Field Data Traverse Entry Options dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-20 Field Data Traverse Entry Options Dialog Box
5. Select Backsight Node ID and Angle from the Direction Type drop list.
This allows us to backsight a Node and turn an angle to the next shot.
6. Select Angle Right from the Angle Type drop list.
7. Select Horizontal Distance from the Distance Options drop list.
8. Toggle on Draw Lines for Sideshots.
9. After all of the settings have been specified, click on OK to commit these settings and close
the Field Data Traverse Entry Options dialog box.
10. In the Backsight Node ID edit field, type 3356.
11. In the Angle Right edit field, type 267.1838.
12. In the Horizontal Distance edit field, type 37.430.
13. Do not change the default value for the Node ID.
14. Type 0 in the Absolute Elevation edit field.
15. After all of the information has been entered, click on Next Leg.
The Node is placed and a line is drawn to it.
16. Notice that the value in the Occupied Node ID automatically advances to the Node ID value
you just placed.
The Backsight Node ID is already filled in as well.
17. Let the default values remain in the edit fields.
21. Do not change the value of 0 in the Absolute Elevation edit field.
22. Click on the Next Leg button.
23. Do not change the default values in the Occupied Node ID and Backsight Node ID edit fields.
28. Click on Next Leg.
You are now going to shoot some sideshots. The Field Data Traverse command allows you to
shoot sideshots while in the middle of traversing.
34. Click on the Sideshot button to place the next sideshot Node.
40. Click on the Sideshot button to place the next sideshot Node.
Lesson 5 – COGO

46. Click on the Next Leg button to place the next leg of the data.
You are done placing the traverse information.
47. Click on Close to dismiss the Field Data Traverse dialog box.
The figure below displays the site with the Nodes placed and lines drawn from using the Field Data
Traverse command.
Figure 5-21 Graphic with Nodes Placed and Lines Drawn
You have finished placing the back lot line traverse information for the new lots along Turtle Creek
Court. Notice that the sideshots you recorded do not land exactly on the lot lines. You could use Survey
Adjustment to adjust the traverse. However, you omit those steps here. See Lesson 3 – Survey
Adjustment, which begins on page 37, for more information on how to accomplish this.
Place Nodes by Station/Offset

The Place by Station/Offset command found under the Nodes menu allows you to place Nodes by
entering the station and offset distance from a selected alignment. You locate two points via the Place
by Station/Offset command. The following steps outline the involved steps.
1. In COGO, select Nodes " Place by Station/Offset.
The Place Nodes by Station/Offset dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-22 Place Nodes by Station Offset – Select Alignment Dialog Box
2. In the listing, you should see Turtle Creek Court CL listed. Highlight this alignment and click
on the Next button.
The Place Nodes by Station/Offset dialog box (below) displays.
As an alternative, you could have selected the PIC button and graphically selected an alignment.
Figure 5-23 Place Nodes by Station Offset Dialog Box
You locate two points to the left of the Turtle Creek Court CL alignment.
3. Type 147.380 in the Station edit field.
4. Type -7.620 in the Offset edit field.
The negative sign indicates an offset distance to the left of the alignment.
5. Do not change the Node ID that is displayed, but note that you could change this value if
desired.
6. Type 0.00 in the Elevation edit field.
7. Make sure the Field Code is set to 78 SCIR. If it is not, select 78 SCIR from the Field Code
drop list.
This is the default field code you had specified earlier in the Entry Options section.
8. Type Prop. Corner in the Description edit field.
9. Click on Apply to commit the settings and place the Node.
You are now ready to place another point based upon Station and Offset values. As it turns out,
your next point happens to be at the same station as the point you just placed.
10. Leave the Station value as 147.380.
11. Type -44.9864 in the Offset edit field.
12. Type Prop. Corner in the Description edit field.
13. Click on Apply to commit the settings and place the Node.
Figure 5-24 on page 84 shows the two Nodes placed.
Lesson 5 – COGO
14. Click on Close to dismiss the Place Nodes by Station/Offset dialog box.
Figure 5-24 Example of Two Nodes Placed in Graphic
Creating Lots
You are now going to draw in some of the lot lines that define the new lots. After drawing in the lot lines,
you convert the drawn lots into Eagle Point Lots. These converted lots allow you to generate lot reports
of the subdivision that contain information including: the angle and area distance of each leg in a lot
perimeter, the area of each lot and the percentage of each lot’s area to the total subdivision area. When
creating Eagle Point Lots, you are able to graphically select or pick a point within a closed figure, or by
selecting the points that define the lot’s perimeter. You define lots in this section by picking within a
closed area and letting Eagle Point determine the boundary.
The first thing you do is delete the lines that extend to the sideshots in Figure 5-24 (above).
1. Use the Erase command in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Delete Element command in
MicroStation to delete these lines.
2. Set the current layer to Lotlines in AutoCAD/BricsCad or set the current level to 4 in
MicroStation.
Now you draw in some lots using the Nodes you placed using the Field Data Traverse command.
See the following figure for an example of what the lots should look like. You do not need to have
your lots look exactly like the ones shown in the following figure. Use the AutoCAD/BricsCad Line
or MicroStation Place Line command to draw these lines.
It is suggested that you use “snaps” to form closed regions (in other words, snap to the Nodes and/
or endpoints of lines to form closed regions).
Figure 5-25 Example of Lots
You are now ready to convert some of the lots drawn into Eagle Point Lots.
3. Zoom into the lots we are going to create as shown in Figure 5-27 on page 86.
4. In COGO, select Layout " Convert to Lot.
The Convert to Lot dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-26 Convert to Lot Dialog Box
5. Select the Eagle Point Boundary selection method for selecting the lots. Leave the
Tolerance value at its default value.
This tolerance is used to determine what can be considered a closed lot. If a figure closes within
this tolerance, Eagle Point assumes the figure is “closed.”
See Figure 5-27 on page 86 for an example.
Lesson 5 – COGO
6. Click on the PIC button and graphically select the point indicated in the figure below.
Figure 5-27 Example of Lots
When converting objects to lots there are a few things to keep in mind:
! You need to zoom into the area. The more objects on the screen, the longer it takes to find the
boundary.
! Do not zoom in too far so that part of your lot is off the screen. If a lot cannot be formed by the lines
displayed in the drawing no lot will be formed.
! The point you pick inside the lot determines the start point and the direction. It finds the closest
vertice point to the point picked on the lot and then goes back in the direction of the point. In the
figure above, the start point is the top right corner and the direction is clockwise.
7. After the point is picked within the lot, click on Apply in the Convert to Lot dialog box.
The Convert to Lot – New Lot dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-28 Convert to Lot – New Lot Dialog Box
8. Type Lot 1 in the Lot Name edit field.

9. Type First Tutorial Lot in the Lot Description edit field.
10. Leave the Lot ID entry at the default value.
This field is supplied primarily to contain a lot (parcel) ID number that an assessor would use for
taxation purposes.
11. Type Anderson in the Lot Owner edit field.
12. Select Square Meters from the drop list to specify the area units to use.
13. Leave the Parent Name and units drop list at their default values.
These options allow you to select the overall parent lot to the lots you have created. This option
only applies if the lot you are selecting is wholly within the parent lot.
14. Click on Apply to commit the settings and create the lot.
15. Click on the Repeat button.
The Convert to Lot dialog box (Figure 5-26 on page 85) displays.
16. Make sure the Eagle Point Boundary method is selected as the lot selection method. Leave
the Tolerance value at its default value.
17. Click on the PIC button and pick within one of the other lots you have drawn.
18. After the point is picked within the lot, click on Apply in the Convert to Lot dialog box.
The Convert to Lot – New Lot dialog box (Figure 5-28 on page 86) displays.
19. Type Lot 2 in the Lot Name edit field.
20. Type Second Tutorial Lot in the Lot Description edit field.
21. Leave the Lot ID entry blank.
22. Type Bennett in the Lot Owner edit field.
23. Select Square Meters from the drop list to specify the area units to use.
24. Leave the Parent Name and Units drop list at their default values.
25. Click on Apply to commit the settings and create the lot.
26. Click on Close to dismiss the Convert to Lot dialog box.
Create Lot Report

In this section you generate a lot report of the lots you just created. Each lot report contains the angles
and distances of the sides of each lot. It also contains the area of the lot, as well as its name,
description and specified owner. Each report can be printed to a file or to a printer.
1. In COGO, select Layout " Create Lot Report.
Lesson 5 – COGO
The Create Lot Report dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-29 Create Lot Report Dialog Box
The first thing you need to do is select the lots that are to be included in the report.
2. Click on the Select Lots button.
The Defined Lots dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-30 Defined Lots Dialog Box
3. Select the lots that display in the listing. Multiple lots can be selected by pressing and
holding the Shift or Ctrl buttons on your keyboard while selecting items from the list. Click
on OK.
# Do not be alarmed if the numerical values of your lots do not match those shown in Figure 5-30.
4. When the Create Lot Report dialog box redisplays, the lots selected display in the listing.
Use the horizontal scroll bar slider to review other information about the Lots.
5. Click on the Create Lot Reports Print Options icon.
The Create Lot Report Print Options dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 5-31 Create Lot Report Print Options Dialog Box
Within this dialog box you can select the pieces of information you want included in your Lot
Report. You are also able to specify the printed width of each piece of information and the order in
which it appears in the report.
6. Click on Cancel after reviewing the data to dismiss the Create Lot Report Print Options
dialog box.
7. Click on Close to dismiss the Create Lot Reports dialog box.
Creating a Nodes Report

You are able to list and generate a report of coordinate and elevation data for the Nodes that have been
placed in the CAD graphic by running the Report Nodes command. Follow the steps below to create the
report.
1. In COGO, select Report " Nodes option.
The Report Nodes dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 5 – COGO
Figure 5-32 Report Nodes – Select Dialog Box
The Report Nodes dialog box allows you to choose methods that allow you to add and remove
Nodes to form a selection set of Nodes.
2. Turn on the Select radio button for the Selection Mode.
4. Select the Nodes that you placed using the Field Data Traverse command.
5. In the From edit field, type 518.
6. In the To edit field, type 525.
7. Make sure that Prefix is toggled off.
This option allows you to filter nodes with Alpha-character (letter) prefixes.
8. Click on Apply.
The Nodes are selected and displayed in the Report Nodes dialog box (below).
Figure 5-33 Report Nodes – Selected Nodes Dialog Box
9. You can print the report to a file or directly to the printer by clicking on the Report Options
icon.
10. After you are finished, click on Close to dismiss the Report Nodes dialog box.
11. Close the COGO menu bar.
This concludes Lesson 5 – COGO. Additional information on those commands not covered by this
tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line Help.
Summary
! Specify some of the entry options used in COGO.
! Place a Node.
! Traverse an alignment using the Traverse Alignment command.
! Place a Node by station/offset.
! Locate some points from a field book using the Field Data Traverse command.
! Convert closed figures to Eagle Point lots.
! Generate a lot report of the new lots in the subdivision.
! Create a report of the Nodes in the CAD graphic.
LESSON 6 –
DRAFTING LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting up the Annotation Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Annotating the Turtle Creek Court Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Annotate Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Create Line Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6
Annotate Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Create Node Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Create Legal Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Inserting a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Lesson 6 – Drafting 91
Objectives
In this lesson we:
! Specify some annotation settings.
! Annotate the Turtle Creek Court alignment.
! Annotate some of the lines with bearing and distance.
! Create a table with the bearings and distances of some selected lines in the CAD graphic.
! Annotate some of the new lots in the subdivision.
! Create a table of the Nodes in the CAD graphic.
! Create a legal description for one of the lots in the subdivision.
! Insert a border.
Overview
In this lesson you review some of the more commonly used Drafting commands. Start by specifying
annotation settings for text that is placed through the Annotation Styles command. We also annotate
the alignment stations of the Turtle Creek Court alignment created in Lesson 5 – COGO. You then
annotate several lines in the CAD graphic with bearing and distance information as well as line
numbers and create a table of the lines annotated. The lots that you created in Lesson 5 – COGO are
annotated as well. The next thing you do is create a table of some of the Nodes in the CAD graphic.
Then, run through the steps to generate a legal description of one of the lots and then place a border
around the site using the Insert Border command.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after finishing Lesson 5 – COGO, you can skip this section and move
directly to the next session, Setting up the Annotation Styles (below).
Setting up the Annotation Styles

! This section takes approximately nine minutes to complete.
One of the first things that should be done when working with the Drafting module is to set up the
annotation settings that meet your specific annotation needs. Once these settings are set, they are
available to you every time you start Eagle Point. Further, since the settings are not specific to any one
project, they can be used in all projects that have been defined. You are able to specify different
Lesson 6 – Drafting
annotation settings for alignments, lots, coordinates, curves, lines, spirals, and directions. You add a
new annotation style with defined settings for Alignments, Areas/Lots, Directions, and Lines. The steps
below illustrate how to accomplish this.
1. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Drafting.
This launches the Drafting menu bar.
2. In Drafting, select Annotate " Styles command.
The Annotation Styles dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-1 Annotation Styles Dialog Box
3. Highlight Eagle Point Metric Default.

4. Click on the New Annotation Style icon.
The New Annotation Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-2 New Annotation Style Dialog Box
Notice that the From field in the New Annotation Style dialog box reads: Eagle Point Metric
Default.
Whenever you add a new annotation style, the style that is currently highlighted is the prototype for
the new style. In your case, you are using the Eagle Point Metric Default as the prototype to create
our new style.
5. In the Name edit field, type Metric Tutorial Style.
6. Click on OK to commit the style name and dismiss the New Annotation Style dialog box.
7. Highlight Metric Tutorial Style from the listing in the Annotation Styles dialog box.
You modify the Alignment portion of this style.
8. Select Alignment from the drop list and click on the Edit button.
The Edit Alignment Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-3 Edit Alignment Style Dialog Box
9. From the Item drop list in the Parameters group, select the Major Station option.
The fields on the dialog box change.
10. Leave the Text Offset item at its default value.
This allows you to indicate how far away from the alignment the text insertion point of the station
value should be placed.
11. In the Tick Interval edit field, type 20.
You mark the major ticks every 20 meters along the alignment.
12. Make sure the Text Placement drop list item is set to Perpendicular.
This places the alignment annotation text label at an orientation that is perpendicular to the
alignment.
13. Leave the Custom Tick field at its default value.
This option allows you to use your own tick symbol when annotating the alignment. Should you
wish to use your own symbol in place of the default Eagle Point symbol, you would need to specify
the block or cell library and cell you want to use.
14. Leave the rest of the items found within the Parameters group at their default values.
15. Leave all of the items in the Table group at their default values.
These settings allow you to specify the items that display and the order in which they display,
should you create an Alignment table.
16. In the Text Height Displacement edit field, type 50.
This setting specifies that the text placed along the alignment is placed at an offset equal to 50% of
the text height.
17. Click on Apply to commit these settings for the Major Station portion of the Alignment
option.
18. From the Item drop list in the Parameters group, select the Minor Station option.
19. In the Tick Interval edit field, type 10.
You mark the minor ticks every 10 meters along the alignment.
20. Leave the rest of the items found within the Parameters group at their default values.
22. In the Text Height Displacement edit field, leave the value at 50.
23. Click on OK to commit these settings and dismiss the Edit Alignment Style dialog box.
You now specify the settings to be used for areas or Lots.
24. Select Area/Lot from the drop list and click on the Edit button.
The Edit Area/Lot Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-4 Edit Area/Lot Style Dialog Box
25. From the Item drop list in the Parameters group, select the Description option.
26. Make sure the Annotate toggle is on.
This indicates that this particular item should be included when an area/lot feature is annotated.
27. Leave the brackets (the <> symbols) as they are in the Label edit field.
If you place text before or after the brackets, the text acts as a prefix or suffix. When used, the
brackets are substituted with the annotation value being placed.
28. In the Table Heading edit field, change the value so it is Lot Name.
29. Leave the rest of the items found within the Parameters grouping at their default values.
These settings allow you to specify the settings to use should you create an Area/Lot table.
31. In the Text Height Displacement edit field, verify the value is 50.
32. Make sure the Place Symbol Around Text toggle is off.
This option allows you to indicate if a symbol should be placed around the text annotation.
33. Click on OK to commit these settings and close the Edit Area/Lot Style dialog box.
The Annotation Styles dialog box (Figure 6-1 on page 93) displays.
You now specify the settings to be used for directions.
34. Select Direction from the drop list and click on the Edit button.
The Edit Direction Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-5 Edit Direction Style Dialog Box
You can custom tailor the direction annotation settings to suit your particular tastes. Assume these
settings are acceptable, so leave each of the settings at their default values.
35. Click on OK to save the settings and dismiss the Edit Direction Style dialog box.
The Annotation Style dialog box (Figure 6-1 on page 93) displays.
36. Select Line from the drop list and click on the Edit button.
This allows you to specify the settings to be used for annotating line work.
The Edit Line Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-6 Edit Line Style Dialog Box
These settings control how the text is placed when annotating lines.
37. Make sure both the Direction and Distance toggles are on and leave the Label, Placement
and Order settings at their default values.
38. Make sure the Stack Annotation and Direction Arrow toggles are off.
39. Leave all of the items in the Table grouping at their default values.
These settings allow you to specify the settings to use should you create a line table.
40. In the Text Height Displacement edit field, verify the value is 50.
41. Verify the Flip Angle Tolerance is 0.
This setting is used to determine the threshold when text is flipped along the line to prevent the text
from being upside down. Setting the value to 0 specifies that the text flips if the line is rotated
beyond vertical.
42. Click on OK to save the settings and dismiss the Edit Line Style dialog box.
The Annotation Styles dialog box (Figure 6-1 on page 93) displays.
You now get the precision for this project that was specified in Lesson 1 –Starting Eagle Point and
adopt it for our Annotation needs.
43. Select Precision from the drop list and click on the Edit button.
The Edit Precision Style dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-7 Edit Precision Style Dialog Box
44. From the Category drop list, select the Linear option.
45. Click on the Inherit Project Precision button.
An Alert box displays, asking you to confirm this action.
46. Click on the Yes button to confirm this action.
The precision for all items in this Category list have taken on the precision of this project.
47. Click on OK to commit these settings and dismiss the Edit Precision Style dialog box.
48. Click on Close to dismiss the Annotation Styles dialog box.
You have looked at some of the settings that can be specified for each some of the items within an
annotation style. See the Drafting documentation or on-line help for more information on the items that
can be specified.
Annotating the Turtle Creek Court Alignment

Now that you have set some of the annotation style settings, you are ready to annotate the Turtle Creek
Court alignment. Use the Annotate Alignment command to annotate the ticks and stations in the CAD
graphic. Use the following steps to annotate the alignment.
1. Verify the visibility of the Turtle Creek Court alignment.
Refer to Figure 6-8 on page 98 to see how the site should look.
Be aware that the default layer/level for the alignment annotation can be specified in the Default CAD
Settings command of the System menu of the main Eagle Point menu bar.
Figure 6-8 Site Before Annotation
2. In Drafting, select Annotate " Alignment Stationing.

The Annotate Alignment Stationing dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-9 Annotate Alignment Stationing Dialog Box
3. From the Annotation Style drop list, select the Metric Tutorial Style option.
This is the annotation style you created earlier.
4. Click on the Defined Alignments button.
The Defined Alignments dialog box (below) displays. This dialog box allows us to select a
previously defined alignment to annotate.
Figure 6-10 Defined Alignments Dialog Box
5. Select Turtle Creek Court CL from the listing and click on OK to close the Defined
Alignments dialog box.
If you recall, you created this alignment in Lesson 5 – COGO.
6. Click on Apply on the Annotate Alignment Stationing dialog box.
The Turtle Creek Court alignment is annotated as shown below.
# The text size for the annotation that is placed can be found in the Default CAD Settings command
under the System pull-down menu on the Eagle Point System menu bar.
Figure 6-11 Annotated Turtle Creek Court Alignment
7. Click on Close to dismiss the Annotate Alignment Stationing dialog box.
Annotate Lines
In this section, you annotate some of the existing lot lines with direction and distance information.
Complete the following steps to annotate the lot lines.
1. Zoom in to the site so that you see the lots shown in the figures below.
Figure 6-12 Zoom In To This Area
Figure 6-13 Zoomed In Area
2. In Drafting, select Annotate " Lines.

The Annotate Lines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-14 Annotate Lines Dialog Box
3. Select Along Line from the Annotation Type drop list.

You annotate a few lines with annotation along the lot lines. You annotate others using By Number.

4. From the Annotation Style drop list, select Metric Tutorial Style.
5. Make sure the selection method is set to By Line.
Alternatively, you could select a method that allows you to identify a line by indicating two
coordinate locations.
6. Select Multiple as the Method for annotation.
Alternatively, you could select a method that allows you to select individual lines for annotation.
When set to the Multiple option, Drafting labels the direction of the line based upon the direction it
was drawn in the CAD graphic.
7. Make sure the Number To Fit option is toggled off.
If enabled, this option checks to see if the selected objects are shorter than their annotation
label(s). If they are, the object(s) are labeled with a number that can be summarized in an
annotation table.
8. Click on the Pick In CAD (PIC) button.
You are prompted to select lines.
9. Select two or three lot lines and then accept your selection set.
The lines are annotated similar to what is shown in following figure.
Figure 6-15 Annotated Lines
10. Select By Number from the Annotation Type drop list as you would like to annotate a few of
the lines using line numbers.
Later, you create a line table that summarizes your line number annotation.
11. Click on the PIC button.
You are prompted to select lines.
12. Select a few lot lines that were not picked earlier and accept your selection set.
The lines are annotated with sequential numbers at this time.

See the following figure for an example of the placed annotation.
Figure 6-16 Lines Annotated With Sequential Numbers
13. Click on Close to close the Annotate Lines dialog box.
Create Line Table

The Line Table command allows you to place a table in the CAD graphic that contains the annotation
information of the lines that were annotated by number. If changes are made to the lines that are
annotated, the information in the table is automatically updated to reflect the changes. Complete the
following steps to create the Line Table for the lot lines we annotated earlier.
1. In Drafting, select Create Tables " Line.
The Create Line Table dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-17 Create Line Table Dialog Box
3. For the Selection Method, select All.

4. Click on Apply to place the line table.
You are prompted to select a location for the line table.
5. See the following figure for an example of where to place the table.
Figure 6-18 Placing the Table
6. Click on Close to dismiss the Create Line Table dialog box. If you like, you can zoom in
closer to see values that have been placed in the table.
Annotate Lots
In this section, you annotate the lots that were defined earlier in COGO. The annotation that is placed
for the lot includes its name, description, ID, owner, and area. You have two options for annotating the
lot; you can place the annotation in the lot itself or create a lot table. You place the annotation directly
within the lots for our purposes.
1. In Drafting, select Annotate " Lots command.
The Annotate Lots dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-19 Annotate Lots Dialog Box
3. Type 0 in the Text Rotation edit field.
This places the annotation text so that it is readable in the CAD engine’s X-direction.
As you can see, the lots that were defined in COGO appear in the listing.

4. Highlight all of the lots in the listing.
Multiple lots can be selected by pressing and holding the Shift or Ctrl buttons on your keyboard
while selecting items from the list.
5. Click on Apply.
All of the lots that were defined are annotated.
See the following figure for an example of the annotation that gets placed.
Figure 6-20 Placed Annotation
6. After you have finished annotating the lots, click on Close to dismiss the Annotate Lots
dialog box. If you like, you can zoom in closer to see values that have been placed into the
CAD graphic.
Create Node Table

In addition to creating a Node Report in COGO, you are able to create a Node Table in Drafting and
place it in the CAD graphic. In this section, you create a Node Table of the Nodes that were placed in
Lesson 5 – COGO. Complete the following steps to create the table.
1. Zoom in to the site so you see the Nodes as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-21 Nodes Shown
2. If you are using MicroStation as your CAD program, place a fence around the Nodes in this
area. If you use AutoCAD/BricsCad, skip to the next step.
3. In Drafting, select Create Tables " Node.

The Create Node Table dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-22 Create Node Table Dialog Box
4. From the Selection Method drop list, select AutoCAD if your CAD program is AutoCAD,
select BricsCad if your CAD program is BricsCad, or select Fence if your CAD program is
MicroStation.
5. Set the Arrange Table by option to Column.
6. Select the Grid Option as shown above.
7. Type 50 in the Text Height Displacement edit field.
8. Click on the PIC button and window the Nodes as shown in the next figure and press Enter if
you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad. If you are using MicroStation, click on the PIC button. The
Fence contents are processed. Skip to step 10.
Figure 6-23 Window Nodes
9. Click on Apply.
At this point you are prompted to select a location for the Node table.

10. Place the table in the CAD graphic as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-24 Place Table in CAD Graphic
11. After you have finished placing the table, click on Close to close the Create Node Table
dialog box.
Create Legal Description

In this section you create a legal description for one of our lots by using the Write Legal Description
command in Drafting. This command allows you to create a metes and bounds description of any open
or closed traverse as well as closed figures such as lots. This command is highly customizable so it fits
your needs rather than the other way around. You should first establish some settings and then run
through the command itself.
1. In Drafting, select Text " Write Legal Description.
The Write Legal Description dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-25 Write Legal Description Dialog Box
You start by looking at some of the settings that can be applied to the legal descriptions you create.
2. Click on the Settings button.

The Write Legal Description Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-26 Write Legal Description Settings Dialog Box
When the Write Legal Description Settings dialog box displays, the tab that should be active is
General. On the General tab, you have settings that apply to all legal descriptions. All of these
settings are described in the Write Legal Description section of the Drafting documentation.
3. Click on the Curves tab.
The Write Legal Description Settings dialog box – Curves Tab (below) displays.
Figure 6-27 Write Legal Description Settings Dialog Box – Curves Tab
The Curves tab contains settings to specify how the legal description describes going through a
curve.
4. Leave the settings at the default values.
5. Click on the Spirals tab.

The Write Legal Description Settings dialog box – Spirals tab (below) displays.
Figure 6-28 Write Legal Description Settings Dialog Box – Spirals Tab
The Spirals tab contains settings to specify how the legal description describes going through a
spiral.
6. Leave the settings at the default values.
7. Click on the Directions tab.
The Write Legal Description Settings dialog box – Directions tab (below) displays.
Figure 6-29 Write Legal Description Settings Dialog Box – Directions Tab
These settings specify how directions are reported in the legal description.
8. Leave the default values as they are.
9. Click on the Ties tab.

The Write Legal Description Settings dialog box – Ties tab (below) displays.
Figure 6-30 Write Legal Description Settings Dialog Box – Ties Tab
The Ties tab contains the settings used by the Write Legal Description command in reporting ties in
the legal description. You can specify settings for both passing and corner ties.
10. Leave the settings at their default values.
11. Click on OK to commit the settings and dismiss the Write Legal Description Settings dialog
box.
12. Click on the New Legal Description icon.
The New Legal Description dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-31 New Legal Description Dialog Box
13. In the Title edit field, type Tutorial Legal Description.

This is the description that displays in the Legal Descriptions dialog box after you have created the
legal description.
14. Click on the Use Caption and Clauses toggle so that it is On.
The Edit button becomes active.
15. Click on the Edit button.
The Edit Caption and Clauses dialog box (Figure 6-32 on page 110) displays. The Edit Caption and
Clauses dialog box allows you create your own starting caption and ending clause for the legal
description. The captions and clauses you type in the edit fields are automatically inserted at the
beginning and ending of the legal description, respectively. Leave these fields blank for now. The
Save as Defaults button allows you to save the caption and/or clauses as the default phrases that

can be used for any future legal descriptions. If this button is clicked on, the caption and clauses
edit fields are completed for every future legal description you run.
Figure 6-32 Edit Caption and Clauses Dialog Box
16. Click on Cancel to close the Edit Caption and Clauses dialog box.
17. Since you have elected not to include captions nor clauses in your legal description, click
the Use Caption and Clauses toggle so that it is off.
You now have two options that allow you to indicate how your legal description should start; a
Commence button and a Begin button. The Commence button allows you to start at a point and
follow an alignment to the point of beginning. The Begin button allows you to start immediately at
the point of beginning. You assume you are already at the point of beginning and write the legal
description for one of your existing lots.
18. Click on the Begin button.
The Begin dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-33 Begin Dialog Box
19. Click on the Lot icon on the bottom of the dialog box.
Notice that the dialog box changes to allows you to select a defined lot.
20. Click on the Defined Lot button.
The Defined Lots dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-34 Defined Lots Dialog Box
21. Select one of the lots in the listing and click on OK.

22. On the Begin dialog box, click on OK.
23. On the New Legal Description dialog box, click on OK to write the legal description.
The Step Through Legal Description dialog box (below) displays. In this dialog box, the legal
description can be displayed and can be edited if you like.
24. Click on the Next Segment button to begin the “step through” process.
Notice that only the first segment in the legal description is displayed at this point.
Figure 6-35 Step Through Legal Description Dialog Box
Notice that if you need to specify a tie point at any segment, you can click on the Tie Point button to
specify or select the coordinates of the Tie Point.
25. If you would not like to look at a segment at a time, or if you have looked at all of the
segments of the legal description, click on the End of Description button.
The legal description is written.
26. Click on OK to close the Step Through Legal Description dialog box.
You could print the legal description to a file or printer by selecting the Legal Description Print
Options icon. Do not do this at this time.
27. Click on Close to close the Write Legal Description dialog box.
Inserting a Border
In this section, you insert a border around your site. The Drafting module lets you choose and insert a
border from a variety of sizes. When a border is inserted, it is sized based on the horizontal scale of the
drawing. If you place a “D-size” border in the drawing at 1:500 scale, the border plots out “D-size” if you
plot the drawing at 1:500 scale. Use the following steps to insert the border in our site.

1. Zoom out in the CAD graphic so you can see the site as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-36 Zoom Out in CAD
2. In Drafting, select Insert " Symbols.

The Insert Symbols from Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 6-37 Insert Symbols From Library Dialog Box
3. Click on the + in front of Borders.

4. Click on the + in front of Metric Landscape.
5. Select A3-29.7 x 42.0.
This is the size the border measures if the drawing is plotted at the same scale at which the border
was inserted.
6. Click on the Settings tab that is behind the Insert Symbols from Library dialog box.
7. Click on the Scale/Rotation tab and type 30 for scale.
This scale factor is applied so that the CAD graphic fits inside the border.
8. Click on the CAD Settings icon. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad, type the Layer name
Border. If you are using MicroStation, set the level to 18.
9. Click on OK to close CAD settings.

10. Click on the Apply button on the Insert Symbols from Library dialog box.
You are prompted to pick a location in the CAD graphic for the border. Your cursor location is the
lower-left corner of the border. Place the border as shown in the following figure.
Figure 6-38 Border on CAD Graphic
# Note that you can move the border to a desired location if you wish to do so. The border is one entity.
11. Click on Close to dismiss the Insert Symbols dialog box.
12. Close the Drafting menu bar.
This concludes Lesson 6 – Drafting. Additional information on those commands not covered by this
tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line help.
Summary
! Specify some annotation settings.
! Annotate the Turtle Creek Court alignment.
! Annotate some of the lines with bearing and distance.
! Create a table with the bearings and distances of some selected lines in the CAD graphic.
! Annotate some of the new lots in the subdivision.
! Create a table of the Nodes in the CAD graphic.
! Create a Legal Description for one of the lots in the subdivision.
! Insert a border.

LESSON 7 – DATA
TRANSFER LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Create a Custom Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Specifying Transfer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Importing Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
7
Lesson 7 – Data Transfer 115

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Create a custom data format.
! Specify transfer settings.
! Import data points into the CAD graphic.
Overview
This lesson discusses the steps in Data Transfer that allow you to import point data into your CAD
graphic. Once imported, this data is typically used as a basis to create surface models (discussed later
in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, which begins on page 123). You build a custom data format
that defines the structure of a data type you have been given. You then specify some settings and
import the data into the CAD graphic. The point data is used to supplement the information brought into
your CAD graphic through Data Collection.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after finishing Lesson 6, you can skip this section and move directly to the
next session entitled Create a Custom Format.
Create a Custom Format

Data Transfer ships with literally hundreds of predefined data formats that should handle most any
data format. However, sometimes the supplied transfer formats do not coincide with the format of the
file you have or want. Data Transfer allows you to create your own user-defined formats that should
solve this particular issue. The format you create may be a either a coordinate format or a station-offset
format. You create a format that is in the following format: Easting, Northing, Elevation, Description.
Complete the following steps to create the custom translation format.
1. Select the Zoom Extents command (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or Fit Active Design command
(MicroStation).

The site should resemble the following figure.
Lesson 7 – Data
Transfer
Figure 7-1 Zoom Extents Site
Also remove the border from your display.

2. AutoCAD/BricsCad users, freeze the layer called BORDER. MicroStation users, turn off
Level 18.
Each of these are the default values for the Drafting border object as specified in the Default CAD
Settings command.
3. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Data Transfer.
This launches the Data Transfer menu bar.
4. In Data Transfer, select Formats " Create command.
The Create User Formats dialog box (below) displays. The Create User Formats dialog box
contains a listing of just the user formats that have been created to this point.
Figure 7-2 Create User Formats Dialog Box
5. Click on the New User Format icon.

The New User Format dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 7-3 New User Format Dialog Box
6. Type Tutorial Data Format in the Format Name edit field.

Your custom format starts with an Easting field. Indicate how wide (how many numeric characters)
this field should be.
7. Type 15 in the Field Width edit field.
8. Click on the E button.
A total of 15 E’s are placed in the edit field below the buttons.
9. Select the comma symbol (,) from the Delimiter drop list and then click on the Delimiter
button once.
A comma symbol (,) is placed after the 15 E’s. Each time the Delimiter button is clicked on, an extra
delimiter is placed. Mistakes can be corrected by manually removing the error through the use of
the Back Space or Delete keys on your keyboard.
The next field you identify is the Northing field.
10. Verify that 15 is still shown in the Field Width edit field.
11. Click on the N button.
A total of 15 N’s are appended to the existing format.
12. Make sure the Delimiter is still a comma symbol (,). Click on the Delimiter button once.
The next field you identify is the Elevation field.
13. Verify that 15 is still shown in the Field Width edit field.
14. Click on the L button.
A total of 15 L’s are appended to the existing format.
15. Make sure the Delimiter is still a comma symbol (,). Click on the Delimiter button once.
Finally, you identify the width of the Description field.
16. Type 20 in the Field Width edit field.
17. Click on the D button.
A total of 20 D’s are appended to the existing format. The format should resemble that of the
following.
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEE,NNNNNNNNNNNNNNN,LLLLLLLLLLLLLLL,DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DD
Again, if mistakes were made during the format entry, you can edit the format by typing the
appropriate characters and delimiters directly into the edit field. When using explicit delimiters
(such as a comma), it is not necessary to indicate the exact width of each field. The format in the
above list is functionally equivalent to the more compact E,N,L,D format.

18. Click on OK to commit the format just entered and dismiss the New User Format dialog box.
The format is now displayed in the list within the Create User Formats dialog box.
19. Click on the Close button to dismiss the Create User Formats dialog box.
Specifying Transfer Settings

Lesson 7 – Data
When using Data Transfer, you have the ability to specify some settings that control the importing and
Transfer
exporting of data to and from your CAD graphic. When importing data, some of the settings that you
can specify include how the point is displayed and which points to place. When exporting data, you are
able to specify the precision of the data that gets written to the output file and whether or not to add a
value to the point numbers. Another setting that can be specified is the editor you want to use when
editing the data file. You specify some settings used for importing data into your CAD graphic. Follow
the steps below to specify these settings.
1. In Data Transfer, select Transfer " Settings command.
The Transfer Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 7-4 Transfer Settings – Import Tab
2. On the Import tab of the Transfer Settings dialog box, make sure the Draw Lines toggle is Off
and the Place Points As toggle is on.
3. Select Points from the Place Points As drop list.
When importing data as points (rather than Nodes with attributes), you typically see improved
performance when working with the point data. The improved performance is realized because the
amount of memory needed to store a simple point is smaller than the memory required to store a
Node with attributes (such as a symbol, number, and/or description). The Default Field Code, Node
Number To Add, and Starting Node ID fields become disabled.
4. Make sure the Use Point Numbers and Use Elevations toggles are off.
These toggles allow you to filter out and import only the points that fall within the selected range(s).
5. Click on OK to save the settings and dismiss the Transfer Settings dialog box.

Importing Points
Now you are ready to import the data into the CAD graphic. Before you import your data, you should
determine on which new layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or level (MicroStation) the imported data resides.
The following steps explain how to identify the file name and specify the data format of the file you want
to import.
1. On the Eagle Point menu bar, select System " Default CAD Settings.
The Default CAD Settings dialog box displays.
2. Click on the plus sign (+) to the immediate left of Data Transfer.
This expands the tree view listing.
3. Highlight the import data item and review the layer/level for this entry.
This is the layer/level in your CAD graphic that your imported data resides on.
4. Click on Cancel to close the Default CAD Settings dialog box.
5. In Data Transfer, select Transfer " Import File command.
The Import File dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 7-5 Import File Dialog Box
6. Click on the Select File To Import icon to the right of the File Name edit field.
The Select File To Import dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 7-6 Select File To Import Dialog Box
7. Select the TUTOR07.PTS file in the Project directory. If your tutorial data is in a different
location, navigate to the appropriate folder to select the file. See Getting Started on page 7
for more information.

8. When selected, click on the Open button to dismiss the Select File To Import dialog box.
9. Click on the Select File Format icon.
The Select Format dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 7 – Data
Transfer
Figure 7-7 Select Format Dialog Box
10. To narrow the listing a bit, select Coordinate from the Format Type Filter drop list.
11. From the listing, select the Tutorial Data Format option.
12. Click on OK to accept this format and close the Select Format dialog box.
The Edit File button launches an editor that allows you to edit/inspect the data before it is imported
into the CAD graphic. The Duplicates button checks to see if the CAD graphic already contains
nodes with the same numbers as found in the data file and display the number of occurrences. The
Settings button provides a shortcut to the Transfer Settings which you have already reviewed.
13. Click on OK to commit these values, import the data into the CAD graphic, and close the
Import File dialog box.
14. Review the Report Warnings if you want and click on the Close button to close the Report
Warnings dialog box.

15. The following figure shows the points after they have been successfully imported into the
CAD graphic.
Figure 7-8 Successfully Imported Points
16. Close the Data Transfer menu bar.

This concludes Lesson 7 – Data Transfer. Additional information on those commands not covered by
this tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or On-line Help.
Summary
! Create a custom data format.
! Specify transfer settings.
! Import data points into the CAD graphic.

LESSON 8 –
SURFACE MODELING LESSON
BASICS
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
8
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Setting Up a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Importing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Check for Crossing Breaklines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Create Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Triangulate a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Reviewing Surface Model Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Create Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Labeling the Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Placing Spot Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Placing a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Manipulating the CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics 123

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Set up a surface model.
! Import a point file.
! Import a breakline file.
! Check for crossing breaklines.
! Create a predefined boundary.
! Create a surface model of the points and breaklines.
! Review the surface model information.
! Create and annotate contours.
! Analyze the site with spot elevation shots.
! Create a three-dimensional grid.
Overview
In this lesson, you review the steps needed to create a surface model. The data that you use consists of
points imported from Data Transfer and faultlines (hereafter referred to as breaklines) imported
through Surface Modeling. The surface model is created by triangulating all of the points and
breaklines to create a network of irregular triangles. After the model is created, contours, spot
elevations, and three-dimensional grids can be generated.
You start by importing breakline information and points into the CAD graphic. This information
represents the breakline data for the area around Highway 169 and Highway 73. After the breaklines
are imported, you make a surface model of the points and breaklines. Then, you create and annotate
the contours of the area. After the contours are created, you place spot elevations at select locations
within the model. Finally, you create a grid mesh of the surface model and look at commands used to
render it.
Getting Started
Since this lesson builds on information obtained from a file, you should first perform some steps that
bring the tutorial data up to speed for this lesson. If you have not already done so, follow each of the
steps discussed in the following sections of Lesson 1.

Setting Up a Surface Model
To create a surface model, you first create and define the properties that control the surface model
itself. When you create a new surface, parameters, such as description, minimum and maximum
elevation range, and contour intervals, can be specified for the model. To create and define a new
surface model, complete the following steps.
1. In Eagle Point, select Products " Surface Modeling.
This launches the Surface Modeling menu bar.
2. In Surface Modeling, select Prepare " Manage Surface Models.
The Manage Surface Models dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 8 – Surface
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-1 Manage Surface Models Dialog Box
3. Click on the New Surface Model icon.

The New Surface Model dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-2 New Surface Model Dialog Box – Surface Model Tab
4. Type Original Ground in the Description edit field.

5. Type the information into the appropriate fields in the Surface Model tab of the New Surface
Model dialog box as shown in the figure above. Press the Tab key to move from one field to
the next.
6. Click on the CAD Settings icon.
The CAD Settings dialog box displays.

7. Set the values of the settings to those specified in the following table. Click on OK in the
CAD Settings dialog box when complete.
CAD Settings
AutoCAD/BricsCad MicroStation
Layer OG-TIN Level 45
Color BYLAYER Color 0
8. Click on Apply in the New Surface Model dialog box to commit these settings.
9. Click on the Contours tab of the New Surface Model dialog box.
This tab allows you to establish the parameters that control the creation of elevation contours.
10. Type the information into the appropriate fields in the Contours tab of the New Surface
Model dialog box as shown in the figure below. Press the Tab key to move from one field to
the next.
Figure 8-3 New Surface Model Dialog Box – Contours Tab

12. Set the values of the settings to those specified in the following tables for the Index
Contours, Intermediate Contours, and User-defined Contours settings, respectively. Click
on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box when complete.
Index Contour Settings
Layer OG-CNT-IDX Level 10
Color 2 Color 3
Line Type BYLAYER Style 0
Width 0 Weight 0

Intermediate Contour Settings
Layer OG-CNT-INT Level 15
Color 1 Color 4
Width 0 Weight 0
User-Defined Contour Settings
Layer OG-CNT-USR Level 20
Color 6 Color 5
Width 0 Weight 0
Modeling Basics
13. Click on Apply in the New Surface Model dialog box to commit these settings.
14. Click on the Elevation Labels tab of the New Surface Model dialog box.
This tab allows you to establish the parameters that control the creation of a grid of spot elevations.
15. Type the information into the appropriate fields in the Elevation Labels tab of the New
Surface Model dialog box as shown below. Press the Tab key to move from one field to the
next.
Figure 8-4 New Surface Model Dialog Box – Elevation Labels Tab
16. Click on Apply to commit these settings.

17. Click on the Rectangular Grid tab of the New Surface Model dialog box.
This tab allows you to establish the parameters that control the creation of a 3-D grid mesh.

18. Type the information into the appropriate fields in the Rectangular Grid tab of the New
Surface Model dialog box as shown below. Press the Tab key to move from one field to the
next.
Figure 8-5 New Surface Model Dialog Box – Rectangular Grid Tab

Setting Values
Layer OG-GRD Level 6
Color 3 Color 1
21. Click on Apply to commit the settings and click on OK.

The New Surface Model dialog box closes.
Notice that a surface model called Original Ground has been added to the Manage Surface Models
dialog box.
22. Click on Close.
The Manage Surface Models dialog box (Figure 8-1 on page 125) closes.
Importing Breaklines
Breaklines are lines that define significant discontinuities (or breaks) of a surface. These features (such
as ridges, ditches, or pavement breaks) need to be triangulated in a particular way so the feature is
accurately represented in the model. While modeling a breakline, triangle sides (or legs) are formed
along the breakline segment. In other words, a breakline prevents triangulation between any two points
on opposite sides of a breakline segment.

It can be safely stated that nearly every problem associated with the creation of surface models can be
attributed to poor or invalid breakline objects. By gaining a solid understanding of breaklines and the
rules they must follow, one can quickly use them as benefits rather than hindrances. Surface Modeling
interprets all vector objects (lines, 3-D lines, arcs, etc.) as breaklines if they meet either of the following
conditions.
! The endpoints or vertices that define the feature fall within the valid elevation range of the surface
model.
! The endpoints or vertices that define the feature fall directly under points whose elevation is within
the valid elevation range of the surface model. This makes it possible to draw and use breaklines
as two-dimensional objects.
Boundaries and void regions also behave as breaklines if they meet either of the above conditions (see
the Surface Modeling documentation for more information on these topics).
Within the CAD graphic, you notice that it contains points that were imported. You supplement this data
with breakline information (fault lines, flow lines, tops of banks, etc.) to more accurately define your site.
Breaklines can be either drawn by hand or can be imported into the CAD graphic. To import breaklines
into the CAD graphic, complete the following steps.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Prepare " Import ASCII " Breaklines.
The Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-6 Import ASCII Breaklines Dialog Box
You can either type the name of the file to import into File Name edit field or select it by clicking on
the Select File option.
2. Click on the Select File icon.
The Select File dialog box displays.
3. Select the TUTOR08.BRK file in the Project directory. (If your tutorial data is in a different
for more information.) Note that you may need to set the Files of type filter to All Files (*.*) to
see the file to import.
4. Click on the Open button.
The Select File dialog box closes and the file name is now displayed with the full path in the File
Name edit field in the Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box.
5. Turn on the Pnt#,N,E,Elev,Line Indicator radio button as this format fits the Point number,
Northing, Easting, Elevation, and Line Indicator structure of the breakline file.
Notice that an example format is displayed along with the first few lines of the selected file. This
makes it possible to inspect the file’s structure before you attempt to import it.

7. Set the values of the settings to those specified in the following table. Click on OK on the
Setting Values
Layer OG-BRK Level 44
Color 6 Color 1
Width 0 Weight 0
8. Click on Apply in the Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box to import the breakline data into
the CAD graphic.
9. Click on Close.
The Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box closes.
The figure below shows the CAD graphic with the imported points and breaklines.
Figure 8-7 Imported Points and Breaklines
Importing data through Surface Modeling is one of several methods that can be used to place data
into your CAD graphic. Information can also be placed into the CAD graphic via the download and
reduction processes of Data Collection, the import processes of Data Transfer, the hand-entry
processes of COGO, or through commands found in your native CAD product. Other methods of data
entry include acquiring public domain data sets or purchasing CAD maps through aerial
photogrammetry companies.
Preparation
It is recommended that you either freeze layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or turn off levels (MicroStation)
that are not going to be used in the surface model. This is to ensure that no triangles are created to
objects that were not supposed to be part of the surface model. All lines that are displayed in the
drawing are treated as breaklines. You can control which breaklines are used and how they are used.
Following is a quick list of how breaklines are used.

A. All breaklines within the specified elevation range (which is 20m to 120m for Original
Ground surface model) are used.
B. Lines at 0 elevation still can be used as breaklines if they are snapped to Nodes that are
within the elevation range.
C. Breaklines can also be masked. The masking types are Include, Exclude, Soft Break,
and No Break.
See the following table and freeze the following layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or turn off the following
levels (MicroStation).
Preparation Table: Freeze Layers/Turn off Levels
Make Points current Make Level 42 current
Freeze: Turn off:

! Alignment 3
! Annotation 4
! Easements 5
Modeling Basics
! L-EDGE 6
! Lot Lines 12
! Lots 13
! Plant-Tract 30
! R-EDGE 32
! Sidewalk
! Sidewalk-Ramps
! Table
! Traverse
Zoom out to see the entire site. The following figure shows what the site should now look like.
Figure 8-8 Site Example

Check for Crossing Breaklines
As was mentioned earlier, breaklines are usually the cause of poor surface model representations.
When connecting two points, a breakline defines a straight grade from one point to the next. A common
source of conflict for a surface model is when two breaklines cross one another. If they do, Surface
Modeling detects this condition and generates a “crossing breakline” error. If a crossing occurs, you
are alerted to the location and are provided some options to fix the crossings. You can also proactively
check for crossing breaklines using a command provided by Surface Modeling. Again, you are alerted
to the location of the crossing lines and allowed to fix them. In this part of the lesson, you review how to
check for crossing lines.
Figure 8-9 Crossing Breaklines Example
To check for crossing breaklines, complete the following steps.

1. In Surface Modeling, select Prepare " Crossing Breaklines.
The Crossing Breaklines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-10 Crossing Breaklines Dialog Box
2. Select Find from the Action drop list.

This option finds any crossing breaklines you may have in the CAD graphic and list their locations.
3. For MicroStation users, place a fence around the entire site.
4. Click on Apply on the Crossing Breaklines dialog box to initiate the Find action.
You are prompted to select the objects that you want to check for crossing breaklines.
5. Graphically, window the entire site.
Notice that no crossing breaklines exist in your site. If they had, they would have been listed in the
Crossing Breaklines dialog box. If you do have some, in the action box, change it to repair. Trim
the breaklines and that should fix the crossing breaklines.
6. Click on Close.
The Crossing Breaklines dialog box closes.

Create Boundary
When you want to make a surface model, you can place a boundary around the data set so that
Surface Modeling only triangulates the data within the boundary. This is useful when the site is not
regularly shaped and you do not want triangles created in an area due to lack of information.
The boundary (when placed) must be a closed 2-D or 3-D polyline (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or shape
(MicroStation). When you create a surface model and specify a boundary, the program may triangulate
to the boundary depending on if it is within the specified elevation range. When you want to place a
boundary around the model, you can predefine where the boundary is ahead of time, or select the
boundary when you are making the surface model. You draw a boundary around the data and then
predefine it for use in your surface model. To create a predefined boundary for the surface model,
complete the following steps.
1. In AutoCAD/BricsCad, create a layer called boundary and make it current. In MicroStation,
make Level 42 current.
2. Select the Polyline command in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Place Shape command in
MicroStation.
Modeling Basics

3. Draw the boundary around the data as shown in Figure 8-11 below. Make sure the boundary
is closed when finished. If you are using the polyline command in AutoCAD/BricsCad, make
sure you use the Close option to complete the polyline.
Figure 8-11 Polyline Boundary
4. In Surface Modeling, select Prepare " Predefined Boundaries command.

The Predefined Boundaries dialog box (below) displays. You can have multiple predefined
boundaries to be used with different surface models. The Description column in the listing is the
description of the boundary that you specify. The Surface Model column is the listing of surface
models. You can have one boundary assigned to any one surface model. You cannot have two
boundaries for the same surface model. After the boundary is defined, you can modify the
description and surface model the boundary corresponds to (if desired).
Figure 8-12 Predefined Boundaries Dialog Box
5. Click on the New Predefined Boundary icon.

You are prompted to select the boundary object.
6. Pick the boundary object you drew earlier.

The New Predefined Boundary dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-13 New Predefined Boundary Dialog Box
7. Type My Boundary in the Description edit field.

8. Select Original Ground from the Surface Model drop list.
9. Click on OK.
These values are applied and the New Predefined Boundary dialog box closes.
Notice that the predefined boundary called My Boundary has been added to the listing in the
Predefined Boundaries dialog box.
10. Click on Close.
The Predefined Boundaries dialog box closes.
Modeling Basics
Triangulate a Surface Model
Up until now, you have been getting things ready to make the surface model. In this section of the
lesson, you actually triangulate the data in the CAD graphic and create a surface model. The
triangulation process creates a network of triangles that make up the surface model. The surface model
information is contained in external files and is not part of the actual CAD graphic. If you want to view
the triangulated network, you can place triangles into the CAD graphic using the Place Triangles
command. To create the surface model, complete the following steps.
1. Zoom to the extents of the CAD graphic so you can see all of the data.
A. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Run the Zoom Extents command by selecting View " Zoom "
Extents.
B. Microstation: Run the Fit Active Design command.

2. If you are using MicroStation, place a Fence around the data as shown in the figure below. If
you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad, skip this step.
Window this region
Figure 8-14 Fenced Region
3. In Surface Modeling, select Triangulate " Surface Model.

The Triangulate Surface Model dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-15 Triangulate Surface Model Dialog Box

5. Select Predefined from the Boundary drop list.
6. Since you do not have void regions in your surface model, make sure (None) is selected
from the Void Regions drop list.
7. Make sure the Display Model, Use External Point File(s), Display Selected Objects Details
and Place Triangles toggles are all toggled off.
These options are discussed as follows.
Display Model: When enabled, this option creates a temporary image of the triangles in the CAD
graphic after the triangulation process is complete. Be aware that enabling this option may extend
the processing time. When you redraw the screen, the triangles disappear.

Use External Point File(s): In addition to selecting the data within the CAD window, you can create
the surface model from information contained within an external point file. This is useful if you have
a large point file that you wish to make a model from but don’t want to import the data into the CAD
graphic.
Display Selected Objects Details: When enabled, a dialog box displays a summary of the data
you have selected to triangulate. This dialog box gives you information on the number of points
selected as well as the minimum and maximum elevation values of the objects selected.
Place Triangles: When enabled, the triangles created from the triangulation process are imported
(or placed) into your CAD graphic. If desired, selected triangles within the CAD graphic can be
altered so that you can “fine-tune” the surface model.
The Surface Model Settings dialog box (below) displays.
This command provides access to the same settings that you entered earlier.
Modeling Basics
9. Since you do not change these settings, click on Cancel.

10. Click on Apply in the Triangulate Surface Model dialog box to initiate the triangulation
process. Complete step A or B as follows for the appropriate CAD package to select the
objects in the CAD graphic.

A. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Window the points and breaklines in the CAD graphic as shown in
the figure below and press Enter.
Figure 8-17 Window Points and Breaklines
B. MicroStation: The fence contents are processed.

An Alert box (below) that indicates if you have any crossing breaklines may display. In your
CAD graphic, some of the lines created by the 3-D Line Templates feature are crossing one
another. Under normal situations, you are encouraged to run the Crossing Breaklines
command (discussed earlier) and specify the Show, Mark, and/or Repair options to correct the
crossing breakline locations.
Figure 8-18 Eagle Point Warning Dialog Box
Since the amount of crossing is relatively minor, ignore the crossing breaklines and proceed.
11. Click on Yes to continue processing the surface model.
The program triangulates the data and creates the surface model.
12. Click on Close.
The Triangulate Surface Model dialog box closes.

Reviewing Surface Model Information
Now that you have made the surface model, verify that the surface model was created by inspecting
some of its data.
The Manage Surface Models dialog box (Figure 8-1 on page 125) displays.
2. Make sure the Original Ground model is selected and click on the Properties for Surface
Model icon.
The Surface Model Properties dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-19 Surface Model Properties Dialog Box
The Surface Model Properties dialog box displays a variety of information for the model that was
created. This is a good place to look to make sure extraneous data is not included in the model.
The two most commonly referenced items in this dialog box are the minimum and maximum
elevation values for the model.
3. Click on Close.
The Surface Model Properties dialog box closes.
4. Click on Close
The Manage Surface Models dialog box closes.
Create Contours
There are several methods you can employ to display contour information. You examine two of them:
Preview Contours and Make Intermediate & Index Contours. The Preview command displays a viewer
that lets you see the contours without actually committing them to the CAD graphic. The Make
Intermediate & Index command places contour objects into the CAD graphic.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Contours " Preview.

The Preview Contours dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-20 Preview Contours Dialog Box
2. Make sure the Original Ground model is selected from the Surface Model drop list.
3. Click on Apply.
Notice that the contours for the Original Ground model are displayed which allows you to look at the
contours before actually placing them into the CAD graphic.
4. Click on Close.
The Preview Contours dialog box closes.
Now that you have performed a cursory review of the contours, you next commit them to your CAD
graphic.
5. In Surface Modeling, select Contours " Make Intermediate & Index.
The Make Intermediate & Index Contours dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-21 Make Intermediate & Index Contours Dialog Box
6. Make sure the Original Ground model is highlighted from the Surface Model drop list.
7. Leave the Use Screen Display, User-defined Boundary, and Erase Existing Contours for this
Surface toggles toggled off.
These options are described as follows.
Use Screen Display: When enabled, contours are made for the active model only to the extent of
your video display. If you are “zoomed in” to the points and breaklines, the contours are made only
to the extent of your video display. Hence, you generally have a rectangular box of contours
depending on how closely zoomed in you are.

User-defined Boundary: When enabled, you can create a closed boundary that allows you to
define the limits of where contour objects should be created. This is a useful feature if you want to
create contours at a specified contour interval for the site, but need the contours at a different
interval within a certain boundary.
Erase Existing Contours for this Surface: If you have already created contours and want to
generate them again, this option erases the old contours prior to generating the new contours
(when enabled).
The New Surface Model dialog box – Contours Tab (below) displays. This command provides
access to the same settings that you entered earlier.
Modeling Basics
9. Since you are not changing these settings, click on Cancel.

10. Click on Apply on the Make Intermediate & Index Contours dialog box to create contours in
the CAD graphic as shown below.
Once they are placed, you can run commands to manipulate the contours or plot them to paper.
Figure 8-23 Manipulate Contours

11. Click on Close.
The Make Intermediate & Index Contours dialog box closes.
Labeling the Contours

Now that you have placed contour objects into your CAD graphic, you are ready to annotate the
contours so they contain their elevation values. There are several methods you can choose from to
annotate the contours. Complete the following steps to annotate the contours.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Contours " Annotate.
The Annotate Contours dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-24 Annotate Contours Dialog Box
3. Make sure the Index toggle is on and set the other options in the Contours section toggled
off.
This allows you to select those contours that are to receive annotation.
4. Select the Crossing option in the Method sections.
This method allows you to pick two points on the site that defines a line.
Wherever this line crosses a contour, annotation is placed on the contour.
5. Click on the Annotation Settings button.
The Annotate Contour Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-25 Annotate Contour Settings Dialog Box

6. Make sure Middle is selected from the Annotation Location drop list.
7. Make sure to toggle on the Break Contour Around Annotation option. Toggle off the other
options if they are on.
8. Click on OK to commit these settings.
The Annotate Contour Settings dialog box closes.
9. Click on Apply in the Annotate Contours dialog box.
You are prompted to select two points that define the location for the annotation.
10. For each point, select a location within the contoured area of the CAD graphic.
11. Make sure the line you create crosses some index contours.
12. Zoom in to the area that was annotated.
The figure below shows an example of the annotation. This may differ from what you have.
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-26 Zoom In On Area Annotated
13. Click on Close.

The Annotate Contours dialog box closes.
Placing Spot Elevations

When you want to annotate the elevation of a specific point on the site, the process involves identifying
the model from which the elevation should be extracted and the location where the label should be
placed. The following steps further describe this process.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Output " Place Spot Elevation Labels.

The Place Spot Elevation Labels dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-27 Place Spot Elevation Labels Dialog Box
3. Make sure the Erase Existing Elevation Labels for this Surface toggle is off.
When enabled, this option erases all previous spot elevations that have been placed for the
specified model.
Settings Values
Layer OG-SPT Level 43
Color 3 Color 1
Height 1.0 Height 1.0
6. Click on Apply in the Place Spot Elevation Labels dialog box to initiate the placement of
spot elevations into the CAD graphic.
You are prompted to identify the locations for the spot elevations.
7. Pick several points within the contoured area of the CAD graphic. After you have picked
several points for the spot elevations, right-click to stop the picking process. Click on Close
to end the command.
8. To examine the spot elevations, zoom in around the spot elevations you placed.

The following figure shows an illustration of some spot elevations. Your spot elevation labels may
be different than the ones illustrated.
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-28 Spot Elevation Labels
9. Click on Close.
The Place Spot Elevation Labels dialog box closes.
Placing a Grid
Now that you have analyzed the surface model through the creation of contours and spot elevations,
you examine the surface conditions by viewing a 3-D grid mesh. Distinct elevation ranges can be
created and displayed with unique colors. The grid can also be rendered for use in presentations or
animation sequences. In this section, you review some of the more commonly used commands applied
to surface modeling grids.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Output " Place Grid.
The Place Grid dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-29 Place Grid Dialog Box
2. Make sure the Original Ground model is highlighted from the Surface Model drop list.
3. Make sure each of the toggles on the Place Grid dialog box is toggled off.
A description of each toggle follows.

Elevation Table: With this option, you are able to define elevation ranges and assign colors to
these ranges. When the grid is placed with defined elevation ranges, you see bands of color
displaying the defined elevation ranges.
Import Elevation Table Legend: If you used the Elevation Table option, you can toggle to have a
legend placed that specifies which color has been assigned to each range.
User Defined Boundary: If you have drawn a closed polyline (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or shape
(MicroStation), this option allows you to place a grid within the specified boundary.
Erase Existing Grid for this Surface: If a grid has already been placed for the selected model,
this option erases the old grid before placing a new one.
The Grid Elevation Settings dialog box (below) displays. This command provides access to the
same settings that you entered earlier.
Figure 8-30 Grid Elevation Settings Dialog Box – Rectangular Grid Tab
5. Since you are not changing these settings, click on Cancel.

6. Click on Apply in the Place Grid dialog box.
This initiates the placement of the grid mesh into the CAD graphic.
7. Click on Close.
The Place Grid dialog box closes.
Manipulating the CAD Graphic

Now that the grid has been placed in the CAD graphic, you manipulate the visibility of some of the
objects in the CAD graphic, change your view perspective, and render the grid mesh.

1. Freeze some layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or turn off some levels (MicroStation) as shown in
the following table.
Freeze Layers Table
Layers Action Levels Action
OG-GRD Current 4 Current
All Others Freeze All Others Off
2. Zoom to a view of the grid so that looks similar to that shown in the figure below.
Modeling Basics
Figure 8-31 View of Grid
To get a better understanding of the surface conditions, view the grid from a 3-D perspective.
3. Follow the steps beginning below for your CAD platform.
A. AutoCAD: Select View " 3-D Viewpoint " Select.
The Viewpoint Presets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-32 Viewpoint Presets Dialog Box

Type 330 in the X Axis edit field.
This sets your viewing direction as if you were looking Northwesterly.
Type 12 in the XY Plane edit field.
This changes your vertical viewing direction so that your viewing direction forms a 12° degree
angle with the horizontal XY plane.
Click on OK.
These settings are applied and the Viewpoint Presets dialog box closes.
The view of the CAD graphic changes to an isometric view.
Select Render from the AutoCAD View menu and select the Render option.
The Render dialog box displays.
Click on the Render or Render Scene button to render the site.
An example of the rendered site is shown below.
After the site is rendered, in AutoCAD, select Top from the 3-D Viewpoint menu on the View
pull-down menu.
When you do so, the view returns to the normal plan view of the CAD graphic.
Figure 8-33 Rendered Grid
B. BricsCad: Select View " Preset Viewpoints.

The Preset Viewpoints dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 8-34 Preset Viewpoints Dialog Box
Modeling Basics
Click on the Right Front icon as shown on the left.
In BricsCad, select View " Rendering " Full Render.
An example of the rendered site is shown in Figure 8-33 on page 148.
After the site is rendered, in BricsCad, select View " Plan View.
When prompted, indicate that you would like to restore the plan view of the World Coordinate
System. Upon doing so, the view returns to the normal plan view of the CAD graphic.
C. MicroStation: Select Windows " Open " 2.
Your drawing is displayed in 3-D view.
Perform the Fit View command by clicking on the Fit View icon.
In MicroStation select Utilities " Render.
Select Render " Smooth.
You are prompted to select the view that is to be rendered.
Pick view 2.
The grid is rendered as shown in Figure 8-33 on page 148.
To return to the plan view, close view 2.
The CAD view returns to the normal plan view of the site.
Turn all levels on to make all of your objects visible.
Removing Unwanted Objects

Now that you have returned to the plan view in your CAD graphic, the grid mesh and your contours in
your project can be removed. To help keep the drawing at a manageable size, the grid and the contours
are going to be removed. They will no longer be needed in the rest of the tutorial. Explore how simple it
can be to remove some (or all) of the Surface Modeling objects you have placed.
1. In Surface Modeling, select Output " Erase Existing Objects.

The Erase Existing Objects dialog box displays (below).
Figure 8-35 Erase Existing Objects Dialog Box
2. Make sure Original Ground is selected from the Surface Model drop list.
This indicates the surface model whose objects you wish to remove.
3. Toggle the Grid option on and also the Contours option.
4. Click on Apply to commit these settings.
Notice that the grid mesh and the contours are removed from the CAD graphic.
5. Click on Close.
The Erase Existing Objects dialog box closes.
6. Close the Surface Modeling menu bar.
This concludes Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics. Additional information on those commands not
covered by this tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line Help.
Summary
! Set up a surface model.
! Import a breakline file.
! Check for crossing breaklines.
! Create a pre-defined boundary.
! Create a surface model of the points and breaklines.
! Review the surface model information.
! Create and annotate contours.
! Analyze the site with spot elevation shots.
! Create a three-dimensional grid.

LESSON 9 – SITE
DESIGN LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Drawing a Feature Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Project Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Create a Surface Model of Slope Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Calculate Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
9
Balance Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Analyze Slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Flow Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Lesson 9 – Site Design 151

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Draw a building pad.
! Project slopes from the building pad.
! Make a surface model of the slope projections.
! Calculate the volume between the building pad and original ground.
! Balance the cut and fill volume for the pad.
! Analyze the slopes of the site.
! Check where the water drains on the site.
Overview
In this lesson, you review the steps to create a building pad and project slopes from it. You create a
surface model of the pad and calculate volumes between the pad model and the original ground. You
also discuss how to balance the cut and fill earthwork volumes between the two models. You then take
steps and analyze the slopes of your surface model and view water drainage paths. Although you are
illustrating a building pad as your example, the same procedures can be applicable to levees, ponds,
dams, and channels.
Getting Started
steps that brings the tutorial data up to speed for this lesson. If you have not already done so, follow
Drawing a Feature Object

! This section takes approximately eight minutes to complete.
To start this lesson, you draw a building pad (or feature). Through a utility found in Site Design, you
draw a closed figure with right angles. Although you can draw figures using native CAD commands, the
utility discussed in this section should be easier to use and provides additional options. The following
steps outline how to use this command.
1. Zoom to the extents of the CAD graphic.
Extents.
B. MicroStation: Run the Fit Active Design command.
The site should look similar to the figure below.
Figure 9-1 Site After Zoom Extents or Fit Active Design
2. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad, make a layer called BUILDPAD and make this layer
current. If you are using MicroStation, make Level 20 the active level.
3. Clean up the CAD graphic a bit by freezing some layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or by turning
off some levels (MicroStation). Follow the actions listed in the table below.
Lesson 9 – Site Design

Layer/Level Actions
OG-*/POINTS Freeze 18,23, 32, 42, Turn Off:

43, 44, 50, 60,
60, 61, 62, 63
Easements, L-Edge, Lot Lines, Thaw

Plant Tract, Sidewalk, Sidewalk-
Ramps, Traverse, Alignment,
Annotation

4. Continue the zoom process by zooming in on the area shown in the figure below.
Zoom in on this area
Figure 9-2 Zoom Area
5. In System " Default CAD Settings, click on the + in front of Surface Modeling.
6. Highlight Feature Line and change the layer/level to the current one specified in step 2.
7. Click on OK.
8. In Eagle Point, select Products " Site Design.
This launches the Site Design menu bar.
9. In Site Design, select Layout " Draw Feature Line.
The Draw Feature Line dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-3 Draw Feature Line Dialog Box
The first thing you do is specify the starting point of the building pad.
10. Type 49991.6 in the Northing edit field and press the Tab key.
11. Type 418376.2 in the Easting edit field and press the Tab key.
12. Type 93.45 in the Elevation edit field and press the Tab key.
13. Notice that the bottom portion of the Construct Feature Line dialog box becomes enabled.
This is due to the fact you need to define a start point before you specify the next point.
14. Turn on the Distance/Direction radio button in the Next Point group.
15. Type 15.85 in the Distance edit field and press the Tab key.
16. Type 8.09 in the Direction edit field and press the Tab key.
17. Type 0 in the Slope edit field to create a level feature.
18. Click on Apply to accept the point chosen.
You have defined the direction and distance of the first side of the building pad.
19. Type 8.55 in the Distance edit field and press the Tab key.
20. Type 278.09 in the Direction edit field and press the Tab key.
21. Type 0 in the Slope field.
An elevation of 93.45 is maintained.
22. Click on Apply to draw the next leg of the feature line.
The figure below provides an illustration of what you have accomplished to this point.

Figure 9-4 Next Leg of Feature Line Drawn
23. Type 15.85 in the Distance field and press the Tab key.
24. Type 188.09 in the Direction field and press the Tab key.
25. Type 0 in the Slope field.

26. Click on Apply to save the data entered and draw the feature line segment as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 9-5 Another Feature Line Segment Drawn
27. Click on the Close Feature Line button.

The remaining side of the feature is closed to the starting point of the feature.
This is the building pad that you work with and get project slopes from. The figure below shows the
illustration of the completed building pad.
Figure 9-6 Completed Building Pad
28. Click on Close.

The Construct Feature Line dialog box closes.
Project Slopes
In this section you outline the steps necessary to project slopes from the building pad to a surface
model. When projecting slopes, you are able to specify independent Cut and Fill slope values. Site
Design automatically projects slopes out around corners based on user-specified criteria.
1. In Site Design, select Project Slopes " To Surface Model command.
The Project Slopes To Surface Model dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-7 Project Slopes To Surface Model Dialog Box

You are able to project slopes to a surface model or to a specified elevation. Therefore, leave the

Use Constant Elevation option toggled off.
3. Type 5 in the Cut Slope edit field and select H/V as the slope unit in the drop list to the right
of the edit field. Press the Tab key.
4. Type -5 in the Fill Slope edit field and select H/V as the slope unit in the drop list to the right
of the edit field. Press the Tab key.
5. Type 3 in the Linear Interval edit field.
This is the distance between the projection lines that are projected from the selected feature.
6. Press the Tab key.
7. Type 9 in the Radial Interval edit field.
This is the angle between projection lines projected from corners of the selected feature.
8. Make sure the Erase Existing Slope Projections for this Surface option is toggled off.
The CAD Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-8 CAD Settings Dialog Box

10. The settings to be entered on the CAD Settings dialog box are found in the following tables.
Use the settings in the columns specific to your CAD program. You can select the different
objects from the Description drop list.
Cut Slope and Fill Slope Lines Settings
Layer PS-SLP-LIN Level 33
Color 2 Color 0
Width 0 Weight 0
Feature Lines Settings
Layer PS-FEA-LIN Level 34
Color 1 Color 1
Width 0 Weight 0
Catch Lines Settings
Layer PS-CAT-LIN Level 35
Color 6 Color 2
Width 0 Weight 0
11. After all of the CAD parameters have been entered, click on OK to commit the settings.
The CAD Settings dialog box closes.
12. Click on Apply in the Project Slopes To Surface Model dialog box.
You are prompted by the CAD program to select objects from which the projections should be
made.
13. Select the building pad you drew earlier.
You are prompted through CAD to select the side of object that slopes should be projected to.
14. Select a location to the outside of the building pad you drew earlier.
Notice that the slope projection lines and catch lines are drawn from the building pad you drew as
shown in the figure below.
Figure 9-9 Projection Lines and Catch Lines to be Drawn
15. Press Enter to reject the prompt to select another object from which to project.
16. Click on Close.
The Project Slopes To Surface Model dialog box closes.

Create a Surface Model of Slope Projections
The projection lines and catch line that were created from the Project Slopes To Surface Model
command are three-dimensional objects that can be used to create a surface model. In this section,
you create a surface model from these objects so that you can later calculate the volume of Cut and Fill
material required for the building pad.
1. Zoom in around the building pad as shown in the figure below.
Figure 9-10 Area to Zoom


Figure 9-12 New Surface Model Dialog Box
4. Type Building Pad in the Description edit field of the New Surface Model dialog box.
5. Enter the rest of the settings on the Surface Model tab as shown in the figure above.
6. After the settings have been entered, click on OK.
The settings you entered are committed and the New Surface Model dialog box closes.
7. Click on Close.
8. If you are using MicroStation as the CAD platform, place a fence around the data as shown
in the figure below. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad as the CAD platform, skip this step.
Figure 9-13 Fenced Data

The Triangulate Surface Model dialog box (below) displays.

10. Select the Building Pad model from the Surface Model drop list.
11. Choose the Select option from the Boundary drop list.
This option allows you to select a previously drawn boundary.
12. Since you do not have void regions in your surface model, make sure (None) is selected
from the Void Regions drop list.
13. Make sure the Display Model, Use External Point File(s), Display Selected Objects Details,
process.
15. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Window the data in the CAD graphic as was shown in Figure 9-13
(above).
You are prompted to select the boundary for the surface model.
16. Select the catch line of the building pad.
The program triangulates the data and creates the surface model.
17. Click on Close.

Calculate Volumes
You are now ready to calculate the volumes between the two surface models. Site Design gives you
two methods to calculate the volume. One is the Prismoidal method and the other is the Slice method.
The Prismoidal method calculates an exact volume between surfaces using prisms. You use the
Prismoidal method to calculate the volume between the building pad and the original ground.
1. In Site Design, select Volumes " Calculate Prismoidal.
The Calculate Prismoidal Volumes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-15 Calculate Prismoidal Volumes Dialog Box
2. Select Original Ground from the Original Surface Model drop list.
3. Make sure the Use Constant Elevation option is toggled off.
4. Select Building Pad from the Final Surface Model drop list.
5. Make sure the Use Constant Elevation option is toggled off.
6. Make sure the Use Boundary and Use Compaction Factor toggles are off.
The Use Boundary toggle allows you to select a boundary so that you get the volume between the
two models within the boundary. The Use Compaction Factor toggle allows you to specify the
compaction factors for Cut or Fill materials.
7. Toggle on the Place Results in CAD Graphic option and click on Apply.
After the calculations are made, the Prismoidal Volume Results dialog box (below) displays. The
results that you receive should resemble those shown.
Figure 9-16 Prismoidal Volume Results Dialog Box
8. Select a point in the CAD graphic to place the volume text.

Your text should resemble that shown the figure below.

Figure 9-17 Prismoidal Volume Results
9. After you have reviewed the Cut and Fill volumes, click on Close.
The Prismoidal Volume Results dialog box closes.
Notice that the Cut and Fill quantities are not equal (the volumes are not balanced satisfactorily).
10. Click on Close.
The Calculate Prismoidal Volumes dialog box closes.

Balance Volumes
In an effort to optimize the volume between your Building Pad model and the Original Ground model,
balance the earthwork using the Balance Volumes command in Site Design. This command allows you
to balance the earthwork between two surface models or to specify excess or shortage of material.
Since the Balance Volumes command provides areas for slope projections, you create the building pad
minus the slope projections and then run the command. To balance the earthwork quantities, the
Balance Volumes command runs through several iterations of slope projections, surface model
creations, and volume calculations. The following steps outline how to balance the earthwork between
your Building Pad and the Original Ground surface model.
1. Create a surface model of the Building Pad minus the slope projections and catch lines. The
CAD layers/levels shown in the table below need to be made not visible. Make the
appropriate changes as indicated below.
Layer/Level Actions
PS-SLP-LIN Freeze 33 Off
PS-FEA-LIN Freeze 34 Off
PS-CAT-LIN Freeze 35 Off
2. In Surface Modeling, select the Prepare " Manage Surface Models.

3. Click on the New Surface Model icon to add a new model for your Building Pad without
slopes.
4. Type Building Pad Without Slopes in the Description edit field of the New Surface Model
dialog box.
5. Type 50.0 in the Minimum Valid Elevation edit field.
6. Leave the rest of the values as they are. Click on OK to save the settings.

Now add a surface model definition for the balanced model condition.
The New Surface Model dialog box (above) displays.
8. Type Balanced Model in the Description edit field.
9. Type 50.0 in the Minimum Valid Elevation edit field.
10. Leave the rest of the values as they are. Click on OK to save the settings and dismiss the
New Surface Model dialog box.
11. Click on Close.
12. If you are using MicroStation as the CAD platform, place a fence around the building pad as
shown in Figure 9-13 on page 161. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad as the CAD platform,
skip this step.
13. In Surface Modeling, select Construct " Unmask All Objects.
A summary of the masked objects in the CAD graphic is displayed in the Unmask All Objects dialog
box. During the Project Slopes command, the original Building Pad was masked as Excluded and a
copy of the original feature was created. Surface Modeling ignores objects masked as Excluded if
they are selected as part of the triangulation process. Since you wish to triangulate the original
building pad object, you need to unmask it (or mask it as Included). See the Surface Modeling on-
line documentation or on-line help for more details.
14. Click on Apply in the Unmask All Objects dialog box.
15. Click on Close.
The Unmask All Objects dialog box closes.

The Triangulate Surface Model dialog box displays.
17. Select Building Pad Without Slopes from the Surface Model drop list.
18. Make sure the Boundary and Void Regions drop lists are both set to (None).
19. Make sure the Display Model, Use External Point File(s), Display Selected Objects Details
20. MicroStation users place a fence around the building pad.
process.
22. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Select the Building Pad.
At this time, the program triangulates the data and creates the surface model.
23. Click on Close.
24. In Site Design, select Volumes " Balance.
The Balance Volumes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-21 Balance Volumes Dialog Box
25. Select Original Ground from the Original Surface Model drop list.
26. Select Building Pad from the Final Surface Model drop list.
27. Select Balanced Model from the Balanced Surface Model drop list.
28. Toggle on the Upward option.
This toggle allows you to specify an upward displacement limit through which the Final Surface
Model can move.
29. Type 4 in the Upward edit field.
30. Toggle the Downward option on.
This allows you to specify a downward displacement limit through which the Final Surface Model
can move.
31. Type 4 in the Downward edit field.
32. In the Balanced Surface Model group, select Excess from the Material drop list.
This allows you to indicate that you would like to have more Cut material than Fill material for the
“balanced” condition.
33. Type 1 in the Ideal edit field and select cu. m. from the adjacent measurement drop list.
This specifies that you want to have an excess of 1 cu. m (cubic meter) of material left over after
you balance the Building Pad.
34. Type 1 in the Upper edit field and select cu. m from the adjacent measurement drop list.
This specifies that you allow up to 1 cu. m of extra cut (beyond the ideal) as an acceptable
tolerance.
35. Type 1 in the Lower edit field and select cu. m. from the adjacent measurement drop list.
This specifies that you allow up to 1 cu. m of extra fill (beyond the ideal) as an acceptable
tolerance.
36. Click on the Settings button in the Balance Volumes dialog box.
The Balance Volumes Settings dialog box (below) displays.

Figure 9-22 Balance Volumes Settings Dialog Box
37. Type 5 in the Cut Slope edit field and select H/V as the slope unit.
38. Type -5 in the Fill Slope edit field and select H/V as the slope unit.
40. Type 9 in the Radial Interval edit field.
41. Make sure the Keep When Complete toggle is on.
When enabled, this option leaves the projected slope objects in the CAD graphic.

42. Make sure the Change the Elevation of the Final Surface Model toggle is off.
When enabled, this option adjusts the elevation of the Final Surface Model by the displacement
amount needed to get to the balanced condition.
43. Toggle the Calculate Prismoidal Volumes for Balanced Surface option on.
This calculates the volume between the Balanced Surface Model and the Original Surface Model
and allows you to place the text information for the volume into the CAD graphic.
44. Make sure the Number of Iterations toggle is off.
When enabled, this option allows you to establish how many balance iterations are to be run.
45. Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the Balance Volumes Settings dialog box closes.
46. Click on Apply in the Balance Volumes dialog box.
The program starts to balance the volumes between the models you have specified. After the site
has been balanced, the Prismoidal Volume Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-23 Prismoidal Volume Results Dialog Box
The Cut and Fill volumes displayed in the figure above should be similar to those you obtain. Notice
that the Total Cut and Total Fill volumes satisfy the requirements that were set in the Balance
Volumes dialog box.
47. Once you have reviewed the volume totals, click on Close.
The Prismoidal Results dialog box closes.
48. Click on Close.
The Balance Volumes dialog box closes.
Analyze Slopes
Once you have built a surface model, you may wish to analyze the slope conditions present in the
model. To help the analysis process, Site Design allows you to create slope categories that can be
depicted with distinct colors. You are also able to generate a slope range report that indicates the area
of each slope range. This command is very useful in finding areas of extreme slope conditions and
helps point out some potential problem areas.
1. In Site Design, select Slopes " Analyze Slopes.
The Analyze Slopes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-24 Analyze Slopes Dialog Box

3. Make sure the Erase Existing Slope Analysis Objects For This Surface and Select User-
Defined Boundary options are toggled off.
When enabled, the Erase Existing Slope Analysis Objects For This Surface option erases previous
slope analysis objects for this model prior to creating new objects. When enabled, the Select User-
Defined Boundary option allows you to place a boundary object that limits the placement of the
slope analysis objects.

4. Toggle on the Generate Report toggle.
This option allows you to place a report of the slope analysis into the CAD graphic or to a printer.
5. Select % Slope from the Display Slope By drop list.
This option allows you to control how the slope ranges should be displayed.
Create the slope range categories for your site. While it is possible to individually create the slope
ranges, you explore how they can be generated in bulk.
6. Click on the Generate Slope Ranges button.
The Generate Slope Ranges dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-25 Generate Slope Ranges Dialog Box
7. Type 0 in the Minimum Slope edit field and select % Slope from the adjacent drop list.
This is the flattest slope you analyze.

8. Type 25 in the Maximum Slope edit field.
This is the steepest slope you analyze.
9. Make sure the Divide option is enabled and type 5 in the Number of Slopes edit field.
This option divides the specified range into five uniform ranges. The Increment Slope option
generates the slope range by incrementing the slopes by the value in the slope edit field.
10. Leave the layer (AutoCAD/BricsCad) at the default value. If MicroStation is your CAD
package, change the Level edit field to 36.
Now you specify the colors to be used for the slope ranges.
11. Toggle on the Increment each color number option and type 1 in the Starting with Color edit
field.
12. Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the Generate Slope Ranges dialog box closes.
13. Make sure the Slope Arrows toggle is off.
14. Click on Apply to initiate the Analyze Slopes command.
The slope analysis triangles are placed into the CAD graphic. The Analyze Slopes Report dialog
box (below) displays.
Figure 9-26 Analyze Slopes Report Dialog Box
15. After you have reviewed the report, make sure the Send Report to CAD Graphics option is
toggled off.
16. Click on OK.
The Analyze Slopes Report dialog box closes.
17. Click on Close.
The Analyze Slopes dialog box closes.
18. Zoom to the extents of the CAD graphic.
Extents.
B. MicroStation: Run the Fit Active Design command.
At this point, the slope analysis objects are in the CAD graphic.
19. To render the site:
A. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Use the SHADE command.
B. MicroStation: Use the Render-Smooth command.
The figure below shows the site rendered. In some cases, the entire site would not be analyzed for
the slopes, but rather just a small section of the site. In those cases, the Select User-Defined
Boundary would be used.

Figure 9-27 Rendered Site
20. In Site Design, select " Slope Analyze Slopes.

21. Toggle on Erase Existing Slope Analysis Objects For This Surface.
22. Toggle on Select User-Defined Boundary.
23. Click on Apply.
This now erases the existing slope analysis objects in the drawing. Once the objects are erased,
the command prompts you to select boundary.
24. Press Enter and close the dialog box.
This command was run again only to show a quick way of deleting the slope analysis objects from
the drawing. Since the slope analysis objects are not needed for the rest of the tutorial, erasing
them keeps the drawing at a manageable size.
Flow Lines
Now that you have analyzed the slope conditions for the entire model, you determine where water
would drain to when “dropped” on to the site. The command you are about to review is helpful for
determining the placement location of required drainage structures.
1. In Site Design, select Slopes " Make Flowlines.

The Make Flowlines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 9-28 Make Flowlines Dialog Box

3. Make sure the Erase Existing Flowlines for this Surface option is toggled off.
When enabled, the Erase Existing Flowlines for this Surface option erases previous flowline objects
prior to creating new objects.
4. Toggle on the Annotate Flowline Distance option.
This annotates the length of the flowline as it is being created in the CAD graphic.
5. Type 1 in the Minimum Slope to Analyze Depth edit field.
This value specifies the minimum slope that you want to see analyzed.
7. Enter the settings specific to your CAD program found in the following table.
Flow Line Settings
Layer FLOWLINE Level 37
Color BYLAYER Color 2
8. After all of the CAD parameters have been entered, click on OK.
9. Click on Apply in the Make Flowlines dialog box.
You are prompted to select a point in the CAD graphic for the source point of the flowline.
10. Click somewhere in the site.
The flowline is drawn.
11. If you want to draw more flowlines, click on Apply on the Make Flowlines dialog box or click
in the CAD graphic again.
12. When you are finished drawing flowlines, click on Close.
The Make Flowlines dialog box closes.
13. Close the Site Design menu bar.
This concludes Lesson 9 – Site Design. Additional information on those commands not covered by this
tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line Help.
Summary
! Draw a building pad.
! Project slopes from the building pad.
! Make a surface model of the slope projections.
! Calculate the volume between the building pad and original ground.
! Balance the cut and fill volume for the pad.
! Analyze the slopes of the site.
! Check where the water drains on the site.

LESSON 10 –
ROADCALC RURAL LESSON
ROAD
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Reviewing Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road 175

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Add a Sub-project.
! Create an alignment.
! Create cross-sections.
! Create a profile.
! Create a typical section.
! Specify slopes to use with certain conditions.
! Run the design.
! Look at the volume reports created.
! Create cross-section plots.
! Create plan and profile plots.
Overview
In this lesson, you explore the steps needed to create a roadway using the RoadCalc™ product. The
roadway that you create is a section of Highway 169, a two-lane rural road. This road is north of the
subdivision that you have been working with in this tutorial and cover the basics of RoadCalc™. You
start by creating a new RoadCalc™ Sub-project for the project. After this is complete, you enter the
point of intersection (PI) locations for the horizontal alignment. You use the surface model created in
Lesson 8 to extract your original ground cross-sections. Once you have the cross-sections extracted,
you are able to view your original ground profile based on the cross-sections. You enter a design profile
and define typical section data for the Sub-project. After the typical section is drawn, you specify the
locations to use the typical section and define constraints for it. The volumes are looked at after you
process the design. Finally, cross-section plots and plan and profile plots are generated. More
advanced RoadCalc™ concepts are covered in Lesson 11 – RoadCalc Urban Road on page 233 and
Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation Work on page 279.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after having finished Lesson 9, skip this section and proceed to the next
section entitled Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project on page 177.

Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project
When working with RoadCalc™, you first must set up a RoadCalc™ Sub-project, as you can have
numerous roadways in a given project. For example, you may have a mainline highway plus numerous
side roads and ramps that tie into the mainline. Follow the steps below to add a new Sub-project.
1. In Eagle Point, select File " New.
The New dialog box (below) displays.
In this dialog box you are able to select the type of item you want to create.
2. Since you wish to define a RoadCalc™ Sub-project, select RoadCalc Sub-project from the
list box.
3. Click on Next.
The RoadCalc Sub-project dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 10 – RoadCalc
Rural Road
Figure 10-2 RoadCalc Sub-project Dialog Box
In this dialog box, you are able supply a number of parameters that help distinguish this roadway
project from others that may already exist for this project. The first such parameter is the
RoadCalc™ Sub-project Number. The Sub-project Number is a three-digit value that RoadCalc™
uses when naming its data files. Values can range from 001 through 999. If you forget to supply
leading zeroes for Sub-project Numbers less than 100, RoadCalc™ places them for you.
4. Type 001 in the Sub Project Number edit field and press the Tab key.
The next item that you must supply is a description of the roadway project. The description can be
generally anything you want, however, most people use the road name, job or billing number.

5. Type Rural Road in the Description edit field and press the Tab key.
The final piece of information that you must supply is a named set of prototype settings. The
prototype settings allow you to quickly apply items like colors, layer/level conventions, sheet sizes,
and annotation styles to your roadway project (hereafter referred to as the Sub-project).
6. Select RoadCalc Metric Defaults from the Sub Project Prototype drop list.
7. Click on Next.
The New Sub-Project dialog box (below) displays. This dialog box allows you to assign the name of
a CAD graphic that shall be used to display (at a minimum) the horizontal alignment geometry.
Figure 10-3 New Sub-project Dialog Box
8. Make sure the Use Project Drawing radio button is turned on and select Eagle Point Tutorial
from the project list box.
9. Click on Finish to complete the definition of this Sub-project.
The Open dialog box (below) displays again and your newly-defined Sub-project has been added to
the project list box.
10. To launch RoadCalc™, select the Rural Road Sub-project and click on OK.
The RoadCalc menu (below) displays.
Figure 10-5 RoadCalc Menu

Now that you have created a Sub-project for your two-lane road, you can start entering the horizontal
alignment geometry.
Alignments
The horizontal centerline alignment defines the path the road takes when travelling from the start of the
road to the end of the road. To simplify the geometry of the road, horizontal alignments are created as a
two-dimensional object that consists of lines, arcs and/or spiral curves. The elevation component (or
vertical profile) of the roadway is discussed later.
Several methods exist that allow you create the horizontal alignment geometry. You can define PI
points by graphically picking their locations, converting existing graphical objects (lines, arcs, etc.) or
directly entering coordinate locations in a dialog box. For this project, you directly enter the coordinates
into the system. In tutorial Lessons 11 and 12, you explore the steps needed to convert graphical
information into horizontal alignments.
Complete the following steps to enter the alignment data for your roadway.
1. To start off, freeze some layers (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or turn off some levels (MicroStation).
Use the table below for your appropriate CAD platform.
Action Value Action Value
Current Centerline Current 1
Freeze ALL Off ALL
Thaw Points On 50
Zoom Extents Fit Active Design
Once complete, your CAD graphic should look similar to the figure below.
Rural Road
Figure 10-6 Example of CAD Graphic
Entering Alignment PI Data

1. In RoadCalc™, select Alignments " Edit Data.

The Edit Alignment Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-7 Edit Alignment Data Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the PI information for the horizontal alignment(s) that you have defined for
this Sub-project.
2. Make sure the Alignment drop list displayed near the top of the dialog box is set to
Centerline.
While there are a variety of other controls on this dialog box, focus your initial attention on adding
new PI locations.
3. Click on the New PI icon.
The New PI dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-8 New PI Dialog Box
Since you have not yet entered any alignment data, the only method of data entry that is allowed is
the Coordinates method. Once the first PI location is identified, other methods become available to
you. These methods include the ability to specify directions and distances or angles and distances
from the point just identified.
If you want your alignment to start from the coordinate location of an Eagle Point Node, you can
indicate the Node ID directly and the coordinate values are filled in for you.
4. Make sure Coordinates is selected from the Method drop list.
5. Since you are not starting at a Node, press the Tab key to skip the Node ID field.
6. Type 50240.80 in the Northing edit field and press the Tab key.
7. Type 417436.65 in the Easting edit field and press the Tab key.
8. Make sure the Fix toggle is On.
When this option is on, the position of the fixed PI does not change if the location of an adjacent PI
is changed.
9. Click on Apply.
Notice that the PI is added to the Edit Alignment Data dialog box and the New PI dialog box
remains open.

10. Repeat steps 4-9 using the information provided in the table below. Make sure to click on
Apply after you enter each PI.
PI Method Node ID Northing Easting Fix

1 Coordinates 50530.87 417651.28 Yes
2 Coordinates 50307.83 418181.23 Yes
EOP Coordinates 50359.00 418256.26 Yes
11. Click on Close in the New PI dialog box.

The New PI dialog box closes and the Edit Alignment Data dialog box displays.
As you applied information for each new PI into the New PI dialog box (Figure 10-8 on page 180),
the coordinate values were placed into the Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 10-7 on page
180). Additionally, the graphical representation of this data was placed as an alignment in the CAD
graphic. If you made a mistake while typing in your data, the errant PI location can be corrected by
selecting the PI in the Edit Alignment Data dialog box and clicking on the Modify PI icon.
12. Although your alignment is relatively simple at this point, click on the Preview Alignment
Graphic icon in the Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 10-7 on page 180) to look at its
geometry.
The Preview dialog box displays, showing your alignment information as it currently stands. You
may find this command useful should your CAD graphic become cluttered with other data as your
design progresses.
13. Click on Close.
The Preview dialog box closes and the Edit Alignment Data dialog box displays.
Entering Alignment Curve Data

Since you have defined the PI coordinate locations of your centerline, you now define the horizontal
curves for your two-lane road.
1. Click on the Curve Data button to enter the horizontal curve information.
The Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (below) displays.
Rural Road
Figure 10-9 Horizontal Curve Data Dialog Box

Notice that a spreadsheet type of control is provided that allows you to supply any pertinent piece
of information that defines the curve. Furthermore, you are able to view the curve information that
precedes and follows the active PI (the active PI being the middle column of data). To quickly move
from one PI to the next, you can use the left and right arrows in the dialog box.
2. Make sure Curve 1 is the active piece of information.
3. In the PI 1 column, type 366.00 in the R (Radius) edit field and press the Tab key.
The remaining curve values are calculated and displayed. Additionally, the curve information is
updated in the CAD graphic.
For this curve you also supply spiral curve lengths. You use spirals on this PI as they help smooth
the transition from your tangents into your circular curve.
4. In the PI 1 Spiral group, type the values specified in the following table in the Length In and
Length Out edit fields.
PI 1 Spiral Length In Length Out

Length 70.0 70.0
Next, you place curve data for PI 2.

5. Click on the Right Arrow until Curve 2 is displayed in the center column of the curve table.
Notice that the parameters for Curve 1 display in the leftmost column of the curve table.
6. For Curve 2 (the PI 2 column), enter a value of 150.00 for the R (Radius) value in the table
and press the Tab key.
The remaining curve values are calculated and displayed. Additionally, the curve information is
updated into the CAD graphic.
7. In the PI 2 Spiral section, type the values specified in the following table in the Length In and
Length Out edit fields.
PI 2 Spiral Length In Length Out

Length 45.0 0.0

Calculations are made. The Horizontal Curve Data dialog box remains open for the next section,
Entering Alignment Superelevation Data (below).
This completes the horizontal geometry of your centerline alignment.
Entering Alignment Superelevation Data

In this section, you supply superelevation parameters for the curves on this alignment.
1. Click on the Superelevation Data button in the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (Figure 10-9
on page 181).

The Superelevation Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-10 Superelevation Data Dialog Box – Curve 1/PI 1
Notice that tabular controls in the Superelevation Data dialog box (above) are similar to those in the
Horizontal Curve Data dialog box where you can see the superelevation parameters for the current
curve as well as the curves that precede and follow the current curve.
2. Use the left or right arrows as needed so that 1 is displayed in the center column in the
table.
3. Type 6.0 in the MSE (Maximum Superelevation Rate) edit field.
4. Select % Slope from the drop list to the right of the MSE edit field.
You are specifying that you want to have a maximum superelevation rate of 6.0%. The drop list
allows you to choose from a variety of slope measurement options.
5. Make sure the Distance radio button is turned on for the Input Method option.
6. Select 1 - Center from the Type drop list in the Rotation group.
This indicates to RoadCalc™ that the pavement material slopes are to rotate about the centerline
of the roadway when in superelevation zones.
7. Enter the transition distances in and out of the curve for the superelevation as shown in the
Rural Road
following table.
Since you are using spirals in and out of curve 1, you apply all of the superelevation transition on
the spirals and by the time you reach the spiral-to-curve (SC) location full superelevation is
achieved.
Curve 1 Superelevation In Superelevation Out

TR 0 0
X 17.5 17.5
Y 35.0 35.0
SR 52.5 52.5
Another option for entering superelevation is to specify the stations of the superelevation inflection
points. The Station radio button lets you directly enter the station values and the transition
distances are calculated for you.

The superelevation data can also be entered through the use of the Superelevation Calculator. The
calculator allows you to enter information concerning the roadway and calculate what the transition
distances should be. You can then save those calculations to a table or have the values applied to
any curve on the horizontal alignment. You do not do this at this time.
If you want to transition from one superelevation rate on one curve to another superelevation rate
on another curve, you could toggle the Superelevation Transition option on and specify the
transition distance for the desired curve(s). You do not do this at this time. See the RoadCalc™
documentation or on-line help for more information.
When using superelevation, you may want to specify Rollover parameters between the pavement
and shoulder(s) of the roadway. By toggling the Rollover option on, you specify the maximum
rollover grade (difference in percent grades between the pavement and shoulder) that is allowed.
You do not do this at this time. See the RoadCalc™ documentation or on-line help for more
information concerning Rollover.
8. Click on the Right Arrow so that PI 2 is displayed in the center column of the superelevation
table.
Figure 10-11 Superelevation Data Dialog Box–Curve 2/PI 2
9. Type 5.4 in the MSE edit field and select % Slope from the drop list to the right of the MSE
edit field.
10. Make sure the Distance radio button is turned on for the Input Method option.
11. Select 1 - Center from the Rotation Type drop list.
Similar to the superelevation data you just entered for Curve 1, you apply the superelevation
transition to the spiral on Curve 2. However, since you do not have a spiral out of Curve 2, you need
to apply some of the superelevation transition to the outgoing tangent. Additionally, the outgoing
tangent for Curve 2 is relatively short which reduces the design speed for Curve 2. And, since this
tangent section is approaching an intersection with Highway 73, this is acceptable.

12. Enter the transition distances found in the table below.
Curve 2 Superelevation In Superelevation Out

TR 0 8.10
X 12.16 3.28
Y 24.32 6.56
SR 32.84 8.87
13. Click on Close.

The Superelevation Data dialog box closes and the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box displays.
Additional options available on the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box that deserve some discussion are
Horizontal Speed Tables Data and Combining Spirals. These are discussed in more detail below.
Horizontal Speed Tables Data: The Horizontal Speed Tables Data option provides you with the ability
to create horizontal curves (including superelevation rates) based on AASHTO (American Association
of State Highway and Transportation Officials) guidelines. In addition to the variety of speed tables that
ship with RoadCalc™, functionality is also provided that allows you to create your own tables. See the
RoadCalc™ documentation or on-line help for additional information.
Combining Spirals: Combining spirals provides a means to transition from one curve to another via a
spiral. You must have at least two internal PI (in other words the BOP, two PI locations and the EOP at
a minimum) before the option is available to you. Generally speaking, combining spirals are only used
between arcs that curve in the same direction (e.g., curving to the right). The combining spiral length is
applied to the first of the two curves as you travel from the start of the alignment. See the RoadCalc™
documentation or on-line help for more information.
14. Click on Close.
The Horizontal Curve Data dialog box closes and the Edit Alignment Data dialog box displays.
Entering Station Data

Now that you have supplied the horizontal geometry of your centerline alignment, you next examine
how you can adjust the station value that defines the Beginning of Project (BOP).
1. Click on the Station Data button on the Edit Alignment Data dialog box (Figure 10-7 on page
180).
Rural Road
The Station Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-12 Station Data Dialog Box
The Station Data dialog box allows you to specify the BOP Station value and additionally, the
location(s) of any station equations (both gap and overlap equations are permitted) along the

alignment. You can also specify a point along the alignment and specify a station for the point you
have specified so that the BOP Station of the roadway is back-calculated.
2. Make sure the Beginning Station field is set to 0.00.
3. Since this project does not contain any station equations, click on OK.
The BOP Station value is committed and the Station Data dialog box closes.
4. Click on Close.
The Edit Alignment Data dialog box closes.
You have finished entering the horizontal alignment information for your two-lane road.
5. Zoom to the extents of the drawing so you can see the full alignment. For direction, select
the step below that corresponds with the program you use to run RoadCalc™.
A. AutoCAD/BricsCad: At the command line, type Z and press Enter.
Type E and press Enter.
The Zoom Extents command is executed.
B. MicroStation: Click on the Fit Active Design button on the View tool bar.
The figure below shows what the alignment looks like in the CAD window.
Figure 10-13 Example of Alignment
Now that you have created the alignment for your two lane road, you are ready to enter the cross-
section information. In the Cross-Sections section (below), you extract cross-sections from the surface
model created in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics and discuss the options available in the Cross-
sections menu.
Cross-Sections
Now that you have determined the route your roadway project follows, you generate cross-section data
for the existing (or original ground) surface(s). The most common approach used today is to “cut cross-
sections” from a surface model. Additionally, RoadCalc™ provides the ability to import cross-section
data from ASCII files and allows you to enter data by hand. You created an original ground surface
model in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics on page 123 and use the geometry of this surface model
for your cross-sections.

Defining Surfaces
Before you extract the cross-section data, you define (or name) the different types of surfaces (or
materials) that are found throughout the project. RoadCalc™ allows you to separate your materials into
one of three distinct types of surfaces: Original, Design, and Actual. Original surfaces are generally
taken to be the materials that exist in the field prior to the construction of your RoadCalc™ project.
Design surfaces are generally taken to be the materials that you place in the field when building your
project. Actual surfaces are generally used to measure as-built quantities. Use the following steps to
define the original and design surfaces.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-sections " Manage Surfaces.
The Manage Surfaces dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-14 Manage Surfaces Dialog Box
The Original tab, which contains the list box of the original surfaces for your project, is displayed by
default. A default surface called Orig_Surface is displayed in the list box. In steps 2-6, modify this
name and call it Topsoil.
2. Select the Orig_Surface surface in the list box and click on the Modify Surface icon.
The Modify Original Surface dialog box (below) displays.
Rural Road
Figure 10-15 Modify Original Surface
3. Highlight the name of the surface in the Name edit field and type Topsoil.
4. Type 0 in the %Compaction edit field.
5. Select Strip from the Removal Method drop list.
This option specifies that the material is to be stripped from the site regardless if your design
section is a Cut or Fill condition. If you specify the Normal option, the material is removed from the
site only if the design section is in a Cut condition.
6. Click on OK.
The surface is modified and the Modify Original Surface dialog box closes.
Next, you add an additional surface to the Original Surface list box.
7. Click on the New Surface icon.

The New Original Surface dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-16 New Original Surface Dialog Box
8. Type Clay in the Name edit field and press the Tab key.
9. Type 20 in the %Compaction edit field.
This specifies that the Clay material swells 20 percent when it is cut from the site.
10. Select Normal from the Removal Method drop list.
11. Select Parallel from the Type drop list.
The options in the Type drop list define how the sub-surface information is generated if Automatic
Point Generation is enabled. Several options are available and are discussed below.
Existing Pavement: This option allows you to define an original material that actually gets inserted
above the top Original surface. When design sections are applied through this type of surface,
RoadCalc™ isolates the existing pavement volumes so that you can quantify the amount of existing
pavement that is to be removed. This type of surface can be extremely useful in rehabilitation
projects and is discussed in more detail in Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation Work, which
begins on page 279.
Parallel: When used, this option allows the subsurface to be parallel to the surface above it. This is
commonly used for the second subsurface as the top original surface is generally topsoil. Since it is
common to strip a uniform amount of topsoil from a roadway project, creating a parallel subsurface
is an easy way to accomplish this.
Absolute: When used, this option creates a subsurface whose elevations are independent from
the elevations of the surface above it. This type of surface is commonly used to model rock or other
rigid surfaces.
12. Click on OK.
These values are committed and the New Original Surface dialog box closes.
Notice that there are two surfaces on the Original tab of the Manage Surfaces dialog box (Figure
10-14 on page 187). You can now enter the design surfaces for this roadway project.
13. Click on the Design tab of the Manage Surfaces dialog box.

The New Design Surface dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-18 New Design Surface Dialog Box
15. Type BitWear in the Name edit field.

This is the description for the topmost material on your typical section.
16. Select Normal from the Type drop list.
The variety of design surface types are discussed below.
Normal: This type comprises the vast majority of design surfaces regardless of the associated
name. It is used to describe the common (normal) situation in which the design surface is applied
(especially when contrasted with the Undercut and Overbreak settings).
Undercut: While not commonly used, one of the design surfaces can be flagged as an undercut
surface. Essentially, an Undercut surface provides a means where additional original ground
material can be cut. As an example, suppose your road is being built on material that is generally
not suitable to support a road. When your design section is in a cut condition, additional material
below the subgrade surface can be extracted and replaced with a more suitable (borrow) material
that better supports the roadway.
Overbreak: While not commonly used, a surface designated as overbreak separates actual
material volumes into volumes inside the overbreak tolerance and volumes outside the overbreak
tolerance. For example, if you do not pay the contractor for any cutting that occurs outside the
overbreak tolerance, requesting only the volumes inside the overbreak tolerance gives you the pay
quantity. For more information on actual surfaces and the overbreak surface, refer to the
RoadCalc™ on-line documentation or on-line help.
17. Click on Apply to add the BitWear surface to the Design Surface list box.
18. Type Binder in the Name edit field.
20. Click on Apply.
21. Type Shoulder in the Name edit field.
Rural Road
23. Click on Apply.
24. Type AggBase in the Name edit field.
26. Click on Apply.
27. Type Subgrade in the Name edit field.
This is the description for the lowest material on your typical section.
This is the surface that ties into the top original surface when your typical sections and slope
conditions are applied to the project.
29. Click on OK.
This data is saved and the New Design Surface dialog box closes.
30. Click on the CAD Settings button

31. Change the Description field to Topsoil.
Notice what the color it is set to. Keep the default.
32. Change the colors of the other surfaces by entering in the data from the table below. When
all the colors have been entered, click on OK.
AutoCAD/BricsCad
Surface Color
Clay 2
Bitwear 171
Binder 5
Shoulder 42
AggBase 6
Subgrade 3
MicroStation
Surface Color
Clay 6
Bitwear 4
Binder 1
Shoulder 86
AggBase 5
Subgrade 2
33. Click on Close.

The Manage Surfaces dialog box closes.
You have now defined the original and design surfaces that are to be used for your project. Your next
goal is to generate original ground Cross-section information.
Cross-Sections from Surface Models

Now that you have defined the original ground surface(s), you can begin to place cross-section data
into RoadCalc™ so that the design of your project can continue. As was mentioned earlier, the most
common approach that is used to generate cross-section data is to extract information from a surface
model. Earlier in this tutorial, you entered the geometry for the horizontal centerline alignment. In
Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics on page 123, a surface model from point and breakline data was
built. In this section, the goal is to utilize this data for your top Original Surface as it represents existing
field conditions. The following steps outline how to extract cross-section data from a surface model.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Extract Cross-Sections.

The Build Station List dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-19 Build Station Dialog Box
The Begin and End stations automatically are determined from the centerline alignment and
displayed as default values. The PIC button allows you to graphically locate the portion of the
alignment where cross-section data should be extracted. You do not do this at this time.
2. Make sure only the Stationing Interval and Curve Stations toggles are on in the Station
Options group.
The options are described below.
Stationing Interval: This is the interval along the tangent portion(s) of the centerline alignment
where cross-section data is extracted.
Curve Stationing Interval: This is the interval along the curved portion(s) of the centerline
alignment where cross-section data is extracted.
Curve Stations: When enabled, this option extracts cross-sections at the inflection points of the
curves on the centerline alignment.
Equation Stations: When enabled, this option extracts cross-sections at the location(s) of station
equation.
Skew Angle: This option allows you to indicate that the cross-sections should be skewed to the
direction of the centerline alignment.
3. Type 20 in the Stationing Interval edit field.
Rural Road
4. In the Stations in Range group, make sure the Mark Stations for Extraction toggle is on and
the Delete Existing Stations toggle is off.
A description of each option is provided below:
Mark Stations for Extraction: When enabled, this option flags (or marks) each cross-section
station being generated as a section that needs to have cross-section data extracted from the
surface model. When building a station list for the first time, this option is typically enabled.
Delete Existing Stations: When enabled, this option removes any existing cross-section station
locations prior to building the new locations. If your list of cross-section stations needs to be rebuilt
due to a significant alignment change, it is common to delete the existing cross-section locations
and replace them with an updated set.
5. Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the Build Station List dialog box closes.

The Extract Cross-Sections dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-20 Extract Cross-Sections Dialog Box
The top portion of the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box not only allows you to indicate which
surface(s) data should be generated for, it also allows you to “map” (or associate) a surface model
to a defined RoadCalc™ surface.
6. Toggle on the Extract option for the Topsoil surface.
This is the only surface for which you extract cross-sections.
7. Select the Original Ground surface model from the Surface Model drop list.
The icon to the immediate right of the surface model drop list allows you to select a surface model
from a different project other than the one in which you are currently working.
The Corridor Edge section of the dialog box allows you to limit the amount of data that is generated
for your cross-sections.
8. Type -30 in the Left edit field and type 30 in the Right edit field in the Corridor Edge Group.
9. Make sure the User-Defined Corridor toggle is off.
These values instruct RoadCalc™ that it can use data up to 30 meters left or right of the centerline
alignment.
Notice the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box now displays the cross-section stations to be
extracted.
The Cross-Section Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-21 Cross-Section Settings Dialog Box

The Cross-Section Settings dialog box allows you to specify settings for how cross-section
information should be presented along with the ability to specify “tolerances” for the number of
cross-section points that are extracted. Horizontal and Vertical tolerances of 0 (zero) indicate that
all cross-section shots are to be extracted from the surface model. Make sure these values are set.
11. Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the Cross-Section Settings dialog box closes.
12. Click on OK in the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box to extract the cross-sections for the
Sub-project.
See the figure below for an example of what the CAD graphic should look like. Notice that the
locations of the extracted cross-sections are displayed for you.
Cross-Section Data
Now that you have extracted the cross-section data, you can look at the cross-section geometry that
has been created. You also generate the data for the Clay subsurface (which is based on the Topsoil
surface you just extracted).
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Edit Cross-Section Data.
The Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (below) displays.
Rural Road
Figure 10-23 Edit Cross-Section Data Dialog Box

2. Select several cross-sections from the Station list box.
Notice that as different stations are selected, the image to the right of the station list box updates
automatically for you. Next, you look at a larger picture of the current cross-section.
3. Click on the Query Cross-Section icon.
The Query Cross-Section dialog box (below) displays. For the sake of clarity, the cross-section
graphics have been resized and repositioned for optimal viewing capability.
Figure 10-24 Query Cross-Section Dialog Box
4. Take a moment to explore the controls on this dialog box.

If you wish to change the exaggeration amount by altering the horizontal or vertical viewing scale,
you can press the Scale View button located near the bottom center of the dialog box. Other
controls allow you to examine the cross-section stations in sequence or to jump to a specific cross-
section station. See the RoadCalc™ on-line documentation or on-line help for additional
information.
5. Click on Close.
The Query Cross-Section dialog box closes and the Edit Cross-Section dialog box displays again.
6. Select Clay from the Surface drop list in the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box.
Notice that all of the data in the Shots at Station list box disappears. This because all of the shots
that had been listed were for the Topsoil surface.
Next, you add shots to the Clay subsurface at the first cross-section station you have.
7. Select the first station in the Station list box.
8. Click on the New Shot icon located in the Shots at Station section of the Edit Cross-Section
Data dialog box (Figure 10-23 on page 193).

The New Shot dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-25 New Shot Dialog Box
When the New Shot dialog box displays, you are able to add a shot to the clay surface you have
selected. Because you enabled the Point Generation feature for this surface when you added it to
the list of the original surfaces, once you add one shot, the remaining shots for this cross-section
station are created for you.
9. Select Offset/Depth from the Method drop list.
The depth is measured from your topmost original surface, in this case topsoil.
10. Select 0 Uncontrolled from the PT (Point) Code drop list.
A Point Code is an identifying value that allows you to distinguish special points of interest along
the cross-section data. Although point codes are not generally used for original surfaces they are
frequently used when defining typical sections. You review point codes in more detail later in this
tutorial.
11. Type 0 in the Offset edit field.
This is the distance from the centerline location where the cross-section shot was measured.
12. Type 0.1 in the Depth edit field.
This is the depth from the topmost surface at the Offset location just specified.
13. Toggle on the Control option.
This option tells RoadCalc™ to flag this specific shot as a controlling piece of data. Data shots that
lie between two control shots on a given cross-section are assigned linearly interpolated values. Be
aware that Control flags for cross-section stations and cross-section shots perform roughly the
same thing but on different “levels” (stations versus shots) of data.
Rural Road
14. Click on Apply to add the shot to the surface.
15. Click on Close.
The New Shot dialog box closes.
All of the shots are added to the Clay surface for this station in your cross-section list box.
16. Select the last station in the Station list box.
17. Click on the New Shot icon.
18. Select a Point Code of 0 Uncontrolled.
19. Type 0 for the Offset.
20. Type 0.2 for the Depth.
21. Toggle on the Control option.
22. Click on Apply to add the shot to the surface.

23. Click on Close.
The New Shot dialog box closes.
Again, notice the uniformly deep shots that have been entered for the Clay surface.
24. Click on Close.
The Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box closes.
Generating Subsurfaces
You have now defined data for the clay surface for the first and last cross-section stations in your
project. To quickly generate data for the intermediate stations, you explore the capability of the
Generate Subsurfaces command.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Generate Subsurfaces.
The Generate Subsurfaces dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-26 Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box
Since you have explicit data for the clay surface at the first and last cross-section stations, you
need to flag these stations as control stations.
2. Toggle on the Control option for the first station in your cross-section list and for the last
station in your cross-section list.
# The control could also have been set in the Edit Cross Section dialog box when we were adding the
subsurface points.
# Failure to set the Control toggle to on as directed in step 2 results in a loss of data for the clay surface
(or any original ground subsurfaces) if the Generate Subsurfaces command is continued past this point.
3. Toggle on the Normal option.

This option instructs RoadCalc™ to generate original ground subsurfaces that follow the normal
surface boundary rules for parallel and absolute surfaces.
4. Toggle off the Use Existing Pavement option.
When this option is enabled, RoadCalc™ is able to insert existing pavement geometry into your
cross-sections so that pavement removal quantities can be calculated. This feature is illustrated in
Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation Work, which begins on page 279.
5. Click on OK in the Generate Subsurfaces dialog box.
The Generate Subsurfaces dialog box closes.
You are presented with an Alert box that prompts you to verify whether you would like to continue
with the subsurface generation process. As a reminder, the text in the Alert box indicates that any
existing subsurface data at non-control stations is deleted.

6. Since you have marked the starting and ending stations as Control stations, click on Yes.
The clay subsurface is generated for each cross-section station between the beginning and ending
stations of your project.
Now that you have generated the clay subsurface, you next look at the cross-sections for the
intermediate stations.
The Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 10-23 on page 193) displays.
8. Select Clay from the Surfaces drop list.
9. Examine the data for stations between the beginning and ending stations.
As you move from the beginning station to the ending station, the depth to the Clay surface
transitions from 0.1 meters to 0.2 meters in depth.
10. Click on Close.
You have defined the Clay surface and generated data for this surface through the entire length of this
project. You are now ready to define the vertical control (or profile) information for your project.
Profiles
The centerline profile defines the vertical path the road takes when travelling from the start of the road
to the end of the road. To simplify the geometry of the road, vertical profiles are created as a two-
dimensional object that consists of lines and/or vertical parabolic curves.
Several methods exist that allow you to create the vertical profile geometry. You can define vertical
points of intersection (VPI) by graphically picking their locations, converting existing graphical objects
(lines, vertical curves, etc.), or directly entering station and elevation locations in a dialog box. For this
project, you directly enter the stations and elevations into the system. You then enter the vertical curves
for the profile and check their rated design speed based on an AASHTO speed table.
Entering Profile VPI Data
Rural Road
Since you have existing ground cross-section data, the original ground profile is generated for you. The
geometry of the original ground profile is taken to be the elevation of the topmost original surface at a
horizontal centerline offset of 0 (zero). Additionally, this profile is automatically displayed for you. The
following steps describe how to enter your design centerline profile.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Profiles " Edit Data.

The Edit Profile Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-27 Edit Profile Data Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to enter information for the profile. By default, a profile definition for the
centerline of your project has been added for you.
2. Make sure Centerline is selected from the Profile drop list (it should be the only option
available).
You add VPI information by entering the station and elevation data for each VPI.
3. Click on the New VPI icon.
The New VPI dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-28 New VPI Dialog Box
When entering VPI data by hand, the first piece of information must supplied as a known Station
and Elevation. After this location has been identified, an additional entry method becomes available
that allows you to supply grade and distance information.
4. Type 0.00 in the Station edit field and press the Tab key.
5. Type 72.33 in the Elevation edit field.
6. Make sure the Fixed toggle is on.
Similar to the Fix option in Alignments, when this option is on, the position of the fixed VPI does not
change if the location of an adjacent VPI is changed.
7. Make sure the Parallel Original Ground toggle is off.
When on, this option allows you create a design profile that parallels the original ground profile.
This feature is commonly used when designing pavement overlay projects and is illustrated in
Lesson 12.
8. Click on Apply to add the VPI to the list box.

9. Enter the values shown in the table below. Click on Apply after the information for each VPI
is added.
VPI Station Elevation Fix Parallel Original Ground

1 509.640 82.53 Yes No
EOP 923.984 87.50 Yes No
10. Click on Close.

The New VPI dialog box closes.
11. To see a quick graphical representation of your data to this point, click on the Preview
Profile Graphic icon.
The Preview Objects dialog box (below) is identical to the Preview Alignment Graphic dialog box
you explored earlier.
12. Click on Close.
The Preview Objects dialog box closes and the Edit Profile Data dialog box displays again.
Rural Road
Entering Profile Curve Data
In this section, you define the vertical curve information for the profile.
1. Select VPI 1 and click on the Curve Data button in the Edit Profile Data dialog box.

The Vertical Curve Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-30 Vertical Curve Data Dialog Box
This dialog box is similar to the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box (Figure 10-9 on page 181) that
you looked at earlier. Various options exist that allow you to specify your vertical curve geometry. If
desired, you can also create vertical curves by extracting data from speed tables.
2. Type 500.00 in the L (curve length) edit field of VPI 1 and press the Tab key.
The remaining curve parameters are calculated and displayed.
Notice that the rated design speed for this vertical curve is updated in the upper right-hand corner
of the dialog box. This speed is determined from the active Vertical Curve Speed Table.
3. Click on Close.
The Profile Curve Data dialog box closes.
Spot Checking the Profile Data

From time to time, it may be necessary to determine the elevation of your profile at a selected location
on the profile. To illustrate this capability, you determine the elevation at a specific station on the profile
in the next set of steps.
1. Click on the Spot Elevations button in the Edit Profile Data dialog box (Figure 10-27 on page
198).
The Spot Elevations dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-31 Spot Elevations Dialog Box
2. Make sure the Centerline profile is selected from the Profile drop list (it should be the only
entry).
3. Enter a value of 745.50 in the Station edit field.

4. Click on the Calculate button.
The elevation of the requested station entered is reported to you in the Spot Elevations dialog box.
If you click on the Annotate button, the station and elevation is annotated into the CAD graphic that
contains the profile geometry.
5. Click on Close.
The Spot Elevations dialog box closes.
6. Click on Close.
The Edit Profile Data dialog box closes.
At this point, RoadCalc™ notifies you that the profile data has changed and prompts you to indicate
whether you want to place the information in your CAD graphic.
7. Click on Yes.
The information is placed in the CAD graphic.
Another Alert dialog box may display, indicating that the current CAD graphic (your Plan view) has
changed.
8. If this alert displays, click on Yes to save the changes.
The profile information is placed into the CAD graphic and the CAD graphic is re-displayed.
Now that you have placed the vertical profile information into RoadCalc™, continue with the next phase
of your project’s design by developing typical section information.
Typical Sections
Typical sections can be thought of as the unique pavement combinations that are used to construct
your project. As an example for your rural road project, you might have one typical section that contains
a paved shoulder and another typical section that contains a curb and gutter.
Typical section geometry generally consists of the design surfaces/materials that were defined earlier.
A variety of slope conditions can be established that enables the typical section to be connected to the
original ground surface. By specifying combinations of typical sections and slope conditions, you are
able to model design scenarios that range from simple to complex. In this section, you create a two-
lane typical section with shoulder.
Rural Road
Managing Typical Sections
In this lesson, you first add a new typical section to the Typical Section Manager dialog box.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Typical Sections " Manage Typical Sections.

The Manage Typical Sections dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-32 Manage Typical Sections Dialog Box
This dialog box contains a list box of typical sections that may be used for this project. A preview
image of each typical section is displayed after it has been saved. An extended description of the
typical section is also displayed to help you distinguish one typical section from the next.
2. Click on the New Typical Section icon to define the new typical section.
The New Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-33 New Typical Section Dialog Box
3. Type 2-lane Rural Road in the Name edit field.

This is the name you assign to your typical section.
4. Type Typical section — 3.6 meter driving lane, for tutorial use only in the
Description edit field.
Since this field is optional, you can elect not to place information into this field if you so choose.
However, as your list of typical sections grows, the extended descriptions help you and others (if
working in a shared office environment).
5. Click on OK to save this typical section name.
The New Typical Section dialog box closes and the Manage Typical dialog box displays again.
Notice that the typical section description has been added to the Manage Typical Sections dialog
box.
6. Click on Close.
The Manage Typical Sections dialog box closes.

Constructing the Typical Section
You are ready to create your typical section.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Typical Sections " Construct Typical Section.
The Construct Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-34 Construct Typical Section Dialog Box
2. Make sure 2-lane Rural Road is selected from the Typical Section drop list in the Construct
Typical Section dialog box.
3. Click on the View Typical Section Graphics icon to display the typical section graphic in the
CAD window.
When the “empty” typical section graphic displays, notice two intersecting lines in the graphic.
These lines intersect at a coordinate of 0,0. The vertical line represents a centerline offset of zero
(generally the centerline of your project), and the horizontal line represents the elevation control
point for the vertical profile. While creating typical sections, dimensions are indicated using the 0,0
coordinate as a reference point. The figure below shows what you eventually create (without the
two reference lines).
Figure 10-35 Example
4. In the Construct Typical Section dialog box, make sure the Cut and Fill Detail icon is
selected.
This allows you to develop pavement geometry (which is generally the same for both Cut and Fill
conditions) at the same time.
5. Click on the Precision Input icon.
Rural Road
The Start Point edit field becomes enabled, as does the “option string” located directly above the
edit field. To switch “entry modes” (the two pieces of information needed to define a line), indicate
the desired entry mode by indicating the appropriate capitalized letters. Be aware that the options
can be supplied as upper, lower, or mixed case. The various entry modes are as follows:

Absxy Absolute X and Y (key-in A) - Allows you to draw a line to or at a specified X, Y
coordinate.
dXdY Delta X and Delta Y (key-in XY) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the X and Y direction from the current coordinate location.
dXS Delta X and Percent Slope (key-in XS) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as a percent) from the current
coordinate location.
dXH Delta X and Horizontal to Vertical Slope (key-in XH) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as the
horizontal displacement relative to one unit of vertical displacement) from the current
dXV Delta X and Vertical to Horizontal Slope (key-in XV) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as the vertical
displacement relative to one unit of horizontal displacement) from the current coordinate
location.
dYS Delta Y and Percent Slope (key-in YS) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as a percent) from the current
dYH Delta Y and Horizontal to Vertical Slope (key-in YH) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as the
dYV Delta Y and Vertical to Horizontal Slope (key-in YV) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as the vertical
location.
Reset pen Reset the pen (key-in R) - Allows you to halt the line creation at the current coordinate
location and resume it from a new location.
Undo Undo (key-in U) - Allows you to “backup” through the entries you have made to allow for
corrections to improperly entered data.
eXit Exit (key-in X) - Allows you to terminate the Precision Input process.
By selecting the input combination that describes the various pieces of your typical section
geometry, it becomes very easy to quickly develop even the most complicated typical sections.
BitWear Surface
1. Type XS in the Start Point edit field and press Enter.
This specifies that you are drawing your first line based on a width displacement at a given slope
(each time the Precision Input command is initialized, an implied starting location of 0,0 is assumed
unless otherwise specified).
Notice the label of the Start Point edit field has changed to DX (the first part of your desired entry).
As each piece of information is placed, RoadCalc™ indicates to you the piece of information it is
expecting next.
2. Type 3.6 in the DX edit field and press Enter.
This is the desired width of a driving lane in meters.
Again, the label of the edit field has changed to keep pace with the next piece of needed
information.

3. Type -2 in the % Slope edit field and press Enter.
Note that negative slope values indicate “out and down from the current point.”
In order to assign special meaning to the coordinate location you just defined, you assign a Point
code (PT code). For your 2-lane Rural Road typical section, the point you just defined serves as the
Superelevation Limit (identified by a PT code of 2). Until you have become familiar with
RoadCalc's™ PT Code Library, it is suggested that you select the desired PT code by pressing the
PT Code Library button.
4. In an effort to simplify the discussion of typical section creation, type 2 in the PT Code edit
field and press Enter.
The top of the BitWear material has been drawn. In the next section, you continue by drawing the
top of the Shoulder material.
Shoulder Surface
Notice the default placement method reverts to XS.
1. To accept this method, press Enter.
This is the desired width of the shoulder in meters.
This defines your shoulder to be 2.0 meters wide at a -4% cross-slope.
The default value for a shoulder PT Code is 10.
4. Type 10 in the PT Code edit field and press Enter.
In the next section, you start drawing the Binder surface. To make your task simpler, you reset the
location of your drawing pen next.
5. Type R in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.
Binder Surface
1. Type A in the Start Point edit field and press Enter.
2. Type 0 in the X edit field and press Enter.
This signifies that you begin at the centerline of the typical section.
Rural Road
3. Type -0.07 in the Y edit field and press Enter.
This signifies that the Binder surface is 0.07 meters below the design profile grade.
5. Type XS in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.
The Binder surface is to be set parallel to the BitWear surface. Therefore, the values you enter are
identical to those supplied for the BitWear surface.
To tie back into the BitWear surface, you need to create a line that extends 0.07 meters in the Y
direction from your current location. You use the capability of Precision Input to perform this task.
However, another common approach is to use the CAD line command and snap to the endpoint of
the desired graphical feature.
9. Type XY in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.

10. Type 0 in the DX edit field and press Enter.
11. Type 0.07 in the DY edit field and press Enter.
In the next section, you start drawing the AggBase surface. To make your task simpler, reset the
location of your drawing pen.
13. Type R in the Next Point edit field.
AggBase Surface
This signifies that the AggBase surface is 0.14 meters below the design profile grade.
The values you enter are identical to those supplied for the Binder surface, so the Aggbase surface
is set parallel to it.
To tie back into the Binder surface, you need to create a line that extends 0.07 meters in the Y
direction from your current location.
Next you start drawing the Subgrade surface. To make your task simpler, reset the location of your
drawing pen.

Subgrade Surface
This signifies that the subgrade surface is 0.45 meters below the design profile grade.
The subgrade surface is made parallel to the AggBase surface. Therefore, the slope value you
enter is identical to that supplied for the AggBase surface.
This places you at the edge of the pavement. If your Subgrade surface was one grade to the
shoulder offset, you would input 5.6 (3.6 meter road width plus 2.0 meter shoulder width) and then
tie back up to the outside of the shoulder.
You are now at the edge of pavement with the Subgrade surface. You next continue out to the
shoulder offset parallel to the shoulder.
9. Press Enter to accept the continued entry of the XS method.
The subgrade surface is made parallel to the AggBase surface. Therefore, the slope value you
Rural Road
enter is identical to that supplied for the AggBase surface.
This places you at the edge of the pavement. If your Subgrade surface was one grade to the
shoulder offset, you would input 4.0 (2.0 meter road width plus 2.0 meter shoulder width) and then
tie back up to the outside of the shoulder.
11. Type -4 in the % slope edit field and press Enter.
You are now at the edge of pavement with the Subgrade surface. Next, continue out to the shoulder
offset parallel to the shoulder.

To tie back into the shoulder surface, you need to create a line that extends 0.45 meters in the Y
direction from your current location. This is the bottom outside corner of the shoulder surface. From
this point, you continue with another line that extends 0.140 meters in the Y direction which ties into
your outermost shoulder offset. The intermediate point aids with line snapping.
17. Press Enter to accept the continued entry of the XY method.
Now that you have tied into the shoulder, you finish by extending the initial line you defined in the
AggBase section.
23. Type 3.6 in the X edit field and press Enter.
30. Type X in the Next Point edit field to terminate the command.
Your typical section should resemble the one shown in the figure below.
Cut Condition Ditch

Up to this point, you have developed the typical section for the cut condition and the fill condition
simultaneously. In this section, you create a ditch for the cut condition only to help protect your shoulder
and roadway from rainfall runoff.
1. Click on the Cut Only Detail icon on the Construct Typical Section dialog box.
2. Click on the Precision Input button.
4. Type 5.6 in the X edit field and press Enter.
7. Type XH in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.

Your ditch side slope is four meters wide.
9. Type -4 in the H/V Slope edit field and press Enter.
Your ditch is two meters wide.
Mirroring the Typical Section

Since the typical section is symmetrical about the center, you can use the mirror command to mirror
about the center point.
1. Click on the Mirror Typical Section from Right to Left icon in the Construct Typical Section
dialog box (Figure 10-34 on page 203).
Notice that the typical section is mirrored and looks similar to the typical section displayed in the
figure below.
Figure 10-39 Example of Mirrored Typical Section
Defining the Typical Section

Now you are ready to specify which areas on the typical section are a specific design material. In order
to define the typical section, you need to zoom in closer.
1. Perform a Zoom Extents (AutoCAD/BricsCad) or a Fit Active Design (MicroStation)
command in the CAD window.
2. In the Construct Typical Section dialog box, click on the Cut and Fill Detail icon.
Rural Road
This allows you to define the pavement areas, which are identical for both the Cut and Fill Details,
at the same time. If your typical section was considerably different between the details, you would
want to define each condition separately by selecting the Cut Only Detail or Fill Only Detail icons as
necessary.
3. Click on the Define Typical Section icon from the Construct Typical Section tool bar.

The Define Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-40 Define Typical Section Dialog Box
4. Select the Bit Wear in the list box and click on the Define button.
You are prompted to select in the Bit Wear area of the typical section.
5. Select the area as specified in the figure below to define the Bit Wear surface.
Figure 10-41 Area to Pick Bit Wear
6. Select Binder from the list box in the Define Typical Section dialog box (Figure 10-40).
You are prompted to select the Binder surface.
7. Select the area illustrated in the figure below to define the Binder surface.
Figure 10-42 Area to Pick Binder Surface
8. Select Shoulder from the list box in the Define Typical Section dialog box.
9. Select the areas illustrated in the figure below to define the Shoulder surface.
Figure 10-43 Area to Pick Shoulder Surface
10. Select Aggbase from the list.

You are prompted to select the AggBase surface.

11. Pick in the area illustrated in the figure below to define the AggBase surface.
Figure 10-44 Area to Pick Aggbase Surface
12. Click on OK in the Define Typical Section dialog box.

The typical section just defined is saved and the Define Typical Section dialog box closes.
13. Click on Close.
The Construct Typical Section dialog box closes.
You have just completed creating and defining a typical section. Although the geometry of this
typical section is relatively simple, the procedures apply to more complex typical sections as well.
In the next section, you explore the commands that allow you to combine your data together into a
format that is ready for processing.
Process
Through this point in this lesson, you have created a horizontal alignment, defined cross-section
surfaces and generated cross-section data, developed a design profile, and built a typical section. It is
time to assemble the various pieces of data and provide information about how they are used together
to create your roadway project.
Slopes Library
Later in this section you apply your typical section to your cross-sections. The horizontal centerline
alignment controls its placement in the XY-plane of your CAD graphic and the vertical centerline profile
controls its placement in the Z-direction. The means to connect the typical section to the original ground
is needed so that earthwork volumes can be determined. All of this is handled by applying any number
Rural Road
of slope conditions to your typical sections.
RoadCalc™ contains a number of slope categories (single, benching, right-of-way, etc.) that can
contain a variety of slope values. For example, in the Single slope category, you might define a 2:1
slope, a 3:1 slope and a 4:1 slope. All of the slopes that are contained in the Slopes Library are stored
in a central location so they can be applied to different projects. A description of the different slope
categories follows:

Single You can define a single slope for cut or fill. Examples include the use of a 6:1 slope in cut or
a 4:1 slope in fill.
Right of Way This slope type provides the ability to specify a slope range whose goal is to tie the slopes
Correction into the original ground at the right-of-way limit. If the catch point falls outside the right-of-
way limit, RoadCalc™ steepens the catch slope to a user-specified limit in an attempt to
minimize right-of-way infraction. If the catch point falls inside the right-of-way limit in a cut
condition, RoadCalc™ widens the ditch for better drainage control.
Benching The Benching slope type provides the means whereby a user-defined slope pattern can be
repeated (or benched) until it ties into the Original ground. The result is a terraced-effect
slope pattern.
Width The Width slope type allows you to define a slope range much like the Right of Way
Correction type, however, you must also specify a desired slope width. When specified,
RoadCalc™ attempts to create a catch slope at the desired width by adjusting the slope
value that gets applied
Clear Zone This slope type option allows you to specify a clear zone distance and slope that are
applied between the typical section and the catch slope. A single slope value is used to tie
into original ground.
Since the slopes in the Slope Library are independent of the typical sections, you are able to specify
combinations of the typical section(s) and slope conditions at specific locations along your project.
You start by defining the slopes that you use for this project.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Slopes Library.
The Slopes Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-45 Slopes Library Dialog Box
2. Select Single in the Slopes Library dialog box list box so that it is active.
3. Click on the New Slope icon.

The New Single Slope dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-46 New Single Slope Dialog Box
4. Type 3:1 Slope in the Name edit field and press the Tab key.
5. Type 3 in the Slope Value edit field and press the Tab key.
6. Select H/V as the slope measurement method and press the Tab key.
7. Type 3:1 slope for tutorial in the Extended Description field.
8. Click on OK.
The slope definition is saved and the New Single Slope dialog box closes.
Next, you define another Single slope.
9. Select Single in the Slopes Library dialog box list box so that it is active.
11. Type 4:1 Slope in the Name edit field and press the Tab key.
12. Type 4 in the Slope Value edit field and press the Tab key.
14. Type 4:1 slope for tutorial in the Extended Description field.
15. Click on OK.
This slope definition is saved and the New Single Slope dialog box closes.
If you click on the “plus” (+) symbol to the left of Single in the tree view list, notice that the two
slopes you defined (along with any other slopes) are listed. Clicking the “minus” (-) symbol to the
left of Single in the tree view collapses the list.
16. Select Clear Zone in the Slopes Library dialog box list box so that it is active.
Rural Road
The New Clear Zone Slope dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-47 New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box

18. Type Clear Zone 4% Slope in the Name edit field and press the Tab key.
19. Type 5.0 in the Clear Distance edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the distance (in meters for this project) from the From PT Code on the typical section for the
clear zone slope.
20. Select 10 Shoulder from the From PT Code drop list and press the Tab key.
21. Type -4 in the To Clear Offset edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the slope to be used for the clear zone area.
22. Set the slope type as % Slope and press the Tab key.
23. Type 3 in the From Clear Offset edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the slope from the outer edge of the clear zone to the specified original ground surface.
24. Set the slope type as H/V and press the Tab key.
25. Type 4% clear zone for tutorial in the Description edit field.
26. Click on OK.
This slope configuration is saved and the New Clear Zone Slope dialog box closes.
27. Click on Close.
The Slopes Library dialog box closes.
You have now defined the slopes that are available to use when processing the typical section. In the
next section, you define the different cut and fill conditions that use these slopes.
Condition Tables
1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Manage Conditions Tables.
The Manage Condition Tables dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-48 Manage Condition Tables Dialog Box
The Settings button on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box lets you control special items
concerning the Condition selected. Some of these settings include No Grade, Slope Seeding and Slope
Rounding.

An overview of each item is provided as follows. See the RoadCalc™ documentation or on-line help for
more information on these topics.
No Grade This option is generally used for divided highway typical sections. Under a normal
divided highway scenario, a graded median is generally constructed. However, when
the No Grade option is enabled, RoadCalc™ does not apply the typical section
geometry to the median area. This reduces the amount of earthwork excavation
required to build the project and helps to keep construction costs down.
Slope Seeding This option allows you to specify a depth for seeding and sodding purposes. The point
at which the seeding begins is defined by a PT Code on the typical section and
continues to the catchpoint between the typical section and Original ground. The
depth is taken to be a vertical difference (as opposed to normal to the slope) and the
amount of seeding is reported in the Volumes portion of the Output menu in
RoadCalc™.
Slope Rounding This option allows you to apply a rounded effect between the catchslope in a Cut
condition and the original ground. You are able to specify differing amounts of slope
rounding depending on the severity of the slope change.
2. Click on the New Condition Table icon on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
The New Condition Table dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-49 New Condition Table Dialog Box
3. Supply a useful description for this condition table by typing Depth Controlled
Conditions in the Name edit field.
Rural Road
4. Click on the Description button.
The Description dialog box displays.
5. Type For tutorial use only in the Description edit field and click on OK.
The Description dialog box closes and the New Condition Table dialog box (above) displays again.
6. Make sure the Based on Depth Only radio button is turned on.
This tells RoadCalc™ to apply the slope conditions based on depths of cut or fill rather than the
Original ground material the slopes may be “traveling through.”
7. Select Cut in the Material Conditions list box so that it is active.
8. Select the default condition (Depth Range >= 0) from the adjacent list box and click the
Modify Condition icon.

The Modify Condition dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-50 Modify Condition Dialog Box
Most of the values in the Modify Condition dialog box should be left as default values with the
exception of the Slope Name.
9. Select 4:1 Slope from the Slope Name drop list.
The items are discussed below.
If Depth is >=: This is the depth (above or below) the Original ground terrain where different slope
conditions should be evaluated. While there is always a “Depth >= 0” entry, it is possible to alter the
slope that is applied for this first test condition.
At PT Code: This option allows you to specify where the depth test should be performed. You can
choose to apply the test at the outermost point on the typical section (perhaps the most commonly
used selection), or you can elect to apply the test at some named PT code. If you elect to choose a
specific PT code and the named PT code does not exist on your typical sections, RoadCalc™
applies the depth test from the outermost point on the typical section.
Measured Vertically: These two options (from PT Code and to Catchpoint) allow you to indicate
how the depth test should be performed. The Measured Vertically from PT Code option performs
the depth check by measuring the vertical difference between the top Original ground surface and
the point named in the At PT Code section. The Measured Vertically to Catchpoint option performs
the depth check by measuring the vertical difference from the point named in the At PT Code
section to the calculated catchpoint elevation. RoadCalc™ begins the depth calculations by
examining the largest depth condition first (and then sequentially examining shallower depths until
the depth condition is satisfied).
Slope Type: This option allows you to indicate which type of slope should be applied if the depth
test succeeds.
Slope Name: This option allows you to select from a list of slopes that have been defined for the
named slope type.
At PT Code: This option allows you to indicate where the named slope should be applied. You can
choose to apply the slope at the outermost point on the typical section (perhaps the most
commonly used selection), or you can elect to apply the slope at some named PT code. If you elect
to choose a specific PT code and the named PT code does not exist on your typical sections,
RoadCalc™ applies the depth test from the outermost point on the typical section. If you elect to
apply the slope at a named PT code other than the outermost point, RoadCalc™ “trims back” the
sections of the typical section (which may yield unexpected results).
10. Click on OK.
The Modify Condition dialog box closes.
11. Click on the New Condition icon.

The New Condition dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-51 New Condition Dialog Box
12. Type 2.0 in the If Depth is >= edit field.

This tells RoadCalc™ that the slope type should change for depths greater than two meters in Cut.
13. Make sure the At PT Code drop list in the Depth Check group is set to Outermost Point and
the Measured Vertically from PT Code radio button is on.
14. Make sure the Slope Type in the Apply Slopes group is set to Single.
16. Make sure the At PT Code drop list in the Apply Slopes section is set to Outermost Point.
17. Click on OK.
These values are saved and the New Condition dialog box closes.
Take a moment to define conditional tests for sections in Fill.
18. Select Fill in the Material Conditions list box so that it is active.
19. Select the default condition (Depth Range >= 0) and click on the Modify Condition icon.
Leave most of the values in the Modify Condition dialog box to default with the exception of the
Slope Name.
21. Click on OK.
This value is committed and the Modify Condition dialog box closes.
Rural Road
Next, you apply a different type of slope condition when your Fill height exceeds two meters.
24. Make sure the At PT Code drop list in the Depth Check section is set to Outermost Point and
the Measured Vertically from PT Code option is on.
25. Select Clear Zone from the Slope Type drop list.
26. Select Clear Zone 4% Slope from the Slope Name drop list.
28. Click on OK.
These values are saved and the New Condition dialog box closes.
29. Click on OK.
This condition table is saved and the New Condition Table dialog box closes.

30. Click on Close.
The Manage Condition Tables dialog box closes.
Now you are ready to specify where the typical section is used in the project and what conditions are
used at certain stations.
Editing Design Locations

This section allows you to specify the location(s) of the typical section(s) and slope condition(s) in the
project. By treating the typical sections separately from the slopes, you can “mix and match”
combinations of typical sections and slopes to model even the most complex projects.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Edit Design Locations.
The Edit Design Locations dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-52 Edit Design Locations Dialog Box
2. In the Typical Section Locations area of the dialog box, click on the New Typical Section
Location icon.
The Modify Typical Section Location dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-53 Modify Typical Section Location Dialog Box
The Modify Typical Section Location dialog box summarizes the station information for the
alignment, cross-section, and profile data.

4. Select 2-lane Rural Road from the Typical Section drop list.
This is the typical section that you created earlier.
5. Make sure Do not transition to next station is selected from the Transition Type drop list.
This tells RoadCalc™ to make an abrupt change from one typical section to the next if multiple
typical sections have been defined for this project. Since you are only using one typical section, this
option is essentially benign.
6. Click on OK.
This value is saved and the Modify Typical Section Location dialog box closes.
Notice that you did not supply an ending station value. This is because you apply the same typical
section for the entire project.
7. In the Condition Table Locations section of the Edit Design Locations dialog box, click on
the New Condition Table Location icon.
The Modify Condition Table Location dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-54 Modify Condition Table Location Dialog Box

9. Select Depth Controlled Conditions from the Left Condition Table drop list.
10. Select Depth Controlled Conditions from the Right Condition Table drop list.
11. Click on OK.
These values are committed and the Modify Condition Table Location dialog box closes.
12. Click on Close.
Rural Road
The Edit Design Locations dialog box closes.
You are now ready to process the typical section through the project. The Run Design command allows
you to process through the entire project automatically or check the process at each station as it
occurs. As an added feature, the station data for the alignment, profile, and cross-sections are shown.
Running the Design

1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Run Design.

The Run Design dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-55 Run Design Dialog Box
2. Leave the Starting Station and the Ending Station values at the default.
3. Select Automatic from the Method drop list.
The other two methods (Step Through All and Step Through Warnings) allow you to inspect each
cross-section as it is being processed. Additionally, these two options allow you to make
corrections to your design on the fly.
4. Click on the Run button.
The typical sections are processed through the project.
Depending on the information you have entered, RoadCalc™ may display a Processing Warnings
dialog box to you similar to that shown in Figure 10-56 (below). The Processing Warnings dialog
box summarizes potential design problems or conflicts. Common practice is for you, the qualified
design professional, to print a report of this information so that you can determine a proper course
of action. Generally, the type of warning you receive dictates the corrective action, although there is
usually more than one way to correct a particular problem.
Figure 10-56 Processing Warnings Dialog Box
5. Click on Cancel in the Processing Warnings if it has been displayed to you.

6. Click on Close.
The Run Design dialog box closes.

Reviewing Cross-Sections
Now that you have processed the typical sections through the project, take a moment and inspect some
of your cross-section stations.
2. Select in sequence a number of the stations in the station list box and watch the thumbnail
graphic image for each station.
You should notice that the geometry for each cross-section is changing as you move from one
station to the next.
3. Click on the Query Cross-Section icon.
This displays a preview of the cross-section. You can view different cross-sections and also scale
the view. The left and right arrows move the cursor to each vertice point along the surface listed.
Rural Road
Figure 10-58 Query Cross-Section Dialog Box

4. After viewing a few cross-sections, click on Close.
The Query Cross-Section dialog box closes.
5. Click on Close.
Output
Volumes
In RoadCalc™ you are able to generate a report of the pavement, design earthwork and actual
earthwork volumes. For the design earthwork and actual earthwork volumes you are able to check on
the raw and mass volumes. The mass volumes are the earthwork volumes with compaction factors
applied to cut or fill. You can report volumes over a particular range. You also have the ability to specify
areas of volume adjustment, such as extra fill for driveways or extra cut. Areas of zero volume may be
specified as well as borrow pits.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Output " Volumes.
The Volume Reports dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-59 Volume Reports Dialog Box
2. Select Pavement from the Volume Type drop list.

The Pavement Volumes should be displayed in the dialog box. Each material has its end area and
volume reported. The Pay Units column displays the conversion factor used to compute the dollar
amount for the material. You can use the scroll arrows on the right side of the dialog box to scroll up
and down to see the different stations. If you scroll to the bottom of the list box, you see the totals.

3. Look at the Design Earthwork volumes. Select Design Earthwork from the Volume Type drop
list.
The Design Earthwork volumes are now displayed in the list box. If you use the horizontal and
vertical scroll bars along the bottom and right of the list box, you notice that the raw and mass
volumes are reported.
4. Click on the Settings button in the Volume Reports dialog box.
The Volume Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-60 Volume Settings Dialog Box
The Volume Settings dialog box contains two tabs. The Display tab allows you to specify what
items are to be displayed in the report as well as how to display the information. The Calculation tab
allows you to specify how the volumes are calculated.
5. Change the Volume Precision to 4 by moving the slider until 4 is displayed in the Volume
Precision edit field.
7. Click on the Calculation tab.
Rural Road

The Volume Setting dialog box–Calculation tab looks like the figure below.
Figure 10-61 Volume Setting Dialog Box – Calculation Tab
8. Make sure the Adjust for Horizontal Curves toggle is on.

The various settings here control how the mass volume is calculated. See the RoadCalc™
documentation for more information.
9. Click on Apply.
The settings are saved and the Volume Settings dialog box closes.
You can look at the other options on the Volume Reports dialog box.
10. When finished, click on OK.
The Volume Reports dialog box closes.
After viewing the volume report you are ready to create your cross-section plots. The following section
outlines the steps to generate cross-section plots for the project.
Creating Cross-Section Sheets

RoadCalc™ allows you to generate cross-section sheets of your cross-section data. You are able to
configure the sheet to look almost any way you want, including the ability to use your own custom
borders. Perform the following steps to create some Cross-Section sheet settings that you would like to
apply to this project.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Output " Cross-Section Sheets.

The Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-62 Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box
When the dialog box displays, notice that you have a list box where the sheets are listed. You are
able to also specify some settings for the sheets before they are created. The settings that can be
specified include:
Sheet Settings These settings specify the dimensions of the sheets and the density of the
gridlines placed. You also can specify how many columns of cross-sections to
plot on each sheet.
CAD Settings These options allow you to specify the components that are used to assemble
the sheets and how they should appear when they are placed. These include
such things as the surfaces that have been defined, grid lines, text annotation,
and reference lines.
Precision You can set the display precision for the text that is placed on the cross-section
sheets. It should be noted that these options supersede the Precision settings
found in the System menu of the Eagle Point main menu.
Offsets and Elevations This option allows you to annotate the offset and elevation at points on the cross-
section. This option is commonly used to place the offset and elevation
information of pavement edges.
Slope Annotation Similar to the Offsets and Elevations option, this option allows you to label the
slope value on your cross-sections. This option is commonly used to label the
catch slope value that ties your design section into the original ground.
Rural Road
Reference Lines This option allows you to place a reference line at a specified location on each
cross-section where the location is defined by a Point code or named alignment.
Text Settings This option allows you to specify how the annotation labels for each cross-
section (the station, centerline elevations, cut and fill end-areas, and cut and fill
volumes) are placed. You can control if each item should be placed, the label it
uses and the placement location.
2. Click on the Format Library button.

The Format Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-63 Format Library Dialog Box
3. Select RoadCalc Metric Defaults from the list box and click on the Load Format button.
A dialog box displays that says “You are about to overwrite your settings with the selected format.
Are you sure you want to do this?”
4. Click on Yes to continue.
Using the Format Library, you can save the format settings of cross-section sheets and then recall
these settings for other projects.
5. Click on Close.
The Format Library dialog box closes.
Next, you look at and alter a couple default settings that came from the format just selected.
6. Select Sheet Settings from the Format section of the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box and
click on the Edit button.
The Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings dialog box (below) displays.
7. Make sure the Sheet Dimensions tab is active.
We have illustrated the desired Sheet Dimensions as shown in the figure below except for the
Sheet Prototype value (leave this value at the default).
Figure 10-64 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet Dimensions Tab
If you want to use your own plot sheet border, the Sheet Prototype edit field is where you would
specify it.

8. Select the Grid Spacing tab and supply the values as shown in the figure below.
Figure 10-65 Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Grid Spacing Tab
9. Click on OK.
The settings are saved and the Edit Cross-Section Sheet Settings dialog box closes.
Now that you have set the Sheet Settings, you next create your cross-section sheets. You have
elected to leave the remaining cross-section format values at their default values for the time being.
For additional information on the values, please see the RoadCalc™ documentation or on-line
help.
10. Click on the New Cross-Section Sheets icon in the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (Figure
10-62 on page 225).
The New Cross-Section Sheets dialog box (below) displays.
Rural Road
Figure 10-66 New Cross-Section Sheets Dialog Box
11. Type 0 in the Starting Station edit field.

This is the station from where you start your cross-section sheets.
12. Type 0+924 in the Ending Station edit field.
This is the last station RoadCalc™ uses to make a sheet. However, notice that this station value
extends past the ending station value of your Cross-Section stations. This tells RoadCalc™ to
create cross-section sheets using all available cross-section stations.
13. Click on OK.
At this point, RoadCalc™ begins to assemble the sheets. You may be presented with an Alert
dialog box notifying you that your current CAD graphic has changed. If this Alert dialog box is
presented to you, click on Yes to save your changes.
The dialog box closes and the cross-section sheets are generated and displayed in the sheet list
box in the Cross-Section Sheets dialog box. If everything was specified correctly, RoadCalc™

should have generated six cross-section sheets for you. Since you only view these particular
sheets, do not be alarmed if the number of sheets you obtained is different from the value given
here.
14. Select the first sheet in the list box and click on the View Cross-Section Sheets icon.
The cross-section sheet displays in the CAD window and should look similar to that shown in the
figure below.
Figure 10-67 Example of CAD Window
15. Click on Close.

The Cross-Section Sheets dialog box closes.
Under normal conditions, once your sheets have been assembled you can use the Printing/Plotting
function of your CAD program to send the sheets to the specified output device (generally a plotter).
The next feature you cover is the generation of Plan & Profile sheets.
Creating Plan and Profile Sheets

RoadCalc™ allows you to generate Plan & Profile sheets showing sections of your horizontal alignment
along with the associated sections of your vertical profile. Similar to the Cross-Section sheet capability
you just reviewed, the Plan & Profile sheets can be configured to look almost any way you want
(including the ability to use your own custom borders). Perform the following steps to create some Plan
& Profile sheet settings that you apply to this project.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Output " Plan and Profile Sheets.
The Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-68 Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box

2. Select Sheet Settings from the drop list in the Format group and click on the Edit button.
The Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-69 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box
3. Make sure the Sheet/Plan tab is active.

You have illustrated the desired Sheet/Plan values as shown in the figure above.
4. Take a moment to set each setting to the value shown in Figure 10-69 (above) except for the
Sheet Prototype value (leave this value at the default value).
If you wish to use your own plot sheet border, the Sheet Prototype edit field is where you would
specify it. For more information on the specific sheet settings, please refer to the RoadCalc™
documentation or on-line help.
5. Click on Apply to commit the settings.
Next, you enter values for the Profile portion of the Plan and Profile sheet.
6. Click on the Profile tab.
Rural Road

The dialog box should resemble the figure below.
Figure 10-70 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab
7. Type the values in the respective fields so that your Profile settings match those shown in
the figure above.
8. Click on OK.
These values are committed and the Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings dialog box closes.
Once your sheet settings have been defined the way you like them, RoadCalc™ allows you to save
your values to a named format. This makes it possible to develop an enterprise-wide standard,
which can be easily recalled for future projects.
9. Click on the Format Library button in the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 10-68 on
page 228).
The Format Defaults dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-71 Format Defaults Dialog Box
10. Click on the New Format icon on the Format Defaults dialog box.
The New Format dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-72 New Format Dialog Box

11. Type Tutorial Settings in the Name edit field.
12. Click on OK.
This value is committed and the New Format dialog box closes.
You return to the Format Defaults dialog box.
If you make changes to your format and want to save those changes to a format in the list, highlight
the format and click on the Save To button. A dialog box displays that says, “Format already exists.
Are you sure you want to overwrite it?” Click on the Yes button. To recall format settings for other
projects, you can select the desired Format and click on the Load Format button.
13. Click on Close.
The Format Defaults dialog box closes and the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 10-68 on
page 228) displays again.
You are ready to create your Plan and Profile sheets.
14. Click on the New Plan and Profile Sheets icon.
The New Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 10-73 New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box
15. Type 0 in the Starting Station edit field.

This is the station from where you start your Plan and Profile sheet.
16. Type 0+940 in the Ending Station edit field.
This is the last station RoadCalc™ uses to make a sheet. However, notice that this station value
extends past the ending station value of both your Alignment and Profile stations. This tells
RoadCalc™ to create Plan and Profile sheets using the entire lengths of available alignment and
Rural Road
profile data.
17. Make sure the View Sheets Upon Creation toggle is off.
This tells RoadCalc™ to create the Plan and Profile Sheet definitions; however, the sheets are not
actually made until you decide to view them.
18. Click on OK.
The New Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box closes and the Plan and Profile sheet definitions are
generated and displayed in the sheet list box on the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box. If
everything was specified correctly, RoadCalc™ should have generated 14 Plan and Profile sheets
for you. Since the only thing you do with these particular sheets is view them, do not be alarmed if
the number of sheets you obtained is different from the value given above.
The Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 10-68 on page 228) displays again.
19. Select the first sheet in the list box and click on the View Plan and Profile Sheet icon.

The Plan and Profile sheet displays in the CAD window and should resemble the figure below.
Figure 10-74 Plan and Profile Sheet Example
20. Click on Close.

The Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box closes.
21. Close the RoadCalc™ menu.
This concludes Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road. While the focus of this lesson was primarily geared
toward a relatively simple project, similar steps could be used to solve more complex urban designs.
Summary
In this lesson, you learned how to:
! Create a profile.
! Create a typical section.
! Run the design.
! Look at the volume reports created.
! Create cross-section plots.
! Create plan and profile plots.

L E S S O N 11 –
ROADCALC URBAN LESSON
ROAD
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
11
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Add a Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Lesson 11 – RoadCalc Urban Road 233

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Add a sub-project.
! Associate an alignment.
! Convert alignments from graphics.
! Design a cul-de-sac via the button hook method.
! Create a profile.
! Create typical sections.
! Create slope conditions.
! Process the design.
! Generate alignments from PT codes.
Overview
In this lesson, you expand the Parkland Estates Subdivision to the South and West by designing an
additional road with a cul-de-sac. The road, named Turtle Creek Court was placed in Lesson 5 and ties
into the existing roads. You also place an eyelet section in the road to add additional road frontage to
some of the southern lots. You use the existing surface model created in Lesson 8 for original ground
cross-section information. The general process is as follows.
Since the horizontal centerline has already been defined through COGO in Lesson 5, you associate the
alignment to this RoadCalc™ project. For the sake of simplicity, the pavement edges have already
been defined for you. You convert these primitive CAD objects so RoadCalc™ can use them to adjust
the pavement widths throughout the project. The original ground cross-sections are extracted from a
surface model created in Lesson 8 and a design profile is graphically generated based on the original
ground profile. You create a total of three typical sections for use throughout the project. The first is a
symmetrically shaped typical section for use over most of the project. The second typical section is
used in the areas where Turtle Creek Court intersects the other roads. The third typical section is used
to model the cul-de-sac (which you define using the “button-hook” method). There are actually two cul-
de-sacs in this project, but you are able to model the first one through pavement widening. Once you
have completed the processing of this project, you create graphical representations of the project's
“breaklines” which are eventually used to define a distinct surface model.
Getting Started
1. If you are starting this lesson after finishing Lesson 10 – Rural Road, you can skip this
section and move directly to Add a Sub-project on page 235.

2. Since this lesson builds on the information from the previous lesson, you should first
perform some steps that bring the tutorial data up to speed for this lesson. If you have not
already done so, follow each of the steps discussed in the following sections of Lesson 1.
Add a Sub-project
When open, the project should resemble the figure below.
Figure 11-1 Example of Beginning CAD Graphic
The drawing needs to have some layers/levels frozen or turned off.

1. Freeze/turn off all of the layers/levels except the following:
Alignment
Centerline Level 1 (active)
L_Edge Level 14
R_Edge Lesson 11 – RoadCalc

Urban Road

2. Zoom into the CAD graphic so that is looks similar to the figure below.
3. In Eagle Point, Select File " New.

4. Select RoadCalc Sub-project from the list and then click on Next.
5. Make sure the Sub-project Number is 002 and type Urban Road in the Description edit field.
6. Select RoadCalc Metric Defaults from the Sub-project Prototype drop list.
7. Click on Next.

The New Sub-project dialog box (below) displays.
8. Make sure the Use Project Drawing option is selected.

9. Click on Finish.
10. In the Open dialog box, select the Urban Road sub-project and click on OK.
The RoadCalc™ menu bar (below) displays.

Urban Road
Alignments
Alignments control the horizontal location of a roadway. There are several methods of entering
alignments, either entering the Points of Intersection (PIs) numerically in a dialog box, graphically
picking them, or by converting an existing graphic element (line/polyline in AutoCAD/BricsCad or line
string/complex chain in MicroStation) into an alignment. Much of your centerline alignment was already

entered in Lesson 5. Rather than duplicate this work, you associate the Turtle Creek Court alignment
into this project and then make subtle adjustments to it for the eventual processing of the cul-de-sac.
Managing and Associating Alignments

1. In RoadCalc™, select Alignments " Manage.
The Manage Alignments dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-8 Manage Alignments Dialog Box
Notice that three alignment definitions are defined by default.

2. Make sure the Centerline definition is highlighted and click on the Associate Alignment
button.
The Associate Alignment dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-9 Associate Alignment Dialog Box
3. Make sure the Turtle Creek Court CL alignment is highlighted and click on OK.
An Alert box prompts:
You may associate the alignment directly or make a copy. Would you like to associate the
alignment directly?
4. You do not make a copy, so click on Yes.
The Turtle Creek Court CL alignment is now associated with the centerline alignment for this
project.
In addition to the Centerline alignment, you define two more alignments that store the geometry for
the left and right edges of pavement.
5. Click on the New Alignment icon.

The New Alignment dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-10 New Alignment Dialog Box
6. Type L_Edge in the Alignment Name edit field and click on OK.
This commits this alignment name and closes the New Alignment dialog box.
7. Click on the New Alignment icon.
8. Type R_Edge in the Alignment Name edit field and click on OK.
This commits this alignment name and closes the New Alignment dialog box.
9. Click on Close to dismiss the Manage Alignments dialog box.
Now that you have defined the two edges of pavement alignments, you convert existing linework
geometry for use by RoadCalc™.
Converting Alignments from Graphics

Although your edge of pavement geometry has already been created for you, it could just as easily
have come from a field survey through Data Collection, or have been created through COGO or
regular CAD commands. To follow are the steps you need to take to convert the geometry into
something more useful.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Alignments " Convert Objects to Alignment.
You are prompted to select the object(s) that comprise the alignment you want to create.
2. Select the R_Edge geometry as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-11 Example of Selected R_Edge Geometry
Once you have selected and accepted the alignment geometry, the Convert Objects To Alignment Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
dialog box (below) displays.
Urban Road
Figure 11-12 Convert Objects To Alignment Dialog Box

3. Click on Next.
You are instructed to identify the end of the object that serves as the alignment’s starting point.
4. Select a point near the beginning of the alignment (by its Southeast end).
You do not have to select or “snap” to the alignment to accomplish this.
The Convert Objects To Alignment dialog box shown in the figure below displays.
Figure 11-13 Convert Objects To Alignment Dialog Box
5. Select R_Edge from the Alignment drop list and click on Apply.
6. Please rerun each of the previous steps, this time substituting L_Edge for the R_Edge
references above.
The next item to discuss is how to make changes to alignment geometry.
Editing the Alignment Geometry

While you were typing the alignment geometry for the Turtle Creek Court CL alignment in Lesson 5, the
geometry was halted at the radius point of the cul-de-sac. In an effort to facilitate more accurate
pavement and earthwork volumes for this project, your goal is to “sweep” a pavement section about the
radius point of the cul-de-sac. You can accomplish this by adding a “button-hook” to the end of your
existing alignment. The figure below provides an illustration of the concepts behind this method.
Figure 11-14 Concept of Button Hook Method
Take a moment and add the “button hook” geometry to the Centerline alignment.

2. Click on the New PI icon.

3. Type the following coordinates into the Northing and Easting edit fields of the New PI dialog
box. Press the Tab key to move between the fields and click on Apply when the information
is correctly entered.
PI Northing Easting Fixed

6 50078.463 417985.627 Yes
EOP 50078.431 417985.666 Yes
4. Once the two PI locations have been defined, click on Close to close the New PI dialog box.
You now place the circular curve information to complete the button hook.
5. Click on the Curve Data button.
Urban Road

6. Click on the Right or Left Arrows until PI 5 displays in the center column.
7. Type the following Radius values for the curves at the PI’s found in the table below into the
R edit field of the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box. Click on the Right Arrow to move to the
next PI.
PI Radius Spiral In Spiral Out

5 0.050 0.000 0.000
6 0.050 0.000 0.000
8. Once the two curves have been defined, click on Close to dismiss the Horizontal Curve Data
dialog box.
9. Click on Close to dismiss the Edit Alignment Data dialog box.
You are ready to now cut original ground cross-sections along this alignment. The steps in the next
section guides you through this process.
Cross-Sections
When building your project, you are able to define materials that fall into one of three categories,
Original, Design or Actual. Briefly, Original surfaces can be thought of as the materials that exist in the
field prior to the construction of your project. Design surfaces are generally taken to be the material you
place to create the project. Actual surfaces can be used to measure what was placed. You take a
moment and define some of the surfaces that are used in this project.
Defining Surfaces
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Manage Surface.

Notice that an original surface already exists. Since RoadCalc™ assumes that you are building
your project on something, there is always at least one original surface. For this project, you
assume that you have only one original surface.
2. Click on the Design tab.
The New Design Surface dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-19 New Design Surface Dialog Box
When defining surfaces, the order in which they are listed becomes important. As a general rule,
surfaces should be defined starting with the topmost surface listed first. Also, it is important to note
the difference between a surface and a material. A surface always has a “top” and does not have a
bottom. A material is bounded by two intersecting surfaces. Lets define the topmost design surface.
4. Type Bituminous in the Name edit field.
5. From the Type drop list, select Normal.
For more information on the types of Design surfaces, please see the appropriate discussion in
Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road on page 175, the RoadCalc™ documentation, or on-line help.
6. Click on Apply to add the surface.
7. Type Curb in the Name edit field and press Enter.
8. Type Sidewalk in the Name edit field.
9. Type Aggregate in the Name edit field. Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
10. Type Subgrade in the Name edit field and click on OK to commit this surface and dismiss
the New Design Surface dialog box.
Urban Road
You have added all of the Design surfaces that are used in this project.
12. Change the Description edit field to Orig. Surface.
Notice what color it is set to. Keep the default.

13. Change the colors of the other surfaces by entering the data from the table below. When all
the colors have been entered, click on OK.
AutoCAD/BricsCad
Surface Color
Bituminous 171
Curb 30
Sidewalk 41
Aggregate 5
Subgrade 3
MicroStation
Surface Color
Bituminous 9
Curb 68
Sidewalk 68
Aggregate 1
Subgrade 3
14. Click on Close to dismiss the Manage Surfaces dialog box.
Cutting Cross-Sections
There are several options on how to enter cross-section data, by directly entering in the data by offset
and elevation, importing the data from an ASCII file, or extracting the information from a surface model.
In this section, you walk through the steps of extracting the cross-sections from a surface model. In
addition to the uniformly spaced cross-sections used throughout most of the project, you also extract
extra cross-sections at the intersection locations and on the button hook so you obtain more accurate
volumes.
Figure 11-20 Build Station List Dialog Box

2. Leave the Begin Station and End Station set to their default values.
3. Set the Stationing Interval to be 20 if it is not already.
This instructs RoadCalc™ to generate cross-section stations every 20 meters along the length of
this project.
4. Toggle the Curve Stationing Interval toggle to on and set the interval to be 10 meters.
This instructs RoadCalc™ that the cross-section interval within the curved portion(s) of the project
should occur every 10 meters.
5. Make sure the Curve Stations and Equation Stations are toggled on and set the Skew Angle
to 0.
6. Make sure the Mark Stations for Extraction option is on and the Delete Existing Stations
option is off.
7. Click on OK to commit these settings and dismiss the Build Station List dialog box.
8. In the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box, toggle on the Extract option for the Orig_Surface
to on. Make sure the Surface Model is set to Original Ground.
9. Type -40 in the Left Corridor Edge edit field and press the Tab key.
10. Type 40 in the Right Corridor Edge edit field and press the Tab key.
You now like to add some additional cross-section stations to this list.
11. Click on the Build List button.
The Build Station List dialog box (Figure 11-20 on page 244) redisplays.
12. Type 83.858 in the Begin Station edit field and 122.372 in the End Station edit field. Press
Urban Road
the Tab key.

13. Type 0.5 in the Stationing Interval edit field.
14. Make sure the Delete Existing Stations option is toggled off.
15. Click on OK to add the stationing and lose the Build Station dialog box.
the Tab key.

20. Click on OK to add the stationing and close the Build Station List dialog box.
the Tab key.
25. Click on OK to add the stationing and close the Build Station List dialog box.
27. Type 480 in the Begin Station edit field and 500.75 in the End Station edit field. Press the
Tab key.
30. Click on OK to add the stationing.
32. Type 500.75 in the Begin Station edit field and 501.2 in the End Station edit field. Press the
Tab key.
35. Click on OK to add the stationing.
You should now have stations added for all the cross-sections that you need along the alignment.
36. Click on OK in the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box to initiate the extraction routine.
Verify that you have the cross-section data that you need.
The Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box in the figure below displays.

38. Look at a few of the stations to see if you got all of the data you need.
A preview window displays on the dialog box and displays a graphic of the cross-section data. As
you select a new station in the Station listing, the corresponding offset/elevation data displays
below in the Shot at Station listing.
39. After you have verified the data, click on Close to close the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog
box.
Now that you have extracted original ground cross-sections, you are able to view the original ground
profile.
Profiles
In this section, you rough in the centerline profile by drawing the vertical tangents in your CAD graphic.
You then convert this graphical information into data that RoadCalc™ can use when processing the
project. You transition between the vertical tangents by creating parabolic vertical curves. Similar to
alignments, you can specify special profiles that control particular locations on your typical sections (for
example, gutter or ditch flow lines). However, for this project, you define just the centerline profile. Now
you examine what the original ground profile looks like.
Creating Profile Tangents Graphically

1. In RoadCalc™, select Profile " View Profile Graphics.
An Alert dialog box may display indicating the current CAD graphic has changed. If this Alert box is
presented to you, click on Yes to save your changes.
The profile graphic should display in your CAD window and should resemble the profile shown in
the figure below. Notice that there is an existing line in the profile. This is the original ground profile
that is read directly from the cross-section data.
Figure 11-23 Profile Graphic Example

You can now draw a profile graphically.
Urban Road

2. Draw a series of lines using your CAD product and pick near the arrows shown in the figure
below.
Figure 11-24 Areas to Pick for Drawing Lines
Once you have roughed in this profile, you convert its information into something RoadCalc™
understands.
3. In RoadCalc™, select Profiles " Convert Objects to Profile.
The Convert Objects To Profile dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-25 Convert Objects To Profile Dialog Box
4. Select the line(s) that you just drew in the CAD graphic and then select the Next button.
At this point, the Convert Objects To Profile dialog box changes to that shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-26 Convert Objects To Profile Dialog Box
5. Verify that the default profile in the drop list is Centerline. Click on Finish.
The graphic profile that you drew is now converted to the Centerline design profile.
6. In RoadCalc™, to look at the data, select Profiles " Edit Data.

Be aware that the numeric values that display in your dialog box most likely do not match those
shown in the dialog box above.
Creating Vertical Curves

You are now ready to enter the vertical curve information for the profile at each VPI (Vertical Point
of Intersection).
1. Select VPI 1 in the listing and click on the Curve Data button.
The Vertical Curve Data dialog box (below) displays. Again, be aware that the numeric values
displayed in your dialog box may not exactly match those shown below.

You design your vertical curves so they comply with AASHTO guidelines.
2. Click on the Vertical Speed Tables button.
Urban Road

The Vertical Speed Tables dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-29 Vertical Speed Tables Dialog Box
3. Select METRIC - WITHOUT PASSING SIGHT from the Speed Table drop list.
This tells RoadCalc™ that it is to base the vertical curves on a metric-based table that does not
consider passing sight distances (which should be safe considering you are in a residential
subdivision).
4. Select the Design Speed of 20 and click on the Create Vertical Curves button.
The Create Vertical Curve dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-30 Create Vertical Curve Dialog Box
5. Click on the first VPI, press Shift, and arrow down until they are all highlighted. Alternatively,
you may press Ctrl and click on the VPIs to perform a multiple selection. Click on OK.
RoadCalc™ generates a vertical curve for each VPI that is highlighted.
6. Click on Close to dismiss the Create Vertical Curve dialog box.
7. Review your vertical curve geometry by using the Left and Right Arrows on the Vertical
Curve Data dialog box.
If your profile geometry contains invalid information (for example, the vertical curve placed is longer
than the available tangent length), adjust the length (L) of the vertical curve until the discrepancy no
longer displays. Notice in the upper right corner of the Vertical Curve Data dialog box, RoadCalc™
reports the rated design speed based on the active speed table for the curve data you are looking
at.
8. When you are satisfied with the results of your profile, click on Close to dismiss the Vertical
Curve Data dialog box.
Under normal design circumstances, you would want to start checking your profile elevations
against the other design elevations in this project (most notably, where the intersection locations
occur). For the sake of brevity, however, you do not do this in this project.

9. Click on Close to close the Edit Profile Data dialog box.
You have just entered the profile data for the centerline of your roadway.
Typical Sections
In this section, you create an urban typical section complete with a curb, gutter and sidewalk on both
sides of the roadway centerline. This typical section is applied to most of your project.

The first thing you do is to add a new typical section to the Typical Section Manager.
The Manage Typical Sections dialog box displays as shown in the figure below.
This dialog box contains a listing of the typical sections that may be used for this project. A preview
image of each typical section is displayed after it has been saved. An extended description of the
typical section is also displayed to help you distinguish one typical section from the next.
2. Click on the New Typical Section icon.
The New Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Urban Road
Figure 11-32 New Typical Section Dialog Box

3. Type 2-lane Urban Road in the Name edit field.
This is the name you assign to your first typical section.
4. Type Typical section — Urban standard, for tutorial use only in the
Description edit field.
Since this field is optional, you can elect not to place information into this field. However, as your list
of typical sections grows, the extended descriptions help you and others (if working in a shared
office environment) distinguish the different typical sections.
5. Click on OK to commit this typical section name and dismiss the New Typical Section dialog
box.
Notice that the typical section description has been added to the Manage Typical Sections dialog
box (below).
6. Click on Close to dismiss the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
Constructing the Typical Section

You are ready to create your typical section.
1. Select Typical Sections " Construct Typical Section in RoadCalc™.
2. Make sure 2-lane Urban Road is selected from the Typical Section drop list on the Construct
3. Click on the View Typical Section Graphics icon to display the typical section graphic in the
CAD window.

When the empty typical section graphic displays, you notice two intersecting lines in the graphic.
These lines intersect at a coordinate of 0,0. The vertical line represents a centerline offset of zero
(generally the centerline of your project) and the horizontal line represents the elevation control
point for the vertical profile. While creating typical sections, dimensions are indicated using the 0,0
coordinate as a reference point. The figure below shows what you eventually create (without the
two reference lines).
4. On the Construct Typical Section dialog box, make sure the Cut and Fill Detail icon is
pushed in.
This allows you to develop pavement geometry (which is generally the same for both Cut and Fill
conditions) at the same time.
5. Click on the Precision Input icon.
The Start Point edit field becomes enabled, as does the “option string” located directly above the
edit field. To switch “entry modes” (the two pieces of information needed to define a line), you
indicate the desired entry mode by indicating the appropriate capitalized letters. The various entry
modes are as follows:
Absxy Absolute X and Y (key-in A) - Allows you to draw a line to or at a specified X,Y
coordinate.
dXdY Delta X and Delta Y (key-in XY) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the X and Y direction from the current coordinate location.
dXS Delta X and Percent Slope (key-inXS) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as a percent) from the current
dXH Delta X and Horizontal to Vertical Slope (key-in XH) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as the
dXV Delta X and Vertical to Horizontal Slope (key-in XV) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the X direction at a given slope (expressed as the vertical
location.
dYS Delta Y and Percent Slope (key-in YS) - Allows you to draw a line by specifying a relative
change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as a percent) from the current
dYH Delta Y and Horizontal to Vertical Slope (key-in YH) - Allows you to draw a line by Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
specifying a relative change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as the
Urban Road
dYV Delta Y and Vertical to Horizontal Slope (key-in YV) - Allows you to draw a line by
specifying a relative change in the Y direction at a given slope (expressed as the vertical
location.
Reset pen Reset the pen (key-in R) - Allows you to halt the line creation at the current coordinate
location and resume it from a new location.

Undo Undo (key-in U) - Allows you to "back up" through the entries you have made to allow for
corrections to improperly entered data.
eXit Exit (key-in X) - Allows you to terminate the Precision Input process.
By selecting the input combination that describes the various pieces of your typical section geometry, it
becomes very easy to quickly develop even the most complicated typical sections. Bear in mind that
although the “key letters” are capitalized above, you can supply them in upper, lower, or mixed case.
Bituminous Surface
This specifies that you are drawing your first line based on a width displacement at a given slope
(each time the Precision Input command is initialized, an implied starting location of 0,0 is assumed
unless otherwise specified).
Notice the label of the Start Point edit field has changed to DX (the first part of your desired entry).
As each piece of information is placed, RoadCalc™ indicates to you the piece of information it is
expecting next.
This is the desired width of a driving lane in meters.
Again, the label of the edit field has changed to keep pace with the next piece of needed
information.
Note that negative slope values indicate “out and down from the current point.”
In order to assign special meaning to the coordinate location you just defined, you assign a Point
code (PT code). For your 2 Lane Urban Road typical section, the point you just defined serves as
the Edge of Pavement (identified by a PT Code of 9). Until you have become familiar with
RoadCalc’s™ PT code Library, it is suggested that you select the desired PT Code by clicking on
the PT Code Library button. However, in an effort to simplify the discussion of typical section
creation, continue with step 4.
The top of the Bituminous material has been drawn.You continue by drawing the top of the Curb
material.
Curb Surface
1. Notice the default placement method reverts back to XS. To accept this method, press Enter.
This is the desired width of the gutter in meters.
You want your gutter to be 0.46 meters wide at a 2% cross-slope.
The default value for a flowline PT Code is 8.
The gutter line is now drawn.
5. To place the face of the gutter, type XY in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.
You place the face of the gutter with a slight slant to it so that you can generate alignments from PT
Codes if you need to do so later. If you would have a placed a vertical face to the curb face,

Surface Modeling would not triangulate to the flowline and the top of curb. It would only triangulate
to the top of curb, thus giving you an incorrect surface representation.
The default value for a face of curb PT code is 6.
You are now ready to draw the top of your curb.
9. Accept the default placement method of XY and press Enter.
11. Type 0 in the DY edit field and press Enter.
12. For the PT Code value, type 5 in the PT Code edit field and press Enter.
This is the default value for back of curb.
This concludes the drawing of the curb surface. Now you move to the sidewalk surface.
Sidewalk Surface
First you draw the shoulder between the Curb and Sidewalk.
3. Type 2 in the % Slope edit field and press Enter.
This is the default value for the shoulder.
5. For the top of your sidewalk, leave the default placement method as XS and press Enter.
7. Type 2 in % Slope edit field and press Enter.
You now draw a short segment where the slopes emanate from when you process your typical
section through the project.
9. Accept the default placement method of XS and press Enter.
11. Type 2 in % Slope edit field and press Enter.
You now start drawing the Aggregate surface. To make your task simpler, reset the location of your
drawing pen.
Aggregate Surface
Urban Road

This signifies that you begin at the centerline of the typical section.
This signifies that the Aggregate surface is 0.15 meters below the design profile grade.

You want the Aggregate surface to parallel the Bituminous surface. Therefore, the values you enter
are identical to those supplied for the Bituminous surface.
To tie back into the Bituminous surface, you need to create a line that extends 0.15 meters in the Y
direction from your current location. You use the capability of Precision Input to perform this task.
However, another common approach is to use the CAD line command and snap to the endpoint of
the desired graphical feature.
You are now going to draw the Aggregate surface under the Curb section. To make your task
simpler, reset the location of your drawing pen.
You graphically select the start point using the PIC button.
14. Click on the PIC button and select the point shown in the figure below. To be precise, make
sure you snap to the location specified.
Figure 11-36 Point to be Selected
15. Accept the default of 0 in the PT Code edit field and press Enter.
You now graphically tie the aggregate surface to the top of the back of curb.
20. Click on the PIC button and graphically select the point as shown in the figure below. To be
precise, make sure you snap to the location specified.
Figure 11-37 Point to be Selected

You now draw the Aggregate surface under the Sidewalk. To make your task simpler, reset the
location of your drawing pen.
To start, you graphically snap to the inside edge of the sidewalk.
23. Click on the PIC button and snap to the endpoint of the line as shown in Figure 11-38
(below).
Figure 11-38 Snap to Endpoint Example
27. Type -0.15 in the DY edit field and press Enter.
You are specifying here that you have a sidewalk that is 0.15 meters thick.
29. Enter XS in the Next Point edit field and press Enter.
32. Accept the default value of 0 in the PT Code edit field and press Enter.
You are now going to tie the aggregate surface to the back of the sidewalk.
33. Enter XY in the Next Point edit field for the Placement Method and press Enter.
36. Accept the default value of 0 in the PT Code edit field and press Enter.
You now start drawing the Subgrade surface. To make your task simpler, reset the location of your
drawing pen.
Subgrade Surface Lesson 11 – RoadCalc

Urban Road

This signifies that the Subgrade surface is 0.45 meters below the design profile grade.
To make the subgrade surface parallel to the Aggregate surface, the slope value you enter is
identical to that supplied for the Aggregate surface.

You now draw the subgrade surface under the curb.
9. Accept the default placement method of XS and press Enter.
You are now ready to tie the subgrade surface to the bottom of the curb.
To do this you graphically select the bottom of curb.
13. Click on the PIC button and snap to the point shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-39 Point to Snap
Now it is time to draw the subgrade surface below the sidewalk. To make it easier, reset the location
of your drawing pen.
16. Click on the PIC button and select the point as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-40 Point to Select
You are now ready to define the thickness of your aggregate material.
20. Type -0.15 in the DY edit field and press Enter.
21. Accept the default value of 0 for the PT Code and press Enter.
22. Type XS in the Start Point edit field and press Enter to change the placement method.

To tie the subgrade surface to the top surface you use Precision Input.
26. Type XY in the Start Point edit field and press Enter to change the placement method.
Rather than have to run through all of the steps above for the left side of the typical section, you
mirror the side you drew instead.
31. To accomplish this, select the Mirror Typical Section from Right to Left icon.
The template is mirrored about the vertical line and should resemble the one shown in the figure
below.
Figure 11-41 Mirrored Template
Defining the Typical Section

Now that you have the typical section drawn, it is time to define the typical section. When you define a
typical section, you specify which areas are certain materials. In the case of your typical section, picking
a point between the bituminous surface and the aggregate surface defines the bituminous material
area.
1. Select the Define Typical Section button.
The Define Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-42 Define Typical Section Dialog Box
Urban Road
2. Select Bituminous in the listing and click on the Define button.

You are prompted to pick the bituminous region.

3. Select a point as shown in Figure 11-43 (below).
Notice that the area you picked hatches to show you the defined area.
Figure 11-43 Point to Select
4. Select the curb entry in the Define Typical Section dialog box.
You are prompted to identify the Curb region(s).
5. Pick in the areas shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-44 Areas to Select
Now you define the sidewalk area.

6. Select Sidewalk in the Define Typical Section dialog box.
7. Pick in the areas shown in the figure below.
The next material to define is the Aggregate.

8. Select Aggregate in the Define Typical Section dialog box.
9. Pick the areas shown in the figure below.

You have now defined all of the materials for the typical section. You do not need to define the last
surface (Subgrade) since that surface is beneath all of the other surfaces and is assumed to be the
remaining material.
10. To save the surfaces you picked, click on OK on the Define Typical Section dialog box.
This action commits your typical section geometry and closes the dialog box.
11. Click on Close to close the Construct Typical Section dialog box.
Adding the Typical Section to the Library

Now that you have created one typical section, you copy this typical section to a central library so that it
can be used by other projects. This typical section is used in Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation
Work on page 279.
2. Select 2-lane Urban Road in the listing and click on the Typical Section Library button.
The Typical Section Library dialog box in the figure below displays.
Urban Road
Figure 11-48 Typical Section Library Dialog Box

3. Click on the Copy To Library button.
The Copy To Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-49 Copy To Library Dialog Box
4. Make sure that the Typical Section drop list is set to 2-lane Urban Road.
The Name edit field should automatically have 2-lane Urban Road in the edit field.
5. Click on OK to add the typical section to the library and close the Copy To Library dialog
box.
6. Click on Close to close the Typical Section Library dialog box.
7. Click on Close to close the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
Copying Typical Sections

Now that you have created and defined your 2-lane Urban Road typical section, you make two more
typical sections, one for the intersection locations and one for the cul-de-sac. The typical section that is
used in the intersection areas needs to have the right curb and sidewalk removed. Instead of creating a
whole new typical section, you copy your 2-lane Urban Road typical section and modify the copy.
The Manage Typical Sections dialog box (Figure 11-31 on page 251) displays.

2. Make sure the 2-lane Urban Road entry is highlighted and click on the Copy Typical Section
icon.
The Copy Typical Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-50 Copy Typical Section Dialog Box
As you can see, an image of the typical section that you previously defined is displayed in a
preview window. You copy both sides of the typical section for use in the intersection typical
section. You do have the ability to take one side from one typical section and the other side from a
completely different typical section.
3. In your case, verify that both the Left Side and Right Side drop lists are set to 2-lane Urban
Road.
4. In the Name edit field, type 2-lane Intersection Typical.
5. In the Description edit field, type Typical section - Intersection Typical, for
tutorial use only and then click on OK to add the typical section to the Manage Typical
Sections dialog box.
Since you have copied the 2-lane urban road for the intersection typical section, do the same for
the cul-de-sac typical.
6. On the Manage Typical Sections dialog box, click on the Copy Typical Section icon.
7. When the Copy Typical Section dialog box displays, verify that the Left Side and Right Side
drop lists are set to 2-lane Urban Road.
8. In the Name edit field, type Urban Cul-de-sac Typical.
9. In the Description edit field, type Typical section - Cul-de-sac Typical, for
tutorial use only and then click on OK to add the typical section to the Manage Typical
Sections dialog box.
10. Click on Close to dismiss the Manage Typical Sections dialog box. Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
Urban Road
Editing Typical Sections

You are now ready to edit the 2-lane Intersection Typical. With this typical section, you remove the curb
and sidewalk sections on the right side of the typical section. The first thing you need to do is load the
CAD graphic of the typical section.
1. In RoadCalc™, Select Typical Sections " Construct Typical Section.

2. Select 2-lane Intersection Typical from the Typical Section drop list and then click on the
View Typical Section icon.
The 2-lane Intersection Typical loads into the CAD graphic.
3. Now you graphically delete the curb and sidewalk from the right side of the typical section.
4. Using CAD, erase the area of the typical section within the dashed box shown in the figure
below.
This is only for the right side.
Figure 11-52 Area to be Erased
The resulting CAD graphic should resemble the figure below.
5. Using CAD, draw a line to close the bituminous material and another line to close the
aggregate material. Make sure you snap the lines you draw to the endpoints of the existing
lines so that the regions are properly closed.
The figure below shows what the resulting CAD graphic should look like.

Now that you have made the changes to the Intersection typical section, you need to define the
different materials like you did earlier.
6. Click on the Define Typical Section button in the Construct Typical Section dialog box.
The Define Typical Section dialog box (Figure 11-42 on page 259) displays.
7. Select Bituminous in the listing and click on the Define button.
You are prompted to define the first design surface.
8. Pick the area as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-55 Area to Pick
9. The next surface you define is the curb surface. Select Curb in the listing on the Define
You are prompted to define the second design surface.
10. Select the area as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-56 Area to be Selected
The next surface to define is the Sidewalk surface.

11. Select Sidewalk in the listing on the Define Typical Section dialog box.
You are prompted to define the third design surface.
12. Select the area as shown in the figure below.
Urban Road
The next surface to define is the Aggregate Base surface.

13. Select Aggregate in the listing on the Define Typical Section dialog box.
You are prompted to define the third design surface.
14. Select the areas as shown in the figure below.
At this point you have defined all of the surfaces for the Intersection typical section.
15. Click on OK on the Define Typical Section dialog box to commit the geometry and dismiss
the dialog box.
You are now ready to edit the Urban Cul-de-sac Typical definition.
16. From the Typical Section drop list on the Construct Typical Section dialog box, select Urban
Cul-de-sac Typical.
17. Click on the View Typical Section icon to load the typical section CAD graphic for the cul-de-
sac.
For the cul-de-sac, you remove everything from the left side of the typical section.
18. Erase all of the linework within the dashed box shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-59 Linework to be Erased
19. After you have removed the left side of the typical section, it should resemble the geometry
Similar to the operations you performed for the intersection typical, you need to draw vertical lines
that close the bituminous material and the aggregate material.
20. Use your CAD product to draw these lines, taking care to snap to the end points of the
existing lines.

21. Once the areas are closed, draw a very short line (around 0.05 in length) from the crosshairs
to the left.
You need to have something on both sides of the crosshairs for RoadCalc™ to process the typical
correctly. A line of 0.05 will suffice.
22. Click on the Define Typical Section button on the Construct Typical Section dialog box.
The Define Typical Section dialog box (Figure 11-42 on page 259) displays.
23. Just like you have done before, select the Bituminous surface in the listing and click on the
Define button.
24. Pick the Bituminous area. Repeat this sequence for each of the materials listed in the Define
Typical Section dialog box (except for the Subgrade surface).
If you ever make a mistake picking the area to define, just pick the same area again and the
hatching is removed. You can then pick the area you intended to define.
25. When you have finished defining all of the surfaces, click on OK of the Define Typical
Section dialog box.
26. Click on Close in the Construct Typical Section dialog box to dismiss it.
You have now defined the typical sections you use throughout this project.
Processing
You are now ready to define the remaining pieces of information RoadCalc™ needs to assemble the
project. These items include:
! Associate alignments and profiles to the typical sections.
! Specify slopes that are needed to tie the typical sections to the original ground.
! Add slope conditions so the design is built according to your instructions.
! Specify the station locations where the typical sections are applied.
! Process the typical sections through the project.
Associate Alignments and Profiles

As you may recall, the pavement width throughout this project is non-uniform. In an effort to account for
the varied pavement widths, you associate the left and right pavement edges to their corresponding
points on your typical sections. Since you assigned PT codes to the typical sections, this process is
fairly straightforward. The following steps explore how to accomplish this.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Associate Alignments and Profiles. Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
Urban Road

The Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-61 Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog Box
In the Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog box you associate a PT code to an Alignment and/
or a Profile, and define the Control Type and Control PT code which control how the typical section
“yields.” You now add your first association.
2. Click on the New PT Code Association icon in the Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog
box.
The New PT Code Association dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-62 New PT Code Association Dialog Box
You are now going to associate the Edge of Pavement PT Code on the left side with the L_Edge
alignment.
3. Select 9 Edge of Pavement from the PT Code drop list.
4. Turn on the Left radio button.
5. From the Alignment drop list, select L_Edge.
This associates the 9 Edge of Pavement PT Code with the L_Edge alignment that you defined
earlier. Leave the Profile drop list on <None> since you do not have any special profiles.
6. Select Slope from the Control Type drop list.
What this means is that when the typical section is stretched to tie to an alignment (or profile) the
slope (in this case, the pavement slope) is maintained. The Control PT Code defines the segment
of the typical section that yields to the alignment (or profile). In all cases, the segment that changes

is the first segment starting from the Control PT Code that is between the Control PT Code and the
Centerline. See the figure below for an example of this.
7. For the Control PT Code, select 9 Edge of Pavement from the drop list.
This specifies that you widen the bituminous pavement between the centerline and the edge of
pavement yet maintain the existing cross-slope.
8. Click on Apply to add the association.
9. While the New PT Code Association dialog box is open, change the Side to Right and select
R_Edge from the Alignment drop list.
10. Click on OK to commit this association and dismiss the New PT Code Association dialog
box.
The Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog box should have both the Left and Right associations
listed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 11-64 Associate Alignments and Profiles Dialog Box
11. Click on Close to dismiss the Associate Alignments and Profiles dialog box.
Setting up the Slopes Library

Within RoadCalc™, you have the ability to establish a number of different types of slopes that are
generally used with your typical section(s). By treating typical sections and slopes as different “classes” Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
of objects, it is possible to “mix and match” different combinations of typical sections and slopes to
produce the desired design results. You define the slope that is applied throughout this project.
Urban Road
For simplicity, you specify just one slope for this project; a 5:1 slope.

As you can see, there are different slope types (or slope categories) that can be used in
RoadCalc™. You define a single slope to use with your typical sections.
2. Select Single in the listing in the Slopes Library dialog box and click on the New Slope icon.
The New Single Slope dialog box in the figure below displays.
3. Type 5:1 Slope in the Name edit field.

4. Type 5 in the Slope Value edit field. Verify that the Slope Type is set to H/V.
5. Leave the Extended Description edit field blank.
This edit field is provided if you want a detailed description of the slope.
6. Click on OK to commit this slope and add it to the Slopes Library.
Since you are defining only one slope, you are finished with the Slopes Library.
7. Click on Close to dismiss the Slopes Library dialog box.
Setting up the Conditions Table

One of the new features in RoadCalc™ is the Conditions Table. This table allows you to have different
slopes placed from a typical section depending on what types of conditions are met. In your case, you
have the 5:1 Slope used everywhere.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Manage Condition Tables.

2. Click on the New Condition Table icon in the Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
You have a condition table for Cut and Fill. In your case you use the 5:1 Slope for both.
3. In the Name edit field, type 5:1 Cut and Fill.
The Description button allows you to specify an extended description for the condition. You can skip
the extended description.
4. Make sure the Based on Depth Only option is on and select Cut in the Material Conditions
list.
5. Click on the Modify Condition icon.
Urban Road

Because you use the 5:1 Slope everywhere, you do not need to modify the depth conditions. As
you can see, you are able to add conditions to a table that change due to depth or material
conditions. You can have a specified slope used from a depth of 0 to 1 meter and another slope
from 1 meter to 4 meters. When you are dealing with different materials, you may have a different
slope used when passing through different original surfaces. For example, you might use a 3:1
slope though clay but a 0.25:1 slope in rock. You can set up a condition to handle the different
slopes through different materials if you wish.
6. Verify that Slope Type is set to Single.
7. Change the Slope Name to 5:1 Slope.
8. Verify the At PT Code drop list is set to Outermost Point.
9. Click on OK to commit this slope condition and close the Modify Condition dialog box.
10. Select the Fill in the Material Conditions grouping and click on the Modify Condition icon.
11. When the Modify Condition dialog box displays, verify that Slope Type is set to Single.
12. Change the Slope Name to 5:1 Slope.
At this point, both the Cut and Fill conditions have been added to the Condition Table.
15. Click on OK in the New Condition Table dialog box to commit this condition and close the
dialog box.
16. Click on Close on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box to close the dialog box.
Now that you have specified the slopes and the condition of when to use them, you are now ready to
specify where to use the three typical sections you have in the project.
Specifying Typical Section Locations

Up to this point you have created the typical sections, defined the slopes to be used, and specified the
depth conditions where the slopes are to be used. The last piece of information you need to supply is
the location(s) where the typical sections and slope conditions should be applied. You set up station
locations where a particular typical section is to be used. You also specify station locations where
condition tables are used. Not only can you have typical sections change throughout a project; you can
also have the slopes that are used change throughout the project (independently of the typical
sections). This provides maximum flexibility and control for the design of your project.

The first thing you do is define the typical section locations.

2. Click on the New Typical Section Location icon.
The New Typical Section Location dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-71 New Typical Section Location Dialog Box
3. In the Station edit field, type 0 and select the 2-lane Urban Road typical section from the
Typical Section drop list.
4. Select the Do not transition to next station option in the Transition Type drop list.
The different transition types are described below.
Do Not Transition to Next This option specifies that you do not want to place a transitioning
Station typical section after your specified station. Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
Transition to Next Station This option creates a straight line transition the current typical section
Urban Road
and its location to the next typical section and its location.
Single Station Occurrence This option applies the typical section just to the station specified.
5. Click on Apply to add the typical section location to the Edit Design Locations dialog box.

6. Add the other station locations for the typical sections as shown in the table below. Click on
Apply after you enter each design location.
Station Typical Section Transition

329.728 2-lane Intersection Do not transition to next station
339.397 2-lane Urban Road Do not transition to next station
420.354 2-lane Intersection Do not transition to next station
429.227 2-lane Urban Road Do not transition to next station
501.075 Urban Cul-de-sac Do not transition to next station
7. Click on Cancel in the New Typical Section Location dialog box to dismiss it.
The figure below shows what the Edit Design Locations dialog box should look like after entering
the data.
You are now ready to define the condition table locations.

8. Click on the New Condition Table Location icon.
The New Condition Table Location dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-73 New Condition Table Location Dialog Box
You only need to define one condition table location since you are using it through the whole
project.

9. In the Station edit field, type 0. For the Left Condition Table, select 5:1 Cut and Fill. For the
Right Condition Table, select 5:1 Cut and Fill.
10. Click on OK to add the new condition location and close the New Condition Table Location
dialog box.
11. Click on Close in the Edit Design Locations dialog box.
Now that you have specified the station locations for the typical sections and conditions to be applied,
you are now ready to run the design. The next section outlines how to do that.
Run the Design

1. In RoadCalc™, select Process " Run Design command.
2. Accept the defaults for the Starting and Ending Stations. Make sure the Use Design
Locations option is toggled on.
If the Use Step Through Modifications option is enabled, the typical sections and slopes on the
stations that previously had been modified using the step through tools are held. Stations in the
process range that had no previous modifications made to them use the typical sections and
condition tables from the Edit Design Locations dialog box.
3. Make sure the Method is set to Automatic.
This option places the typical sections at each station in the range without prompting you to confirm
each station. The other two options, Step Through All and Step Through Warnings, allow you to
walk through every station or every station with a process warning and allow you to change the
typical section placed at that the station.
Urban Road

RoadCalc™ applies the typical sections to each cross-section and adjusts the pavement width if
needed. Once complete, the Processing Warnings dialog box (below) may display.
The Processing Warnings dialog box alerts you to problem spots that occurred while processing the
typical sections throughout the project. You may elect to adjust portions of your design to eliminate
the various warnings. If you want to check the trouble spots, there are two general methods that are
commonly used to correct the problem spots:
A. Re-run the design using the Step Through Warnings method.
B. Edit the cross-sections at the problem stations and manually make changes to the
cross-sections.
5. Click on the Describe button to get a listing of what the errors mean.
6. After you have reviewed the error messages, click on OK to close the Error Descriptions
dialog box.
7. Click on Cancel on the Processing Warnings dialog box to close it.
In the next section, you generate 3-D lines from the PT Codes that were placed via the typical sections.
Output
The Breaklines from PT Codes command allows you to draw breaklines in the plan drawing based on
the PT codes of the processed typical sections. The program examines each cross-section, determines
the elevation and offset of each PT code placed by the typical section, and then connects the locations
with a 3-D object that can be used to create a surface model.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Output " Breaklines from PT Code.

The Breaklines from PT Codes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 11-76 Breaklines from PT Codes Dialog Box
As you can see from the Breaklines from PT Codes dialog box, you select the surface(s) you want
to extract the PT Code(s) for.
2. Take care to select the proper surface for each PT Code. Enter the data as shown in the table
below.
PT Code Surface Side Extract

1 Bituminous Both X
5 Curb Both X
6 Curb Both X
8 Curb Both X
9 Bituminous Both X
10 Sidewalk Both X
11 Sidewalk Both X
4 Subgrade Both X
1000 Subgrade Left X
1001 Subgrade Right X
PT Codes 1000 and 1001 are the catchpoints for the left side and right side respectively.
3. Click on the CAD Settings icon. If you are in AutoCAD/BricsCad, type Breaklines in the
Layer edit field. If you are using MicroStation, type 5 in the Level edit field.
4. Click on OK to commit the setting and close the CAD Settings dialog box.
5. Click on OK on the Breaklines from PT Codes dialog box. Lesson 11 – RoadCalc
The breaklines are extracted from the PT Codes on the surfaces and placed into the CAD graphic
based on the CAD settings you specified.
Urban Road
This concludes Lesson 11. At this point, you may want to view the cross-sections by selecting the View
Cross-section Graphics command from the Cross-Sections menu or by examining the volumes by
selecting Volumes from the Output menu. Feel free to do so if you wish.
6. Close the RoadCalc™ menu.

Summary
During this tutorial lesson, you learned how to:
! Add a sub-project.
! Associate an alignment.
! Convert alignments from graphics.
! Design a cul-de-sac via the button hook method.
! Create a profile.
! Create typical sections.
! Create slope conditions.
! Process the design.
! Generate alignments from PT codes.

LESSON 12 –
ROADCALC LESSON
REHABILITATION
WORK
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Defining the Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
12
Existing Pavement Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Entering the Design Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Processing Typical Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Running the Design Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Lesson 12 – RoadCalc Rehabilitation Work 279

Objectives
In this lesson:
! Create an existing pavement surface.
! Specify the profile.
! Process the typical section through the project.
! Examine the cross-sections.
! Look at the volumes generated.
Overview
In this tutorial, you look at some of the steps in RoadCalc™ one would use to perform rehabilitation
work. You look at an existing road that requires the pavement to be removed and replaced. To start
with, you specify parameters that allow you to quickly model the existing pavement. Once the existing
pavement material has been defined, you create a vertical profile that uniformly parallels your existing
pavement surface. You then process a typical section through the project, examine the resulting cross-
sections, and inspect the calculated pavement volumes.
It is assumed that you have already mastered some of the basic theories and procedures of
RoadCalc™. If you are new to RoadCalc™ and have not yet worked through Lesson 10 – RoadCalc
Rural Road on page 175, it is suggested that you do so prior to starting this lesson.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after having finished Lesson 11, you can skip this section and move
directly to the next section entitled Defining the Sub-project (below).
Defining the Sub-project

Before you begin, you must first define your roadway rehabilitation project within the Eagle Point
software. To accomplish this, perform the following steps.
1. Select File " New from the Eagle Point menu.

Rehabilitation Work
In this dialog box you are able to select the type of item you want to create.
2. Since you define a RoadCalc™ Sub-project, select RoadCalc Sub-project from the list.
3. Click on Next.
4. Type 003 in the Sub-project Number edit field and press the Tab key on your keyboard.
5. Type Rehabilitation Work in the Description edit field and press the Tab key on your
keyboard.
6. Select RoadCalc Metric Defaults from the Sub-project Prototype drop list.
7. Click on Next.
The New Sub-Project dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 12-3 New Sub-Project Dialog Box

8. Make sure the Use Project Drawing option is toggled on. Select Eagle Point Tutorial from the
project listing.
9. Click on Finish to complete the definition of this Sub-project.
The Open dialog box redisplays and your newly-defined Sub-project has been added to the project
listing.
10. To launch RoadCalc™, select the Rehabilitation Work Sub-project and click on OK.
Now that you have created a Sub-project definition, you can start exploring some of the more advanced
topics in RoadCalc™.
As mentioned earlier, this tutorial lesson assumes that you have already mastered some of the basic
theories and procedures of RoadCalc™. As a result, you skip some of the more basic topics so you can
focus on the primary differences used for rehabilitation work.
For this lesson, the horizontal alignment geometry has already been created. In Lesson 4 – Data
Collection Advanced Topics, which begins on page 49, you downloaded and reduced a file that
generated terrain, edges of pavement, and centerline shots. Your centerline alignment for this Sub-
project has been taken from the geometry produced in that lesson. You assume the Beginning of
Project station value for this Sub-project starts at 0+000.000 and the End of Project station value has
been determined to fall at 0+264.137.
The road that is going to be rehabilitated is the Foxfield Lane. The beginning of the project will be the
intersection with Forsythe Avenue and the existing pavement consists of the same design surfaces
specified in Lesson 11 – RoadCalc Urban Road (bituminous, curb, sidewalk, aggregate, and subgrade).
The first major goal of this lesson is to model existing pavement conditions. Before that can be done,
the alignment needs to be converted, the cross-sections need to be extracted every 20 meters from the
Original Ground surface model created in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, and the design
surfaces need to be created.
Existing Pavement Parameters

In this section you specify the parameters that define the original pavement surface that you replace.
The existing pavement that you are about to define can follow existing alignments so that the pavement
width can vary from cross-section to cross-section, or you can specify a uniform width for the existing
pavement. In your example, you specify uniform offsets from the surveyed centerline. Complete the
following steps to specify the parameters.
# An alignment must be created and a cross-section must be extracted before the Generate Subsurfaces
command can be implemented.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Generate Subsurfaces.

The Generate Subsurfaces dialog box (below) displays.
Rehabilitation Work
Figure 12-5 Generate Subsurfaces Dialog Box
This dialog box shows the existing stations where you have cross-section information. The Control
toggle allows you to specify which stations contain explicit data for the surfaces you wish to
generate. If you have two stations that are marked as control stations, the non-control cross-
sections between them are processed to contain interpolated values between the control stations.
2. Click on the Control toggle for Station 0+000 and Station 0+264.137 so that they have a
check mark. All of the other stations should have the Control toggle off.
3. Toggle the Use Existing Pavement option on.
The Parameters button become enabled. This option allows you to define the existing pavement
information.
4. Click on the Parameters button.
The Existing Pavement Parameters dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 12-6 Existing Pavement Parameters Dialog Box
The Existing Pavement Parameters dialog box shows multiple groups of three offsets (hereafter
referred to as a triplet) for each existing pavement data set you may have. While it is possible to
model more than one pavement triplet per cross-section (as may be the case when dealing with
divided highways), you supply data for a single stretch of existing pavement.
5. From the Station drop list, select station 0+000.
You now specify the three alignments for the original pavement to follow and the depth to use.
6. Click on the New Offsets button.

The New Offsets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 12-7 New Offsets Dialog Box
7. When the New Offsets dialog box displays, select the Offset option for the method.
The existing pavement is placed on offsets from the centerline.
8. For the Left offset, type -3.6. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Left offset.
9. For the Center offset, type 0. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Center offset.
10. For the Right offset, type 3.6. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Right offset.
11. Click on OK to save the settings for station 0+000 and close the New Offsets dialog box.
12. From the Station drop list, select station 0+264.137.
13. Click on the New Offsets button.
The New Offsets dialog box (Figure 12-7, above) displays.
14. Select the Offset option for the method.
15. For the Left offset, type -3.6. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Left offset.
16. For the Center offset, type 0. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Center offset.
17. For the Right offset, type 3.6. Enter 0.3 in the Depth edit field for the Right offset.
18. Click on OK to save the settings for station 0+264.137 and close the New Offsets dialog box.
19. Click on Close to close the Existing Pavement Parameters dialog box.
You should now have a check mark in the Control column for station 0+000 and 0+264.137. To
reiterate, the existing pavement subsurface is generated between these two controlling stations.
20. Click on OK in the Generate Subsurfaces dialog box (Figure 12-5 on page 283) to generate
the existing pavement surface.
You are prompted if it is all right to delete any subsurface data at non-control stations.
21. Click on Yes to indicate that it is OK to continue processing.
The figure below shows an example of the results when generating existing pavement.
Figure 12-8 Example of Generating Existing Pavement

Should any processing errors occur when generating subsurfaces, a Processing Warnings dialog
Rehabilitation Work
box may appear. You may elect to examine the results of this dialog box if you so choose. If the
Processing Warnings dialog box does appear, click on Close to dismiss it.
Now that you have generated the existing pavement section for this Sub-project, you are ready to
define the profile for the overlay. The next section outlines the steps necessary to create a profile that
parallels the original ground (existing pavement) elevations.
Entering the Design Profile

In this section, you define the Vertical Points of Intersection (VPI) for your typical section overlay.
Because this is an existing road surface and your overlay is of uniform thickness, you design your
profile to parallel the existing pavement surface.
2. From the Profile drop list on the Edit Profile Data dialog box, select Centerline.
The Centerline profile is what you are defining.
Figure 12-10 New VPI Dialog Box
4. Select By Station/Elevation from the Method drop list.

5. In the Station edit field, type 0+000.
This is the station for the first VPI (and was used because it is the first station in your cross-section
listing).
6. In the Elevation edit field, type 93.9.
# Throughout RoadCalc™, you may omit the entry of the plus (+) symbol when entering station values.
We have elected to supply the plus symbols in this lesson primarily for consistent notation.
7. Toggle the Parallel Original Ground option on.

This specifies that the typical section you define to parallel the original ground surface at a uniform
depth.
8. Type 0.05 in the At Depth edit field.
Since you are dealing with depth values, a positive depth value indicates the profile should be
below the existing surface. A negative depth value indicates the profile should be above the
existing surface.
9. Click on Apply to place the VPI.
You are now ready to supply the second VPI.
10. In the Station edit field, type 0+264.137.
This is the station for the second (and last) VPI (and was used because it is the last station in your
cross-section listing).
11. Toggle the Parallel Original Ground option on. Type 0.05 for the Depth.
RoadCalc™ models the design profile based on the existing profile information.
12. Click on Apply to place the VPI.
13. Click on Close to dismiss the New VPI dialog box.
14. Click on the Preview button to preview the profile you just defined.
The Preview Objects dialog box (below) displays.
As you can see from the preview, your design profile uniformly parallels the existing profile at a
depth of 0.05 meters.
15. Click on Close.

16. Click on Close to close the Edit Profile Data dialog box.
Rehabilitation Work
At this point, RoadCalc™ notifies you that the profile data has changed and prompts you if you
want to place the information into a CAD graphic.
Another alert dialog box may display indicating that the current CAD graphic (your plan view) has
changed. If this alert displays, click on Yes to save the changes. The profile information is placed
into the CAD graphic.
Once the information has been placed, control returns to the starting CAD graphic (your Plan view).
Another alert dialog box may display indicating that the current CAD graphic (your Profile view) has
changed. If this alert displays, click on Yes to save the changes. The plan CAD graphic is
redisplayed.
Now that you have defined the profile data for the overlay, you are now ready to process the overlay
typical section through the project.
Processing Typical Sections

You have defined your existing pavement section and design profile up to this point. Now you can
process your typical section that represents the overlay for the existing roadway. The typical section
that you process through the project has already been defined and is currently stored in the Typical
Section Manager. You examine this typical section and then define it for use in this rehabilitation
project.

You now retrieve the typical section that was created and stored in the Typical Section Library from
Lesson 11.
2. Click on the Typical Section Library button.

The Typical Section Library dialog box (below) displays.
3. Make sure the 2-lane Urban Road typical section is selected and click on the Copy From
Library button.
The Copy From Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 12-14 Copy From Library Dialog Box
Leave the destination (or target) name and description at their default values.
4. Click on OK to initiate the command and close the Copy From Library dialog box.
5. Click on Close.
Notice the 2-lane Urban Road typical section is listed in the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
6. Click on Close to dismiss the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
Setting up the Conditions Table

This section assumes that the Single 5:1 Slope defined in Lesson 11 currently exists within
RoadCalc™. If you skipped Lesson 11, you can substitute the “Single 5:1 H/V” slope that ships with
RoadCalc™ in place of the 5:1 Slope mentioned here. Similar to the steps you performed in Lesson 11,
you use the Single 5:1 Slope throughout this project. The detailed explanations about these steps can
be found in Lesson 11 and are not elaborated on here.

Rehabilitation Work
2. Select the New Condition Table icon on the Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
You have a condition table for Cut and Fill. In this case you use the 5:1 Slope for both.
3. In the Name edit field, type 5:1 Cut and Fill.
The Description button allows you to specify an extended description for the condition. You can skip
the extended description.
4. Make sure the Based on Depth Only option is toggled on and select Cut in the Material
Conditions grouping.
5. Click on the Modify Condition icon.

6. Verify that Slope Type is set to Single.

7. Change the Slope Name to be 5:1 Slope.
8. Verify that the At PT Code drop list is set to Outermost Point.
10. Select Fill in the Material Conditions grouping and click on the Modify Condition icon.
11. When the Modify Condition dialog box displays again, verify that Slope Type is set to Single.
12. Change the Slope Name to be 5:1 Slope.
14. Click on OK to commit this slope condition and dismiss the Modify Condition dialog box.
At this point, both the Cut and Fill conditions have been added to the condition table.
15. Click on OK in the New Condition Table dialog box.
16. Click on Close in the Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
Now that you have specified the slopes and the condition of when to use them, you are now ready to
specify where to use the three typical sections you have in the project.
Typical Section Locations

You indicate the location(s) along the project where this typical section should be applied.

Rehabilitation Work
2. Click on the New Typical Section Location icon.

3. In the Station edit field in the New Typical Section Location dialog box, type 0+000.
4. From the Typical Section drop list, select 2-lane Urban Road as the typical section.
5. From the Transition Type drop list, select Do not transition to the next station.
6. Click on OK to commit this location and close the New Typical Section Location dialog box.
Slope Condition Locations

Now that you have indicated where your typical section should be applied, you indicate the location(s)
of slope conditions that connect the typical section to the existing ground surface. You perform this task
so that RoadCalc™ is able to calculate the amount of Cut and Fill earthwork quantities for your
rehabilitation project.
1. Click on the New Condition Table Location icon in the Condition Locations section of the
Edit Design Locations dialog box (Figure 12-18, above).

The New Condition Table Location dialog box allows you to define locations where condition tables
are to be used. The Station Data section displays information on the beginning and ending stations
for the alignment, profile, and cross-section data for this project.
2. In the Station edit field, type 0+000.
3. From the Left Condition Table drop list, select the 5:1 Cut and Fill option.
4. From the Right Condition Table drop list, select the 5:1 Cut and Fill option.
5. Click on OK to commit this condition table and close the New Condition Table dialog box.
6. Click on Close to close the Edit Design Locations dialog box.
Running the Design Information

Now that you have supplied all of the pertinent data about your design to RoadCalc™, you assemble
this data so you can later examine the results to determine if your design criteria produced acceptable
results.
2. In the Starting Station edit field, type 0+000.

3. In the Ending Station edit field, type 0+264.137.

4. Turn on the Use Design Locations radio button.
Rehabilitation Work
This option enables the data to be processed without interruption.
This applies the typical sections and slopes to the cross-sections based on the alignment and
profile you have specified.
Once the data has been processed, the Processing Warnings dialog box (Figure 12-22, below) may
display. This dialog box summarizes the different types of conflicts that can result when the design
data is assembled. Should this dialog box display, it often is in your best interest to examine the
cross-section locations that generated the warnings and adjust the design criteria if desired.
7. Click on the Describe button to get more detailed information on the warnings that are
reported.
8. After you have looked at the descriptions, click on Close to dismiss the Processing
Warnings dialog box.
Now that you have processed the typical section through the project, you examine the integrity of the
cross-sections.
Take a moment to review the cross-section information.

2. Sequentially select the cross-sections in your Station list and inspect the thumbnail preview
of each cross-section.
3. When you are satisfied with the results, click on Close to dismiss the Edit Cross-Section
Data dialog box.
Volumes
Now that you have reviewed your cross-sections, you inspect pavement and earthwork volumes. If you
recall, earlier in this lesson you generated a surface called Existing Pavement. Since this material is a
member of your original surfaces, its volumes are reported in the design earthwork volume calculations.
The pavement material that was placed with the typical section (the design pavement material) is
reported in the Pavement Volumes report.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Output " Volumes.

The Volume Reports dialog box (below) displays.
Rehabilitation Work
Figure 12-24 Volume Reports Dialog Box
2. From the Volume Type drop list, select the Design Earthwork option.
The Design Earthwork values are displayed.
Notice that one of the materials displayed is named ExistPavement. This is the volume of the
material between the existing pavement surface you defined earlier and is your topmost original
ground surface.
3. After you have looked at the values for the existing pavement volumes, select the Pavement
option from the Volume Type drop list.
The pavement volumes are now displayed.
Notice that the volumes, pay units, and cost for each material are reported at each station.
4. To change the conversion factor, pay units, and unit cost for each material, click on the Pay
Units button.
The Pay Units Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 12-25 Pay Units Settings Dialog Box

5. Click on the Pavement tab.
In this dialog box you are able to change the Conversion Factor, Pay Unit Label, and Unit Cost for
each material. The Conversion Factor allows you to convert quantities from cubic meters to some
other quantity of measure.
6. Enter the values in the table below for the Pay Units:
Material Conversion Factor Pay Unit Label Unit Cost

Curb 4.292 Lineal Meter 49.00
7. After you have made the changes to the values, click on OK to commit the changes and
close the Pay Units Settings dialog box.
Notice the changes to the Cost and Quantity of the material.
8. Click on Close to close the Volume Reports dialog box.
You have just gone through the process of creating existing pavement, creating a profile that parallels
the existing ground, processing a typical section pavement overlay through the project, and finally
looking at the resulting cross-sections and volumes. This concludes Lesson 12 – RoadCalc
Rehabilitation Work. Additional information on RoadCalc™ may be found in Lessons 10 and 11, as well
as in the on-line help and on-line documentation.
Summary
! Create an existing pavement surface.
! Specify the profile.
! Use a typical section created from another project.
! Examine the cross-sections.
! Look at the volumes generated.

LESSON 13 –
SURFACE MODELING LESSON
ADVANCED TOPICS
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
13
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Setting Up a Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Triangulate Surface Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Merging Surface Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Creating and Annotating Contours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Lesson 13 – Surface Modeling Advanced Topics 297

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Set up a surface model for the Turtle Creek Court project.
! Create a surface model of the Turtle Creek Court project.
! Set up a merged surface model definition.
! Merge surface models together.
! Create and annotate contours of the merged surface.
Overview
In this lesson you go through the steps needed to merge surface models together to produce finished
contours for your site. The proposed surface model is created from breaklines produced in a previous
lesson. Then you merge several surface modules together to create a final surface module. After this
model is created, you create final contours and annotate them. See Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling
Basics, which begins on page 123, as well as the on-line Help or documentation for more information
on Surface Modeling.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after finishing Lesson 12, you can skip this section and move directly to
the next section, Setting Up a Surface Model (below).
Setting Up a Surface Model

To create a surface model, the first thing that needs to happen is creating and defining the properties
that control the surface model itself. When you are creating a new surface, parameters can be specified
for the model that include its description, minimum and maximum elevation range, and contour
intervals. To create and define a new surface model, complete the following steps.
1. From the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Surface Modeling.
The Surface Modeling menu bar is launched.
2. From the Surface Modeling menu bar, select Prepare " Manage Surface Models.

Modeling Advanced
Topics
4. Type Turtle Creek Court into the Description edit field of the New Surface Model dialog
box.
5. Type the information into the appropriate edit fields in the Surface Model tab of the New
Surface Model dialog box as shown in the figure above, pressing the Tab key on your
keyboard to move from one field to the next.
6. Click on OK to commit the Surface Model settings.
Notice that the surface model called Turtle Creek Court has been added to the list of available
surface models.
Take a moment to define another surface model. You use this additional surface model later to
contain “merged” conditions for your site. In other words, you combine several surface models
together to form a single yet comprehensive representation of your designed site. Since this model
may be used for extensive analysis later on, you are indicating how its data should be presented.
The New Surface Model dialog box (above) displays.
8. Type Merged Surface in the Description edit field.

9. Enter the information on the Surface Model tab of the dialog box as shown in the figure
below. Press the Tab key to move between fields after the appropriate information has been
entered.
10. Click on the CAD Settings icon on the Surface Model Tab.
11. Set the options to those shown in the table below.
Layer MERGED-TIN Level 47
Color 1 Color 0
12. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the dialog box.
13. Click on Apply in the New Surface Model dialog box to save the settings for this model.

14. Click on the Contours tab in the New Surface Model dialog box. Enter the information as
shown in the figure below to define the contour information for this surface model. Press
the Tab key to move between the various fields.
Modeling Advanced
Topics
15. Click on Apply to save the settings for the contours.

16. Click on the CAD Settings icon on the Contours tab and set the options to the values given
below.
Index Contours
Layer MERGED-IDX Level 20
Color 1 Color 6
Width 0 Weight 0
Intermediate Contours
Layer MERGED-INT Level 21
Color 2 Color 7
Width 0 Weight 0

User-Defined Contours
Layer MERGED-USR Level 22
Color 4 Color 8
Line Type BYLAYER STYLE 0
Width 0 Weight 0
17. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box and click on Apply in the New Surface Model
dialog box.
18. Click on the Elevation Labels tab on the New Surface Model dialog box. Supply the
parameters for the Elevation Labels as shown in the figure below. Press the Tab key to move
between the various fields.
19. Click on Apply to save the settings in the Elevation Labels tab.

20. Click on the Rectangular Grid tab in the New Surface Model dialog box. Enter the
information as shown in the figure below.
Modeling Advanced
Topics
Figure 13-7 New Surface Model Dialog Box – Rectangular Grid Tab
21. Click on the CAD Settings icon to specify the CAD settings for the rectangular grid.
22. Enter the settings in the CAD Settings dialog box as shown in the table below.
CAD Settings
Layer MERGED-GRD Level 48
Color 30 Color 1
23. Click on OK to commit these settings and close the CAD Settings dialog box.
24. Click on OK to close the New Surface Model dialog box.
The merged surface model has been added to the manager.
25. Click on Close to close the Manage Surface Models dialog box.
Now that you have added your two surface models, you are ready to create the Turtle Creek Court
surface model.
Triangulate Surface Model

Until now, you have been getting ready to make the surface model. In this section of the lesson, you
actually triangulate breaklines in the CAD graphic to create a surface model.
1. To simplify the selection of your breakline objects, perform the following layer/level
manipulations based on your CAD product.

Current Breaklines Current 5
Freeze ALL Off ALL
2. If you are using AutoCAD/BricsCad, continue with step 3. If you are using MicroStation, you
must first place a fence around the breaklines, then continue with step 3.
3. From the Surface Modeling menu, select Triangulate " Surface Model.
4. Select Turtle Creek Court from the Surface Model drop list in the Triangulate Surface Model
dialog box.
5. Make sure None is selected from the Boundary and Void regions drop lists.
6. For the Display Model, Use External Point File(s), Display Selected Objects Details, and
Place Triangles options, make sure they are all toggled off.
For a detailed description of these options, please refer to Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics,
which begins on page 123, Surface Modeling on-line help, or documentation.
process.
8. AutoCAD/BricsCad: Window around the breaklines in the CAD graphic as shown below.
Figure 13-8 Window Breaklines Example
The program triangulates the breaklines and creates the surface model.
9. Click on Close.
Merging Surface Models

Now that you have actually created the surface model of Turtle Creek Court, you could merge this
model into the original ground surface model. However, if you recall from Lesson 9 – Site Design, which
begins on page 151, you balanced the volumes for a building pad surface model. This information is

contained within the Balanced Model definition. You would like to merge the data found in the Turtle
Creek Court and the balanced model with the original ground surface model. Once this has been
accomplished, you create contours of the composite model.
1. From the Surface Modeling menu, select Triangulate " Merged Surface Models.
Modeling Advanced
Topics
Figure 13-9 Triangulate Merged Surface Models Dialog Box
When merging surface models together, you have two methods to choose from, Single or Multiple.
The Single Merge option allows you to combine two surfaces (an original and a final surface) into a
third composite surface (the merged surface). The source models are not altered in any way. The
contents of the final surface can be adjacent to, overlapping with or enclosed by the original surface
data. In the area(s) that the models have in common, the final surface data takes precedence. If the
edges of the final surface model do not exactly tie into the original surface data, (i.e., they have
different elevations), they are combined with vertical planes.
The Multiple Merge option follows the same general conventions as the single option, except you
can select multiple final surfaces for the merge process. The surface models are merged to the
original surface model in the order that they are selected. The contents of the final surface can be
adjacent to, overlapping with, or enclosed by the original surface data.
2. Select Original Ground from the Original Surface drop list.
3. To select multiple final surfaces, select Multiple from the Merge Options drop list.
This enables the Multiple Models button.
4. Click on the Multiple Models button.
The Multiple Final Surface Models dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 13-10 Multiple Final Surface Models Dialog Box
5. Select Balanced Model and click on the Add button.

6. Select Turtle Creek Court and click on the Add button.
Again, when merging multiple surfaces, the final surfaces are combined with the original surface
from the top of the ordered final surfaces list. If you need to adjust the order of your list, you can
select a model and then click on the Up or Down arrows to adjust this order.
7. Click on OK to commit this list and close the Multiple Final Surface Models dialog box.
8. Select Merged Surface from the Merged Surface drop list.
9. Click on Apply to initiate the merging process.
10. Once the merging process has completed, click on Close in the Triangulate Merged Surface
Models dialog box.
Creating and Annotating Contours

As a means to illustrate the results of your merged surface, you create and annotate some contours for
the merged surface.
1. MicroStation users, turn on levels 20, 21, and 22.
2. In Surface Modeling, select Contours " Make Intermediate & Index.
The Make Intermediate & Index Contours dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 13-11 Make Intermediate & Index Contours Dialog Box
3. Select Merged Surface from the Surface Model drop list.

4. Leave the Use Screen Display, User-defined Boundary and Erase Existing Contours for this
Surface toggles off.
Please see Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, which begins on page 123, the Surface
Modeling documentation, or on-line Help for a description of each of these options.
5. Click on Apply on the Make Intermediate & Index Contours dialog box to create the contours
in the CAD graphic.
6. Click on Close.

The figure below displays a portion of the site with the contours that have been created.
Modeling Advanced
Topics
Figure 13-12 Example of Contours Created
Now you are ready to annotate the contours in the CAD graphic. You explored one possible method
of contour annotation in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, which begins on page 123. Now you
explore another option.
7. In Surface Modeling, select Contours " Annotate.
The Annotate Contours dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 13-13 Annotate Contours Dialog Box

9. Make sure Index is the only option that is toggled on in the Contours section as you only
annotate the index contours.
10. Toggle on the Interval option in the Method section.
11. Type 200 in the Interval edit field.
This instructs Surface Modeling to place a piece of contour annotation every 200 meters along a
contour.
12. Click on the Annotation Settings button.

The Annotate Contour Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 13-14 Annotate Contour Settings Dialog Box
13. Make sure Middle is selected from the Annotation Location drop list.
14. Toggle on the Place Symbol Around Annotation option.
15. Make sure Rectangle is selected from the Symbol list.
16. Make sure the Break Contour Annotation option is toggled on.
17. Click on OK to commit these settings and close the Annotate Contour Settings dialog box.
18. MicroStation users draw a fence around the contours you want to annotate and change the
Fence Mode to Overlap.
19. Click on Apply in the Annotate Contours dialog box to initiate the contour annotation
routine.
AutoCad/BricsCad users are prompted to select the objects you wish to annotate.
20. Select all objects within the CAD graphic.
Those items that are not contours for this surface are ignored.
21. Thaw the layer Annot_contour layer or turn on level 23.
22. Zoom in around an area that was annotated.
The figure below shows an example of the annotation. This may differ from what you have.
Since we do not need the contours in the rest of the tutorial, we are going to delete them. This helps
keep the drawing at a reasonable size.
23. In Surface Modeling, select Output " Erase Existing objects.
24. From the Surface Model drop list select Merged Surface.
25. Toggle on Contours and Contour Annotation. Make sure the rest are toggled off and click on
Apply.
Figure 13-15 Example of Annotated Area

This concludes Lesson 13 – Surface Modeling Advanced Topics. Additional Surface Modeling
commands are discussed in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, which begins on page 123. Also
refer to the Surface Modeling documentation or on-line Help for more detailed explanations of the
individual commands.
Summary
Modeling Advanced
! Set up a surface for the Turtle Creek Court project.
! Create a surface model of the Turtle Creek Court project.
Topics
! Set up a merged surface model definition.
! Merge surface models together.
! Create and annotate contours of the merged surface.

LESSON 14 – STORM
SEWERS LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Create a Storm Sewer Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Drawing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Creating Libraries of Standard Network Components. . . . . . . . . . 315
Establishing Network Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
14
Creating a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Rainfall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Storm Sewer Network Design and Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers 311

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Create libraries with standard Storm Sewers Structures, Inlets, and Pipes.
! Create a new Storm Sewers Network.
! Edit the Network junctions, pipes and flows.
! Create a Rainfall library.
! Design pipes for full flow a during a 10 year storm event.
! Examine the Hydraulic profile for the network.
! Prepare Plan & Profile sheets.
! Print out a Storm Sewers Report.
Overview
In this lesson, you continue the design for the Parkland Estates Subdivision, designing a storm sewer to
serve Turtle Creek Court. The lesson covers many of the commands available in the Eagle Point Storm
Sewers module.
Figure 14-1 Turtle Creek & Parkland Estates Subdivision, Storm Sewer System
Getting Started
You should perform the steps in the sections listed below to bring the tutorial data files up to date for
this lesson. If you have not already done so, follow each of the steps discussed in the following sections
of Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point, which begins on page 5.

Create a Storm Sewer Sub-project
The first step is to create a Storm Sewers Sub-project. In any single project you can have numerous
Storm Sewers Sub-projects, each containing a single network. A network is defined as a combination
of structures and connecting pipes that have a single outfall. The outfall is connected to the first network
junction by a single pipe from which the network may continue or branch and expand.
With the sewer sub-projects, instead of using the main drawing, you are going to use a drawing called
Sewers. This drawing references the Civtutor drawing. This allows you to work in a smaller drawing, but
still lets you use the surface models that were created in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
In this dialog box you are able to select what type of project or Sub-project you want to create.
Next, you define a Storm Sewers Sub-project.
2. Select Storm Sewers Sub-project from the list box and click on Next.
The Storm Sewers Sub-project dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-3 Storm Sewers Sub-project Dialog Box
In this dialog box, you select the project to which to attach the Sub-project. You are able to specify
the Sub-project number, description, and prototype setting for this new Storm Sewer Sub-project.
3. Select the Eagle Point Tutorial from the Project List list box.
4. Type 01 in the Sub-project Number edit field.
5. Type Turtle Creek Court Storm in the Description edit field.

6. Select Storm Sewers Metric Defaults from the Sub-project Prototype drop list.
7. Click on Next.
8. Turn on the Use New Drawing radio button.

9. Click on the folder to the right of Additional Drawing and navigate to the PROJECT folder. (If
your tutorial data is in a different location, navigate to the appropriate folder. See Getting
Started on page 7 for more information.)
If you are running Eagle Point for MicroStation, the word “Drawing” in the New Sub-project dialog
box displays as “Design File.”
10. Select the CAD graphic file (sewers) and click on Open.
11. Click on Finish.
The Open dialog box (below) displays with the new Storm Sewers Sub-project, entitled Turtle
Creek Storm added to the list.
12. Select the Turtle Creek Storm Sub-project and click on OK.

The Storm Sewers menu bar displays and the project drawing becomes active. The menu bar
consists of three areas: the top bar, the menu list, and the icons representing commands in the
menu list.
Figure 14-6 Storm Sewers Menu Bar
Drawing Setup
To get the drawing set up to create the network, some layers or levels need to be turned off or on.
AutoCAD/BricsCad users freeze all layers except for STSCHEMATIC and CIVTUTOR|LOTLINES.
MicroStation users for Active Design make level 25 current and turn off level 26; for Civtutor, turn off all
Lesson 14 – Storm
levels except for level 13.
Sewers
Creating Libraries of Standard Network Components.
This portion of the lesson demonstrates libraries. Libraries are used to store standard components for a
Storm Sewer system. Three types of libraries are available: Structure, Inlet, and Pipe. Customization of
the libraries allows you to show local manufactured details or standard details for the your storm sewer
system. Created libraries are stored in the Eagle Point support directories and are available for use in
other projects or by other workstations.
While you use the libraries in the tutorial, they are not necessary to the creation, design, and modeling
of a storm sewer network. The libraries created in this tutorial differ from the catch basins, manholes,
grates, and pipes available in your area and are intended for demonstrational and informational use
only.
A storm sewer is a combination of components. The Outfall, Structures, Pipes and Inlets represent
these components. Structures, such as catch basins and manholes, represent the point of entry for
runoff and junctions, bends or ends of conveyance conduits. Inlets represent the openings into the
storm sewer and the geometry of the grate, openings, and surrounding surfaces.
In the beginning of this section, you setup libraries for the components used in a storm sewer system.
The library information created in this section is available in the current project, Sub-projects, and any
future projects.
Structure Library
In this section, you create six typical structures, two catch basins, and four manholes, for use in this
tutorial. The first two structures are created as new library items and the last four are created by making
copies and modifying existing structures in the library.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Structure Library.

The Structure Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-7 Structure Library Dialog Box
Three default structures–Elbow, Circle, and Box–setup in Imperial English units, are listed in the
Structure Library dialog box (Figure 14-7). For this lesson, you create a number of standard
sections for use in the system design.
2. Click on the New Structure icon.
The New Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-8 New Structure Dialog Box
3. Type Type 1 CB in the Description edit field.

This becomes the name for your first box catch-basin structure.
4. Select Box from the Section Type drop list.
5. Type 0.609 meters (24 inches inside) in the Length edit field.
6. Type 0.4572 meters (18 inches inside) in the Width edit field.
7. Type 0.1016 meters (4 inches) in the Wall Thickness edit field.
8. Type 0 in the Sump Depth edit field.
9. Type 0.75 in the Junction Loss edit field.
10. Toggle off the QTO Item ID option.
11. Click on OK.
The New Structure dialog box closes.
Type 1 CB is now shown in the list box in the Structure Library dialog box.
The New Structure dialog box (above) displays.
13. Type Type 2 48 in the Description edit field.
14. Select Circular from the Section Type drop list.

15. Type 1.22 (48 inches inside) in the Diameter edit field.
16. Type 0.1016 (4 inches) in the Wall Thickness edit field.
17. Type 0 in the Sump Depth edit field.
19. Toggle off the QTO Item ID option.
20. Click on OK.
The New Structure dialog box closes.
The Type 2 48 structure is added to the library.
Next, you add the remaining four structures to your library using the copy and modify structure
commands.
21. Select Type 1 CB in the Structure Library list box.
22. Click on the Copy Structure icon.
The Copy Junction/Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-9 Copy Junction/Structure Dialog Box
23. Type Type 1L CB in the Copy to Description edit field.

24. Click on OK.
The Copy Junction/Structure dialog box closes.
The information from the Type 1 CB is copied into another structure that can then be modified.
25. Select Type 1L CB in the list box.
26. Click on the Modify Structure icon.
The Modify Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-10 Modify Structure Dialog Box
This dialog box shows the information for the structure that was copied from the original Type 1 CB
and needs to be changed as you do in steps 27 through 29 to reflect the differences in the Type 1L
CB.
27. Type 0.609 in the Width edit field.
29. Click on OK.

The Modify Structure dialog box closes.
The information for the Type 1L CB has been revised to reflect less loss and a wider size.
30. Select Type 2 48 in the Structure Library list box.
The Copy Junction/Structure dialog box (Figure 14-9 on page 317) displays.
32. Type Type 2 54 in the Copy to Description edit field.
33. Click on OK.
The information from the Type 2 48 is copied into another structure that can be modified.
34. Select Type 2 54 in the list box.
The Modify Structure dialog box (Figure 14-10 on page 317) displays.
37. Type 1.37 in the Diameter edit field.
38. Type 0.152 in the Wall Thickness edit field.
39. Type 0.305 in the Sump edit field.
41. Click on OK.
45. Click on OK.
50. Type 0.152 in the Thickness edit field.
53. Click on OK.
54. Select Type 2 54 from the list box.
55. Click on the Copy Structure icon to copy and modify the fourth structure.
57. Click on OK.

58. Select the Type 2 96 in the list box.
60. Select Circular from the Section Type edit field.
62. Type 0.152 in the Thickness edit field.
65. Click on OK.
You are finished copying and modifying structures. The Structure Library dialog box (below)
displays and reflects the changes you made in this lesson.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-11 Structure Library Dialog Box – Completed
66. Click on Close.

The Structure Library dialog box closes.
Now that you have successfully completed changes to the Structure Library, proceed with the next
section which explains how to specify inlets for the Inlet Library, the second command on the
Network menu.
Inlet Library
In this section, you work with the Inlet Library command found within the Network menu.
Creating the Inlet Library allows you to specify the dimensions for standard grates and inlets. This
information is copied into the network and can be modified for each junction, if necessary, to reflect the
actual conditions.
The standard inlets you create for this lesson consist of two inlets comprised of three components. A
single Type M1 Flat Grate inlet for non-sag areas and a combination of the Type M1 Flat Grate and
Curb opening for sag areas.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Inlet Library.

The Inlet Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-12 Inlet Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Inlet icon located on the Inlet dialog box.
The New Inlet dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-13 New Inlet Dialog Box
3. Type Type M1 Flat Grate in the Description edit field.

This is the name for your standard Inlet.
4. For the Inlet Computation options, turn on the Grade radio button.
5. In the Pavement Parameters group, type 0.2 in the Longitudinal Slope edit field.
6. Type 0.016 in the Manning’s “n” edit field.
7. Type 0.020 in the Cross Slope edit field.
8. In the Gutter Parameters group, type 0.040 in the Cross Slope edit field.
9. Type 12.7 in the Local Depression edit field.
10. Type 0.45 in the Width edit field.
11. Click on the Details button.

The Grate Inlet dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Figure 14-14 Grate Inlet Dialog Box
Since the grate is of a standard length and type, the information is entered in this dialog box for use
Sewers
in modeling of the designed system.
12. Select the P-50 x 100 Grate from the Grate Type drop list.
13. Type 0.479 in the Grate Length edit field.
14. Type 0.45 in the Grate Width edit field.
15. Click on OK.
The Grate Inlet dialog box closes and the New Inlet dialog box (Figure 14-13 on page 320) displays
again.
16. Click on OK in the New Inlet dialog box.
The New Inlet dialog box closes and the Inlet Library dialog box displays again ready for the Copy
and Modify Inlets section of this lesson. The Type M1 Flat Grate is now listed in the Inlet Library
dialog box list box.
Copy and Modify Inlets

For the second inlet you make a copy of the new Type M1 inlet and modify the copy to be in sag and to
include a curb opening as described in the following steps.
1. Select the Type M1 Flat Grate Inlet from the Inlet Library dialog box.
2. Click on the Copy Inlet command icon.
The Copy Inlet dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-15 Copy Inlet Dialog Box
3. Type Type M1 Sag with Curb Inlet in the Copy to Description edit field.
4. Click on OK.

The Copy Inlet dialog box closes and the Inlet Library dialog box displays again.
5. Select Type M1 Flat with Curb Inlet Sag from the list box.
6. Click on the Modify Inlet icon.
The Modify Inlet dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-16 Modify Inlet Dialog Box
7. Turn on the Sag radio button for the Inlet Computation option.
8. Select Combo Curb & Grate from the Inlet Type drop list.
9. Click on the Details button.
The Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-17 Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details Dialog Box – Design Parameters Tab
10. Select the Curb Inlet tab.

The Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details dialog box – Curb Inlet tab (below) moves to the front and
becomes active.
Figure 14-18 Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details Dialog Box – Curb Inlet Tab
Lesson 14 – Storm
11. Type 0.479 in the Curb Opening Length edit field.
Sewers
12. Select Vertical from the Curb Throat Type drop list.
13. Type 102 in the Inlet Throat Width edit field.
14. Select the Grate Inlet tab.
The Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details dialog box – Grate Inlet tab (below) moves to the front and
becomes active.
Figure 14-19 Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details Dialog Box – Grate Inlet Tab
15. Type 50.0 in the Clogging Factor edit field.

This is an assumed worst case design condition for the sub-division storm sewer system.
16. Click on OK.
The Combo Curb & Grate Inlet Details dialog box closes and the Modify Inlet dialog box (Figure 14-
16 on page 322) displays again.
17. Click on OK.
The Modify Inlet dialog box closes and the Inlet Library dialog box displays again.

Two new inlets are now listed in the Inlet Library dialog box list box as you see below. The Type M1
Sag with Inlet information has been has been revised in the Inlet Library dialog box list box to reflect
a Combo Type inlet in Sag.
Figure 14-20 Inlet Library Dialog Box
18. Click on Close.

The Inlet Library dialog box closes.
Pipe Library
In this section, you work with the Pipe Library command found on the Network menu.
Creating the pipe library allows the user to specify dimensions and descriptions to be used for pipes in
the storm sewer system. This allows you to customize pipes to reflect a description that may be more
specific than the normal material and diameter. Like the other library information the Pipe Library is
copied into the Sub-project network which can be modified for any reach or junction to reflect actual
conditions.
Two default pipes are shipped with Eagle Point software to provide a starting library. In this section, you
create two pipes.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Pipe Library.
The Pipe Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-21 Pipe LIbrary Dialog box
2. Click on the New Pipe icon.

The New Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-22 New Pipe Dialog Box
3. Type Walts 18" Equivalent in the Description edit field.

5. Select HDPE from the Pipe Material drop list.
6. Type 457 in the Diameter edit field.
7. Make sure the Manning’s “n” value is 0.013.
Lesson 14 – Storm
8. Click on OK.
Sewers
The New Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog box displays again. The Walts 18"
Equivalent pipe is added to the Pipe Library dialog box list box.
Copy and Modify Pipe

In this section, you create a copy of Walts 18" Equivalent pipe and modify the diameter to be Walts 12"
Equivalent.
1. In the Pipe Library dialog box, select the Walts 18" Equivalent in the list box.
2. Click on the Copy Pipe icon.
The Copy Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-23 Copy Pipe Dialog Box
3. Type Walts 12" Equivalent in the Copy to Description edit field.

4. Click on OK.
The Copy Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog box displays again.
5. Select Walts 12" Equivalent in the list box.

The Modify Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-24 Modify Pipe Dialog Box
7. Type 305 in the Diameter edit field to overwrite the existing value.
8. Click on OK.
The Modify Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog box displays with the updated pipe
descriptions and information.
9. Click on Close.
The Pipe Library dialog box closes.
Establishing Network Settings

In this portion of the lesson, you set the network settings that control annotation for the junctions and
pipes in both plan and profiles. You also reset the default CAD settings for the graphic elements and
text. There are six separate areas of settings that can be changed in the Network Settings dialog box;
however, in this lesson you change only a few of the settings.
Network Settings – Display

1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Settings.
The Network Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-25 Network Settings Dialog Box

2. Click on the Display tab.
3. Review the settings in the Thaw/Freeze group that control which object(s) are visible in the
CAD display.
4. Make sure the Elevation of Network Shadow is set to 0.00.
The 2-D plan elements is drawn at this elevation.
Lesson 14 – Storm
6. Review the available settings for controlling the CAD display and click on OK.
Sewers
7. Click on the Text CAD Settings icon.
8. Review the default settings for text placement and ensure that the height setting is greater
than 0.00 to make text visible.
9. Click on OK.
The Text CAD Settings dialog box closes and the Network Settings dialog box (Figure 14-25 on
page 326) displays again.
Network Settings – Profile

1. Select the Profile tab in the Network Settings dialog box.

The Profile tab on the Network Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-28 Network Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab
2. Select Center to Center – Pipe Length from the Profile Pipe Length Annotation drop list.
3. Turn on the Center to Center radio button for the Profile Pipe Slope Annotation.
4. Click on Apply.
The Network Settings dialog box remains open and the values you entered are applied.
Network Settings – Precision

1. Select the Precision tab in the Network Settings dialog box.
The Precision tab on the Network Settings Precision dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-29 Network Settings Dialog Box – Precision Tab
2. Type 1 in the Flows edit field.

3. Type 2 in the Velocity edit field.
4. Type 2 in the Slopes edit field.
5. Type 3 in the Pipe Dimensions edit field.
6. Type 3 in the Losses edit field.
7. Type 2 in the Rainfall edit field.

8. Type 2 in the HEC-22 Parameters edit field.
9. Click on Apply.
The values you entered are applied.
10. Click on OK.
The Network Settings dialog box closes.
Eagle Point Precision Settings

Control of the precision for length labels are set by linear precision in the System menu on the Eagle
Point menu bar. In this section, follow the steps to check this setting which are similar to those found in
Lesson 1: Precision on page 13.
1. In Eagle Point, select System " Precision.
The Precision dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers

3. Type 3 in the Distance edit field.
4. Type 3 in the Northing/Easting edit field.
5. Type 3 in the Elevation edit field.
6. Click on Apply.
The values you entered are applied.
7. Click on OK.
The Precision dialog box closes.
Network Settings – HEC-22

In this lesson, you accept the default settings and continue to the annotation dialog boxes.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Settings.
The Network Settings dialog box (Figure 14-25 on page 326) displays.
2. Select the HEC-22 tab.

The HEC-22 tab on the Network Settings dialog box (below) displays. These are the default
descriptions for the inlets that are used in the reports.
Figure 14-31 Network Settings Dialog Box – HEC-22 Tab
3. Click on Apply.
The default settings are accepted and the Network Settings dialog box remains open.
Settings – Junction Annotation

The Junction Annotation tab on the Network Settings dialog box (below) controls the annotation
settings for labeling at junctions. The information for justification, Delta X, and Delta Y are set to the
final plot scales set in the Tools menu in the main Eagle Point menu bar. Notice that the CAD Settings
icons are available on the Junction Annotation tab for customizing the graphic elements created in
Storm Sewers.
1. Select the Junction Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box.
The Junction Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-32 Network Settings Dialog Box – Junction Annotation Tab
2. Select Junction Description from the Item drop list.

This drop list allows you to see the annotation available for junctions as well as verify the current
setting.
3. Toggle on Place Annotation.

4. Click on Apply.
The settings you entered are applied.
5. Select Invert Elevations from the Item drop List.
7. Type []=Inv.<> in the Label edit field.
8. Click on Apply.
9. Select Rim Elevation from the Item drop list.
11. Click on Apply.
Network Settings – Pipe Annotation

The Pipe Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box (below) controls the settings for pipe
Lesson 14 – Storm
annotation. The information for justification, Delta X and Delta Y are set to the final plot scales set in the
Tools menu in the main Eagle Point menu bar.
Sewers
1. Select the Pipe Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box.
The Pipe Annotation tab on the Network Settings Pipe Annotation dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-33 Network Settings Dialog Box – Pipe Annotation Tab
2. Select Pipe Description from the Item drop list.

3. Select Above from the Placement drop list.
4. Click on Apply.
5. Select Length from the Item drop list.
6. Click on Apply.
The settings are applied.
7. Select Size from the Item drop list.
8. Type <> dia in the Label edit field.
9. Select Below from the Placement drop list.

10. Click on Apply.
11. Select Material from the Item drop list.
13. Click on Apply.
14. Click on OK.
Creating a Network
In this portion of the of the lesson, you create a Storm Sewer Network similar to that shown in the
Turtle Creek Storm Sewer Schematic (below). The Storm Sewer system is designed to service the new
Turtle Creek Court and intercept the discharge from the two existing storm sewers for Radford Road
and Foxfield Lane. A variety of methods to lay the network out are used and modifications are done to
provide some examples of the software’s flexibility.
Figure 14-34 Turtle Creek Storm Sewer Schematic
Locate Outfall
The point of discharge or outfall for a Storm Sewer network is defined in the Locate Outfall dialog box
(Figure 14-35 on page 333). The coordinates for the outfall are identified in three dimensions with the
ability to extract the elevation from a surface model. Follow the steps in this lesson.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Locate Outfall.

The Locate Outfall dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-35 Locate Outfall Dialog Box
2. Click in the Northing or the Easting edit field.

The PIC button becomes active.
To define the Northing and Easting values for an outfall, two methods for location selection are
available: selecting a point graphically or entering a numeric value via the keyboard entry, both
explained in step 3.
Lesson 14 – Storm
3. Determine the location by selecting one of the options below.
Sewers
A. To graphically select the Northing and Easting points, click on the active PIC button.
You are prompted:
Select a point.
Select a point near the location, labeled Outfall Location shown in the Turtle Creek Storm
Sewer Schematic (Figure 14-34 on page 332). The coordinates for this point are 50098.0 N,
417856.0 E.
B. To enter the Northing and Easting points on your keyboard, type 50098.0 in the
Northing edit field and 417856.0 in the Easting edit field.
The point selected in steps A and B is roughly 30.5 meters west of the northwest corner of the
Subdivision.
Next, you establish surface or rim elevation at the outfall by either entering a value or inheriting the
value from a surface model. The surface model can be either in this project or other Eagle Point
projects. For this lesson, you inherit the value from the surface model.
4. Type 68.0 in the Invert Elevation edit field.
5. Click on OK.
In the CAD graphic, a symbol representing the outfall is placed.
Create Network
In creating the network, you start by placing three junctions and pipes–MH 1, MH 2, and MH 3–between
the outfall. Pipes are placed between the downstream junction and the new upstream junction using the
parameters for the pipe and junction specified in the Create Network dialog box (Figure 14-36 on page
334). Refer to the Turtle Creek Storm Sewer Schematic (Figure 14-34 on page 332) for the junction
network alignment information.
The remaining network is created by using the Convert Objects to Reach command found on the
Network menu and described in Convert Objects to Reach/Network on page 335. Lines representing
the pipe alignment are selected and reaches of pipes and junctions are automatically added to the
network. Editing of the network, which is described in Editing the Network Junctions on page 339, is
done to fine-tune the system layout.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Create Network.

The Create Network dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-36 Create Network Dialog Box
From the Network Outfall to the first junction, only a single pipe can be used. You may wish to
window into the area to make selection of the junction locations easier and pan in CAD with each
junction selection. The information used in the first three pipes is contained in Junction Input
Information Table on page 335.
2. Select Outfall from the Junction drop list in the Downstream Connection group.
3. Type Pipe <> in the Pipe Description edit field and set the number in the adjacent edit field
to 1.
4. Select Design from the Pipe drop list.
Expanding the Pipe drop list shows those pipes currently in the Pipe Library. To the right of the Pipe
drop list is the Pipe Library icon that displays the Pipe Library dialog box as shown in Figure 14-21
on page 324.
5. Verify that the Junction Description edit field is MH <> and the number in the adjacent edit
field is set to 1.
6. Select Type 2 96 from the Structure drop list.
This creates the junction using the dimensions and shapes stored in the Structure Library. To
display the Structure Library dialog box, click on the Structure Library icon, which is found adjacent
to the Structure drop list.
Next, you select the location for the junction MH 1.
7. Click in either the Junction Northing or the Junction Easting edit field.
The PIC button activates.
8. Toggle on Inherit from Surface Model.
10. Determine the point by selecting one of the options below.
A. To graphically select the location, click on the PIC button.
You are prompted:
Select a point.
Select the end point of the first pipe alignment running from the outfall, coordinates N
50053.305, E 417939.204.
B. To enter the point using your keyboard, type 50053.305 in the Junction Northing edit
field and type 417939.204 in the Junction Easting edit field.

11. Click on Apply.
The information, upon selection of a point in CAD, conveys the coordinate to Eagle Point, which
draws the pipe, structure and text.
You are prompted in CAD:
Pick the Next Point.
12. Graphically select the location for the manhole and press Enter.
The Create Network dialog box displays again.
13. Select the locations for MH 2 and MH 3. To do so, repeat steps 2-12 for each location and
enter the values in the Junction Input Information Table (below)
Junction Input Information Table
Junction MH 2 MH 3
Downstream Junction MH 1 MH 2
Pipe Description Pipe 2 Pipe 3
Pipe Design Design
Lesson 14 – Storm
Junction Description MH 2 MH 3
Sewers
Structure Type 2 48 Type 2 72
Junction Northing 50005.593 50044.892
Junction Easting 417992.508 418024.354
Inherit from Surface Model Yes Yes
# Note the change in the Structures and Pipes to use items stored in the Libraries.
" Remember to check the settings after application in the Network. If your settings are not
correct, not to worry, in the following sections you have a chance to edit the pipes and networks
created.
14. After selecting the locations for the third junction, click on Close.
The Create Network dialog box closes.
15. At this point, save the drawing.
Convert Objects to Reach/Network

In this section, you complete the creation of the network by selecting the lines that represent the
remaining pipe alignments after which new reaches are created and the Storm Sewers network design
can proceed.
# You must first draw the lines which represent the pipe alignments that you plan to use with this
command.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Convert Objects to Reach.

The Convert Objects to Reach/Network dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-37 Convert Objects to Reach/Network Dialog Box
2. Select Type 2 54 from the Junction drop list.

3. Select Design from the Pipe drop list.
4. Toggle on the Inherit from Surface Model option.
6. MicroStation users click on the Element Selection button and select the line that represents
the pipes by selecting the line between MH 3 and CB 4.
You could also place a fence around the pipes. If an object is picked using the Element Selection,
that object is selected instead of the objects in the fence. When using the Element Selection you
can hold down the Ctrl key and select multiple lines.
7. Click on Apply.
8. AutoCAD/BricsCad users select the line that represents the pipes by selecting the line
between MH 3 and CB4.
You are prompted to select the outfall/downstream point.
9. Select the downstream connection, which is located near M H3.
The remaining junctions in the network, less the furthest upstream catch basin, are created and are
now visible in CAD. If this does not occur, re-run the command. Select the line again and select the
downstream connection at MH 3.
Modifying the Network

After the automated converting, the junction descriptions have all been added with MH as the prefix. In
this section, you use the Edit Junctions command to change the descriptions to match the Turtle Creek
Storm Sewer Schematic (Figure 14-34 on page 332).
1. In Storm Sewers, select Edit " Junctions.

The Edit Junctions dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-38 Edit Junctions Dialog Box
Lesson 14 – Storm
2. Select MH 4 from the list box.
Sewers
The edit fields display the values that correspond with the junction selected.
3. Type CB 4 in the Description edit field.
4. Select MH 3 from the Downstream Junction drop list.
5. Click on Apply to save the changes.
The description of MH 4 has been changed to CB 4.
6. Modify the rest of the network so that the junctions correspond to the Edit Junctions Dialog
Box Input Information table below. Click on Apply after each change.
See the Turtle Creek Storm Sewer Schematic (Figure 14-34 on page 332) for reference.
Edit Junctions Dialog Box Input Information
Old Description New Description Downstream Junction

MH 5 CB 5 CB 4
MH 6 CB 6 CB 5
MH 7 CB 7 CB 6
MH 8 CB 8 CB 7
MH 10 CB 10 MH 9
7. After all of the changes are made, click on Close.

The Edit Junctions dialog box closes.
Adding Lines to the Network

In the converting objects to reaches, some of the catch basins were not included. In this section, you
add these catch basins to the network.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Create Network.

2. In the Junction Description edit field, change MH to CB.

3. Select MH 9 from the Junction drop list in the Downstream Connection group.
4. Click in either the Junction Northing or the Junction Easting edit field in the New Upstream
Reach group.
5. Determine the point by selecting one of the following options.
A. Click on the PIC button and graphically select the coordinates.
You are prompted:
Select a Point
Select the point with the coordinates: N 49886.9013, E 418311.7247.
B. Type 49886.9013 in the Northing edit field and type 418311.7247 in the Easting edit
field.
6. Make sure the Inherit from Surface Model toggle is off.
7. Click on Apply.
The CB 11 junction is added to the network.
8. Add the remaining catch basins to the network using the Create Network Input Information
table below.
9. Make sure the Inherit from Surface Model toggle is on and the surface model selected is
Merged Surface.
10. After each catch basin is added, click on Apply.
Create Network Input Information

Junction Downstream Northing Easting Pipe Structure
Junction
CB 12 CB 8 49907.8251 418169.5018 Design Type 2 54”
CB 13 CB 6 49955.4040 418124.8313 Design Type 2 54”
CB 14 CB 5 49994.9968 418093.5503 Design Type 2 54”
CB 15 CB 4 50030.5704 418057.1666 Design Type 2 54”
CB 16 MH 3 50064.7304 417996.9987 Design Type 2 54”
CB 17 CB 16 50070.3273 418001.5427 Design Type 2 54”

11. After all of the catch basins are added, click on Close.
The Create Network dialog box closes.
Extract Ground Profiles

In this section, you extract the rim elevation or surface elevation for the network.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Network " Extract Ground Profiles.
The Extract Ground Profile dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-40 Extract Ground Profile Dialog Box
2. Select all of the pipes listed in the Select the Pipes to Extract the Ground Profile list box.
3. Turn on the Existing Grade radio button in the Profile to Extract group.
4. Toggle on the Extract Rim Elevation toggle.
6. Click on Apply.
You receive a message stating that you will overwrite the existing rim elevation.
7. Click on Yes.
8. Click on Close.
The Extract Ground Profile dialog box closes.
Edit
Now that you have created a network, the next step is to edit the new network. Four edit commands are
available: Junctions, Pipes, Flows, and Global Edit.
Editing the Network Junctions

In the Edit Junctions dialog box (Figure 14-41 on page 340), each junction is listed in the list box.
Highlighting a junction in the list box causes the relevant edit fields to become active.
In this section, you work through each junction checking if the description, structure, inlets, and loss
coefficients match those in the following table. Basic labeling follows that Type 1 CB’s are located on
ends of reaches. Type 1L CB’s are located in junctions below the end of reaches. Type 2 MH’s are

located at most junctions with the size varying depending on the pipe size. For more information, refer
to the Full Network Edit Junction Data Table (below).
The Turtle Creek Storm Sewer Schematic (Figure 14-34 on page 332) Inlets should be placed as
required along the gutter CB’s and in the low spots at MH and CB sag inlet installed.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Edit " Junction.
2. Select each junction in the list box and make the appropriate changes as shown in the
following table.
3. Click on Apply after each change.
Full Network Edit Junction Data Table

Description Rim Elevation Structure Inlet
MH 1 Extracted from Surface Type 2 96" None
Model
Model
Model
CB 4 Extracted from Surface Type 2 54" Type M1 Flat
Model
Model
Model
Model
Model
MH 9 90.1 Type 2 54" Type M1 Flat
CB 10 89.9 Type 1 CB Type M1 sag
CB 11 89.9 Type 1 CB Type M1 sag
CB 12 Extracted from Surface Type 1 CB Type M1 Flat
Model
Model

Full Network Edit Junction Data Table
Description Rim Elevation Structure Inlet
Model
CB 15 Extracted from Surface Type 1 CB Type M1 sag
Model
Model
Model
4. Click on Close.
The Storm Sewers network is updated to reflect the changes.
Editing Network Pipes

In the previous section of this lesson, you set up the network and checked the junction information to
determine the type of structure to be placed and whether the inlets are present. In this section of the
Lesson 14 – Storm
lesson, you check and edit the connecting pipes. The majority of pipes are set to have the pipe sizes
designed and have the pipe material be HDPE, which is completed in the Global Edit command (Global
Sewers
Edit on page 343). In this section you also set the inverts for the first two pipes.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Edit " Pipes.
The Edit Pipes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-42 Edit Pipes Dialog Box
While examining the Edit Pipes dialog box (above), notice that the Pipe Descriptions, Pipe, Section
Type, Pipe Material, Roughness Coefficient, QTO Item ID, and Inverts can all be changed in this
command. In the lower portion of the dialog box, in the rows for the Downstream and Upstream
Inverts, you can toggle them on for design so Storm Sewers designs the inverts for you.
2. Toggle off the Design option adjacent to the Downstream edit field in the Invert Elevation
group.
3. Type 68.41 in the Downstream edit field.
This is the outfall invert elevation and the assumed discharge pipe invert elevation.
4. Toggle off the Design option adjacent to the Upstream edit field in the Invert Elevation
group.

5. Type 68.52 in the Upstream edit field.
6. Click on Apply.
The new settings for Pipe 1 are applied.
7. Click on the right arrow to advance to Pipe 2.
The values on the Edit Pipes dialog box change to reflect those that correspond with Pipe 2.
8. Toggle off the Design option adjacent to the Downstream edit field in the Invert Elevation
group.
9. Type 68.53 in the Downstream edit field.
10. Toggle off the Design option adjacent to the Upstream edit field in the Invert Elevation
group.
11. Type 68.62 in the Upstream edit field.
12. Click on Apply.
The new settings entered for Pipe 2 are applied.
13. Click on Close.
The Edit Pipes dialog box closes.
Editing the Network Junction Flows

With the junctions and pipes now edited, you enter the information for the flows for a design run. Inlets
along the gutter pick up water from a series of catchments and for connection to the existing storm
systems known flows are entered.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Edit " Flows.
The Edit Flows dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-43 Edit Flows Dialog Box
In the Edit Flows dialog box, as in the Edit Junctions dialog box, the list box has the description that
when highlighted allows data or edits of data in the lower half of the dialog box. Inlets are
indications of catchment collection points and should match the information entered in the Edit
Junctions portion of this lesson. The methods you use are manual input and known flows. Take a
moment to look at the other methods by expanding the Input Method drop list.

2. Select Pipe 4 in the list box for CB 4.
3. Select Manual Input from the Input Method drop list.
4. Type 0.273 in the Drainage Area edit field.
5. Type 0.70 in the Composite Runoff Coefficient edit field.
6. Type 9 in the Catchment Drain Time edit field.
7. Select MH 3 from the Downstream Inlet drop list.
8. Click on Apply.
9. Using the data in the following table enter the areas, runoff coefficients, drain times and
known flows for the pipes listed.
Take note to check the downstream inlets as this tells the program where runoff splashing past a
grate is added into the network next.
10. After the data for each section is entered, click on Apply.
Full Network Edit Flows Data

Upstream Drainage Runoff Drain Time Known Downstream
Junction Area Coefficient Flow Inlet
Lesson 14 – Storm
CB 5 0.3112 0.62 8 0 CB 4
Sewers
CB 6 0.2220 0.62 8 0 CB 5
CB 7 0.3660 0.62 8 0 CB 6
CB 8 0.2580 0.62 8 0 CB 7
MH 9 0.0600 0.80 8 0 CB 8
CB 10 0.0400 0.62 8 0 MH 9
CB 11 0.2700 0.62 9 0 MH 9
CB 12 0.0900 0.62 8 0 CB 8
CB 13 0.1700 0.62 8 0 CB 6
CB 14 0.2830 0.62 8 0 CB 5
CB 15 0.2730 0.62 8 0 CB 4
CB 16 0.3100 0.62 8 0 MH 3
CB 17 0.1820 0.62 8 0 CB 16
11. Click on Close.

The Edit Flows dialog box closes.
Global Edit
After entry of the flow data in the previous section, the system is almost ready to model. To specify pipe
materials in this section you use the Global Edit command.
In this section, you step through each tab in Global Edit dialog box to become familiar with the items
available for editing the Network.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Edit " Global Edit.

The Global Edit dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-44 Global Edit Dialog Box – Pipe Data Tab
In the Pipe Data tab in Global Edit dialog box, you select the pipes from 1 through 17 and set the
pipe material to HDPE. Follow the next set of steps for direction.
This Selection Method allows you to specify the range of pipes that are to be edited.
Using the Range method, you specify the range of pipe descriptions to edit. All pipes in the
selected range are edited. Selection of the pipes can also be done graphically using the PIC button.
3. Select Pipe 1 from the From drop list.
4. Select the Pipe 17 from the To drop list.
The range of pipes to be edited is determined.
5. Select HDPE from the Pipe Material drop list.
6. Toggle on the Set option adjacent to the Pipe Material drop list.
7. Click on Apply.
The new settings are applied.
8. Select the Flow Data tab.

The Flow Data tab in the Global Edit dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Figure 14-45 Global Edit Dialog Box – Flow Data Tab
Sewers
9. Review the available information on Flow Data tab.
10. Select the Junction Data tab.
The Junction Data tab in the Global Edit dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-46 Global Edit Dialog Box – Junction Data Tab
11. Review the settings available.

12. Select the Inlet Data label tab.

The Inlet Data tab in the Global Edit dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-47 Global Edit Dialog Box – Inlet Data Tab
13. Review the settings available.

14. Click on OK.
The Global Edit dialog box closes.
Rainfall
In this section, you specify the rainfall data to be used for the project. You use the Western method for
rainfall.
Creating a Rainfall Library

In this section, you create a Rainfall Library for use in the design and modeling of the Storm Sewers
network. In creation of a Rainfall library, you use the Western methods and enter the data provided in
this lesson.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Rainfall " Edit Western.

The Edit Western Rainfall dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-48 Edit Western Rainfall Dialog Box
2. Click on the Rainfall Library icon.

The Rainfall Library dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-49 Rainfall Library Dialog Box
3. Click on the New Library icon.

The New Rainfall dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-50 New Rainfall Dialog Box
4. Type Parkland in the Description edit field.

5. Select Western from the Type drop list.
6. Click on OK.
The New Rainfall dialog box closes and the Rainfall Library dialog box (Figure 14-49, above)
displays again with the Parkland Rainfall Description showing in the list box.
7. Click on Close.
The Rainfall Library dialog box closes and the Edit Western Rainfall dialog box (Figure 14-48,
above) displays again with the current description set to Parkland.
8. Select Rainfall Accumulation from the Input Method drop list.
9. Type 38.1 in the 6 Hours/2 Year edit field.

13. Type 366 in the Elevation edit field.
14. Click on Apply.
The new settings are applied.
15. Click on the Results button.
The Rainfall Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-51 Rainfall Results Dialog Box
16. Click on Close.

The Rainfall Results dialog box closes.
17. Click on Close.
The Edit Western Rainfall dialog box closes.
Storm Sewer Network Design and Calculations

Now that all of the changes to the network are finished, you are ready to run calculations on the network
and generate output. In this section, you specify design settings, run the calculations, and examine the
detailed report.
Design Settings
The Design Settings are used to specify parameters used for sizing pipes and setting inverts in the
network. When specifying the design settings, you can specify the default constraints by which to abide.
These constraints include whether to violate cover first or violate minimum velocity first. After they are
set, you specify the Minimum Depth of Cover and the Minimum Velocity. You also specify the allowable
pipe sizes to consider. Storm Sewers sizes pipes based on the allowable pipe sizes and uses the next
larger pipe size if necessary. There is a toggle option which allows the program to consider the closest
pipe size instead. In this section, you begin by entering the parameters for design.

1. In Storm Sewers, select Calculate " Design Settings.
The Design Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-52 Design Settings Dialog Box
2. Turn on the Inverts radio button for the Match By section of the Pipe at Junction group.
3. Type 0.01 in the Drop Across Inverts edit field.
A drop of 0.01 meters is applied at the inverts in the design. This helps convey the flow better
through the junction.
4. Turn on the Cover radio button for the Constraints to Violate First section of the Design
Constraints group.
This maintains the minimum velocity of 1 m/s.
5. Type 0.9 in the Minimum Depth of Cover edit field.
6. Type 1.0 in the Design Velocity edit field.
This value is used when initially sizing the pipes. If both pipes and inverts are being designed, the
minimum velocity in the pipes may be slightly lower than this value.
7. Make sure the Use Drop Manholes toggle is on.
This places drop manholes when needed to help minimize excavation.
8. Leave the Minimum and Maximum pipe sizes at their defaults.
The Pipe Sizes button when clicked on displays the Pipe Sizes dialog box so you can customize
what pipe sizes to use.
9. Leave the Use Closest Pipe Size and Iterate Pipe Design to Minimize Size toggles off.
10. Click on OK.
The Design Settings are saved for the network and the Design Settings dialog box closes.
Calculate
In this section, you specify the calculation parameters and run calculations on the network. After the
calculations are run, the Summary dialog box displays the results of the calculations.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Calculation " Calculate.

The Calculate dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-53 Calculate Dialog Box
2. For the Return Period, select 10 Year from the drop list.
3. Verify that the Accumulate Known Flow toggle is on.
4. Verify that the Connect Inlets to Pipe Flows toggle is on.
This toggle insures that the inlet flows are included in the calculations.
5. Select Arithmetic from the Friction Slope Averaging Option drop list.
See the Storm Sewers documentation concerning the different friction slopes.
6. Toggle on the Start Hydraulic Grade Elevation at Critical Depth.
This specifies that the hydraulic grade line starts at critical depth to start the iterations to find the
HGL line in all of the pipes. You can specify the actual elevation of the starting hydraulic grade
elevation if you wanted to.
The calculations for the network are performed and the Summary dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-54 Summary Dialog Box
8. Review the data on the Summary dialog box.

9. Click on the Comments button to review comments about the calculations.

The Comments dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-55 Comments Dialog Box
System related messages about the network display in the Comments dialog box.
10. Click on Close.
The Comments dialog box closes and the Summary dialog box displays again.
11. Click on the Details button to display the details for the pipes in the network.
Lesson 14 – Storm
The Calculation Details dialog box (below) displays.
Sewers
Figure 14-56 Calculation Details Dialog Box
12. Review the Details for the pipe. You can use the left and right arrows next to the Current
Pipe drop list to advance through the network.
13. After you have reviewed the results, click on Close.
The Calculation Details dialog box (above) closes and the Summary dialog box displays again.
14. Click on Close.
The Summary dialog box closes.
At this point you are ready to generate some output for the Sanitary Sewers network. You create a
Hydraulic Profile, Plan and Profile sheet. You also look at the Custom Reports that can be
generated.

Hydraulic Profile
The Hydraulic Profile for the network can be generated through the Plan and Profile Sheets command.
When you create a reach for the Plan and Profile Sheets command, you create a Hydraulic Profile
drawing that can be drawn in a profile drawing or in the plan drawing. In the example given in this
section, you have the Hydraulic Profile created in the profile drawing. This profile drawing is used in the
Plan and Profile Sheets after their generation.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Output " Plan and Profile Sheets.
2. Click on the New Plan and Profile Reaches icon.

The New Sewer Reach dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-58 New Sewer Reach Dialog Box
3. Select Pipe 1 from the Downstream Pipe drop list.

4. Select Pipe 7 from the Upstream Pipe drop list.
You generate the hydraulic profile for pipe reach 1 to 7. You should see 7 pipes in the Hydraulic
Profile.

5. Leave the Beginning Station of Reach edit field at 0.00.
6. Toggle off the Reference Alignment toggle.
This option allows you to select an existing alignment on which to base the stationing. In this case,
assume the alignment runs down the center line of the sewer. The outfall has a station of 0. All
stationing starts from the outfall.
7. Turn on the Left to Right radio button for Profile Orientation.
This causes the profile to be drawn with the outfall on the left end of the sheet.
8. Turn on the In Profile Drawing toggle in the Draw Profile Graphic group.
This causes the Hydraulic Profile to be drawn in the profile drawing instead of in the plan drawing.
9. Click on OK.
The Hydraulic Profile is drawn in the profile drawing and is displayed (below). The Plan and Profile
Sheets dialog box (Figure 14-57 on page 352) displays the new profile values.
Lesson 14 – Storm
Sewers
Figure 14-59 Hydraulic Profile Example
10. Review the Hydraulic Profile drawing (above).

After the Hydraulic Profile drawing is created, you are ready to create Plan and Profile Sheets for
the network. In the next section, you specify sheet settings and create the plots.
11. Save the Hydraulic Profile drawing.
Plan and Profile Sheets

1. In the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (Figure 14-57 on page 352), which should still be
open from the previous lesson, select the Sheet Settings option in the Format drop list.

The Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-60 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box
3. Type 1640 in the Sheet Length edit field.

The long length allows you to see more than one pipe per sheet.
4. Type 1620 in the Plan – Upper Right Coordinate X edit field.
5. Click on the Profile tab at the top of the dialog box.
6. Type 1620 in the Upper Right Coordinate X edit field.
7. Change the Heavy Grid spacing to .25 Horizontal and 20 Vertical.
8. Change the Fine Grid spacing to 0.25 Horizontal and 5 Vertical.
9. Leave all of the other fields to the default values.
10. Click on OK.
The sheet settings are saved.
11. Click on the New Plan and Profile Sheets icon on the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box.
The New Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box displays.
12. Leave the default station values as they are and click on OK.
The New Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box closes and the sheets are added to the sheet list box.
13. In the Plan and Profiles Sheet dialog box, select the first sheet in the list box and click on
the View Plan and Profile Sheet icon.
The Plan and Profile Sheet displays in the drawing.
14. You can review the other Plan and Profile Sheet settings if you would like.
15. Click on Close.
You are now ready to look at the Custom Reports. The Custom Reports allow you to create printed
reports of any information in the network. There are six default reports included in Custom Reports.
Three are for English projects and three are for Metric projects.

Custom Reports
In this section, you create a report with pipe data for Turtle Creek Court.
1. In Storm Sewers, select Output " Custom Reports.
The Custom Report Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-61 Custom Report Library Dialog Box
Lesson 14 – Storm
2. Click on the New Custom Report icon.
Sewers
The New Custom Report dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-62 New Custom Report Dialog Box
3. Type Turtle Creek Pipe Data in the Custom Report Name edit field.
4. Select Pipe Material in the Available Items to Print list box.
5. Hold the Shift key down on your keyboard and select Invert Slope in the Order of Items to
Print list box.

Notice that all of the items between Pipe Material and Invert Slope are highlighted. See Figure 15-
57 on page 397 for an example of what the dialog box looks like.
Figure 14-63 New Custom Report Dialog Box Example
6. Click on the Append button.

The items selected in the Available Items to Print list box move to the Order of Items to Print list box
as shown in Figure 14-63 (above).
The order of the items in the list box is the order in which they are printed in the report.
7. Click on the Print Options button.
The Custom Report Print Options dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 14-64 Custom Report Print Options Dialog Box
8. Review the Print Option settings.

This dialog box gives you the option to specify the column headers and the width of the columns in
the report.
9. Click on OK to accept the Print Option settings.
The Custom Report Print Options dialog box closes.
10. Click on OK in the New Custom Report dialog box.
The new format is added and the New Custom Report dialog box closes.
11. If you want to print the report to the printer, click on the Print icon.

The Select Pipe to Print dialog box displays.
Figure 14-65 Select Pipe To Print Dialog Box
The print-out is sent to the printer or printed to file depending on the print setup settings.
For more information on printer setup, see the Getting Started manual.
12. Select the pipe or range of pipes to be printed in the Select Pipe to Print dialog box and click
on the Print button.
The report is printed.
13. Click on Close.
The Custom Report Library dialog box closes.
Lesson 14 – Storm
This concludes the Sanitary Sewers tutorial. The figure below displays the final Storm Sewers
network.
Sewers
Figure 14-66 Final Storm Sewers Network
For more information regarding commands not covered in this tutorial, see the Sanitary Sewers
manual.

Summary
! Create libraries with standard Storm Sewers Structures, Inlets, and Pipes.
! Create a new Storm Sewers Network.
! Edit the Network junctions, pipes and flows.
! Create a Rainfall library.
! Design pipes for full flow a during a 10 year storm event.
! Examine the Hydraulic profile for the network.
! Prepare Plan & Profile sheets.
! Print out a Storm Sewers Report.

LESSON 15 –
SANITARY SEWERS LESSON
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Create a Sanitary Sewer Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Drawing Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Editing the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
15
Calculations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Lesson 15 – Sanitary Sewers 359

Objectives
In this lesson you:
! Create a Sanitary Sewers Sub-project.
! Define libraries of standard Sanitary Sewers structures, pipes, and pumps.
! Create a new network for Radford Road.
! Edit pipes and junctions.
! Calculate the system and design the system for the peak flow.
! Modify the system.
! Output the system.
Overview
In this lesson, you continue the design for the Parkland Estates Subdivision, designing a sanitary sewer
to serve Radford Road. You also create a lift station to discharge the waste out of the subdivision. The
lesson covers many of the commands available in the Eagle Point Sanitary Sewers product.
Figure 15-1 Radford Road and Parkland Estates Subdivision, Sanitary Sewers System

Getting Started
Create a Sanitary Sewer Sub-project

The first step in a Sanitary Sewers project is to create a Sub-project. In any single project you can
have numerous Sanitary Sewers Sub-projects, each containing a single network. A network is defined
as a combination of structures and connecting pipes that have a single outfall. The outfall is connected
to the first network junction by a single pipe from which the network may continue or branch and
expand.
With the sewer sub-projects, instead of using the main drawing, you use a drawing called SEWERS.
This drawing references the CIVTUTOR drawing. This allows you to work in a smaller drawing, but still
lets you use the surface models that were created in Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics, which
Lesson 15 – Sanitary
begins on 123.
1. From the Eagle Point menu (Figure 1-3 on page 8), select File " New.
Sewers
Figure 15-2 New Project/Sub-project Dialog Box
In this dialog box you can select the type of project or Sub-project you want to create.
2. Select Sanitary Sewers Sub-project from the list box.
3. Click on Next.

The Sanitary Sewers Sub-project dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-3 Sanitary Sewers Sub-project Dialog Box
In this dialog box, you select the project to which to attach the Sub-project and you can specify the
Sub-project number, description, and prototype setting for this new Sanitary Sewers Sub-project.
4. From the Project List, select Eagle Point Tutorial.
5. Type 01 in the Sub-project Number edit field.
6. Press the Tab key on your keyboard to move to the next edit field.
7. Type Radford Road Sanitary Connection in the Description edit field.
8. Select Sanitary Sewer Metric Default from the Sub-project Prototype drop list.
9. Click on Next.
10. Turn on the Use Project Drawing radio button.

11. Select the SEWERS drawing.
12. Click on Finish.

The Open dialog box (below) displays with the new Sanitary Sewers Sub-project added to the
Projects and Sub-projects list box.
13. In the Open dialog box, select the Radford Road Connection Sub-project.
14. Click on OK.
The Sanitary Sewers tool bar (below) displays and the Project drawing CIVTUTOR becomes
active.
Figure 15-6 Sanitary Sewers Tool Bar
Sewers
Drawing Setup
To get the drawing set up to create the network, some layers or levels need to be turned off or on.
AutoCAD/BricsCad users freeze all layers except SSSCHEMATIC and CIVTUTOR/LOTLINES.
MicroStation users, for Active Design make level 26 current and turn off level 25; for Civtutor, turn off all
levels except for level 13.
Network
Network is the first menu on the Sanitary Sewers menu. Clicking on the Network menu header
displays commands that allow you to create the network. To begin, you create libraries of structures,
pipes, and pumps. These are used for the network and would be available for any project.

Creating Libraries of Standard Network Components
This portion of the lesson demonstrates libraries. Libraries are used to store standard components for a
sanitary sewer system. Three kinds of libraries are available: structures, pipes, and pumps.
Customization of the libraries allows you to show local manufactured details or standard details for your
sanitary sewer system. Created libraries are stored in the Eagle Point support directories and are
available for use in other projects or by other workstations.
While you are using libraries in the tutorial, they are not necessary to the creation, design, and
modeling of sanitary sewers. The libraries created in this tutorial differ from the manholes, pipes, and
pumps available in your area and are included for demonstrational and informational use only.
A sanitary sewer is a combination of components. The Outlet, Structure, Pipe, and optionally a Lift
Station represent these components. Structures such as manholes represent the change of direction of
the network. You can also enter elbows (just bends in the pipe). To start this lesson, you set up libraries
for the components used in a Sanitary Sewers system. The library information is available in the
current project, Sub-projects, and any future projects.
Structure Library
You create two typical structures – two manholes – for use in this tutorial. The first structure is created
as a new library item and the second is created by making a copy and modifying the structure in the
library.
1. From the Sanitary Sewers tool bar, select Network " Structure Library.
The Structure Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-7 Structure Library Dialog Box
In the Structure Library dialog box, three default structures are listed. An elbow, circle, and box are
each set up in Imperial English units. If you completed Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers, which begins on
311, then you also have the structures that were added during that lesson. During this lesson, you
create a number of standard sections for use in the system design.
The standard is to create two circular manhole structures. To add these to the library we create a new
structure for a circular section then copy and modify it to get the second standard section.

The New Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-8 New Structure Dialog Box, Type 1 MH
3. Type Type 1 MH in the Description edit field.

This is the name for your first manhole structure.
5. Type the settings for the Type 1 MH as shown below.
Diameter 1.2 meters (4 feet),
Wall Thickness 0.1016 meters (4 inches),
Sump Depth 0
Junction Loss 0.75
6. Leave the QTO Item ID toggled off.
7. Click on OK.
Sewers
The New dialog box closes and the Structure Library dialog box (Figure 15-7 on page 364)
displays.
The Type 1 MH is shown in the list box in the Structure Library dialog box.
8. Select Type 1 MH in the Structure Library list box.
The Copy Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-9 Copy Structure Dialog Box
10. Type Type 2 MH in the Copy to Description edit field.

11. Click on OK.
The Type 2 MH is added to the Structure Library with the same parameters as the Type 1 MH.
Next you modify the parameters of Type 2 MH.
12. Select Type 2 MH in the Structure Library list box and click on the Modify Structure icon.

The Modify Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-10 Modify Structure Dialog Box

# Pressing the Tab key allows you to move from one edit field to another.
14. In the appropriate edit fields enter:
Diameter 2.0 meters
Wall Thickness 0.1016 meters
Sump Depth 0
Junction Loss 0.8
15. Click on OK.

The Modify Structure dialog box closes and the Structure Library dialog box (below) displays.
Notice that the Type 2 MH structure has been modified. Once completed, the library of structures is
available for use in this and other projects that are stored in the ...\SUPPORT\SW folder.
Figure 15-11 Completed Structure Library Dialog Box
The two additional circular structures have been created.

16. Click on Close in the Structure Library dialog box.
The Structure Library dialog box closes and the main Sanitary Sewers tool bar displays. Now that
you have completed the Structure Library, you specify pumps for the Pump Library, the second
command in the Network menu.

Pump Library
You are now working with the Pump Library. The Pump Library is accessed from the Network menu and
allows you to set up pump curves that would be used with a forcemain. You have a forcemain near the
discharge point of the network you define later. Sanitary Sewers computes system curves based on
the layout of the network. The location where your pump curve intersects the system curve determines
the operating point for the pump. You create one pump to be used in the forcemain.
1. From the Sanitary Sewers tool bar, select Network " Pump Library.
The Pump Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-12 Pump Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Pump icon.
The New Pump dialog box (below) displays.
Sewers
Figure 15-13 New Pump Dialog Box
3. Type Eagle Pump 1 in the Pump Name edit field.

This is the name for your standard pump.

4. Type the values for Head and Flow in the correct edit fields as listed in the table below.
Head Flow
1 20 0
2 18 260
3 16 420
4 13 560
5 10 660
6 8 720
7 5 780
8 3 815
9 2 830
10 0 850
5. Click on OK.
The New Pump dialog box closes and the Pump Library dialog box displays.
The pump is added to the pump library as shown below.
Figure 15-14 Pump Library Dialog Box
6. Click on Close.
The Pump Library dialog box closes and the Sanitary Sewers tool bar (Figure 15-6 on page 363)
displays.
Pipe Library
Creating the pipe library allows you to specify dimensions and descriptions to be used for pipes in the
Sanitary Sewers system. This enables you to customize pipes to reflect a description that may be
more specific than the normal material and diameter. Like the other library information, the pipe
information is copied into the Sub-project network, which can then be modified for any reach or junction
to reflect actual conditions.
Information for two default pipes are shipped with Eagle Point software to provide a starting library. If
you completed Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers, which begins on 311, then you have the pipes added from
that lesson in the Pipe Library dialog box. In this lesson you create two additional pipes.
1. From the Sanitary Sewers tool bar, select Network " Pipe Library.

The Pipe Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-15 Pipe Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Pipe icon.

The New Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-16 New Pipe Dialog Box
3. In the Description edit field type 425mm PVC.
Sewers
5. Select PVC from the Pipe Material drop list.
7. Verify the Mannings “n” value is 0.013.
8. Leave the QTO Item ID toggled off.
9. Click on OK.
The New Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog box displays. The 425 mm PVC is
added to the Pipe Library list box.
Next, you create a copy of 425 mm PVC and modify the diameter to be 175 mm.
10. Select 425 mm PVC in the Pipe Library dialog box list box.
11. Click on the Copy Pipe icon.
The Copy Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-17 Copy Pipe Dialog Box
12. Type 175mm PVC in the Copy to Description edit field.

13. Click on OK.
The Copy Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog Box (Figure 15-15 on page 369)
displays again.
14. Select 175mm PVC in the Pipe Library dialog box list box.
15. Click on the Modify Pipe icon.
The Modify Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-18 Modify Pipe Dialog Box
16. Double-click in the Diameter edit field.

The Diameter edit field becomes highlighted, allowing you to overwrite the existing value.
18. Click on OK.
The Modify Pipe dialog box closes and the Pipe Library dialog box displays with the updated pipe
descriptions and information.
19. Click on Close.
The Pipe Library dialog box closes and the Sanitary Sewers tool bar displays.
Establishing Network Settings

In this portion of the lesson, you set the Network Settings that control annotation for the junctions and
the pipes. This is also the area to reset the default CAD settings for the graphic elements and text.
There are five separate areas of settings that can be changed. You change only a few of the settings.
Settings – Display
1. From the Sanitary Sewers tool bar, select Network " Settings.

The Network Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-19 Network Settings Dialog Box – Display Tab
2. If the Display tab is not currently displayed, click on it.

The Display tab (above) displays.
3. Review the settings in the Thaw/Freeze group or turn on/off for the object to be visible in the
CAD display.
4. Verify that the Elevation of Network Shadow is set to 0.00.
This is the elevation at which the 2-D plan elements are drawn.
In the lower left-hand quadrant of the Network Settings dialog box are two icons that represent CAD
Settings. Clicking on the left icon displays the CAD Settings dialog box for drawn objects and
clicking on the right icon displays the Text CAD Settings dialog box. Refer to the figure below.
Sewers
Figure 15-20 CAD Settings Icons

6. Review the available settings for controlling the CAD display.

7. Click on OK.

The Text CAD Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-22 Text CAD Settings Dialog Box
9. Review the default settings for text placement and insure that the height is greater than 0.00
to make text that is visible.
10. Click on OK.
The Text CAD Settings dialog box closes and the Network Settings dialog box displays.
Settings – Profile
1. Click on the Profile tab in the Network Settings dialog box.
The Network Settings dialog box – Profile tab (below) displays.
Figure 15-23 Network Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab
2. Select Center to Center – Pipe Length from the Profile Pipe Length Annotation drop list.
3. Turn on the Center to Center radio button in the Profile Pipe Slope Annotation group.
4. Click on Apply.
The information selected on the Profile tab is applied.
Settings – Precision
1. Click on the Precision tab in the Network Settings dialog box.

The Network Settings dialog box – Precision tab (below) displays.
Figure 15-24 Network Settings Dialog Box – Precision Tab
2. Review the current default settings in this dialog box and make the following changes.
3. Type 1 in the Flows edit field.
4. Type 2 in the Velocity edit field.
5. Type 2 in the Slopes edit field.
6. Type 3 in the Pipe Dimensions edit field.
7. Type 3 in the Losses edit field.
8. Click on Apply.
Control of the precision for length labels is set by linear precision in the System menu on the Eagle
Point main menu. You can check this setting according to instructions similar to those found in Lesson
Sewers
1.
9. Leave the Network Settings dialog box open and select System " Precision from the Eagle
Point tool bar (Figure 1-3 on page 8).
The Precision dialog box (below) displays.

11. Make sure the values in the Distance, Northing/Easting and Elevation edit fields are each set
to 3.
12. Click on Apply.
13. Click on OK.
The Precision dialog box closes and the Network Settings dialog box – Junction Annotation tab
(Figure 15-26 on page 374) displays.

Settings – Junction Annotation
The Junction Annotation command controls the annotation settings for labeling at junctions. The
information for justification, Delta X, Delta Y is set to the final plot scales set in the Tools menu in the
main Eagle Point tool bar. Notice that the CAD Settings icons (Figure 15-20 on page 371) become
available for customizing the graphic elements created in Storm Sewers.
1. Click on the Junction Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box.
The Network Settings dialog box – Junction Annotation tab (below) displays.
Figure 15-26 Network Settings Dialog Box – Junction Annotation Tab
When you select the Item drop list, you can see the annotation available for junctions and verify the
current setting.
2. Select Junction Description from the Item drop list and turn on the Place Annotation toggle.
3. Click on Apply.
4. Select Invert Elevations from the Item drop list.
6. Click in the Label edit field and add Inv. after the equal sign (=).
This makes the edit field display [] = Inv. <>.
7. Click on Apply.
8. Select Rim Elevations from the Item Drop list and toggle on the Place Annotation toggle.
9. Click on Apply.
Settings – Pipe Annotation

The Pipe Annotation command controls the annotation settings for pipe annotation found in the
Network Settings Pipe dialog box – Annotation tab dialog box (Figure 15-27 on page 375). The
information for justification, Delta X, Delta Y are set to the final plot scales set in the Tools menu on the
main Eagle Point tool bar.
1. Select the Pipe Annotation tab in the Network Settings dialog box.

The Network Settings dialog box – Pipe Annotation tab (below) displays.
Figure 15-27 Network Settings Dialog Box – Pipe Annotation Tab
In the Item drop list you find a list of the four annotation items available.
2. Select Pipe Description from the Item drop list.
4. Click on Apply.
5. Select Length from the Item drop list.
7. Click on Apply.
8. Select Size from the Item drop list.
Sewers
10. Type dia. at the end of the current label in the Label edit field.
11. Select Material from the Item drop list.
13. Click on Apply.
14. Click on OK.
Creating Network
In this portion of the lesson, you create a Sanitary Sewers network similar to that shown in Figure 15-
28 on page 376. The sanitary sewer system is designed to service Radford Road. A variety of methods
to lay the network out are used and then modifications are done to provide some examples of the

software’s flexibility. To start you specify the outfall location and then use the Create Network command
to lay out the network.
Figure 15-28 Radford Road Schematic
Locate Outfall
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Network " Locate Outfall.
2. The Locate Outfall dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-29 Locate Outfall Dialog Box, with Data
The point of discharge or outfall for a Sanitary Sewer network is defined in the Locate Outfall
dialog box. The coordinates for the outfall are identified in three dimensions with the ability to
extract the elevation from a surface model. To define the Northing and Easting for an outfall, two
methods are available; selection of a location graphically or by keyboard entry of the numeric
values.
Next you select a point graphically.
3. Click in the Northing or Easting edit field.
The Pick In Cad (PIC) button becomes active.
5. Select the outfall location in the drawing.
Select a point near the location shown in the system schematic shown in Figure 15-28 (above).
This point is at the coordinates 50123.386 North by 418048.860 East.

To establish surface or rim elevation at the outfall you can enter a value or choose to have the value
inherited from a surface model. The surface model can be either in this project or other EP 2000
projects. You select the Merged Surface, the surface model that was uncompressed at the start of
this Lesson.
6. Toggle on the Inherit from Surface Model toggle.
7. Select Merged Surface from the Inherit from Surface Model drop list.
The surface elevation for the outfall is displayed in the Elevation edit field. An Outfall Invert
Elevation is needed to define the start of your network.
8. Enter the value from the Elevation edit field or 81.9 into the Invert Elevation edit field.
9. Click on OK.
The Locate Outfall dialog box closes.
A symbol representing the outfall is placed in the graphic and the screen returns to the Sanitary
Sewers menu.
Create Network
In creating the network you start by placing eight pipes and junctions. Pipes are placed between the
downstream junction and the new upstream junction using the parameters for the pipe and junction
specified in the Create Network dialog box (below). Refer to Radford Road Schematic, Figure 15-28 on
page 376, for the junction network alignment. Editing of the network in the Edit portion of the lesson
(Editing the Network on page 380) is done to fine-tune the system layout.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Network " Create Network.
Sewers
From the Network Outfall to the first junction, only a single pipe can be used. You may wish to
window into the area to make selection of the junction locations easier and pan in CAD with each
junction selection.
The information used in these first seven pipes is contained in the Junction Input Information table
on page 378.
2. Verify that the Pipe Description edit field contains Pipe <> and the number in the edit field
is set to 1.
The numbers are counters that automatically increment as pipes are placed into the network. You
can start the numbers at whatever number you want.

3. In the Pipe drop list set it from Design to 425mm pvc.
To set a pipe to a specific pipe from the Pipe Library, select the Pipe drop list to show those pipes
currently in the Pipe Library dialog box.
4. Verify that the Junction Description edit field displays MH <> and the number in the text edit
field is set to 1.
The numbers are counters that automatically increment as junctions are placed into the network.
You can start the numbers at whatever number you want.
5. Select Type 1 MH from the Structure drop list.
This creates the junction using the dimensions and shape stored for Type 1 MH in the Structure
Library. Next you select the location for the junction MH 1.
6. Turn on the Inherit from Surface Model toggle.
8. Click in either the Northing or Easting edit field.
10. Select the end point of the first pipe alignment running from the outfall at coordinates N
50086.6950, E 418048.8600.
Upon selection of a point in CAD, the information conveys the coordinate to Eagle Point which
draws the pipe, structure, and text.
You are prompted to select the point for the next junction.
To see the next junction settings in the Create Network dialog box you need to press the Return key
on the keyboard. The Create Network dialog box redisplays.
11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 for each of the next six junctions MH 2, MH 3, MH 4, MH 5, MH 6,
and MH 7 using the information provided in the Junction Input Information table (below).
Check the settings in the Create Network dialog box for each junction prior to selecting the
point in CAD for the junction location.
Note the change in the Structures and Pipes to use items stored in the Libraries.
Junction Input Information

Junction MH 2 MH 3 MH 4 MH 5 MH 6 MH 7
Down-stream MH 1 MH 2 MH 3 MH 4 MH 5 MH 6
Junction
Pipe Pipe 2 Pipe 3 Pipe 4 Pipe 5 Pipe 6 Pipe 7
Description
Pipe 425 mm 425 mm PVC 425 mm PVC 425 mm 425 mm PVC 425 mm
PVC PVC PVC
Junction MH 2 MH 3 MH 4 MH 5 MH 6 MH 7
Description
Structure Type 2 MH Type 1 MH Type 1 MH Type 1 MH Type 1 MH Type 1 MH
Junction 50053.907 50060.153 50057.811 50067.179 50063.275 50047.662
Northing
Junction 418069.172 418098.078 418216.825 418274.635 418353.540 418399.632
Easting
Inherit from Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Surface
Model

Change the pipe and junction numbers by changing the number in the edit field that corresponds to
the appropriate line. Remember to check the setting but if it is not correct, do not worry; in the
following sections you have a chance to edit the pipes and networks created.
12. Once you select the locations for the seventh junction, click on Close.
# This is a good time to save the drawing on which you have been working.
Convert Objects to Reach/Network

You now complete the creation of the network by selecting a line that represents the remaining pipe
segment. This command allows you select line work that is connected and convert it into a reach or
network.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Network " Convert Objects to Reach/Network.
The Convert Objects to Reach/Network dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-31 Convert Objects to Reach/Network Dialog Box
2. Select Type 1 MH from the Structure to place at Junction drop list.

3. Select 175 mm PVC from the Pipe drop list.
4. Toggle on the Inherit from Surface Model toggle.
Sewers
6. MicroStation users click on the Element Selection button and select the line that represents
the pipe as shown in Figure 15-32 on page 380.
You could also place a fence around the pipe. If an object is picked using Element Selection, that
object is selected instead of the objects in the fence. When using Element Selection, you can hold
down the Ctrl key and select multiple lines.
7. Click on Apply.
8. AutoCAD/BricsCad users select the line that represents the pipe as shown in Figure 15-32
on page 380 and press Enter.

You are prompted to select the outfall/downstream point.
Figure 15-32 Convert Objects to Reach/Network Example
9. Select the downstream connection, which is located near MH2.

The remaining junction in the network should be created and is now visible in CAD. If it is not
visible, the line selected should be erased and redrawn in CAD by snapping to the center of MH 2.
This ensures that the program accepts the end point and the downstream junction occupy the
same point. The numbering and labels for the junctions and pipes continue to use the last setting
from when you created MH 7 by using the Create Network command.
In the next section, you modify the network by using the Edit menu to change descriptions and
other information before running the calculations.
Editing the Network

Four edit commands are available on the Edit menu to edit the Network. They are Junctions, Pipes,
Flows/Forcemain, and Global Edit.
Editing the Network Junctions

1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Edit " Junctions.

In this dialog box each junction is listed in the list box. Highlighting a junction in the large list makes
the relevant edit fields become available for each junction as they are selected.
2. For the network, work through each junction checking if the description, structure, and loss
coefficients match those in the following table.
Type 1 MH’s are located at most junctions. The Type 2 MH is located at the lift station location
which is MH 2. Refer to the following table.
Full Network Edit Junction Data
Description MH 1 MH 2 MH 3 MH 4 MH 5 MH 6 MH 7 MH 8
Sewers
Loss Method Dynamic Dyna Dyna Dyna Dyna Dyna Dyna Dyna
Loss Coefficient 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
Structure Type 1 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1
MH MH MH MH MH MH MH MH
Downstream Outfall MH 1 MH 2 MH 3 MH 4 MH 5 MH 6 MH 2
Junction
Pipe Description Pipe 1 Pipe 2 Pipe 3 Pipe 4 Pipe 5 Pipe 6 Pipe 7 Pipe 8
Diameter (m) 1.2 2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
Wall Thickness .1016 .1016 .1016 .1016 .1016 .1016 .1016 .1016
(m)
Sump Depth 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3. After you have made the changes as shown in the table, click on Apply.
The network junctions are updated with the new changes.
4. Click on Close.
The Edit Junctions dialog box closes.
Editing Network Pipes

You have set up the network and checked the junction information to determine the type of structure to
be placed. Now the connecting pipes need to checked and edited. Some of the pipes are set to have
the pipe sizes designed and made of PVC. You do this later in the Global Edit command. In the Edit
Pipes command, you set the inverts for the first three pipes.

1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Edit " Pipes.
The Edit Pipes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-34 Edit Pipes Dialog Box
Notice that the annotation, pipe, section type, material, roughness coefficient, QTO item and inverts
can all be changed in this dialog box.
2. Make sure that Pipe 1 is selected in the Current Pipe drop list.
3. From the Pipe drop list make sure that 425 mm PVC is selected and that the Design toggle
for Diameter is toggled off.
4. Toggle off the Design option for the Downstream and Upstream Invert Elevations.
5. Type 78.0 in the Downstream edit field in the Invert Elevations group.
6. Type 78.3 in the Upstream edit field in the Invert Elevations group.
7. Click on Apply.
The parameters for Pipe 1 are modified and saved to the network.
8. Enter the pipe data for the rest of the pipes in the network using the data in the following
table. Click on Apply after entering the data for each pipe.
You can select the Current Pipe drop list to change to the next pipe in the network or use the left
and right arrows to advance through the network.
Network Pipe Data

Pipe Pipe 2 Pipe 3 Pipe 4 Pipe 5 Pipe 6 Pipe 7 Pipe 8
Diameter 425 425 425 425 425 425 175
Manning’s “n” 0.013 0.013 0.012 0.013 0.013 0.013 0.013
Downstream 78.35 Design Design Design Design Design Design
Invert
Upstream Invert 73.0 Design Design Design Design Design Design
Notice that the downstream invert of Pipe 2 is higher than the upstream invert of Pipe 2. That is
because you specify a forcemain for MH 2. You pump the flow up Pipe 2 and use gravity flow
through Pipe 1.
9. Click on Apply and then on Close.
The data entered is applied and the Edit Pipes dialog box closes.

Editing the Network Junction Flows
With the junctions and pipes now edited, information for the flows for a design run is entered next. You
define a forcemain for MH 2 and flow rates for waste are defined for the other junctions.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Edit " Flows/Forcemains.
The Edit Flows/Forcemains dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-35 Edit Flows/Forcemains Dialog Box
In this dialog box, as in the Edit Junctions dialog box, the list box has the description, that when
selected, displays relevant data or edits of data in the lower half of the dialog box. In this part of the
Sewers
lesson, you highlight pipe 2 and enter the forcemain data. After the forcemain data is entered, you
specify flows for pipes 3 through 8.
2. Select Pipe 2 in the list box.
The flow data for Pipe 2 is displayed in the lower half of the dialog box.
3. Turn on the Forcemain toggle and click on the Pump Data button.
The Pump Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-36 Pump Data Dialog Box

4. Select 1 from the Number of Pumps drop list.
Once the Number of Pumps drop list is changed to 1 pump, the Pump Name, Pump On Elevation
and Pump Off Elevation edit fields become available. The icon to the right of the Number of Pumps
drop list, displays the Pump Library dialog box (Figure 15-15 on page 369).
5. In the Pump Name drop list, select Eagle Pump 1.
6. Type 75.0 in the Pump On Elevation edit field for pump 1.
7. Type 73.5 in the Pump Off Elevation edit field for pump 1.
8. Type 100 in the Diameter edit field in the Discharge Piping group.
9. Select Manning’s from the Loss Method drop list.
You can use the Manning’s or Hazen-Williams equations to calculate friction loss in the pipes.
10. Type 5 in the Average Pipe Length edit field.
11. Type 3.14 in the Wet Well Area edit field.
12. Type 1.0 in the Exit Loss Coefficient edit field.
13. Click on the Minor Losses button to enter the minor losses for the forcemain.
The Minor Losses dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-37 Minor Losses Dialog Box
14. Make sure the Use Loss Coefficient radio button is on.
You can enter minor losses either by using loss coefficients or by specifying equivalent lengths for
fittings.
15. Click on the New Fitting icon.
The New Fitting dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-38 New Fitting Dialog Box
16. Type 90 Degree Elbow in the Description edit field.

17. Type 4 in the Number of Fittings edit field.
18. Type 0.3 in the Loss Coefficient edit field.

19. Click on Apply.
The 90 Degree Elbow fitting is added to the Minor Losses dialog box (Figure 15-37 on page 384).
The New Fitting dialog box displays again.
Next, you add a 45 degree elbow to the Minor Loss dialog box.
20. In the New Fitting dialog box, type 45 Degree Elbow in the Description edit field.
21. Type 2 in the Number of Fittings edit field.
22. Type 0.2 in the Loss Coefficient edit field.
23. Click on Apply.
The 45 Degree Elbow fitting is added to the Minor Losses dialog box.
24. Click on Close.
The Minor Losses dialog box displays again.
25. Click on Close in the Minor Losses dialog box.
The Minor Losses dialog box closes.
26. Click on OK in the Pump Data dialog box.
The Pump Data dialog box closes.
The forcemain data has now been defined for MH 2. You are now ready to define the flow data for
MH 3 through MH 8.
The Edit Flows/Forcemains dialog box (below) displays.
27. Highlight Pipe 3 in the Edit Flows/Forcemains dialog box.
The Flow Data section of the dialog box (below) displays.
Sewers
Figure 15-39 Edit Flows/Forcemains Example
28. Enter the flow data as shown in the Flow Data table on page 386. Select each pipe in the list
box when you want to enter the flow data for that pipe.

Flow Data
Pipe 3 Pipe 4 Pipe 5 Pipe 6 Pipe 7 Pipe 8

Residential
Known Flow 1000 2500 0 0 0 500
Flow Rate/Unit 0 0 300 300 300 100
No. of Units 0 0 10 7 5 3
Commercial
Known Flow 0 0 1200 0 0 0
Flow Rate/Unit 0 0 0 0 0 0
No. of Units 0 0 0 0 0 0
Miscellaneous
Known Flow 0 0 0 0 0 0
Flow Rate/Unit 0 0 0 1000 0 0
No. of Units 0 0 0 2 0 0
Infiltration 20 20 20 20 20 20
Infiltration Flow/ 0 0 0 0 0 0
Length
29. After all of the flow data is entered, click on Close.

The Edit Flow/Forcemains dialog box closes.
After entry of the flow data, the system is almost ready to model. You need to use the Global Edit on
Pipe Data to set the material to New PVC.
While the Global Edit is open you step through each dialog box page to see what items are
available for editing.
Global Edit
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Edit " Global Edit.

The Global Edit dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-40 Global Edit Dialog Box

Using the Range method, you specify the pipe descriptions that are to be edited. Notice the order in
the list as you specify the first and last pipes that then result in edits being performed on all pipes in
between. Selection of the pipes can also be done graphically by clicking on the PIC button.
3. Select Pipe 1 from the From drop list.
4. Select Pipe 8 from the To drop list.
You have created the list of pipes to be edited.
Sewers
5. Click on the Pipe Material icon to the right of the Pipe Material drop list.
The Pipe Material Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-41 Pipe Material Library Dialog Box
Next you add New PVC to the Pipe Material Library.

6. Click on the New Pipe Material icon.
The New Pipe Material dialog box displays.
Figure 15-42 New Pipe Material

7. Type New PVC in the Description edit field.
8. Click on OK.
The New Pipe Material dialog box closes. The Pipe Material Library dialog box displays and as you
see, New PVC has been added to the Pipe Material Library.
9. Select New PVC in the list box.
10. Click on Close.
The Pipe Material Library dialog box closes.
The Global Edit dialog box (below) is displayed again.
Figure 15-43 Global Edit Dialog Box
11. Click on OK.

The pipe material change is made to all of the pipes in the network and the Global Edit dialog box
closes.
Calculations
Now that all of the changes to the network have been done, you are now ready to run calculations on
the network and generate some output. You first specify some design settings. After the Design
Settings are specified, you can run the calculations and look at the detailed report.
Design Settings
The design settings are used to specify parameters for sizing pipes and setting inverts in the network.
When specifying the design settings, you can specify the default constraints to abide by. These
constraints would be whether to violate cover first or violate minimum velocity first. After they have been
set, you can specify the Minimum Depth of Cover and the Minimum Velocity. You can also specify the
allowable pipe sizes to consider. Sanitary Sewers sizes pipes based on the allowable pipe sizes and
uses the next larger pipe size if needed. There is a toggle to consider the closest pipe size instead. You
start with entering the parameters for the design.

1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Calculation " Design Settings.
The Design Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-44 Design Settings Dialog Box
2. Turn on the Inverts radio button for the Match by option.

3. Type 0.05 in the Drop Across Inverts edit field.
A drop of 0.01 m is applied at the inverts that are in design. This helps convey the flow better
through the junction.
4. Turn on the Cover radio button in the Constraints to Violate First option.
This maintains the minimum velocity of 1 m/s.
5. Verify that the Minimum Depth of Cover edit field is set to 1.2.
Sewers
6. Verify that the Design Velocity is set to 1.0.
This value is used when initially sizing the pipes. If both pipes and inverts are being designed, the
minimum velocity in the pipes may be slightly lower than this value.
7. Make sure that the Use Drop Manholes toggle is on.
This places drop manholes when needed to help minimize excavation.
You leave the Minimum and Maximum pipe sizes at their defaults, since you have already specified
the pipe sizes.
The Pipe Sizes dialog box displays when you click on the Pipe Sizes button so you can customize
the pipe sizes to use.
8. Make sure the Use Closest Pipe Size toggle is off.
9. Click on OK.
The Design Settings are saved for the network.
Calculate
The Design Settings have been specified. You are now ready to specify the calculation parameters and
run calculations on the network. After the calculations are run, the Summary dialog box (Figure 15-46
on page 390) displays the results of the calculations.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Calculation " Calculate.

The Calculate dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-45 Calculate Dialog Box
2. Leave the default values in the Flow Ratios group. Verify that the variables in your dialog
box agree with what is shown in the figure above.
3. Select Daily Maximum from the Flow Profile Option drop list.
You have six different flow profile options that you can select from. The At Time option allows you to
create a table of flow ratios versus time. You then can select the time of day for which you want to
check the flow.
4. Be sure the Balance Forcemains toggle is off.
The Balance Forcemains option is used to balance multiple forcemains when they are using a
single discharge pipe. The static head is balanced between the two forcemains then.
5. Select Arithmetic from the Friction Slope Averaging Method drop list.
See the Sanitary Sewers documentation concerning the different friction slopes.
6. Turn on the At Critical Depth toggle for the Starting Hydraulic Grade Elevation.
This specifies that the hydraulic grade line starts at critical depth to start the iterations to find the
HGL line in all of the pipes. You can specify the actual elevation of the starting hydraulic grade
elevation if you prefer.
The calculations for the network are performed and the Summary dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-46 Summary Dialog Box
8. Review the data on the Summary dialog box.

9. Click on the Comments button to review comments about the calculations.

The Comments dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-47 Comments Dialog Box
Notice the variety of messages displayed. Lines 3, 4, 6, and 7 have a warning that the JLC may be
too small. The calculations for those lines show that there is a drop and the junction loss coefficient
that was entered may be too small. Lines 4 and 5 have transitional flow. Somewhere along the pipe
it went from subcritical flow to supercritical flow. Line 1 shows an upstream surcharge. This is due
to the pump at line 2. After viewing the comments it is usually suggested that some changes be
made to the network to resolve some of the issues. This tutorial just wanted to show some of the
error messages and touch on a few to give you exposure to some of the error messages that you
might see on your own projects.
10. Click on Close.
The Comments dialog box closes and the Summary dialog box displays again.
11. Click on the Details button to display the details for the pipes in the network.
The Calculation Details dialog box (below) displays.
Sewers
Figure 15-48 Calculation Details Dialog Box
12. Review the Details for the pipe. You can use the left and right arrows next to the Current
Pipe drop list to advance through the network.
13. After you have reviewed the results, click on Close.
The Calculation Details dialog box closes and the Summary dialog box displays again.

14. Click on Close.
The Summary dialog box closes.
At this point you are ready to generate some output for the Sanitary Sewer network. In the next
section, you create a Hydraulic Profile and a Plan and Profile sheet. You also look at the Custom
Reports that can be generated.
Hydraulic Profile
The Hydraulic Profile for the network can be generated through the Plan and Profile Sheets command
found on the Output menu. When you create a reach for the Plan and Profile Sheets command, you
create a Hydraulic Profile drawing that can be drawn in a profile drawing or in the plan drawing. In this
example, you have the Hydraulic Profile created in the profile drawing. This profile drawing is used in
the Plan and Profile sheets when you generate the sheets.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select the Output " Plan and Profile Sheets.
2. Click on the New Plan and Profile Reaches icon.

The New Sewer Reach dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-50 New Sewer Reach Dialog Box
3. Select Pipe 1 from the Downstream Pipe drop list.

4. Select Pipe 7 from the Upstream Pipe drop list.
Steps 3 and 4 define the pipe reach range for which to generate the Hydraulic Profile. You should
see seven pipes in the Hydraulic Profile including the forcemain.
5. Be sure that the Beginning Station of Reach edit field is set to 0.00.
6. Be sure that the Reference Alignment toggle is off.
This option allows you to select an existing alignment to base the stationing on. In this case,
assume the alignment runs down the centerline of the sewer. The outfall has a station of 0. All
stationing starts from the outfall.
7. Be sure that the Left to Right radio button in the Profile Orientation group is on.
Sewers
This selection causes the profile to be drawn with the outfall on the left end of the sheet.
8. Make sure that the In Profile Drawing radio button in the Draw Profile Graphic group is on.
This selection causes the Hydraulic Profile to be drawn in the profile drawing instead of in the plan
drawing.
9. Click on OK.
The New Sewer Reach dialog box closes.

The Hydraulic Profile is drawn in the profile drawing and is displayed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 15-51 Hydraulic Profile Example
10. Review the Hydraulic Profile example (above).

After the Hydraulic Profile drawing is created, you are ready to create Plan and Profile sheets for
the network. In the next section, you specify sheet settings and create the plots.
Plan and Profile Sheets

1. In the Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box, select Sheet Settings from the Format drop list.
The Edit Plan and Profile Sheets Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-52 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Sheet/Plan Tab
3. Refer to the figure above and type in the corresponding numbers.

The Sheet Length of 1600 allows you to see more than one pipe per sheet.

4. Click on the Profile tab.
The Profile portion of the Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings dialog box displays.
5. Refer to the figure below and type in the corresponding numbers.
Figure 15-53 Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings Dialog Box – Profile Tab
6. Click on OK.
The sheet settings are saved and the Edit Plan and Profile Sheet Settings dialog box closes. The
Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box displays again.
7. Click on the New Plan and Profile Sheets icon in the lower portion of the Plan and Profile
Sewers
Sheets dialog box.
The New Plan and Profile Sheets dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-54 New Plan and Profile Sheets Dialog Box
8. Leave the default station values as they are and click on OK.
The sheets are added to the sheet listing.
9. Select the first sheet in the list box and click on the View Plan and Profile Sheet icon.
The plan and profile sheet displays in the drawing.
10. You can review the other plan and profile sheet settings if you would like.
11. Click on Close.
At this point, you are ready to look at the Custom Reports.

Custom Reports
Custom Reports allows you to create printed reports of any information in the network. There are six
default reports included in Custom Reports. Three are for English projects and three are for Metric
projects.
1. In Sanitary Sewers, select Output " Custom Reports.
The Custom Report Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-55 Custom Report Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Custom Report icon.

The New Custom Report dialog box (Figure 15-56, below) displays.
3. In the Custom Report Name edit field type Radford Pipe Data.
You now create a report with pipe data for Radford road.
4. Select the Pipe Material item in the Available Items to Print list box.
5. Hold the Shift key down on your keyboard and select the Invert Slope option in the Available
Items to Print list box.
Notice that all of the items between Pipe Material and Invert Slope are highlighted. See the
following figure for an example of what the dialog box looks like.
Figure 15-56 New Custom Report Dialog Box
6. Click on the Append button to add the items to the Order of Items to Print list box.
The order that the items are in the list box is how they are printed in the report.
7. Click on the Print Options button.

The Custom Report Print Options dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 15-57 Custom Report Print Options Dialog Box
8. Review the Print Option settings.

In this dialog box, you can specify information to be included in the column headers and the width
of the columns.
9. Click on OK to accept the Print Option settings.
The Print Options dialog box closes and the New Custom Report dialog box displays.
10. Click on OK to add the new report format.
The New Custom Report dialog box closes.
11. If you want to print the report to the printer, click on the Print icon.
12. Select the desired print options in the Print Setup dialog box and click on OK.
The printout is printed to the printer or to file depending on the selected print setup settings.
See the Getting Started manual for more information on Print Setup.
Sewers
13. Click on Close.
The Custom Report Library dialog box closes.
This concludes the Sanitary Sewers tutorial. See the Sanitary Sewers manual for more information
on commands not covered here.
Summary
! Create a Sanitary Sewers Sub-project.
! Define libraries of standard Sanitary Sewers structures, pipes and pumps.
! Create a new network for Radford Road.
! Edit pipes and junctions.
! Calculate the system and design the system for the peak flow.
! Modify the system.
! Output the system.

LESSON 16 –
INTERSECTION LESSON
DESIGN
This lesson guides you through using Intersection Design for the
intersection between Rural Road and Hwy 73.
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Creating a RoadCalc Prototype . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
16
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Alignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Cross-Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Layout of the Horizontal Geometry for the Intersection. . . . . . . . . 426
Designing the Intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Maintaining Water Flow Through the Intersection. . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Finishing the Design of the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Reviewing the Design of the Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Lesson 16 – Intersection Design 399

Objectives
The areas covered in this lesson are:
! Create a profile.
! Copy a typical section to and from the library.
! Run the design.
! Add in an intersection.
! Adjust boundary stations.
! Place pavement control lines.
! Clean-up pavement control lines.
! Place lane transitions and islands.
! Create and attach curb and parallel components.
! Define areas within the intersection.
! Project slopes to the existing ground surface model.
! Check the boundary conditions.
! Determine problem areas within the intersection.
! Preview the intersection.
! Review quantities for the intersection.
Overview
In this lesson, you explore the steps needed to create a roadway using the RoadCalc™ product and
then design the intersection of two roadways. The roadway that you create is a section of Highway 73,
a 2 lane rural road. This road travels toward the subdivision from the north. You only complete the
required steps for the RoadCalc™ Sub-project before designing the intersection of the Rural Road and
Highway 73.
You start by creating a new RoadCalc™ Sub-project for the project. After this is complete, you enter the
point of intersection (PI) locations for the horizontal alignment so it intersects with the Rural Road
(lesson 10). Use the surface model created in lesson 8 to extract your original ground cross-sections.
Once you have the cross-sections extracted, you are able to view your original ground profile based on
the cross-sections. You enter a design profile and copy a typical section from the typical section library.
You then specify slope conditions, locations for the typical section and run the design of the
RoadCalc™ Sub-project. This completes the required RoadCalc™ information needed to design the
intersection between two RoadCalc™ Sub-projects. In Intersection Design, you add in an intersection
between the Rural Road and Highway 73. Once you have the intersection added, you place pavement
control lines in the CAD graphic that are used to control the intersection surface model. The pavement
control lines that cross are cleaned up with a radius, lane transition, breaking, and removing segments.
Shoulders are attached to the edge of pavement lines and islands with curbs placed within the
intersection. The ditch line is imported and a utility is placed under the Rural Road to continue water
flow through the intersection. Areas within the intersection are defined and slope lines are projected

from the ditch to tie into existing ground. The intersection is evaluated with various commands to verify
a proper design.
Getting Started
If you are starting this lesson after having finished lesson 15, you can skip this section and move
directly to the next section, Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project, below.
each of the steps discussed in the following sections of lesson 1.
Creating a RoadCalc Prototype

The sub-project prototype that is going to be created stores the names of alignments, original surfaces,
design surfaces, names of profiles, cross-sections sheet formats, plan and profile sheet formats, and
mass diagram sheet formats. Sub-project 4, which will be created shortly, is going to be based off sub-
project 1, which was done in Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road.
1. In Eagle Point, select File " Open.
The open dialog box displays.
2. Select Road Calc Sub-project 1 and click on OK.
The RoadCalc™ menu displays.
3. In RoadCalc™ select Output " Sub-project Prototype Settings.
Intersection Design
The Sub-Project Prototype Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-1 Sub-project Prototype Settings Dialog Box
4. Click on the New icon.

The New Sub-project Prototype dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-2 New Sub-project Prototype Dialog Box
5. Type RoadCalc Tutorial in the Prototype Description edit field and leave the rest at
default.
6. Click on OK.
This closes the New Sub-project Prototype dialog box.
7. Click on Close.
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project

The first step when working with RoadCalc™ is to set up a RoadCalc™ Sub-project, as you can have
numerous roadways in a given project. For example, you may have a mainline highway plus numerous
side roads or ramps that tie into the mainline. Follow the steps below to add a new Sub-project.
2. Select RoadCalc Sub-project from the list and then click on Next.

3. Make sure the Sub-project Number is 004 and type Hwy 73 in the Description edit field.
4. Select RoadCalc Tutorial from the Sub-project Prototype drop list.
5. Click on Next.
6. Make sure the Use Project Drawing radio button is on.

7. Click on Finish.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –

8. In the Open dialog box, select the 004 - Hwy 73 Road Sub-project and click on OK.
Alignments
The horizontal centerline alignment defines the path the road takes when travelling from the start of the
road to the end of the road. To simplify the geometry of the road, horizontal alignments are created as a
two-dimensional object that consists of lines, arcs, and/or spiral curves. The elevation component (or
vertical profile) of the roadway is discussed later.
Several methods exist that allow you to create the horizontal alignment geometry. You can define PI
points by graphically picking their locations, converting existing graphical objects (lines, arcs, etc.), or
directly entering coordinate locations in a dialog box. For this project, you directly enter the coordinates
into the system.
Entering Alignment PI Data

1. Before you enter the data for the alignment, perform the following options based on your
CAD product.
Thaw Centerline On 1
Current Centerline Active 1
Freeze All Off All
The resulting CAD graphic should display as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-8 Resulting CAD Graphic

3. Click on the New PI Icon.

4. Type the following coordinates into the Northing and Easting edit fields of the New PI dialog
box. Press the Tab key to move between the fields and click on Apply when the information
is correctly entered.
PI Northing Easting
BOP 50512.77105900 417340.41915006
Intersection Design
1 50535.55164032 417957.27001166
Lesson 16 –
2 50360.00717874 418278.75651049
EOP 50028.93836982 418534.80977293
5. Once the four PI locations have been defined, click on Close to dismiss the New PI dialog
box.
Entering Alignment Curve Data

Since you have defined the PI coordinate locations of your centerline, you now define the horizontal
curves for your two-lane road.

When the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box displays, notice that a spreadsheet type control is
provided that allows you to supply any pertinent piece of information that defines the curve.
Furthermore, you are able to view the curve information that precedes and follows the active PI (the
active PI being the middle column of data). To quickly move from one PI to the next, you can use
the left and right arrows provided in the dialog box.
3. Type the following Radius values for the curves at the PI’s found in the table below into the
R edit field of the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box. Click on the Right Arrow to move to the
next PI.
PI Radius Spiral In Spiral Out

1 700.00 0.00 0.00
2 700.00 0.00 0.00
This completes the horizontal geometry of your centerline alignment. Your next task is to supply
superelevation parameters for the curves on this alignment.
Entering Alignment Superelevation Data

1. Once the two curves have been defined, click on the Superelevation Data button.

The Superelevation Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-12 Superelevation Data Dialog Box
When the Superelevation Data dialog box displays, notice the tabular controls similar to those in the
Horizontal Curve Data dialog box where you can see the superelevation parameters for the current
curve as well as the curves that precede and follow the current curve.
3. Type the following superelevation parameters for the curves at the PI’s found in the table
below. Click on the Right Arrow to move to the next PI.
Parameter PI 1 PI 2
MSE 3.4 3.4
Slope Type % Slope % Slope
Rotation Type 1- Center 1 - Center
TR (in) 49.00 49.00
Intersection Design
X (in) 23.00 23.00
Lesson 16 –
Y (in) 46.00 46.00
SR (in) 39.00 39.00
TR (out) 49.00 49.00
X (out) 23.00 23.00
Y (out) 46.00 46.00
SR (out) 39.00 39.00
The superelevations between the two curves overlap. Therefore, you need to transition between
the superelevations.
4. Toggle on Superelevation Transition on the Superelevation Data dialog box.

The Superelevation Transition Parameters dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-13 Superelevation Transition Parameters Dialog Box
6. Turn on the All PI’s radio button to which to apply the transition.
7. Set the Minimum Length to Perform Transitions to be 70.00.
8. Click on OK to set the superelevation transition parameters and dismiss the Superelevation
Transition Parameters dialog box.
An Eagle Point message box (below) displays asking if you are sure that you want to apply this to
all curves.
Figure 16-14 Eagle Point Dialog Box
9. Click on Yes to apply the superelevation transition parameters to all curves. The Eagle Point
message box is dismissed.
10. Click on Close to dismiss the Superelevation Data dialog box.
11. Click on Close to dismiss the Horizontal Curve Data dialog box.
12. Click on Close to dismiss the Edit Alignment Data dialog box.
13. To view the alignment that you entered, perform the following actions according to your
CAD product.

The centerline for Highway 73 is displayed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-15 Highway 73 Centerline
You are now ready to cut original ground cross-sections along this alignment. The steps in the next
section guides you through this process.
Cross-Sections
Now that you have determined the route your roadway project follows, you generate cross-section data
for the existing (or original ground) surface. The most common approach used today is to “cut cross-
sections” from a surface model. Additionally, RoadCalc™ provides the ability to import cross-section
data from ASCII files and allows you to enter data by hand. Since you created an original ground
surface model in Lesson 8, you use the geometry of this surface model for your cross-sections.
Defining Surfaces
Before you extract the cross-section data, you define (or name) the different types of surfaces (or
materials) that are found throughout the project. RoadCalc™ allows you to separate your materials into
one of three distinct types of surfaces: Original, Design and Actual. Original surfaces are generally
taken to be the materials that exist in the field prior to the construction of your RoadCalc™ project.
Intersection Design
Design surfaces generally take the materials that you are going to be placing in the field when building
Lesson 16 –
you project. Actual surfaces are generally used to measure as-built quantities. Use the following steps
to define the design surfaces.
1. In RoadCalc™, select Cross-Sections " Manage Surfaces.

Since this sub-project was created using the prototype from Sub-project 1, there are two surfaces
listed under Original. This sub-project only uses one original surface.
2. Highlight the second surface and click on the Delete icon.
A message displays, stating Are you sure you want to Delete this Surface.
3. Click on Delete.
4. Click on the Design tab.
All the design surfaces are already added in. Just compare these to the dialog box below.
5. Click on Close to close the Manage Surfaces dialog box.
Cross-Sections from Surface Models

Now you can begin to place cross-section data into RoadCalc™ so that the design of your project can
continue. As was mentioned earlier, the most common approach that is used to generate cross-section
data is to extract information from a surface model. Earlier in this tutorial, you entered the geometry for
the horizontal centerline tutorial. In Lesson 8, you built a surface model from point and breakline data.
Your next goal is to utilize this data for your top Original surface as it represents existing field
conditions. The following steps outline how to extract cross-section data from a surface model.
Figure 16-18 Build Station List Dialog Box
When the Build Station List dialog box displays, the Begin and End stations automatically are
determined from the centerline alignment and displayed as default values. The PIC button allows you to

graphically locate the portion of the alignment where cross-section data should be extracted. You are
not doing this at this time.
2. Leave the Begin Station and End Station set to their default values.
3. Set the Stationing Interval to 20 if it is not already.
This instructs RoadCalc™ to generate cross-section stations every 20 meters along the length of
this project.
4. Make sure the Curve Stations and Equation Stations are toggled on and set the Skew Angle
to 0.
5. Make sure the Mark Stations for Extraction toggle is on and the Delete Existing Stations
toggle is off.
6. Click on OK to commit these settings and dismiss the Build Station List dialog box.
The top portion of the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box not only allows you to indicate which
surface(s) data should be generated for, it also allows you to map (or associate) a surface model to
Intersection Design
a defined RoadCalc™ surface.
Lesson 16 –
7. In the Extract Cross-Sections dialog box, toggle on the Extract option for the Orig_Surface
to on. Make sure the Surface Model is set to Original Ground.
8. Type —30 in the Left Corridor Edge edit field and press the Tab key.
9. Type 30 in the Right Corridor Edge edit field and press the Tab key.
10. Click on OK in the Extract Cross-Section dialog box to initiate the extraction routine.
Verify that you have the cross-section data the you need.
Once the cross-sections have been extracted from the surface model, the next step is to verify the
cross-section data.
Cross-Section Data
Now that you have extracted the cross-section data, you can look at the cross-section geometry that
has been created.

2. Look at a few of the stations to see if you got all of the data you need.
A preview window displays on the dialog box and displays a graphic of the cross-section data. As
you select a new station in the Station listing, the corresponding offset/elevation data displays
below in the Shot at Station listing.
3. After you have verified the data, click on Close.
Now that you have extracted original ground cross-sections, you are able to view the original
ground profile.
Profiles
The centerline profile defines the vertical path the road takes when travelling from the start of the road
to the end of the road. To simplify the geometry of the road, vertical profiles are created as a two-
dimensional object that consists of lines and/or vertical parabolic curves.
Several methods exist that allow you to create the vertical profile geometry. You can define vertical
points of intersection (VPI) by graphically picking their locations, converting existing graphical objects
(lines, vertical curves, etc.), or directly entering station and elevation locations in a dialog box. For this
project, you directly enter the stations and elevations into the system. You then enter vertical curves for
the profile.
Entering Profile VPI Data

Since you have existing ground cross-section data, the original ground profile is generated for you. The
geometry of the original ground profile is taken to be the elevation of the topmost original surface at the
horizontal centerline offset of 0 (zero). Additionally, this profile is automatically displayed for you. The
following steps describe how to enter your design centerline profile.
1. Before you enter the data for the centerline profile, you view the original ground profile that
was created by extracting cross-section. In RoadCalc™, select Profiles " View Profile
Graphics.

The original ground profile is displayed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-21 Original Ground Profile

This dialog box allows you to enter information for the profile. By default, a profile definition for the
centerline profile of your project has been added for you.
3. Make sure the Centerline definition is selected in the Profile drop list (it should be the only
option available).
Intersection Design
Figure 16-23 New VPI Dialog Box Lesson 16 –
# When entering VPI data by hand, the first piece of information must be supplied as a known Station and
Elevation. After this location has been identified, an additional entry method becomes available that
allows you to supply grade and distance information.

5. Type the following station and elevation values into the edit fields of the New VPI dialog box.
Press the Tab key to move between the fields and click on Apply when the information is
correctly entered.
VPI Station Elevation

BOP 0+000.00000000 84.74487966
1 0+300.00000000 86.00000000
2 0+830.00000000 86.08000000
3 1+275.00000000 91.10000000
EOP 1+388.63877769 88.90150270
6. Once the five VPI locations have been defined, click on Close to close the New VPI dialog
box.
Entering Profile Curve Data

You now define the vertical curve information for the profile.
The Vertical Curve Data dialog box (below) displays.
2. Click on the Right or Left Arrows until VPI 1 displays in the center column.
3. Type the following Length values for the vertical curves at the VPI’s found in the table below
into the L edit field of the Vertical Curve Data dialog box. Click on the Right Arrow to move to
the next VPI.
VPI Length
1 500.00
2 260.00
3 200.00

The profile was created so it passes through station 0+955.726 at an elevation of 87.50. Station
0+955.726 is the station along Hwy 73 at the intersection of the Rural Road.
4. Click on Close on the Vertical Curve Data dialog box.
5. Click on Close on the Edit Profile Data dialog box.
The design centerline profile is displayed as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-25 Design Centerline Profile
6. Once you have finished reviewing the profiles, select Alignments " View Alignment
Graphics from the RoadCalc™ menu.
Typical Sections
Typical sections can be thought of as the unique pavement combinations that are used to construct
your project. As an example, you might have one typical section that contains a paved shoulder and
another typical section that contains a curb and gutter.
Typical section geometry generally consists of the design surfaces/materials that were defined earlier.
A variety of slope conditions can be established that enable the typical section to be connected to the
original ground surface. By specifying combinations of typical sections and slope conditions, you are
able to model design scenarios that range from simple to complex. Instead of creating a typical section
to use for the Hwy 73 RoadCalc™ Sub-project, you use a typical section that was created for the Rural
Road Sub-project.
Copying the Typical Section for the Rural Road to the Typical Section
Library
Intersection Design
You need to open the Rural Road Sub-project and copy the typical section to the manager before you
Lesson 16 –
can access it in the Hwy 73 Sub-project.
The Open dialog box (Figure 16-6 on page 403) displays.
2. Highlight the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 001 – Rural Road and click on OK.
This loads the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 001 – Rural Road and displays the RoadCalc Menu
(Figure 16-7 on page 404).
# If the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 001 - Rural Road is not displayed for the project, follow steps 1-9 in
Creating a RoadCalc Sub-project on page 177 to add the Rural Road Sub-project to the project.

This dialog box contains a listing of typical sections that were used for the Rural Road Sub-project.
A preview image of each typical section is displayed after it has been saved. An extended
description of the typical section is also displayed to help you distinguish one typical section from
the next.
The Typical Section Library dialog box (below) displays.
This dialog box displays all of the typical sections that have been added to the Typical Section
Library. The name, preview, and an extended description for each typical section displays to help
you distinguish one typical section from the next. You can copy typical sections to the library and
from the library. Copying typical sections to the library allows you to use these typical sections in
any Sub-project. Copying from the library copies the typical section to your current Sub-project so it
can be used within the Sub-project.
5. Click on the Copy to Library button.

The Copy To Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-28 Copy To Library Dialog Box
6. Select 2-lane Rural Road from the Typical Section drop list.
7. Verify the Name is 2-lane Rural Road and the Description is Typical section – 3.6 meter
driving lane.
8. Click on OK to add the typical section to the Typical Section Library and close the Copy to
Library dialog box.
9. Click on the Close button in the Typical Section Library dialog box.
10. Click on the Close button in the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
Copying the Typical Section from the Typical Section Library to Use for
Hwy 73
Since you have the typical section from the Rural Road Sub-project added to the Typical Section
Library, you are now ready to copy the typical section to the Hwy 73 Sub-project.
The Open dialog box (Figure 16-6 on page 403) displays.
2. Highlight the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 004 – Hwy 73 and click on OK.
This loads the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 004 – Hwy 73 and the RoadCalc Menu (Figure 16-7 on
page 404).
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
The Manage Typical Sections dialog box (Figure 16-26 on page 416) displays.
The Typical Section Library dialog box (Figure 16-27 on page 416) displays.
5. Highlight 2-lane Rural Road in the list and click on the Copy from Library button.

The Copy From Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-29 Copy From Library Dialog Box
6. Type 2-lane Hwy 73 in the Name edit field.

7. Click on OK to copy the typical section from the library to the RoadCalc™ Sub-project 004 –
Hwy 73 and close the dialog box.
8. Click on the Close button in the Typical Section Library dialog box.
9. Click on the Close button in the Manage Typical Sections dialog box.
Process
Through this point in this lesson, you have created a horizontal alignment, defined cross-section
surfaces, developed a design profile, and selected a typical section to use. It is time to assemble the
various pieces of data and provide information about how they are used together to create your
roadway project.
Slopes Library
You are using the same slopes and conditions that were created in Lesson 10 – Rural Road. When the
slopes were created for lesson 10, they were added to a library. This library is used in all RoadCalc™
Sub-projects. If the slopes are already added in the library, you can skip those steps.

2. Click on the plus (+) symbol next to Single to expand the list of single slopes.
If you have a slope of 3:1 Slope and 4:1 Slope, you can skip steps 3-15. If you need to add one or
both of the slopes, complete the appropriate steps below.
3. Highlight Single in the tree view list and click on the New Slope icon.
The New Single Slope dialog box (below) displays.
4. In the Name edit field, type 3:1 Slope and press the Tab key.
Intersection Design
5. In the Slope Value edit field, type 3 and press the Tab key.
Lesson 16 –
7. In the Description field, type 3:1 slope for tutorial.
8. Click on OK to save this slope definition and close the New Single slope dialog box.
You now define another Single slope.
9. Select Single in the Slopes Library dialog box listing so that it is active.
11. In the Name edit field, type 4:1 Slope and press the Tab key.
12. In the Slope Value edit field, type 4 and press the Tab key.
14. In the Description field, type 4:1 slope for tutorial.

15. Click on OK to save this slope definition and close the New Single Slope dialog box.
Both single slopes (3:1 Slope and 4:1 Slope) are displayed in the single branch. If you click on the
plus (+) symbol to the left of Single in the tree view list, you see all of the slopes defined for Single.
Clicking on the minus (-) symbol to the left of Single in the tree view list collapses the list.
16. Click on the plus (+) symbol next to Clear Zone to expand the list of clear zone slopes.
If you have a slope of Clear Zone 4% Slope, you can skip steps 17–25. If you need to add the
clear zone slope, complete the steps below.
17. Highlight Clear Zone and click on the New Slope icon.
The New Clear Zone Slope dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-32 New Clear Zone Slope Dialog Box
18. In the Name edit field, type Clear Zone 4% Slope and press the Tab key.
19. In the Clear Distance edit field, type 5 and press the Tab key.
This is the distance (in meters for this project) from the From PT Code on the Typical section for the
clear zone slope.
20. Select 10 Shoulder from the From PT Code drop list and press the Tab key.
21. Type —4 in the To Clear Offset edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the slope to be used for the clear zone area.
22. Set the slope type to be % Slope and press the Tab key.
23. Type 3 in the From Clear Offset edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the slope from the outer edge of the clear zone to the specified original ground surface.
24. Set the slope type as H/V and press the Tab key.
25. Type 4% clear zone for tutorial in the Description edit field.
26. Click on OK to save this slope configuration and close the New Clear Zone Slope dialog box.
27. Click on Close to close the Slopes Library dialog box.
You have now defined the slopes that are available to use when processing the typical section. You are
now going to define the different cut and fill conditions that use these slopes.
Condition Tables

2. Click on the New Condition Table icon.

3. Type Depth Controlled Conditions in the Name edit field.

4. Click on the Description button.
The Description dialog box displays.
Intersection Design
5. Type For tutorial use only in the Description edit field and click on OK.
Lesson 16 –
6. Make sure the Based on Depth Only option is on.
This tells RoadCalc™ to apply the slope conditions based on depths of cut or fill rather than the
Original ground material the slopes may be traveling through.
7. Select Cut in the Material Conditions list box so that it is active.
8. Select the default condition (Depth Range of 0.00) and click on the Modify Condition icon.

You leave most of the values in the Modify Condition dialog box with the exception of the Slope
Name.
10. Click on OK to close the Modify Condition dialog box.
The New Condition dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-36 New Condition Dialog Box

This tells RoadCalc™ that the slope type should change for depths greater than two meters in Cut.
13. Make sure the At PT Code drop list in the Depth Check section is set to Outermost Point, the
Measured Vertical from PT Code is on and the Slope Type is set to Single.
16. Click on OK to commit these values and close the New Conditions dialog box.
Take a moment to define conditional tests for sections in Fill.
17. Select Fill in the Material Conditions list box so that it is active.
18. Select the default condition (Depth Range of 0.00) and click on the Modify Condition icon.
You leave most of the values in the Modify Condition dialog box with the exception of the Slope
Name.

20. Click on OK to commit this value and dismiss the Modify Condition dialog box.
You apply a different type of slope condition when your fill height exceeds two meters.
23. Make sure the At PT Code drop list in the Depth Check section is set to Outermost Point and
the Measured Vertically from PT Code option is on.
24. Select Clear Zone from the Slope Type drop list.
25. Select Clear Zone 4% Slope from the Slope Name drop list.
27. Click on OK to commit these values and close the New Condition dialog box.
28. Click on OK to save this condition table and close the New Condition Table dialog box.
29. Click on Close in the Manage Condition Tables dialog box.
Now you are ready to specify where the typical section is used in the project and what conditions
are used at certain stations.
Editing Design Locations

This section allows you to specify the locations of the typical sections and slope conditions in the
project. By treating typical sections separately from the slopes, you can “mix and match” combinations
of typical sections and slopes to model even the most complex projects.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
2. In the Typical Section Locations area of the dialog box, click on the New Typical Section
Location icon.

The New Typical Section Location dialog box summarizes the station information for the alignment,
cross-section, and profile data.
4. Select 2-lane Hwy 73 from the Typical Section drop list.
This is the typical section you copied from the Typical Section Library earlier.
5. Make sure Do not transition to next station is selected from the Transition Type drop list.
This tells RoadCalc™ to make an abrupt change from one typical section to the next if multiple
typical sections have been defined for this project. Since you are only using one typical section, this
option is essentially benign.
6. Click on OK to commit this value and close the New Typical Section Location dialog box.
Notice that you did not supply an ending station value. This is because you apply the same typical
section for the entire project.
7. In the Condition Table Locations section of the Edit Design Locations dialog box, click on
the New Condition Table Location icon.

9. Select Depth Controlled Conditions from the Left Condition Table drop list.
10. Select Depth Controlled Conditions from the Right Condition Table drop list.
11. Click on OK to commit these values and dismiss the New Condition Table Location dialog
box.
12. Click on Close in the Edit Design Locations dialog box.

You are now ready to process the typical section through the project. The Run Design command allows
you to process through the entire project automatically or check the process at each station as it
occurs. As an added feature, the station data for the alignment, profile, and cross-sections are shown.
Running the Design

2. The Starting Station edit field should display the value of 0+000.00. If this is not the value
displayed, type it into the edit field.
3. The Ending Station edit field should display the value of 1+388.63877769. If this is not the
value displayed, type it into the edit field.
The other two methods (Step Through All and Step Through Warnings) allow you to inspect each
cross-section as it is being processed. Additionally, these two options allow you to make
corrections to your design on the fly.
The typical sections are processed through the project.
Intersection Design
Depending on the information you have entered, RoadCalc™ may display a Processing Warnings
Lesson 16 –
dialog box to you similar to that shown in Figure 16-41 on page 426. The Processing Warnings
dialog box summarizes potential design problems or conflicts. Common practice is for you, the
qualified design professional, to print a report of this information so that you can determine a proper

course of action. Generally, the type of warning you receive dictates the corrective action, although
there is usually more than one way to correct a particular problem.
6. Click on the Cancel button in the Processing Warnings dialog box if it has been displayed to
you.
Now that you have processed the typical section through the project, take a moment and inspect some
of your cross-section stations.
The Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box (Figure 16-20 on page 412) displays.
2. Select in sequence a number of the stations in the station listing and watch the thumbnail
graphic image for each station.
You should notice that the geometry for each cross-section is changing as you move from one
station to the next.
3. Click on Close to close the Edit Cross-Section Data dialog box.
4. Since the RoadCalc™ portion of this lesson is complete, click on the X in the upper right
corner of the RoadCalc™ menu to close RoadCalc™.
Layout of the Horizontal Geometry for the Intersection

The layout of the intersection includes several steps. First, an intersection between two or more roads
is established. Once the intersection is established, pavement control lines are created for the
horizontal layout throughout the intersection. The pavement control lines are connected between the
two roadways with a radius and a lane transition.

Creating an Intersection for 001 – Rural Road Sub-project and 004 –
Hwy 73 Sub-project
The intersection between the Rural Road Sub-project and Hwy 73 Sub-project is created. When
creating an intersection to be designed, you select the intersecting roadways and establishing an
intersection surface model. The intersection surface model is created to blend the intersection into the
roadway Sub-projects.
Complete the following steps to create an intersection for the project.
Before you create an intersection for the project, you zoom into the area of the intersection.
1. Zoom into the area of the intersection of the Rural Road and Highway 73 as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 16-42 Intersection of Rural Road and Highway 73
2. In Eagle Point, Select Product " Intersection Design.

This loads the Intersection Design menu (below).
Figure 16-43 Intersection Design Menu
3. In Intersection Design, Select Layout " Manage Intersections.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
The Manage Intersections dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-44 Manage Intersections Dialog Box
4. Click on the New Intersection icon to add a new intersection to the project.

The first page of the New Intersection wizard dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-45 New Intersection Dialog Box Wizard – Page One
5. Click on the PIC button to select the alignments to use for the design of the intersection.
6. Graphically pick two points around the intersection of the two alignments as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 16-46 Select Two Points to Define the Intersection
The centerline alignments for Sub-project 001 and Sub-project 004 display in the preview window.
The catchlines of the two RoadCalc™ Sub-projects are also displayed.
7. Click on the Next button once you have the correct alignments selected.

The second page of the New Intersection wizard dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-47 New Intersection Dialog Box Wizard – Page Two
The locations the catchlines of the two Sub-projects intersect are marked with circles.
8. Click on the Select button to define the extents of the intersection.
In the New Intersection dialog box, below the preview window, you are prompted:
Pick first point
9. Graphically select a point in the upper left of the preview window.
In the New Intersection dialog box, below the preview window, you are prompted:
Pick second point
10. Graphically select a point in the lower right of the preview window such that the two circles
and the intersection of the centerlines are included within the window.
The boundary stations of the intersection are displayed and the Next button is enabled.
11. Click on Next.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –

The third and last page of the New Intersection wizard dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-48 New Intersection Dialog Box Wizard – Page Three
12. Type Rural Road and Hwy 73 in the Name field and press the Tab key on your keyboard.
13. Select Intersection Metric Defaults from the Intersection Prototype drop list.
14. Click on the Manage Surface Models icon next to the Intersection Surface Model drop list to
add a new surface model.
This surface model is used as the intersection surface model.
15. Click on the New Surface Model icon to add a new surface model to the Manage Surface
Models dialog box.

The New Surface Model dialog box – Surface Model Tab (below) displays.
16. Type Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int for the description of the surface model.
17. Set the parameters of the Surface Model to the following:
Minimum Valid Elevation 1.00
Maximum Valid Elevation 200
Maximum Length of Triangle Side Off
Point Tolerance 0.005
Construction Method Faces/Shapes
Write Output Plan Drawing/Design File

Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
19. Set the option to those shown in the table below.
Layer INT_TIN Level 35
Color 1 Color 0
20. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the settings and close the dialog box.

21. Click on Apply in the New Surface Model dialog box to save the settings for this model.
22. Click on the Contours tab in the New Surface Model dialog box.
The New Surface Model Dialog Box– Contours Tab (below) displays.
23. Enter the information as shown in the table below. Press the Tab key to move between the
various fields.
Intermediate Interval 0.1
Index Interval 0.5
Smoothing Factor 0
Polynomial Factor 0
Construction Method Polylines/Complex Chains
24. Click on Apply to save the settings for the contours.

25. Click on the CAD Settings icon on the Contours Tab and set the options to the values given
below.
Index Contours
Layer INT_IDX Level 36
Color 4 Color 3
Width 0 Weight 0
Intermediate Contours
Layer INT_INT Level 37
Color 3 Color 2
Width 0 Weight 0
User-Defined Contours
Layer INT_USR Level 38
Color 6 Color 5
Width 0 Weight 0
27. Now click on the Elevation Labels tab in the New Surface Model dialog box.
The New Surface Model Dialog Box – Elevation Labels Tab (below) displays.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –

28. Supply the parameters for the Elevation Labels as shown in the table below. Press the Tab
key to move between the various fields.
Text Rotation Angle 0.00
X Interval 20.00
Y Interval 20.00
Grid Rotation Angle 0.00
Construction Method Block/Cell
29. Click on Apply to save the settings in the Elevation Labels tab.
30. Click on the CAD Settings icon to specify the CAD settings for the elevation labels. Enter the
CAD Settings given below.
Layer INT_SPOT Level 38
Color 7 Color 6
Height 10.00 Height 10.00
31. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the setting and dismiss the dialog
box.
32. Click on the Rectangular Grid tab in the New Surface Model dialog box.
The New Surface Model Dialog Box – Rectangular Grid Tab (below) displays.
Figure 16-54 New Surface Dialog Box – Rectangular Grid Dialog Box
33. Enter the information as shown in the table below. Press the Tab key to move between the
various fields.
X Interval 20.00
Y Interval 20.00
Vertical Scale Factor 1.0
Change Default Smoothing Factor Off

Longitudinal Angle 0.00
Display Transverse Lines On
Grid Skirt On
Construction Method Faces/Shapes
34. Click on Apply to save the settings in the Rectangular Grid tab.
35. Click on the CAD Settings icon to specify the CAD settings for the rectangular grid. Enter
the CAD Settings given below.
Layer INT_GRD Level 39
Color 3 Color 2
37. Click on OK to close the New Surface Model dialog box and save all of the parameters.
The Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int surface model has been added to the manager.
38. Click on Close to close the Manage Surface Model dialog box.
You are returned to the New Intersection dialog box with the Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int surface
model set in the Intersection Surface Model drop list.
39. Select Original Ground from the Original Ground Surface Model drop list.
40. Type 1.0 into the Surface Densification Length field on the New Intersection dialog box.
41. Click on Finish in the New Intersection dialog box.
The intersection is added to the Manage Intersections dialog box and highlighted.
42. Click on Close in the Manage Intersections dialog box.
Adjusting the Boundary Stations for the Intersection
Intersection Design
Now that the intersection of the Rural Road and Hwy 73 has been added to the project, you are ready
to design the intersection. You start by adjusting the boundary stations of the intersection if necessary.
Lesson 16 –
The boundary stations are used as the extents of the intersection. Also, the cross-section stations in
RoadCalc™ within the boundary stations for all RoadCalc™ Sub-projects are marked for zero volumes
so duplicate volumes are not created for the intersection. The stations within the boundary stations are
also toggled off so they are not plotted with when cross-section plots in RoadCalc™.
1. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Modify Intersection Boundary Stations.

The Modify Intersection Boundary Stations dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-55 Modify Intersection Boundary Stations Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the calculated boundary stations for the intersection. You are going to
modify the stations for the boundaries so you have a larger area to work with.
2. Highlight Sub-project 001 – Rural Road in the list view.
You are going to change the beginning station from 0+880.00 to 0+860.00.
3. To change the Beginning Station to 0+860.00, select 0+860.00 in the Beginning Station drop
list.
The ending station for this road can not be modified since it is already at the end of the road
alignment.
4. Highlight Sub-project 004 – Hwy 73 in the list view.
You are going to change the beginning station from 0+920.00 to 0+900.00.
5. Select 0+900.00 in the Beginning Station drop list.
6. Select 1+000.00 in the Ending Station drop list.
7. Click on OK to save the modification to the boundary stations and close the Modify
Intersection Boundary Stations dialog box.
Placing Pavement Control Lines in the CAD Graphic

The pavement control lines you place are the centerline and the edges of pavement of each road. Once
these pavement control lines are placed, some clean work is done.
1. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Pavement Control Lines.

The Layout Pavement Control Lines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-56 Layout Pavement Control Lines Dialog Box
In this dialog box, each road within the intersection is displayed in the Road drop list. The beginning
boundary station is displayed for the selected road. The processed offsets and processed cross-
section are displayed for the boundary station. Any of the processed offsets can be toggled on to be
placed as pavement control lines in the CAD graphic. These pavement control lines are used to
develop the surface model for the intersection.
2. Select 001 – Rural Road in the Road drop list.
The station of 0+860.00 is displayed to the right of the drop list. All of the processed offsets and the
processed cross-section for station 0+860.00 are displayed.
3. Toggle on the processed offsets of –3.6, 0.0, and 3.6.
This creates pavement control lines for the edge of pavement left, centerline, and edge of
pavement right when the Apply button is clicked on for the Rural Road.
4. Select 004 – Hwy 73 in the Road drop list.
The station of 0+900.00 is displayed to the right of the drop list. All of the processed offsets and the
processed cross-section for station 0+900.00 are displayed.
5. Toggle on the processed offsets of –3.6, 0.0, and 3.6.
This creates pavement control lines for the edge of pavement left, centerline, and edge of
pavement right when the Apply button is clicked on for Hwy 73.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –

6. Click on the CAD Settings icon to set the CAD properties for the pavement control lines.
Enter the CAD settings given below.
Layer INT_PAVEMENT Level 40
Color 3 Color 2
Width 0 Weight 0
8. Click on Apply in the Layout Pavement Control Lines dialog box.
This places the pavement control lines at the offsets toggled on in the CAD graphic for each road.
The pavement control lines are placed in CAD at a 0 (zero) elevation. A profile is also created for
each pavement control line. The Surface Densification Length specified when adding the
intersection is used when creating the profile. Since you set the Surface Densification Length to 1
meter, the profile has a VPI that is every meter along the pavement control lines.
9. After the pavement control lines are placed in the CAD graphic, click on Close to dismiss
the Layout Pavement Control Lines dialog box.
A surface model for the intersection is created. All of the pavement control lines and their
associated profiles are used.
Placing a Curve Return Between Pavement Control Lines

Next, you place a curve return on the Northwest corner of the T intersection.
1. Before you clean up the pavement control lines, zoom into the area that the pavement
control lines have been places.
Your CAD graphic should resemble Figure 16-58 on page 439.
2. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Clean-up Intersection Lines.
The Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-57 Clean-up Intersection Lines Dialog Box
3. Set the Clean-up Option to be Radius.

4. Type 10 in the Radius edit field.
This places a 10 meter radius curve between the pavement control lines that are selected.
5. Click on Apply on the Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box.
You are prompted:
Select first pavement control line:

6. Graphically select the first pavement control line as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-58 Location to Select First Pavement Control Line
Once the first pavement control line is selected, you are prompted:
Select second pavement control line:
7. Graphically select the second pavement control line as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-59 Location to Select Second Pavement Control Line
A radius of 10 meters is placed between the two pavement control lines selected as shown below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-60 Radius Placed Between Pavement Control Lines
You are prompted:

Select first pavement control line
8. Press Enter in AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device in
MicroStation to end the clean-up command.
The prompt is canceled and you are returned to the Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box.

9. Click on Close.
A surface model for the intersection is created with the changes made to the pavement control
lines.
Adding a Lane Transition to the Intersection

The Southeast corner of the T intersection needs a lane transition placed. The lane transition is a turn
lane along the Rural Road and an acceleration lane along Hwy 73. You first add a lane transition to the
Lane Transition Library. Once the lane transition is added to the library, you use it to place between the
Rural Road and Hwy 73.
1. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Lane Transitions.
The Layout Lane Transitions dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-61 Layout Lane Transition Dialog Box
2. Click on the Lane Transition Library icon to display the library of lane transitions.
The Lane Transition Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-62 Lane Transition Library Dialog Box
3. Click on the New Lane Transition icon to create a new lane transition.

The New Lane Transition dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-63 New Lane Transition Dialog Box
4. Type Tutorial Turn Lane and Acceleration Lane (3.6 meters) in the Lane
Transition Name field.
5. Type 0.0 in the D1 field and press the Tab key.
6. Type the following data from the table below into the correct field. Press the Tab key to move
to the next field.
D2 3.6
D3 0.0
D4 3.6
L1 10.0
L2 20.0
Intersection Design
L3 20.0
Lesson 16 –
L4 10.0
R1 0.0
R2 5.0
R3 5.0
R4 5.0
R5 0.0
7. Click on OK in the New Lane Transition dialog box to create the lane transition and close the
dialog box.
The lane transition is added to the Lane Transition Library.
8. Highlight Tutorial Turn Lane and Acceleration Lane (3.6 meters) and click on Close on the
Lane Transition Library to close the dialog box.
The Tutorial Turn Lane and Acceleration Lane (3.6 meters) is displayed in the Lane Transition drop
list.

9. Click on Apply in the Layout Lane Transitions dialog box to place the lane transition
between the Rural Road and Hwy 73.
You are prompted:
Select first pavement control line:
10. Graphically select the pavement control line along the Rural Road as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 16-64 Location the Select First Pavement Control Line Along Rural Road
Once the first pavement control line has been selected, you are prompted:
Select second pavement control line:
11. Graphically select the second pavement control line along Hwy 73 as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 16-65 Location to Select the Second Pavement Control Line Along Hwy 73
A lane transition is placed between the Rural Road and Hwy 73 as shown below.
Figure 16-66 Lane Transition Placed Between Rural Road and Hwy 73

12. Click on Close in the Layout Lane Transitions dialog box.
lines.
Breaking and Removing Pavement Control Lines Along the Rural Road
The pavement control lines at the centerline and right edge of pavement of the Rural Road extend into
the pavement of Hwy 73. You break these pavement control lines at their intersection with the right
edge pavement control line along Hwy 73.
1. To simplify the selection process of the pavement control lines, perform the following layer/
level manipulation based on your CAD product.
Current INT_PAVEMENT Active 40
Freeze ALL Off ALL
2. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Clean-up Intersection Lines.

The Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box (Figure 16-57 on page 438) displays.
3. Set the Clean-up Option to Break.
4. Click on Apply in the Clean-up Intersection lines dialog box.
You are prompted:
Select pavement control line:
5. Graphically select the centerline pavement control line for the Rural Road as shown below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-67 Centerline Pavement Control Line to Break
Once the pavement control line is selected, you are prompted:

Select point for break:

6. Graphically select the intersection of the centerline pavement control line on the Rural Road
and the right edge pavement control line on Hwy 73 as shown below.
Figure 16-68 Intersection Location to Break the Centerline Pavement Control Line
Once the pavement control line at the centerline of the Rural Road is broken, you are prompted:
7. Graphically select the right edge pavement control line on the Rural Road as shown below.
Figure 16-69 Right Edge of Pavement Control Line to Break
Once the pavement control line is selected, you are prompted:

Select point for break:
8. Graphically select the intersection of the right edge pavement control line on the Rural Road
and the right edge pavement control line on Hwy 73 as shown below.
Figure 16-70 Intersection Location to Break the Right Edge Pavement Control Line
Once the pavement control line at the right edge on the Rural Road is broken, you are prompted:

MicroStation.
The prompt is canceled and you are returned to the Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box.
10. Set the Clean-up Option to Remove.
11. Click on Apply in the Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box.
You are prompted:
Select objects:
12. Graphically select the centerline and left and right edge pavement control lines along the
Rural Road that extend into Hwy 73 as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-71 Selecting the Pavement Control Lines to Remove
13. Once you have selected the three segments, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/BricsCad or
the Reset button on your pointing device in MicroStation to finish the selection process.
The selected segments of pavement control lines are removed from the CAD graphic.
You are prompted:
Select objects:
MicroStation to finish removing pavement control lines.
The resulting pavement control lines for the intersection should display as shown below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-72 Resulting Pavement Control Lines
15. Click on Close in the Clean-up Intersection Lines dialog box.

lines.

Adding Triangular Islands to the Intersection
Next, you place triangular Islands between Hwy 73 and the Rural Road. The first island placed is in the
Northwest corner and the second island is in the Southeast corner. Two centerline alignments and a
pavement control line are used for the alignment of the triangular island.
1. To display the centerline alignments, perform the following layer/level manipulation based
on your CAD product.
Thaw CENTERLINE On 1
2. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Islands/Medians.

The Layout Islands/Medians dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-73 Layout Islands/Medians Dialog Box
3. Set the Island/Median drop list to Triangular Island.

4. Type 3.6 in the Offset 1 field and press the Tab key.
This is the offset to the triangular island from the first alignment selected.
This is the offset to the triangular island from the second alignment selected.
This is the offset to the triangular island from the pavement control line selected.
7. Type 10.0 in the Maximum A field and press the Tab key.
This is the maximum length the first side of the triangular island can be.
8. Type 10.0 in the Maximum B field and press the Tab key.
This is the maximum length the second side of the triangular island can be.
9. Type 0.25 in the Radius field and press the Tab key.
This is the radius value that is placed at each corner of the triangular island.

10. Click on the CAD Settings icon to specify the CAD properties for the islands/medians. Enter
the CAD settings given below.
Layer INT_ISLAND- Level 41
MEDIAN
Color 4 Color 3
Width 0 Weight 0
11. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the setting and close the dialog box.
12. Click on Apply to place the triangular island.
You are prompted:
Select a point:
13. Graphically select along the Hwy 73 centerline alignment as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-74 Location to Select the First Alignment for the Northwest Triangular Island
The closest centerline alignment is used as the selected object to align the triangular island.
Once the first point for the first alignment is selected, you are prompted:
Select first alignment:
Intersection Design
14. Graphically select along the Rural Road centerline alignment as shown in the figure below.
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-75 Location to Select the Second Alignment for the Northwest Triangular Island
Once the second point for the second alignment is selected, you are prompted:

15. Graphically select the pavement control line with the radius as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-76 Location to Select the Pavement Control Line for the Northwest Triangular Island
Once the pavement control line is selected, the triangular island is placed as shown below.
Figure 16-77 Resulting Northwest Triangular Island
Once the triangular island is placed in the Northwest corner of the intersection, the command
repeats. You are prompted:
16. Graphically select the first point on the Rural Road alignment as shown below.
Figure 16-78 Location to Select the First Alignment for the Southeast Triangular Island
Once the first point for the first alignment is selected, you are prompted:
Select second alignment:

17. Graphically select along the Hwy 73 centerline alignment as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-79 Location to Select the Second Alignment for the Southeast Triangular Island
Once the second point for the second alignment is selected, you are prompted:
18. Graphically select the pavement control line with the lane transition as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 16-80 Location to Select the Pavement Control Line for the Southeast Triangular Island
Once the pavement control line is selected, the triangular island is placed as shown below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-81 Resulting Southeast Triangular Island
Once the triangular island is placed in the Southeast corner of the intersection, the command
repeats. You are prompted:

MicroStation.
You are returned to the Layout Triangular Islands/Medians dialog box.
20. Click on the Close button.
A surface model for the intersection is created with the triangular islands added.
Designing the Intersection

You create area, curb, and parallel components that are used to design the intersection. Area
components are used to define the pavement, island, boulevard, and sidewalk regions within the
intersection. You are defining areas for the pavement materials and the areas within the triangular
islands. Curb components are attached to pavement control lines or other component lines to define
any curb and gutter within the intersection. You are attaching curb components to the inside of the
triangular islands. Parallel components are attached to pavement control lines or other component lines
to define shoulders, sidewalks, or any other parallel geometry. You are attaching the parallel component
to the edges of pavement as a shoulder.
Creating Area Components

Area component are used for defining regions within the intersection. These defined regions or areas
are then used to calculate intersection quantities. The first area component you create has the same
pavement materials for the roadway. These surfaces include BitWear, Binder, and AggBase. The
second area component is used within the triangular islands.
1. In Intersection Design, select Design " Area Component Library.
The Area Component Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-82 Area Component Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Area Component icon.

The New Area Component dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-83 New Area Component Dialog Box
3. Type Pavement area for tutorial in the Name edit field.

The New Surface dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-84 New Surface Dialog Box
5. Type BitWear in the Surface edit field and press the Tab key.
6. Type 0.07 in the Thickness edit field and click on Apply.
The BitWear surface is added to the Surface list in the New Area Component dialog box.
7. Type Binder in the Surface edit field and press the Tab key.
The Binder surface is added to the Surface list on the New Area Component dialog box.
9. Type AggBase in the Surface edit field and press the Tab key.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
The AggBase surface is added to the surface list on the New Area Component dialog box.
11. Click on Close.
12. Click on OK to commit the settings for the area component and close the New Area
Component dialog box.
The Pavement area for tutorial area component is displayed in the Area Component Library dialog
box.
13. Click on the New Area Component icon.
14. Type Island area for tutorial in the Name edit field.
16. Type Concrete in the Surface edit field and press the Tab key.
The Concrete surface is added to the Surface list in the New Area Component dialog box.

The AggBase surface is added to the Surface list on the New Area Component dialog box.
20. Click on Close to close the New Surface dialog box.
21. Click on OK to commit the settings for the area component and close the New Area
The Island area for tutorial area component is displayed in the Area Component Library dialog box.
22. Click on Close.
Creating a Curb Component

A curb component is used on the inside of the triangular islands. The curb is placed on the AggBase
material. The AggBase has a thickness of 0.31 which is consistent with the typical section for the Rural
Road and Hwy 73.
1. In Intersection Design, select Design " Curb Component Library.
The Curb Component Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-85 Curb Component Library Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Curb Component icon.

The New Curb Component dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-86 New Curb Component Dialog Box
The New Curb Component dialog box always displays an Offset of 0.00 with an Elevation of 0.00. This
is the location the curb component is attached to a pavement control line. You can enter offsets to the
left with a negative value and to the right with a positive value. The elevation is an absolute elevation. A

negative elevation would be below the 0.00,0.00 location and a positive elevation is going to be above
the 0.00,0.00 location. The First Offset Thickness is measured from the Offset/Elevation that is listed
first in the Curb Geometry list. This value is measured down to define the bottom of the curb. The Last
Offset Thickness is measured from the Offset/Elevation that is listed last in the Curb Geometry list. This
value is also measured down to define the bottom of the curb.
3. Type Island curb for tutorial in the Name edit field.
4. Click on the New Offset/Elevation icon in the Curb Geometry frame.
The New Offset/Elevation dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-87 New Offset/Elevation Dialog Box
5. Type 0.3 in the Offset edit field and press the Tab key.
6. Type —0.006 in the Elevation edit field and click on Apply.
The offset and elevation is placed in the Curb Geometry frame in the New Curb Component dialog
box. The preview window on the New Curb Component dialog box updates with the curb geometry
entered.
8. Type 0.144 in the Elevation edit field and click on Apply.
The offset and elevation is placed in the Curb Geometry frame on the New Curb Component dialog
box. The preview window updates with the curb geometry entered.
The offset and elevation is placed in the Curb Geometry frame in the New Curb Component dialog
box. The preview window on the New Curb Component dialog box updates with the curb geometry
entered.
11. Click on Close to close the New Offset/Elevation dialog box.
12. Type 0.23 in the First Offset Thickness edit field in the New Curb Component dialog box for
Intersection Design
the thickness of the curb at the 0.00,0.00 offset/elevation point and press the Tab key.
Lesson 16 –
The preview window updates with the thickness specified.
13. Type 0.374 in the Last Offset Thickness edit field on the New Curb Component dialog box
for the thickness of the curb at the 0.46,0.144 offset/elevation point and press the Tab key.
The preview window updates with the thickness specified.
14. Highlight the surface of Curb in the Surfaces list and click on the Modify Surface icon.
The Modify Surface dialog box displays.
15. Change the name of the surface to Conc. Curb and click on OK to commit the change and
close the Modify Surface dialog box.
16. Click on the New Surface icon in the Surfaces frame in the New Curb Component dialog box.
The New Surface dialog box displays.
The AggBase surface is added to the Surface frame on the New Curb Component dialog box. The
preview window also updates to display the new surface.

19. Click on Close.
20. Click on OK to add the curb component and close the New Curb Component dialog box.
21. Click on Close to close the Curb Component Library dialog box.
Creating a Parallel Component

A parallel component is used as a shoulder. The shoulder is 2 meters wide with a slope of – 4%. This
shoulder has the same materials as defined with the typical section used for the Rural Road and Hwy
73 Sub-projects.
1. In Intersection Design, select Design " Parallel Component Library.
The Parallel Component Library dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-88 Parallel Component Library DIalog
2. Click on the New Parallel Component icon.

The New Parallel Component dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-89 New Parallel Component Dialog Box
A parallel component does not need to have an offset/elevation of 0.00,0.00. When a parallel
component is placed on a pavement control line or another component line, it is placed based on a
0.00,0.00 offset/elevation.
3. Type 2 meter shoulder for tutorial in the Name edit field.
4. Click on the New Offset/Elevation icon in the Geometry frame.
This displays the New Offset/Elevation dialog box (Figure 16-87 on page 453).

The Offset/Elevation is added to the Geometry frame on the New Parallel Component dialog box.
The New Offset/Elevation dialog box remains open, allowing you to add additional offsets and
elevations.
8. Type —0.08 in the elevation edit field and click on Apply.
The Offset/Elevation is added to the New Parallel Component dialog box. The preview window
updates for the Offsets/Elevations added.
9. Click on Close to close the New Offset/Elevation dialog box.
10. Click on the New Surface icon in the Surfaces frame.
The New Surface Model dialog box (Figure 16-54 on page 434) displays.
11. Type Shoulder in the Surface Name edit field and press the Tab key.
This is the same name for the surface on the typical section used for the Rural Road and Hwy 73.
This is the same thickness for the shoulder on the typical section used for the Rural Road and Hwy
73.
The surface and thickness is added to the list in the Surfaces frame on the New Parallel
Component dialog box. The preview window updates with the Shoulder surface. The New Surface
dialog box remains open allowing you to add additional surfaces.
13. Type AggBase in the Surface Name edit field and press the Tab key.
The surface and thickness is added to the list in the Surfaces frame on the New Parallel
Component dialog box. The preview window updates with the AggBase surface.
15. Click on Close to close the New Surface dialog box.
16. Click on OK to commit the settings for the parallel component and close the New Parallel
17. Click on Close in the Parallel Component Library dialog box.
Attaching a Parallel Component

The parallel component that was created earlier is attached to the pavement control line along each
Intersection Design
edge of pavement.
Lesson 16 –
1. Before you attach the parallel component, perform the following actions so fewer objects
are displayed.
Freeze CENTERLINE Off 1
Freeze INT_ISLAND- Off 41

MEDIAN
2. In Intersection Design, select Design " Attach Parallel Component.

The Attach Parallel Component dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-90 Attach Parallel Component
3. Select 2 meter shoulder for tutorial from the Parallel Component drop list.
4. Toggle on the Apply to Entire Object option.
5. Click on the CAD Settings icon and enter the following CAD settings for the parallel
component.
Layer INT_PARCOMP Level 45
Color 6 Color 5
Width 0.00 Weight 0
6. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the settings and dismiss the CAD
7. Click on Attach in the Attach Parallel Component dialog box.
You are prompted:
Select object to attach parallel component:
8. Graphically select the pavement control line on the edge of pavement as shown below.
Figure 16-91 First Object to Attach Parallel Component
Once you select the object to attach the parallel component to, you are prompted:
Select the side for the parallel component:

9. Graphically select the side as shown in Figure 16-91 on page 456.
The Attach Parallel Component command repeats, you are prompted:
10. Graphically select the pavement control line on the edge of pavement as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 16-92 Second Object to Attach Parallel Component
11. Graphically select the side as shown in the figure above.
You are prompted:
12. Graphically select the pavement control line on the edge of pavement as shown in the figure
below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-93 Third Object to Attach Parallel Component
14. When prompted to select object to attach parallel component, press Enter in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the Reset button in MicroStation without selecting an object.

This terminates the Attach Parallel Component command. The resulting parallel components
attached to the pavement control lines are shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-94 Resulting Attached Parallel Components
15. Click on Close in the Attach Parallel Components dialog box.
Attaching a Curb Component

The curb component that was created earlier is attached to the inside of the triangular islands. You
need to display the triangular islands for which to attach the curb components.
1. Before you attach the curb component, perform the following actions.
Freeze INT_PARCOMP Off 45
Thaw INT_ISLAND- On 41
MEDIAN
2. In Intersection Design, select Design " Attach Curb Component.

The Attach Curb Component dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-95 Attach Curb Component Dialog Box
3. Select Island curb for tutorial from the Curb Component drop list.
4. Toggle on the Apply to Entire Object option.

5. Click on the CAD Settings icon and enter the following CAD settings for the curb
component.
Layer INT_CURBCOMP Level 46
Color 4 Color 3
Width 0.00 Weight 0
6. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the settings and close the CAD
7. Click on Attach on the Attach Parallel Component dialog box.
You are prompted:
Select object to attach curb component:
8. Graphically select the triangular island as shown below.
Figure 16-96 First Triangular Island to Attach Curb Component
Once you select the object to attach the curb component to, you are prompted:
Select the side for the curb component:
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
The Attach Curb Component command repeats, so you are prompted:
Select object to attach curb component:

Graphically select the triangular island as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-97 Second Triangular Island to Attach Curb Component
Once you select the object to attach the curb component to, you are prompted:
Select the side for the curb component:
11. When prompted to select object to attach curb component, press Enter in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the Reset button in MicroStation without selecting an object.
This terminates the Attach Curb Component command. The resulting curb components attached to
the triangular islands are shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-98 Resulting Attached Curb Components
12. Click on Close in the Attach Curb Components dialog box.
Defining Areas
You need to define the pavement regions and inside the triangular islands as areas. Once these areas
are defined, they are included in the intersection quantities. Parallel and curb components are
automatically defined as areas.
1. Before you define areas for pavement and inside the triangular islands, perform the
following actions.
Thaw INT_PARCOMP On 45

2. In Intersection Design, select Design " Define Areas.
The Define Areas dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-99 Define Areas Dialog Box
3. Select Pavement area for tutorial in the Area Component drop list.
4. Click on the PIC button to select a location to define with an area component.
You are prompted:
Select a point:
5. Graphically select all of the locations within the pavement as shown in the figure below.
Intersection Design
Figure 16-100 Locations to Select to Define Pavement Areas
Lesson 16 –
6. When the locations are selected, the areas should be highlighted as shown in the figure
above. If this area is not highlighted, click on the PIC button and select the locations again.
Once you have the correct areas highlighted, click on the Apply button in the Define Areas
dialog box.
The highlight around the defined areas are removed from the CAD graphic.
Now that all of the pavement areas are defined, you define the areas inside the triangular islands.
7. Select Island area for tutorial from the Area Component drop list.
8. Click on the PIC button to select a location to define with an area component.
You are prompted:
Select a point:

9. Graphically select the locations as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-101 Locations to Select to Define Island Areas
10. When the locations are selected, the area should be highlighted as shown in the figure
above. If this area is not highlighted, click on the PIC button and select the locations again.
Once you have the correct areas highlighted, click on the Apply button on the Define Areas
dialog box.
The highlight around the defined areas are removed from the CAD graphic.
11. Click on the Display Defined Areas button (this command can also be executed from
Intersection Design " Design " Display Defined Areas.
The Display Defined Areas dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-102 Display Defined Areas Dialog Box
12. Toggle the Areas option on.

13. Toggle the Curb Components option on.
14. Toggle the Parallel Components option on.
15. Toggle the Erase Existing Displayed Areas on.
16. Click on the CAD Settings icon and enter the following CAD settings for Areas.
Layer INT_DISPLAYAREA Level 47
Color 2 Color 1
17. Enter the following CAD settings for Curb Components.
Layer INT_DISPLAYCURB Level 48
Color 4 Color 3

18. Enter the following CAD settings for Parallel Components.
Layer INT_DISPLAYPARAL Level 49
LEL
Color 6 Color 5
19. Click on OK in the CAD Settings dialog box to commit the settings and close the CAD
20. Click on the Display button.
The Areas, Curb Components, and Parallel Components are displayed in the CAD graphic as
Figure 16-103 Resulting Displayed Areas
21. Click on Close in the Display Defined Areas dialog box.

22. Click on Close in the Define Areas dialog box.
Maintaining Water Flow Through the Intersection

Intersection Design
To maintain the water flow through the intersection, ditches need to be added to the intersection. These
Lesson 16 –
are imported into the CAD graphic and converted into an intersection breakline. A culvert is placed
under the Rural Road to keep the water flowing through the ditches.
Creating Ditches
To create the ditch lines for the intersection area, you import a breakline file. Once the file is imported,
you convert the ditch breaklines into intersection breaklines.
1. Before you import the breaklines for the ditch, perform the following actions.
Current CENTERLINE Active 1
Freeze INT_PAVEMENT Off 40
Freeze INT_CURBCOMP Off 46

Freeze INT_PARCOMP Off 45
Freeze INT_ISLAND-MEDIAN Off 41
Freeze INT_DISPLAYAREA Off 47
Freeze INT_DISPLAYCURB Off 48
Freeze INT_DISPLAYPARALLE Off 49

L
2. In Eagle Point, select Products " Surface Modeling.

The Surface Modeling menu bar (below) displays.
Figure 16-104 Surface Modeling Menu
3. In Surface Modeling, select Prepare " Import ASCII " Breaklines.

The Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-105 Import ASCII Breaklines Dialog Box
4. You can either type the name of the file to import into the File Name edit field or select it by
using the Select File option.
5. Click on the Select File icon.
The Select File dialog box displays.
6. Select All Files (*.*) from the Files of Type drop list.
7. Select the TUTOR16.BRK file from the Project directory. (If your tutorial data is in a different
for more information.)
8. Click on Open.
The file name is displayed with the full path in the File Name edit field.
9. Click on the X,Y,Z,Line Indicator toggle as this format fits the structure of the breakline file.
Notice that an example is displayed along with the first line of the selected file. This makes it
possible to inspect the file’s structure before you attempt to import it.

Layer INT_IMPBRK Level 39
Color 7 Color 6
Width 0.00 Weight 0
12. Click on Apply on the Import ASCII Breaklines dialog box to import the breakline data into
the CAD graphics.
13. Click on Close.
The figure below shows the CAD graphics with the imported breaklines.
Figure 16-106 Imported Ditch Breaklines
Now that the ditch lines have been imported, you can convert them to an intersection breakline.
This allows Intersection Design to use the breaklines when creating the intersection surface
model.
14. Close the Surface Modeling menu since it is no longer needed.
Intersection Design
15. In Intersection Design, select Design " Convert Objects to Intersection Breaklines.
Lesson 16 –
You are prompted:
Select objects:
16. Graphically select the all of the ditch breakline objects that were imported (above).

17. Once you have selected all of the ditch breakline objects, press the Enter key in AutoCAD/
BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device when in MicroStation.
All of the selected objects are converted to an intersection breakline.
You are prompted:
Select objects:
This allows you to select more objects to be converted to an intersection breakline.
18. You do not have any additional objects that need to be converted, so press the Enter key in
AutoCAD/BricsCad or the Reset button on your pointing device when in MicroStation.
The Intersection surface model is updated to include the intersection breaklines for the ditch that
you converted.
Creating a Culvert Under the Intersection

You create a culvert under the Rural Road for water to continue to flow under the roadway. You place a
500 mm culvert at the center of the ditch lines that were imported.
1. You first draw a line in CAD that represents the center of the culvert. The elevations
provided are the invert elevations.
(X) Easting (Y) Northing (Z) Elevation

From 418237.3765 50360.4765 86.114
To 418254.6685 50341.9640 86.354
The resulting line is shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-107 Line Drawn For Culvert
2. In Intersection Design, select Layout " Manage Utilities.

The Manage Utilities dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-108 Manage Utilities Dialog Box
3. Click on the New Utility icon.

The New Utility dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-109 New Utility Dialog Box
4. Type Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Culvert in the Name edit field.

5. Select Invert from the Elevation Type drop list.
6. Select 500 from the Diameter drop list.
7. Click on OK to add the utility and close the New Utility dialog box.
The CAD Settings dialog box for utilities (below) displays.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
9. Select Rural Road and Hwy 73 Culvert from the Utility drop list.
10. Set the CAD Settings in the Geometry frame for the Rural Road and Hwy 73 Culvert
according to the table below.
Layer INT_UTILITIES Level 51
Color 2 Color 1
Width N/A Weight 0

11. Set the following CAD Settings in the Text frame for the Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Culvert
according to the table below.
Layer INT_UTILITY_TEXT Level 52
Color 6 Color 5
Text Style STANDARD Font 0
Text Size 2.5 Text Size 2.5
12. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the CAD Settings dialog box.
13. Click on the Convert Objects to Utility button.
You are prompted:
Select objects:
14. Graphically select the line that was drawn in CAD in step 1 and shown in Figure 16-107 on
page 466.
Once the object is selected, you are prompted:
Select objects:
MicroStation.
The selected line is converted to a utility and placed with the CAD settings specified. The utility is
displayed in the following commands: Edit Profile Data, Preview Cross-Section, and Preview
Profile.
16. Click on Close to close the Manage Utilities dialog box.
Finishing the Design of the Intersection

To complete the design of the intersection, you project slope lines from the outside of the ditch to tie into
the existing ground surface model. Once the slope projection lines are created, all of the design of the
intersection is complete. The only things left would be to review the design of the intersection and fix
any problems that may exist.
Project Slopes
You need to project slope lines from the outside ditch line to tie into the original ground. The slope is a
4:1 H/V since that is the slope placed when the typical sections were processed in RoadCalc™.
1. In Intersection Design, select Design " Project Slopes.

The Project Slopes dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-111 Project Slopes Dialog Box
2. Select Original Ground from the Surface Model drop list. If the drop list is disabled, toggle
off the Use Constant Elevation option.
3. Type 4 in the Cut Slope edit field and set the type of slope to be H/V.
4. Type —4 in the Fill Slope edit field and set the type of slope to be H/V.
6. Type 9 in the Radial interval edit field.
7. Toggle the Project to Constant Offset First off.
8. Click on the CAD Settings icon and set the CAD settings for the Fill Slope Lines according
to the table below.
Layer INT_FILLSLOPE Level 52
Color 2 Color 1
Intersection Design
Width 0.0 Weight 0.0
Lesson 16 –
9. Set the following CAD settings for the Cut Slope Lines according to the table below.
Layer INT_CUTSLOPE Level 52
Color 4 Color 3
Weight 0.0 Weight 0.0
10. Set the following CAD settings for the Feature Lines according to the table below.
Layer INT_FEATURELINE Level 53

Color 3 Color 2
11. Set the following CAD settings for the Catch Lines according to the table below.
Layer INT_CATCHLINE Level 54
Color 6 Color 5
12. Click on OK to commit the settings and dismiss the CAD Settings dialog box.
13. Click on Apply.
You are prompted:
Select Object to project from:
14. Graphically select the outside ditch line as shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-112 First Location to Select to Project Slopes
Once you select the object to project the slopes from, you are prompted:
Select side to project to:
The Project Slopes command repeats, so you are prompted:
Select Objects to project from:

Figure 16-113 Select Location to Select to Project Slopes
Select side to project to
Intersection Design
Figure 16-114 Third Location to Select to Project Slopes
Lesson 16 –
Select side to project to:
MicroStation without selecting any objects.
21. Click on Close in the Project Slopes dialog box.

The resulting slope projections are shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-115 Resulting Slope Projections
Defining a Boundary for the Intersection Surface Model

A surface model of the intersection has been created. You need to create a boundary to restrict the
intersection surface model so the triangles do not extend from the boundary station to boundary station.
The surface model created without the boundary is shown below.
Figure 16-116 Intersection Surface Model Without the Defined Boundary
1. You first need to construct the boundary in the CAD graphics. Perform the following
actions.
New Layer INT_BOUNDARY N/A N/A
Current INT_BOUNDARY Active 55
Freeze Centerline Off 1

2. Draw a closed polyline/line string similar to the boundary shown in the figure below.
Figure 16-117 Closed Polyline String for Boundary
3. To create the boundary for the intersection surface model, select Layout " Define
Intersection Surface Model Boundary in Intersection Design.
You are prompted:
Select boundary:
4. Graphically select the object that was drawn in step 1 (see the figure above)
The intersection surface model is recreated using the boundary defined. The figure below shows
the resulting surface model. You will preview the intersection a little later in the tutorial and it should
look very similar to the figure below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-118 Intersection Surface Model With the Defined Boundary
Reviewing the Design of the Intersection

Now that the design of the intersection is complete, you can review the intersection surface model to
verify a proper design. The first review should be at the boundary stations. The boundary stations of the
intersection should match with the RoadCalc™ cross-section data for proper design. You create
flowlines and find any ponding areas that exist in the intersection. Also, you preview the intersection
surface model and a cross-section within the intersection where the culvert utility was placed. The final
step, when you are satisfied with your design, is to review the quantities of the intersection.

Check Boundary Conditions
To verify that your intersection surface model and your RoadCalc™ design matches at the boundary
stations, you can view both at the same time. The RoadCalc™ design and the intersection surface
model should match at the boundary stations for a correct design.
1. In Intersection Design, select Query " Check Boundary Conditions.
The Check Boundary Conditions dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-119 Check Boundary Conditions Dialog Box
2. Click on the Move Arrow Right icon to move the arrow in the preview window along the
selected surface.
This allows you to determine offsets, elevations, and depths to the other surface.
In Figure 16-119 (above), there is a problem with the intersection surface model when comparing it
to the RoadCalc™ cross-section data. Notice that the intersection surface model extends to the
outside limits of the ditch. If this was your design project, this should be resolved to assure proper
design.
3. Click on the Boundary Station drop list to view the other boundary stations of the
intersection.
4. Click on the Report Boundary Data icon to display detailed data for both the intersection
surface model and the RoadCalc™ Cross-section data.

The Report Boundary Data dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-120 Report Boundary Data Dialog Box
5. Once you have reviewed the data for any of the Boundary Stations, click on Close.
6. Click on Close in the Check Boundary Conditions dialog box.
Display Flowlines
The Display Flowlines command allows you to determine how water flows through the intersection. You
select a location for the starting point of the water and a flowline of where the water travels is created. If
the flowline stops in a location because a depression, a ponding area is created.
Before you place the flowlines, display the pavement control lines for the edge of pavements,
shoulder, and curbs.
1. Perform the following in the table below.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Thaw INT_PAVEMENT On 40
Thaw INT_PARCOMP On 45
Thaw INT_CURBCOMP On 46
2. In Intersection Design, select Query " Display Flowlines.

The Display Flowlines dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-121 Display Flowlines Dialog Box

3. Select Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int from the Surface Model drop list.
4. Toggle the Erase Existing Flowlines for this Intersection on.
5. Toggle the Annotate Flowline Distance option off.
6. Type 0.01 in the Minimum Slope to Analyze Depth edit field.
7. Click on the CAD Settings icon and enter the CAD settings specified in the table below.
Layer INT_FLOWLINE Level 55
Color 4 Color 4
Weight N/A Weight 0.0
8. Click on OK to commit the CAD settings and close the CAD Settings dialog box.
9. Click on Apply to place the flowlines.
You are prompted:
Select point:
10. Graphically select locations within the intersection surface model similar to the figure
below.
Figure 16-122 Locations to Select to Display Flowlines
The Flowlines are placed in the CAD graphic from the locations selected.
MicroStation.
12. Click on Close in the Display Flowlines dialog box.
Find Ponding Areas

This displays any areas within the intersection that contain ponds at a specific depth. These ponding
areas can be locations of concern with your design.
1. In Intersection Design, select Query " Find Ponding Areas.

The Find Ponding Areas dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-123 Find Ponding Areas Dialog Box
2. Select Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int from the Surface Model drop list.
3. Type 0.01 in the Minimum Depth for Ponding edit field.
4. Toggle the Erase Existing Ponding Areas for this Intersection option on.
5. Click on the CAD Settings icon and enter the CAD settings specified in the table below.
Layer INT_POND Level 56
Color 5 Color 4
Width 0.0 Weight 0.0
6. Click on OK to commit the CAD settings and close the CAD Settings dialog box.
7. Click on Apply to place the ponding areas in the CAD graphic.
See the figure below for the resulting ponding areas.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-124 Resulting Ponding Areas
8. Click on the Close button in the Find Ponding Areas dialog box.
Edit the Profile on the Edge of Pavement

Next, you edit the profile of the centerline pavement control line and the right edge of the pavement
control line to remove some of the ponding areas that have occurred. By editing the profile, the
intersection surface model is recreated with the new profile.

1. In Intersection Design, select Design " Edit Profile Data.
You are prompted:
Select object to edit profile:
2. Graphically select the Rural Road centerline pavement control line near the intersection as
Figure 16-125 Select the Centerline on Rural Road to Edit
The Edit Profile Data dialog box allows you to modify the profiles for any pavement control lines or
component lines. You can insert points along the profile and change the display properties of the profile.
In this tutorial, you do not insert any points or change the displays settings of the profile. In this tutorial,
you change an elevation and some grades of the profile. For more information on the editing profiles,
see Edit Profile Data in the on-line help or the on-line documentation.
3. Type 87.364 in the Elevation edit field and click on the Move Arrow Right icon.
This changes the elevation of the first point on the profile to the elevation specified and moves the
query arrow to the next point.

4. Type —0.05 in the Grade edit field and click on the Move Arrow Right icon.
This changes the grade from the previous location to the current location of the query arrow.
5. Continue to enter the —0.05% grade and click on the Move Arrow Right icon until a negative
grade is displayed in the Grade edit field after the Move Arrow Right icon is selected.
6. Click on Apply to commit the changes to the profile.
7. Click on Close in the Edit Profile Data dialog box.
The intersection surface model is recreated with the changes to the profile. These changes help to
eliminate the ponding areas that were determined.
Preview Intersection
This allows you to view the surface model for the intersection. You can view the triangles, contours,
rectangular grid, and point and breaklines used to create the surface model. The surface model is
displayed in a preview window instead of placing the objects in the CAD graphic. This allows you to
review the surface model before you commit any objects to the CAD Graphic.
1. In Intersection Design, select Query " Preview Intersection.
The Preview Objects dialog box (below) displays.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
When the dialog box displays, the last surface model selected is displayed. Also, the objects
displayed in the preview window and the view perspective are restored from the last time the
command was opened.
2. Select Rural Rd and Hwy 73 Int in the Surface Model drop list if the model is not already set.
3. To view the contours instead of the triangles, click on the Display Settings button.

The Display Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-128 Display Settings Dialog Box
The displays settings dialog box allows you to control what you see in the preview window and how
it displays. To turn multiple items on or off, you can use the Shift key or the Control key in
combination with your primary button on your pointing device.
4. Highlight Contours (Index) and click on the On button.
This changes the Display column to be On for the Contours (Index).
5. Highlight Contours (Intermediate) and click on the On button.
This changes the Display column to be On for the Contours (Intermediate).
6. Highlight Triangles and click on the Off button.
This changes the Display column to be Off for the Triangles.
7. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the Display Settings dialog box.
The controls at the top of the Preview Objects dialog box change how the objects are viewed in the
preview window. For more information about the Preview Objects dialog box, see Preview
Intersection in the Intersection Design manual.
8. Click on Close in the Preview Objects dialog box.
Preview Cross-Sections
The Preview Cross-Section command allows you to view a cross-section through the intersection
surface model. You can specify an interval to view multiple cross-sections along one of the roadways
included in the intersection, or you can specify a single station to view. You are going to view a single
station close to the location of the culvert that was placed under the Rural Road.
1. In Intersection Design, select Query " Preview Cross-Section.
The Preview Cross-Section dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-129 Preview Cross-Sections Dialog Box

This first Preview Cross-Sections dialog box contains the settings for what cross-sections are
displayed and what surface models are used. Once you click on Apply, the second Preview Cross-
Sections dialog box displays with the graphic representation of the cross-section.
2. Select 001 – Rural Road from the Alignment drop list.
3. Select Station for the option and press the Tab key.
4. Click on the PIC button and select a location close to where the utility is crossing the Rural
Road.
The station value is displayed in the Station edit field. The value should be close to 0+911.00.
5. Type —50.00 in the Corridor Edge Left edit field and press the Tab key.
6. Type 50 in the Corridor Edge Right edit field and press the Tab key.
7. Toggle the Surface Model option on.
9. Click on Apply.
The Preview Cross-Sections dialog box (below) displays.
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
Figure 16-130 Preview Cross-Sections Dialog Box
The surface drop list contains the Original Ground surface model, Rural Road and Hwy 73 Int
surface model and utilities. Any of the surfaces can be reviewed by selecting the desired surface in
the drop list and moving by clicking on the Left and Right arrows.
10. Click on the Change Scales icon to modify how the surfaces are displayed.
The Change Scales dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-131 Change Scales Dialog Box

11. Select 10.00 from the drop list in the Horizontal frame.
This sets each horizontal grid square on the Preview Cross-Section dialog box equal to 10 meters.
12. Select 2.00 from the drop list in the Vertical frame.
This sets each vertical grid square on the Preview Cross-Section dialog box equal to 2 meters. The
resulting exaggeration of the cross-section is 5 times (horizontal divided by vertical).
13. Click on Apply to commit the settings.
14. Click on Close in the Change Scales dialog box.
15. Once you are finished reviewing the cross-section, click on Close in the Preview Cross-
Section dialog box containing the graphic cross-section.
16. Click on Close in the Preview Cross-Sections dialog box containing the settings for the
cross-section.
Intersecting Quantities
The quantities for the intersection include areas, curb components, parallel components, and earthwork
quantities. You can specify if you want the quantities displayed as a volume, area, or linear distance.
1. In Intersection Design, select Output " Intersection Quantities.
The Intersection Quantities dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-132 Intersection Quantities Dialog Box
2. Click on the Setting button to change the quantity of the concrete curb from volume to
linear.

The Intersection Quantity Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 16-133 Intersection Quantity Settings Dialog Box
3. Highlight Conc. Curb in the Measurement Type list box.

4. Toggle on Linear under the Measurement Type list box to set the Conc. Curb Measurement
type to be Linear.
5. Click on OK to commit the settings and close the Intersection Quantity Settings dialog box.
6. Click on Close in the Intersection Quantities dialog box.
This concludes Lesson 16 – Intersection Design. Additional information on those commands not
covered by this tutorial can be found in the on-line documentation and/or on-line Help.
Summary
Intersection Design
Lesson 16 –
! Create a profile.
! Copy a typical section to and from the library.
! Run the design.
! Add in an intersection.
! Adjust boundary stations.
! Place pavement control lines.
! Clean-up pavement control lines.
! Place lane transitions and islands
! Create and attach curb and parallel components.

! Define areas within the intersection.
! Project slopes to the existing ground surface model.
! Check the boundary conditions.
! Determine problem areas within the intersection.
! Preview the intersection.
! Review quantities for the intersection.

LESSON 17 –
WATERSHED LESSON
MODELING
In this lesson:
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Overview and Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
17
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Creating an Additional Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Open Additional Drawing and Watershed Modeling Product . . . . 488
Preparing CAD Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Creating Watersheds & Land Uses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Create Scenarios and Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Create Reservoir/Detention Pond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Linear Storage Approximation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Reservoir Routing Hydrographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Regional Hydrograph Results for Stream Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
Culvert Rating Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Lesson 17 – Watershed Modeling 485

Objectives
In this lesson, you:
! Define Watersheds and Land Uses.
! Create Unit Hydrographs.
! Create Computed Flood Hydrographs.
! Combine Hydrographs.
! Estimate Detention Requirements.
! Create and Define Outlet Structures and a Reservoir.
! Perform a Reservoir routing.
! Place model output graphics.
! Create Santa Barbara Urban Hydrographs.
! Perform Channel Routing and Combine Flood Hydrographs.
! Create a simple Culvert Outlet Structure and Outlet Rating Curve.
Overview and Concepts

In this lesson, you continue the design work for the Parkland Estates Subdivision. The design work
deals with the site hydrology using Watershed Modeling. Using the sub-division layout and the original
ground surface model created in earlier lessons, defined sub-basins and land uses are used to define
watersheds. Hydrographs will be created for the undeveloped site conditions and the developed site
conditions. The hydrographs created cover four storm events. The resulting undeveloped site condition
hydrographs will be used to establish design parameters for a detention pond that will be modeled
using the developed site condition hydrographs.
The constructed watershed models use a Type II SCS synthetic storm for the 2-year, 10-year, 25-year
and 100-year events for both the undeveloped and developed site conditions. The detention pond will
be designed to discharge at undeveloped flow rates using the developed inflow hydrographs.
2-year rainfall is 3.05 inches or 77.47 mm.
25-year rainfall is 5.0 inches or 127 mm.
Getting Started
You should perform the steps in the sections listed below to bring the tutorial data files up to date for
this lesson if you have not completed the previous chapter. If you have not already done so, follow each
of the steps discussed in the following sections of Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point on page 5.
! Getting Started on page 7.
! Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project on page 8.
! Opening a Project on page 10.

Creating an Additional Drawing
You can work with Watershed Modeling in any project drawing. In this lesson you add an additional
drawing, following steps similar to those in Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers, which begins on page 311. The
additional drawing that will be added is the file WSM.DWG or WSM.DGN for Microstation users.
1. Start the Eagle Point Software™ by double-clicking on the Eagle Point icon found in the
Eagle Point program group or on the desktop.
The Eagle Point menu tool bar (Figure 1-3 on page 8) displays and the Open dialog box (below)
displays.
Figure 17-1 Open Projects and Sub-projects Dialog Box
2. Click on the Create New Project/Sub-Project icon in the Open dialog box.
Lesson 17 – Watershed
3. From the New dialog box, select the Additional Drawing (Additional Design File) from the list
Modeling
of available items.
4. Click on Next.

The New Additional Drawing dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-3 New Additional Drawing Dialog Box
5. In the Associate Additional Drawing with the highlighted Project text screen, select Civil
Tutorial.
You need to associate an additional drawing with the project Civil Tutorial.
6. Click on the folder to the right of the Additional Drawing edit field and browse to the
PROJECT folder. (If your tutorial data is in a different location, navigate to the appropriate
folder. See Getting Started on page 7 for more information.)
If you are running Eagle Point for Microstation, the word Drawing in the New Additional Drawing
dialog box displays as Design File.
7. Select the CAD graphic file (WSM) and click on Open.
8. Click on Finish.
Open Additional Drawing and Watershed Modeling

Product
! This section takes approximately one minute to complete.
The Open dialog box (below) displays with the new additional drawing WSM.DWG.
Figure 17-4 Open WSM Dialog Box
1. Select the additional drawing WSM.DWG and click on OK.

The Open dialog box is dismissed; however, the Eagle Point menu bar remains open. The CAD
product associated with the additional drawing WSM is launched.
2. In the Eagle Point menu bar, select Products " Watershed.
This displays the Watershed Modeling menu (below).
Figure 17-5 Watershed Modeling Menu
Preparing CAD Graphic

The CAD graphic now visible contains drawn elements that represent watershed sub-basin areas for
regional existing conditions and on-site developed conditions. The file also contains land uses and
other watershed sub-basins on other layers/levels that are currently turned off in the active view.
Boundaries and labels identifying land uses and watersheds were placed on different layers/levels to
allow the visual separation between those representing undeveloped and developed conditions.
Creating Layer Groups (Level Groups)

You now create named groups of layers/levels to control their display.
1. In the Eagle Point menu bar, select Tools " Manage Layer Groups (Tools " Manage Level
Groups).
The Manage Layer Groups (Manage Level Groups) dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-6 Manage Layer Groups Dialog Box

Modeling
Five layer/level groups will be created: two for land uses and three for watersheds.
The two groups for land use will have one for the undeveloped or existing land uses and the second
for the developed site land uses.
The three groups for watersheds will include one for the undeveloped site conditions, one for the
regional off-site basins, and one for the final developed subdivision site conditions.
2. Click on the New Layer Group icon (New Level Group).

The New Layer Group (New Level Group) dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-7 New Layer Group Dialog Box
3. Type Land Use Existing in the Name edit field.

4. In the Existing Layers list box, select the layers that begin with LU_EX layers and then click
on the Add button (Microstation users refer to the table below for level numbers).
5. Click on OK.
The Manage Layer Group dialog box displays the updated group name and the layers in the group.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 making new layer/level groups using the Group Name, Levels in
Group, and Layers in Group in the table below.
Layers/Levels may be selected individually or in multiples for adding. To select multiple layers/
levels you have two options. Holding the Ctrl key down while selecting them individually, the
selection set created can then be added. If the Shift key is held down you may select the topmost
layer/level you desire and the bottommost layer/level and all layers/levels in between will also be
selected.
After selecting and adding the layers/levels that make up the Land Use Existing Group you need to
create each of the groups shown in the table below.
Layer Groups
Group Name Levels In Group Layers In Group

Land Use Existing 4 LU_EX_001
5 LU_EX_002
6 LU_EX_003
7 LU_EX_004
8 LU_EX_005
9 LU_EX_TXT
Land Use Developed 14 LU_PR_Onsite

10 LU_PR_TXT
WS Existing Onsite 19 WS_EX_ONSITE

11 WS_EX_ONSITE_TXT
WS Existing Offsite 3 WS_EX_OFFSITE

12 WS_EX_OFFSITE_TXT
WS Developed Onsite 15 WS_PR_001

16 WS_PR_002
17 WS_PR_003
18 WS_PR_TXT
Upon completion, you should have created the five layer/level groups shown in the table above.

Isolate Layer/Level Group
Next you use another tool to change the screen display to show only the existing on-site watersheds.
1. In the Eagle Point menu bar, select Tools " Layer Commands " Isolate Layer Group by
Freeze (Tools " Level Commands " Isolate Level Group by Off).
The Isolate Layer Group by Freeze dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-8 Isolate Layer Group by Freeze Dialog Box
2. Select the WS Existing Onsite Group Name.

3. Click on OK.
An Eagle Point dialog box may open containing the statement “The current layer will be changed to
the selected layer group.” The current layer will then be changed to a layer that is listed in the Layer
Groups list.
Figure 17-9 Eagle Point Dialog Box
4. Click on OK.
The CAD graphics now change, showing only the layers/levels in the selected group.
Creating Watersheds & Land Uses

! This section takes approximately 40 minutes to complete. Lesson 17 – Watershed
Watershed Modeling is based upon the concept of watersheds consisting of smaller sub-basins. The
CAD graphical elements can be used to delineate or identify sub-basins that can then be used for
Modeling
modeling. Land uses may also be identified by CAD graphics. These defined sub-basins and land uses
can then be linked to Hydrograph Scenarios for input data in the creation of Unit and Flood
Hydrographs.
You now define the sub-basins that define the watersheds for the sub-division site, both the
undeveloped and developed, and the larger regional watershed. Sub-basins for the existing conditions
will be defined for on-site and off-site, followed by the developed sub-basins.

Create a New Sub-basin
You now create the sub-basins for this Watershed Modeling lesson. Two different methods will be
used to define the watersheds. Both methods use previously-created graphic objects that show the
basin delineation.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Watersheds " Manage Sub-basins.
The Manage Sub-basins dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-10 Manage Sub-basins Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Sub-basin icon.

The New Sub-basin dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-11 New Sub-basin Dialog Box
3. Type Existing Onsite in the Name edit field.

4. Click on OK.
5. Click on the CAD Settings icon located in the Manage Sub-basins dialog box.
The CAD Settings dialog box of Sub-basins (below) displays.
Figure 17-12 CAD Settings – Sub-basins Dialog Box
6. In the Layer edit field type a layer name of Sub-basins (or level 20).
7. In the Color edit field type 2.
8. Check that the Line Type is set to BYLAYER (linestyle of 0).
9. In the Width edit field enter a width/weight of 2.
10. Click on OK.
11. Click on Close.
You now define the boundary for the sub-basin, setting the area and creating a graphic object to
represent the sub-basin on the layer/level specified in the CAD Settings.

Convert Objects to Sub-basin – Closed Object
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Watersheds " Convert Objects to Sub-
basin.
The Convert Objects to Sub-basin dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-13 Convert Objects to Sub-basin Dialog Box
You now select the object in the CAD graphic that represents the sub-basin to define the sub-basin
and its area.
2. Turn on the Closed Object radio button.
3. Click on the Pick in CAD icon, and CAD prompts you to:
Select the objects you wish to convert:
4. Select the closed object in the CAD display.
5. Click on Apply.
The area for the closed object is set in the lower portion of the Convert Objects to Sub-basin dialog
box and the Sub-basin is drawn on the layer/level specified in the CAD Settings.
6. Click on Close.
Convert Objects to Sub-basins – Eagle Point Boundary

You now define additional watershed sub-basins by using the Eagle Point Boundary method. Before
converting, we manipulate the layers/levels, showing the necessary objects and create the names of
the sub-basins. Further layer/level manipulation will be required to complete the conversion of all sub-
basins.
1. In the Eagle Point menu bar, select Tools " Manipulate Layer Group (Tools " Manipulate
Level Group).
The Manipulate Layer Group dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-14 Manipulate Layer Group Dialog Box
2. In the Group Name drop list select the name WS Existing Offsite.
The layers/levels in the group are then listed in the list box portion of the dialog box.

3. Click on the All button to select all the layers.
4. Click the On button and then on the Thaw button to change the layer state (Microstation
users only need to click on the On button to change the level state).
5. Click on Apply to change the CAD display.
6. Click on Close.
In CAD objects should now be visible. You need to change the view so that you can see all sub-
basin boundaries. There are six identified regional existing condition sub-basins, including the one
on-site sub-basin previously defined.
7. In the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Watersheds " Manage Sub-basins.
The Manage Sub-basins dialog box (Figure 17-10 on page 492) displays.
8. Click on the New Sub-basin icon.
The New Sub-basin dialog box (Figure 17-11 on page 492) displays.
9. Enter WS_EX_001 in the Name edit field.
10. Click on Apply.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 for each of the remaining Sub-basin names in the Sub-basin Names
table (below).
# For the last file, click on OK and not on Apply.
Sub-basin Names
Name Button Description

WS_EX_001 Apply Existing Off-site Sub-basin 001
WS_PR_001 Apply Developed On-site Sub-basin 001
WS_PR_002 Apply Developed On-site Sub-basin 002
WS_PR_003 OK Developed On-site Sub-basin 003
After entering the names from the table, the Manage Sub-basins dialog box (below) displays the
revised list of sub-basin names.
Figure 17-15 Manage Sub-basins Dialog Box
Notice that the last three sub-basin names are developed site sub-basins that will be defined after
the five regional sub-basins.

Now you change the CAD settings so that the existing condition sub-basins will be placed on the
Sub-basins_EX_Offsite layer (level 21) and the developed condition sub-basins will be placed on
the Sub-basins_DV_Onsite layer (level 22), all with different colors.
12. Click on the CAD Settings icon located in the Manage Sub-basins dialog box (Figure 17-15
on page 494).
The CAD Settings – Sub-basins dialog box (Figure 17-12 on page 492) displays. Using the Sub-
basin Layer, Level, Color, and Width table, change the layer/level, color, and width to match the
settings shown in the following table. This is to allow visual separation of the objects and is purely
aesthetic in nature.
# Remember: Information in one edit field can be copied into another edit field by using the standard
Windows copy and paste (Ctrl+C and Ctrl+P) commands. You can take a value from one sub-basin's
Layer edit field and paste it into another sub-basin's Layer edit field. First highlight the layer name you
wish to copy and perform a copy or Ctrl+C. Then change the active sub-basin description in the CAD
Settings dialog box. Highlight the layer shown and perform a paste or Ctrl+P.
13. Repeat the setting of the layer names, levels, colors, and widths for each of the sub-basins
following the values given in the table shown below.
Sub-basin Layer, Level, Color, and Width
Name Layer Level Color Width/Weight

WS_EX_001 Sub-basins_EX_Offsite 21 1 2
WS_PR_001 Sub-basins_DV_Onsite 22 1 5
After entering the values from the table for every sub-basin listed in the Description drop list, go on
to Step 14.
14. Click on OK.
15. Click on Close.
Having created the sub-basin names, you now define each of the existing condition off-site sub-
basins. Then you need to repeat the steps and define the developed on-site sub-basins.
basin. Lesson 17 – Watershed
The Convert Objects to Sub-basin dialog box (Figure 17-13 on page 493) displays.
17. Turn on the Eagle Point Boundary radio button.
Modeling
18. Select the Sub-basin WS_EX_001 from the Sub-basin drop list.
19. Click on the Pick in CAD icon visible in the dialog box.
The command is issued to the CAD and you are prompted:
Select a point inside the sub-basin:

20. Select a point inside of the graphical objects that form the boundary for WS_EX_001.
A highlighted outline of the boundary that will be used by Eagle Point becomes visible. If this is not
the correct boundary, click on the Pick in CAD icon and try again until the correct boundary is
highlighted.
21. Click on Apply.
22. Repeat steps 16 through 18 for each of the existing condition sub-basins, WS_EX_002,
WS_EX_003, WS_EX_004, and WS_EX_005.
23. Click on Apply after each one and click on Close after the last.
Now after defining the existing condition sub-basins, you define each of the developed on-site sub-
basins. Again, the steps are to change the layers displayed, then use the Convert Objects To Sub-
basin command.
25. Select the WS Developed Onsite Group Name.
26. Click on OK.
The CAD now displays only the on-site watersheds as shown in the following figure.
Figure 17-16 Developed Watersheds Drawing
basin.
29. In the Sub-basin drop list, select Developed Sub-basin Onsite or WS_PR_001.
30. Click on the Pick in CAD icon.
31. Select a point within the sub-basin boundary labeled 001.
The boundary that has been identified by Eagle Point is highlighted.
32. If the boundary looks correct, click on the Apply button.
33. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 6 for the WS_PR_002 and WS_PR_003 watershed sub-basin
boundaries labeled 002 and 003.
34. Click on Apply after each.
35. Click on the Close button.
The watershed sub-basins used in this lesson have been defined, so next you define the land uses.

Create Existing Land Uses
You now identify land uses for use in the watershed models. The procedure is similar to those used for
defining the sub-basins.
Land use boundaries represent regions of single-curve-number or runoff-coefficient values. These are
normally areas of similar ground cover and soils. The land use boundaries along with the sub-basin
boundaries are used to obtain weighted curve numbers for creating the hydrographs.
The procedures to define the land uses are similar to those used for defining the sub-basins. In this
portion of the lesson you select closed objects to represent the land use and then correct any overlaps.
We first perform some layer/level manipulation and then add the land use to the Land Use Manager
before converting.
2. Select the Group Name Land Use Existing.
An Eagle Point dialog box displays, informing you that at least one land use must be defined before
a land use can be defined.
Figure 17-17 Eagle Point Instance Dialog Box
3. Click on OK
The CAD display changes so that only existing condition land use layers/levels are visible. Adjust
your display to show all of the active view.
Modeling
Figure 17-18 Existing Land Uses Drawing

4. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Land Uses " Manage Land Uses.
The Manage Land Uses dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-19 Manage Land Uses Dialog Box
5. Click on the New Land Use icon.

The New Land Use dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-20 New Land Use Dialog Box
6. Type Forest B Soil in the Name edit field.

7. Enter a Curve Number value of 64 and a Runoff Coefficient of 0.35.
8. Click on Apply.
9. Repeat steps 6, 7, and 8 for the remaining four Land Use Names in the table below.
10. Click on Apply after each entry except for the last entry, when you click on OK.
Land Use Names, CN, and C Values
Land Use Name CN C

Forest B Soil 64 0.35
Meadow B Soil 78 0.35
Forest C Soil 76 0.35
Riparian C Soil 86 0.40
Brush C Soil 81 0.35
11. Click on the CAD Setting icon.

12. Change the layer edit field to LU_Existing (or level 23).
13. Repeat step 12 for every Land Use Description so each uses the same layer/level.
14. Upon completion of the CAD setting modifications, click on OK.
15. Click on Close.

Convert Objects to Land Use – Closed Objects
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Land Uses " Convert Objects to Land Use.
The Manage Land Uses dialog box closes and the Convert Objects to Land Use dialog box (below)
displays.
Figure 17-21 Convert Objects to Land Use Dialog Box
2. Turn on the Closed Object radio button.

3. Change the Land Use drop list to show the Forest B Soil.
5. Select the boundary for the Forested B Soil.
A new closed polyline is created on the layer LU_Existing that represents the defined boundary and
the Area field in the dialog box updates.
6. Click on the Apply button.
7. Repeat steps 3, 4, 5, and 6 for the Forest C Soil, Meadow B Soil, Riparian C Soil, and the
Brush C Soil.
Select the boundary lines along their outer boundaries where there are no adjacent land uses if
possible. In selecting the Forest C Soil boundary you have to select the boundary where it is inside
the Riparian C Soil. This overlap by the Riparian C Soil into the Meadow B Soil and Forest C Soil
regions will be resolved next.
8. Click on Apply for each land use converted and click on Close afterwards for the last.
Resolve Land Use Overlap

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Land Uses " Resolve Land Use Overlap.
The resolve Land Use Overlap dialog box (below) displays. This command works similar to our
Crossing Breakline where you find, show, mark, and repair the overlap. You first choose to find the
overlaps and then repair the overlaps.
Modeling
Figure 17-22 Resolve Land Use Overlap Dialog Box
2. Set the Action drop list to Find.

3. Click on Apply.
You are then prompted in CAD to:
Select Land Uses:
4. Select the objects using a crossing window to select all items on the screen or only the area
of the obvious overlap, as shown in the figure displayed below.
Figure 17-23 Land Use Overlap Window
The Resolve Land Use Overlap dialog box updates and the four overlap location points are
highlighted, as shown in the figure below.
5. Set the Action drop list to Mark All.

6. Click on Apply.
Four circles centered on the overlap points are drawn, two of which are the same points. You now
repair these overlaps by selecting the land use you want to hold the boundary, then select the

boundary to modify and select near the line you wish to follow. This has to be done twice: once for
the Meadow B Soil land use, and again for the Forest C Soil land use.
Figure 17-25 Land Use Overlap Window
7. Set the Action drop list to Repair.

8. Highlight Crossing number 1 or the point coordinates N=50053.158 and E=417708.891.
9. Click on Apply.
The focus is now in the CAD and you are being asked to select the primary land use. Since the
Meadow is the primary land use, we wish to follow it.
10. Select a point near or snap to the center of the marked overlap point as shown in the figure
below.
Figure 17-26 Land Use Repair Point 1 Window
Now a rubber band will appear stretching from the location of overlap point 1.
11. Select the point of overlap near, or snap to, the center of the marked point shown in Figure
17-27 below.
This defines the length of boundary that is to be changed.
Modeling
Figure 17-27 Land Use Repair Point 2 Window

The information is then transferred and you are prompted:
Select a point on primary land use to follow:
12. Select a point near the boundary of the Meadow B Soil that you wish to follow, as shown in
Figure 17-27 on page 501.
Figure 17-28 Land Use Repair Line to Follow 1 Window
The boundary between the Riparian and Meadow land uses updates, holding the shape of the
primary land use and following the boundary near the point you selected in step 11.
Now you resolve the overlap between the Riparian C Soil and the Forest C Soil land use
boundaries.
13. Change the Action drop list to Repair

14. Highlight Crossing number 3 or the point coordinates N=49869.879 and E=418046.757.
15. Click on Apply.
The focus is now returned to CAD and you are asked to select the primary land use. Since the
Forest C is the primary land use we wish to follow, and the Riparian is overlapping, you should
select the Forest C boundary near the point shown below.
16. Select the Forest C Soil land use boundary as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-30 Land Use Repair First Point Window
Now a rubber band will appear stretching from the location of overlap point 3. You are to select the
point of overlap. This defines the length of the boundary that is to be changed.

17. Select the point of the overlap line as shown in the figure below.
Figure 17-31 Land Use Resolve Use Second Point Window
The information is transferred and you are prompted:

Select a point on primary land use to follow:
18. Select a point near the boundary of Meadow B Soil that you wish to follow, as shown in the
figure below.
Figure 17-32 Land Use Repair Line to Follow 2 Window
19. Change the Action drop list to Erase Marks.

20. Click on Apply and then click on Close.
You have now resolved the overlap between the land use boundaries.
Create Developed Land Uses

The undeveloped land uses have been defined. Now the land uses for the developed sub-division site
needs to be defined. The sub-division site will be treated as a single land use using a composite curve
number of 86 to represent a base CN of 78 with 38% impervious surface. We first perform some layer/
level manipulation before converting.
2. Select the Land Use Developed Group Name.
3. Click on OK. Lesson 17 – Watershed
4. Zoom extents (Fit Active).
The CAD display updates changes showing on the on-site developed land use boundary and text.
Modeling
Convert Objects to Land Use – Eagle Point Boundary

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Land Uses " Convert Objects to Land Use.
The Convert Objects to Land Use dialog box (Figure 17-21 on page 499) displays.

3. Click on the folder icon to the right of the Land Use Drop list – the Manage Land Uses icon.
The Manage Land Uses dialog box (Figure 17-33, below) displays.
4. Click on the New Land Use icon, located on the Manage Land Uses dialog box.
The New Land Use Group dialog box (Figure 17-39 on page 507) displays.
5. Enter Developed Subdivision for the Land Use Name.
6. Enter a value of 86 for the subdivision Curve Number.
7. Enter a value of 0.65 for the Runoff Coefficient.
8. Click on OK.
10. Change the Layer edit field to LU_Developed (or Level 24) for the Description Developed
Subdivision.
11. Click on OK.
12. Click on Close.
The Convert Object to Land Use dialog box becomes active.
13. Verify that the Land Use drop list shows Developed Subdivision as the active land use.
You are prompted in CAD:
Select a point inside the land use:
15. Select a point inside the Developed Onsite land use boundary.
Using the point selected, a boundary should be highlighted that identifies a closed region found by
the Convert Object routine. If the highlighted boundary is correct, it can be accepted by using the
Apply button; if it is not correct, repeat.
16. Click on Apply.
17. Click on Close.
The defined areas that appear in the Manage Land Uses dialog box should match those in Figure
17-33 (below). You can get the dialog box to display by selecting Manage Land Uses in the
Hydrograph menu list.
Figure 17-33 Manage Land Uses Dialog Box

Create Scenarios and Hydrographs
The predefined sub-basins and land uses have now been defined and are available for use in creating
hydrographs for scenarios. In the scenarios you will create three general names: the Undeveloped
Subdivision, Developed Subdivision, and the Regional. Each scenario is connected to a Watershed and
Land Use Group to get input information for the hydrographs necessary for the model.
Create Scenario Undeveloped Subdivision

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Manage Scenarios.
The Manage Scenarios dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-34 Manage Scenarios Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Scenario icon.

The New Scenario dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-35 New Scenario Dialog Box
3. Type Undeveloped Subdivision in the Name edit field.

4. Verify that the Scenario Prototype is set to Watershed Modeling Metric Defaults.
5. Click on the Manage Watershed icon.
Modeling

The Manage Watersheds dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-36 Manage Watersheds Dialog Box
6. Click on the New Watershed icon.

The New Watershed dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-37 New Watershed Dialog Box
7. Type Undeveloped Subdivision in the Name edit field.

8. Highlight Existing Onsite in the Available Sub-basins text window.
9. Click on the Add button.
10. Click on OK.
11. Click on Close.
12. Click on the Land Use Group icon.
The Manage Land Use Groups dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-38 Manage Land Use Groups Dialog Box
13. Click on the New Land Use Group icon.

The New Land Use Group dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-39 New Land Use Group Dialog Box
14. Type Existing Land Use in the Name edit field.

15. Holding the Ctrl key, highlight Brush C Soil, Forest C Soil, Forest B Soil, Meadow B Soil, and
Riparian C Soil in the Available Land Uses text window.
17. Click on OK.
18. Click on Close.
19. Click on Apply.
This has created the Scenario Undeveloped Subdivision with predefined watersheds and land uses
that will be used for input into hydrographs.
In the following sections, you repeat steps 3 through 19 to define a Developed Subdivision Scenario
and again to create a Regional Scenario.
Create Scenario Developed Subdivision

1. Type Developed Subdivision in the Name edit field.
2. Click on the Manage Watersheds icon.
4. Type Developed Onsite in the watershed Name edit field.
5. Holding the Ctrl key, highlight WS_PR_001, WS_PR_002, and WS_PR_003 from the Available
Sub-basins text window.
7. Click OK.
8. Click on Close.
9. Click on the Manage Land Use Group icon.
10. Click on the New Land Use Group icon.
Modeling
11. Type Developed Onsite in the land use group Name edit field.
12. Highlight Developed Subdivision in the Available Land Uses text window.
14. Click on OK.
15. Click on Close.
16. Click on Apply.

Create Scenario Regional
Repeat again for the Regional Scenario.
1. Type Regional in the Name edit field.
2. Click on the Manage Watersheds icon.
4. Type Regional in the watershed Name edit field.
5. Holding the Shift key, select WS_EX_001 and then select WS_EX_005; all the sub-basins in-
between will be highlighted.
7. Click OK.
8. Click on Close.
9. Select Existing Land Use in the Land Use Group text drop list.
10. Click on OK.
Set an Active Scenario

You now take steps to start defining hydrographs by setting the active scenario in which to work.
1. Highlight Undeveloped Subdivision in the Manage Scenarios dialog box.
2. Click on Close.
Creating Unit Hydrographs – Existing Onsite

The modeling for the subdivision site uses the SCS Unit Hydrograph methods to estimate the runoff
flow and volumes. In creating the hydrographs, a name must be added to the manager and then the
data can be entered to define the hydrograph.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Manage Unit Hydrograph.
The Manage Unit Hydrographs dialog box (below) displays for the Undeveloped Subdivision
scenario.
Figure 17-40 Manage Unit Hydrographs Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Unit Hydrograph icon.

The New Unit Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-41 New Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box
3. Type Existing Onsite in the Name edit field.

4. Click on OK.
5. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Unit Hydrograph – Existing Onsite

1. From the Watershed Modeling tool bar, select Hydrograph " Edit Unit Hydrograph.
The Edit Unit Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-42 Edit Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box
2. Expand the Name drop list and select 1 - Existing Onsite.

3. Set the Method to SCS Curvilinear.
4. Set the Input Method to Select Sub-basin.
5. Click on the Input Data button.
The Select Sub-basin dialog box displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-43 Select Sub-basin Dialog Box

6. Select Existing Onsite.
7. Click on OK.
8. Set the Time Step to 1.0 minute.
9. Select TR-55 from the Time of Concentration Method drop list.
The TR-55 Time of Concentration dialog box (below) displays. The dialog box is divided into two
main sections: the input and the output. The input side contains a number of edit fields to input the
information to calculate the three conditions of flow, sheet flow, shallow flow, and channel flow. After
input of the necessary data, the calculation of the time of concentration is then executed upon
clicking on the Calculate Time of Concentration button.
Figure 17-44 TR-55 Time of Concentration Dialog Box
11. Type 0.4 in the Manning's n edit field.

12. Type 77.47 mm in the 2 yr/24hr Rainfall edit field.
13. Type 77 m in the Flow Length edit field.
14. Type 0.035 in the Land Slope edit field.
15. Type 0.25 for the Flow regime.
16. Enter a Flow Length of 410 m.
17. Enter a Shallow Slope of 0.0503 m/m.
18. Enter a Hydraulic Radius of 0.40.
19. Enter a Manning's n value of 0.120.
20. Enter a Flow Length of 151 m.
21. Enter a Channel Slope of 0.134 m/m.
22. Click on the Calculate Time of Concentration button.
23. Click on OK.
The Hydrograph Summary dialog box (Figure 17-45 on page 511) displays. This dialog box shows
a graph of the unit hydrograph, a table of the time and flow values, and a summary showing select
information. Using the Settings button you can control the CAD settings, Text CAD settings, Title,

Sub-title, Discharge Title, Time Title, and Time Units for the hydrograph that can be inserted in the
drawing.
Figure 17-45 Hydrograph Summary Dialog Box
25. Click on Close.

The Hydrograph Plot Settings dialog box is dismissed.
26. In the Edit Unit Hydrograph dialog box (Figure 17-42 on page 509) make sure to click on the
Apply button to save the hydrograph.
27. Click on Close.
The Existing Onsite Unit Hydrograph has been created. This hydrograph will be used later to create
the runoff hydrographs by creating Computed Flood Hydrographs. The peak flows from these
hydrographs will be used as the control discharges for the detention pond.
Creating Unit Hydrograph – Developed Onsite

You now create three new unit hydrographs that represent the developed subdivision sub-basins that
will be stored in the new Developed Subdivision Scenario.
The steps are similar to the previous section. You make the correct scenario active, unit hydrographs
names are added to the Unit Hydrograph Manager, and the new unit hydrographs are created.
Change the Active Scenario to the Developed Subdivision scenario.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Hydrograph " Manage Scenarios.
The Manage Scenarios dialog box (Figure 17-34 on page 505) displays.
2. Select the Developed Subdivision scenario to make it active.
3. Click on Close. Lesson 17 – Watershed
The Developed Subdivision scenario is active, so the sub-basins and land uses for the scenario are
now available for use in creating the hydrographs.
Modeling
4. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Hydrograph " Edit Unit.
5. Click on the Manage Unit Hydrograph icon.
The Manage Unit Hydrographs dialog box (Figure 17-40 on page 508) displays.
6. Click on the New Unit Hydrograph icon.
The New Unit Hydrograph dialog box (Figure 17-41 on page 509) displays.
7. Type Developed 001 in the Name edit field.

8. Click on Apply.
9. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for the next two developed unit hydrographs.
11. Click on the Apply button.
13. Click on OK
Now set the active unit hydrograph to edit to Developed 001
14. Select the Developed 001, the Number 1 Unit Hydrograph.
15. Click on Close.
Create Unit Hydrograph 1 Developed 001

1. Expand the Edit Unit Hydrograph dialog box Name drop list and select 1 - Developed 001.
2. Verify that the Method drop list is set to SCS Curvilinear.
3. Set the Watershed Parameters Input Method to Select Sub-basin.
The Select Sub-basin dialog box (Figure 17-43 on page 509) displays.
5. Select the sub-basin name WS_PR_001.
6. Click on OK.
The information for the area and curve number is shown but not available for editing.
7. Set the time step to 1.0 minute.
8. Set the Time of Concentration Method to User Defined.
9. Set the Time of Concentration Time edit field to 9.56.
11. Click on Close.
12. Click on Apply.
# An Errors Occurred while Calculating Hydrographs dialog box may display to remind you that
information has not been entered for all the unit hydrographs. Click on Close and continue.
13. Click on Close.

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Unit Hydrograph.
7. Click on OK.

8. Set the Time step to 1.0 minute.
12. Click on Close.
13. Click on Apply.
14. Click on Close.

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Unit Hydrograph.
7. Click on OK.
8. Set the Time Step to 1.0 minute.
12. Click on Close.
13. Click on Apply.
14. Click on Close.
Create Flood Hydrographs – Undeveloped

The Unit Hydrographs have been created for both the developed and undeveloped site conditions of
the Parkland Estates Subdivision. The Unit Hydrographs now allow you to create the runoff
hydrographs that estimate the changes due to the subdivision and will be used in the modeling of the
detention pond.
The runoff hydrographs will be created for the four design storm events for every sub-basin,
representing both the developed and undeveloped subdivision site conditions. Lesson 17 – Watershed
The steps in creating the computed flood runoff hydrographs are similar to those for creating the unit
hydrographs. The correct scenario must be made active. The new computed flood hydrograph names
Modeling
must be added to the Hydrograph Manager. Then the computed flood hydrographs can be created. In
addition to creating the hydrograph data, symbols will be placed in CAD using the settings in the
Hydrograph Manager. The location of the symbols will be modified using the Modify Symbol Location
command.
2. Select the Undeveloped Subdivision Scenario.
3. Click on Close.

4. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Manage Hydrographs.
The Manage Hydrographs dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-46 Manage Hydrographs Dialog Box

The Hydrograph Symbol Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-47 Hydrograph Symbol Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box controls the automatic placement of the hydrograph symbols. Placement of
symbols can be done manually after calculations have been performed. The symbols may be
placed as you desire to represent schematically the watershed model after opening the Hydrograph
Symbol Settings dialog box by picking a point in CAD, changing the settings, and the symbols can
be referenced for output.
6. Using the Pick in CAD icon or by typing the coordinates, enter a point location close to
N=50400 & E=418700.
This point is to the east of the site and should not interfere with any of the graphics.
7. In the Subsequent Symbol Displacement Direction drop list, change the Direction to Below.
9. Enter a Scale Factor of 10.
10. Click on the Text CAD Setting icon.

The Text CAD Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-48 Text CAD Settings – Hydrograph Symbol Dialog Box
11. Change the Height value to 10.

12. Click on OK.
13. Click on OK.
14. Click on the New Hydrograph icon.
The New Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-49 New Hydrograph Dialog Box
15. In the Name edit field, type Existing On-site 2 year.

16. From the New Hydrograph dialog box Type drop list, select Computed Flood.
17. Click on OK.
18. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrograph – Existing On-Site 2 Year

The runoff hydrograph names and methods have been created in the Manager, so now you create
them.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Computed Flood.
Modeling

The Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-50 Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph Dialog Box
2. In the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box Name drop list, set it to 1 - Existing On-
Site 2 Year.
3. Set the Unit Hydrograph drop list to 1 - Existing Onsite.
4. In the Rainfall Storm Type section, expand the drop list and select SCS I.
5. Enter 77.47 mm in the Rainfall Depth edit field.
6. Check the Loss Method to make sure it is set to the SCS method.
7. In the Hydrograph Shape section, check that the Flow Multiplier is 1.0.
The Hydrograph Summary dialog box (below) displays.
9. Click on Close.
10. Click on Apply.
11. Click on Close.

Copy Computed Flood Hydrographs – Existing On-Site 10, 25, and 100
Year
Now you create the additional runoff hydrographs for the 10-year, 25-year and 100-year frequency
storm events by using the Manage Hydrograph icon in the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog
box.
The Manage Hydrographs dialog box (Figure 17-46 on page 514) displays.
2. Click on the Copy Hydrograph icon.
The Copy Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-52 Copy Hydrograph Dialog Box
3. In the Copy Hydrograph to Name edit field, type Existing On-site 10 Year.
4. Click on OK.
5. Repeat the Copy Hydrograph steps 2, 3, and 4, creating Existing On-site 25-Year and 100-
Year runoff hydrographs.
8. Click on OK.
11. Click on OK.
12. Click on Close.
Edit Computed Flood Hydrographs – Existing On-Site 10, 25, and 100
Year
Creating the hydrographs by using the Copy command now allows you to edit and update the
hydrographs by changing the rainfall amounts.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Computed Flood Lesson 17 – Watershed
Hydrograph.
2. Set the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box Name drop list to 2 - Existing On-site
Modeling
10 year.
3. Change the Rainfall Depth to 111.76 mm.
5. Click on Close.
6. Click on Apply.
7. Repeat steps 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the 25 year and 100 Year Hydrographs.

25 year.
11. Click on Close.
12. Click on Apply.
100 year.
15. Click on Apply.
16. Click on Close.
The hydrographs that define the undeveloped conditions are defined and symbols placed in CAD.
The peak flows from these hydrographs are used to estimate detention pond storage and volumes
to allow you to do a preliminary sizing and model run.
Create Flood Hydrographs – Developed

Using similar steps to those of the previous sections, you will create three hydrographs for the 2-year
developed flow conditions, one for each of the developed on-site sub-basins. You will also again select
the location for the symbols to reference. After defining the three 2-year developed flow hydrographs,
copies will be made of each for the 10-year, 25-year and 100-year design hydrographs, which will then
be used to design, then model, a detention pond using reservoir routing.
You now need to change the Scenario Manager to make the Developed Subdivision the active scenario
to create the developed subdivision flood hydrographs.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Manage Scenario.
2. Select Developed Subdivision in the edit field to make it active.
3. Click on Close.
The Hydrograph Symbol Settings dialog box (Figure 17-47 on page 514) displays.
6. Type 49400 in the Northing edit field.
7. Type 419000 in the Easting edit field.
8. In the Subsequent Symbol Displacement Direction drop list, change the Direction to Below.
The Text CAD Settings dialog box (Figure 17-48 on page 515) displays.
13. Click on OK on the Text CAD Settings dialog box.
14. Click on OK on the Hydrograph Symbol Settings dialog box.
The New Hydrograph dialog box (Figure 17-49 on page 515) displays.

16. In the New Hydrograph dialog box Name edit field, type Developed 001 2 Year.
17. Change the Type shown in the drop list to Computed Flood.
18. Click on Apply.
19. In the New Hydrograph Name edit field, type Developed 002 2 Year.
20. Click on Apply.
21. In the New Hydrograph Name edit field, type Developed 003 2 Year.
22. Click on OK.
23. Click on Close.
This closes the Manage Hydrographs dialog box.
Modify Hydrograph Symbol Locations

The runoff hydrograph symbol locations can be modified using the Modify Hydrograph Symbol Location
command. As the hydrographs are created, symbols are placed in the CAD using the default settings
from the Manage Hydrographs dialog box. The symbols can be moved in CAD with the positions stored
only after using the Update All button in the Modify Symbol Location dialog box. Otherwise, the Apply
button may be used to move the hydrograph symbols, as is demonstrated in the following steps.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Modify Symbol Location.
The Modify Hydrograph Symbol Location dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-53 Modify Hydrograph Symbol Location Dialog Box
2. Select the Developed 001 2 Year hydrograph name.

3. Click on Apply.
4. Select the location for the hydrograph symbol.
6. Click on Apply.
7. Select the location for the hydrograph symbol. Lesson 17 – Watershed
9. Click on Apply.
Modeling
10. Select the location for the hydrograph symbol.

11. Click on Close.
The hydrograph symbols are placed as selected. If additional editing is desired repeat the previous
steps.

Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision 2
Year
The symbols have been placed. Now you input the information to compute the 2-year hydrographs,
after which you make copies and change the rainfall amounts.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Computed Flood.
2. Set the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box Name drop list to 1 - Developed 001 2
Year.
3. Set the Unit Hydrograph drop list to 1 - Developed 001.
4. Set the Rainfall Storm Type drop list to show to SCS I.
5. Type a Rainfall Depth of 77.47 mm.
6. Set the Loss Method drop list to SCS.
The Hydrograph Summary dialog box (below) displays. Looking at the hydrograph, notice the short
steep peak that occurs due to development.
8. Click on Close.
9. Click on Apply.
# An Error Occurred while Calculating Hydrographs dialog box may display to remind you that
information has not been entered for all hydrographs. Click on Close and continue.
10. Set the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph Name drop list to 2 - Developed 002 2 Year.
16. Click on Close.
17. Click on Apply.
18. Set the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph Name drop list to 3 - Developed 003 2 Year.

24. Click on Close.
25. Click on Apply.
Copy Flood Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision 10, 25, and 100 Year
The Copy Hydrograph command will now be used to create copies of the developed hydrographs for
the 2-year storm event, which will then be revised to reflect the 10, 25, and 100-year storm events. You
access the Manage Hydrograph command from within the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog
box.
1. Click on the Manage Hydrograph icon located to the right of the Name drop list in the Edit
Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box.
The Manage Hydrographs dialog box displays.
2. Select the hydrograph name Developed 001 2 Year.
The Copy Hydrograph dialog box displays.
4. In the Copy Hydrograph to Name edit field, type Developed 001 10 year.
5. Click on OK.
6. While the Developed 001 10 Year hydrograph is highlighted, click on the Copy Hydrograph
icon.
8. Click on OK.
9. While the Developed 001 25 Year hydrograph is highlighted, click on the Copy Hydrograph
icon.
11. Click on OK.
12. Repeat Steps 2 through 11 for the Developed 002 2 Year and Developed 003 2 Year
hydrographs to create the necessary 10-year, 25-year, and 100-year hydrographs for each
sub-basin area.
This creates a total of 12 hydrographs.
13. Click on Close.
This returns you to the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box.
Edit/Create Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision 10,

Modeling
25, and 100 Year

1. In the Edit Computed Flood Hydrograph dialog box, set the Name drop list to 4 - Developed
001 10 Year.
3. Set the Storm Type drop list to SCS I.

5. Check that the Loss Method set is SCS.
6. Verify that the Hydrograph Flow Multiplier is 1.0 and the Time Step is 1.0.
7. Click on Apply.
8. Set the Name drop list to 5 - Developed 001 25 Year.
11. Type a Rainfall Depth of 127 mm.
14. Click on Apply.
15. Set the Name drop list to 6 - Developed 001 100 Year.
21. Click on Apply.
22. Repeat the previous steps 1 through 21 for the Developed 002 and Developed 003 sub-
basins.
# Remember to make sure the correct unit hydrograph is used for each computed flood hydrograph.
23. Click on Close.
You may want to now modify the locations of the symbols using the Hydrograph - Modify Symbol
Locations command to get the symbols in the positions you desire.
Combine Computed Flood Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision

The developed sub-basins for the subdivision site need to be combined and routed to reflect actual
conditions. Since the distances involved are so short (routing produces little to no change – less than
0.01 m^3/s for a 100-year storm), only hydrograph combining will be performed.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Combined Hydrograph.

The Edit Combined Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-55 Edit Combined Hydrograph Dialog Box
2. Click on the Manage Hydrograph icon located to the right of the Name drop list.
The New Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-56 New Hydrograph Dialog Box
4. In the Name edit field, type Developed 2 Year.

5. Click on Apply.
6. In the New Hydrograph Name edit field, type Developed 10 Year.
7. Click on Apply.
9. Click on Apply.
11. Click on Apply.
12. Click on Cancel.
13. Click on Close. Lesson 17 – Watershed
Edit/Create Combined Hydrographs – Developed Subdivision

Modeling
Returning to the Edit Combined Hydrograph dialog box, you need to combine the hydrographs into a
single hydrograph for each rainfall event. The resulting combined hydrograph is used for modeling the
detention pond.
1. Set the Edit Combined Hydrograph dialog box Name drop list to 13 - Developed 2 Year.
2. Highlight the Developed 2 Year hydrographs from the list of Available Hydrographs in the
list box.

4. In the Time Step edit field, type 2.00.
6. Click on Close.
7. Click on Apply.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the combined hydrographs 14 - Developed 10 Year, 15 -
Developed 25 Year, and 16 - Developed 100 Year.
9. Click on Close.
You may want to again adjust the positions of the hydrograph symbols.
Create Reservoir/Detention Pond

In the previous section, the combining of the developed hydrographs created the inflow hydrographs
necessary to model a detention pond or reservoir. The table Summary of Hydrograph Results shows
the undeveloped site runoff that will be used as the control discharges for the detention pond.
Summary of Hydrograph Results
2 Year 10 Year 25 100 Peak

Year Year Flow
Runoff Peak Volume Peak Volume Peak Volume Peak Volume
Hydrograph Flow Flow Flow Flow
Name
Existing On- 0.08 0.129 0.17 0.246 0.22 0.302 0.32 0.430
Site
A detention pond or reservoir is made up of two main components, storage and discharge. Using
the previously developed hydrographs estimates of the storage and discharge values will be
obtained and a preliminary trapezoidal detention pond modeled.
Linear Storage Approximation

To estimate the necessary volumes, you need to set the Scenario Manager to Developed Sub-division
so that the correct hydrographs become available.
2. Select the Scenario name Developed Subdivision in the text edit window.
3. Click on Close.
This sets the active watershed scenario to Developed Subdivision and to the hydrographs that are
stored within that scenario.
4. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " Linear Storage Approximation.

The Linear Storage Approximation dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-57 Linear Storage Approximation Dialog Box
5. Set the Hydrograph Name drop list to 13 - Developed 2 Year.

6. Enter an Allowable Discharge of 0.08 m^3/s.
7. Click on the Calculate Storage button.
8. Click on Close.
Another method can also be used to estimate storage requirements. This is the TR-55 Storage
Approximation method. It gives a maximum storage value.
9. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " TR-55 Storage Approximation.
The TR-55 Storage Approximation dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-58 TR 55 Storage Approximation Dialog Box
Modeling
10. In the Area edit field, type 11.89 ha.

11. In the Curve Number edit field, type 86.

Using the following values for Inflow Rate, Outflow Rate, and Total Rainfall, estimated values of
Maximum Storage are obtained, which can then be used to estimate the detention pond
requirements.
Storage Input Values
Frequency Inflow Rate Outflow Rate Total Rainfall

m^3/s m^3/s mm
2 year 0.41 0.08 77.47
10 year 0.71 0.17 111.76
25 year 0.85 0.22 127.00
100 year 1.15 0.32 160.02
Storage Volume Estimates
Peak Flow TR-55 Storage Volumes Linear Storage Volume

m^3/s m^3 m^3
2 year 0.08 1987 468
10 year 0.17 2998 726
25 year 0.22 3383 826
100 year 0.32 4342 1069
Comparing the two sets of estimated storage values, it would appear that the larger are the TR-55
maximum storage values. These values will be used to get the preliminary geometry for the
detention pond, but the optimum reservoir size will likely fall between the two sets of storage
values.
Reservoir/Detention Pond Storage

Taking the storage and discharge estimations from the earlier approximations, the pond will require a
maximum storage of 4342 m^3 with a discharge at or below 0.32 cubic meters per second. The
preliminary pond has a bottom length of 50 meters, a bottom width of 10 meters, the side slopes are 5
to 1 H/V, and the depth will be three meters. Looking at the volumes needed for the individual storm
events, it is estimated that the pond volumes will exceed the necessary amounts at depths of 1.8, 2.3,
2.4, and 2.8 meters for the 2-year, 10-year, 25-year, and 100-year events. An assumed elevation of 100
will be used for the pond bottom or top of dead storage. The preliminary design run will yield the general
stage volume requirements and allow you to create a more detailed shape later, if desired. You could
then use actual elevations.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Detention " Manage Reservoirs.

The Manage Reservoirs dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-59 Manage Reservoirs Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Reservoir icon.

The New Reservoir dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-60 New Reservoir Dialog Box
3. In the Name edit field, type Detention Pond 1.

4. Click on OK.
5. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Reservoir Storage

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Detention " Edit Reservoir.
The Edit Reservoir dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-61 Edit Reservoir Dialog Box
2. Set the Edit Reservoir dialog box Storage Method to Trapezoidal Basin.
3. Click on the Storage Parameters button.

The following dialog box displays.
Figure 17-62 Trapezoidal Basin Storage Dialog Box
4. Set the Trapezoidal Basin dialog box Storage Geometry Option drop list to Base Dimensions
and Slopes.
5. In the Base Length edit field, type 50.
6. In the Base Width edit field, type 10.
7. In the Side Slopes edit field, type 5.
8. Check that the Side Slopes drop list is set to H/V.
9. In the Depth edit field, type 3.0.
10. Click on OK.
11. In the Edit Reservoir dialog box Rating Curve Limits Minimum Elevation edit field, type 100.
12. In the Rating Curve Limits Maximum Elevation edit field, type 103.
13. In the Rating Curve Limits Elevation Increment edit field, type 0.1.
14. Click on the Stage Results button.
The Reservoir Stage Storage/Discharge Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-63 Reservoir Stage Storage/Discharge Results Dialog Box
Review the results given in the table to check if the storage capacities shown are compatible with
the table given earlier in this section. No discharge information has been given yet, so the results
show values of zero in the table and the graphs should not be shown.
15. Click on Close.
16. Click on Apply.
The information about the reservoir will not be stored until you click on the Apply button.
17. Click on Close.

Discharge Structure/Pond Outfall
The second component to the detention pond or reservoir is the discharge system. Two discharge
structures will be used for this detention reservoir: a trapezoidal overflow weir, and a circular stand pipe
with multiple orifices.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " Manage Outlet Structures.
The Manage Outlet Structures dialog box for Developed Subdivision (below) displays.
Figure 17-64 Manage Outlet Structures Dialog Box
2. Click on the New Outlet Structure icon.

The New Outlet Structure dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-65 New Outlet Structure Dialog Box
3. In the New Outlet Structure dialog box Name edit field, type Stand Pipe 1.
4. Set the New Outlet Structure Type drop list to Stand Pipe.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Type Overflow Weir 1 in the New Outlet Structure Name edit field.
7. Set the New Outlet Structure Type drop list to Weir.
8. Click on OK.
9. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Outlet Structures – Trapezoidal Weir

You now define the outlet structure parameters and generate the operating or rating curves. Lesson 17 – Watershed
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " Edit Weir.
Modeling

The Edit Weir dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-66 Edit Weir Dialog Box
2. Set the Edit Weir Name drop list to 2 - Overflow Weir 1.

3. Set the Edit Weir Type drop list to Trapezoidal.
4. In the Weir Parameters Crest Length edit field, type 40.
5. In the Weir Parameters Angle of Walls edit field, type 70.
6. In the Weir Parameters Crest Elevation edit field, type 102.9.
7. Verify that the Weir Parameters Weir Coefficient and Exponential are set to reasonable
values.
8. In the Rating Curve Limit Minimum Elevation edit field, type 100.
9. In the Rating Curve Limit Maximum Elevation edit field, type 103.
10. In the Rating Curve Elevation Increment edit field, type 0.10.
11. Click on the Stage Discharge Results button.

The Weir Stage Discharge Results dialog box (below) displays, showing the results for the stage
and discharge.
Figure 17-67 Weir Stage Discharge Results Dialog Box
12. Click on Close.

13. Click on Apply.
14. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Outlet Structures – Stand Pipe

The second component the Stand Pipe will now be defined. The Stand Pipe will have a circular riser
connected to a circular corrugated metal culvert. Orifices will be placed near the estimated depths that
the storage requirements are met and sized to discharge in a stage pattern. The staged discharge from
the pond will attempt to match the estimated flows and volumes resulting from the TR-55 Storage
Approximation methods. It should be noted that these are often the maximum storage volumes, which
then tends to oversize the reservoir.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " Edit Stand Pipe.
The Edit Stand Pipe dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-68 Edit Stand Pipe Dialog Box
2. Set the Edit Stand Pipe Name drop list to 1 - Stand Pipe 1.

3. Click on the Stand Pipe button.
The Stand Pipe Parameters dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-69 Stand Pipe Parameters Dialog Box
4. Turn on the Stand Pipe Parameters dialog box Type: Circular radio button.
5. In the Orifice Parameters Diameter edit field, type 0.90.
6. In the Weir Parameters Crest Elevation edit field, type 102.8.
7. Click on OK.
8. In the Edit Stand Pipe dialog box, click on the Culvert button.
The Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-70 Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Dialog Box
9. Set the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Shape drop list to Circular Corrugated Metal Pipe.
10. Set the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Type drop list to Headwall.
11. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Diameter edit field, type 900 mm.
12. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Pipe Length edit field, type 20 m.
13. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Pipe Slope edit field, type 0.01 m/m.
14. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Manning's n edit field, type 0.013.
15. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Entrance Loss Coefficients edit field, type 0.6.
16. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Inlet Invert Elevation edit field, type 100.
17. In the Stand Pipe Culvert Parameters Tailwater Elevation edit field, type 99.6.
18. Click on OK.

19. Click on the Optional Orifices button in the Edit Stand Pipe dialog box.
The Optional Orifices dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-71 Optional Orifices Dialog Box
20. In the Optional Orifices text window check the box to the left of Orifice 1.
21. Turn on the Circular radio button.
22. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Diameter edit field, type 0.17 m.
23. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Invert Elevation edit field, type 100.0.
24. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Orifice Coefficient edit field, type 0.60.
25. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Number of Openings edit field, type 1.
26. Click on Apply.
27. In the Optional Orifices text window, toggle on the box to the left of Orifice 2.
31. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Orifice Coefficient edit field, type 0.60.
33. Click on Apply.
34. In the Optional Orifices text window, toggle on the box to the left of Orifice 3.
38. In the Optional Orifices Parameters Orifice Coefficient edit field, type 0.60. Lesson 17 – Watershed
40. Click on OK.
Modeling
41. In the Edit Stand Pipe dialog box Rating Curve Limit Minimum Elevation edit field, type 100.
42. In the Edit Stand Pipe Rating Curve Limit Maximum Elevation edit field, type 103.
43. In the Edit Stand Pipe Rating Curve Limit Elevation Increment edit field, type 0.05.
44. Click on Apply.

The Stand Pipe Stage Discharge Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-72 Stand Pipe Stage Discharge Results Dialog Box
46. Turn on the Stage vs. Discharge Graph radio button and the dialog box changes to show a
plotted graph.
Figure 17-73 Stand Pipe Stage Discharge Results Graph Dialog Box
Clicking on the Weir data and the Orifice Data buttons will show dialog box data tables for the weirs
and orifices. You might want to look at these displays on your own.
47. Click on Close.
48. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Reservoir Discharge Structure

Now the discharge components can be added to the earlier created reservoir to allow the routing to
proceed.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Detention " Edit Reservoir.
The Edit Reservoir dialog box (Figure 17-61 on page 527) displays.
2. Click on the Discharge Structures button.

The Discharge Structures dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-74 Discharge Structures Dialog Box
3. Toggle on both the 1 - Stand Pipe 1, and 2 - Overflow Weir 1 options.

4. Click on OK.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Click on Close.
Reservoir Routing Hydrographs

! This section takes approximately eight minutes to complete.
The Detention Reservoir has been created and now the routing will be performed using the Storage
Indication methods. The routing will estimated the adequacy of the reservoir in reducing the effects on
runoff created by the construction of the Parkland Estates Subdivision.
Create Routing Hydrographs

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Routing " Edit Storage Indication.
The Edit Reservoir Routing - Storage Indication dialog box (below) displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-75 Edit Reservoir Routing Dialog Box

2. Click on the Manage Hydrographs icon.
4. In the New Hydrograph Name edit field, type Detention Pond 1 2 Year.
5. Click on Apply.
7. Click on Apply.
9. Click on Apply.
11. Click on OK.
12. Click on Close.
Edit/Create Reservoir Routing Hydrographs

1. Set the Edit Reservoir Routing – Storage Indication dialog box Hydrograph drop list to 17 -
Detention Pond 1 2 Year.
2. Set the Edit Reservoir Routing – Storage Indication Inflow Hydrograph Name drop list to 13 -
Developed 2 Year.
3. Set the Edit Reservoir Routing – Storage Indication Reservoir Information Name to 1 -
Detention Pond 1.
The Reservoir Routing – Storage Indication Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-76 Reservoir Routing Dialog Box
This dialog box shows the hydrograph information in a table, graph, and summary information table.
Note the attenuation effects from the routing shown by the double curves in the hydrograph preview
window. You can use the icons below the preview window to change the display scale factor, zoom
window, and pan.
5. Click on Close
6. Click on Apply.

7. Repeat Steps 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 for the 10 Year, 25 Year and 100 Year storm events using the
following combinations of hydrographs.
Hydrograph Combinations
Storm Event Hydrograph (Routing) Inflow Hydrographs

2 Year 17 - Detention Pond 1 2 Year 13 - Developed 2 Year
25 Year 19 - Detention Pond 1 25Year 15 - Developed 25 Year
Notice that the reservoir is more than adequate, and by editing the storage and discharge components
or creating new components, the design could be optimized. A possible second trial might be a length
of 25m, width 4m, and side slopes of 4 to 1. Changing the size of the pond would allow you to keep the
discharge structure or you could modify both. Making any changes then would require the use of the
Recompute Reservoir and Recompute Hydrograph commands to update the hydrographs and other
stored information.
Output
! This section takes approximately ten minutes to complete.
Output information is available as graphics and printouts. The graphs available include IDF curves,
hydrographs, outlet structures, and reservoirs. Printouts include the same information in table format
plus the ability to print out summary tables for various model components.
Output Graphics – Hydrographs

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar, select Output " Printouts " Summary.
The Summary Printout dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-77 Summary Printout Dialog Box

Looking this dialog box over, notice the items available for summary output.
2. Click on Cancel.
Modeling
Looking at the graphical objects that can be printed, you now place a set of hydrographs in the
drawing that show the comparison of the 100-year runoff from the undeveloped, developed, and
routed conditions.
3. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Output " Graphics " Hydrographs.

The Graph Hydrographs dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-78 Graph Hydrographs Dialog Box
4. Check and set, if necessary, the Graph Hydrographs Scenario drop list to show the
Developed Subdivision scenario.
5. In the Available Hydrographs list view, select Developed 100 year and the Detention Pond 1
100 Year hydrographs.
7. Return to the Graph Hydrographs Scenario drop list and change the Scenario to Un-
developed Subdivision.
The Available Hydrographs list view updates, showing the hydrographs that are contained in the
undeveloped Subdivision Scenario.
8. In the Available Hydrographs list view, select the Existing On-site 100 year hydrograph.
The Hydrograph Plot Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-79 Hydrograph Plot Settings Dialog Box
11. In the Title edit field, type Hydrographs 100 Year.

12. In the Sub Title edit field, type Existing, Developed & Routed.
13. Check that the Discharge Title edit field contains Discharge (cubic meters).
14. From the Time Units drop list select Hours.
15. In the Time Title edit field, type Time (hr).
16. Click on OK.
17. Click on Insert in the Graph Hydrographs dialog box.
18. Pick a location in the drawing to locate the hydrographs.

You may want to change your display scale by zooming or other means to examine the three
hydrographs inserted into the CAD. The three graphs represent the undeveloped conditions runoff,
the higher developed condition runoff, and the effects of the pond routing.
Figure 17-80 Inserted Hydrograph
19. Click on Close.
Output Graphics – Reservoir

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Output " Graphics " Reservoirs.
The Graph Reservoirs dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-81 Graph Reservoirs Dialog Box

Modeling
2. Set the Graph drop list to Storage vs. Discharge.

3. Set the Scenario drop list to Developed Subdivision.
4. Select Detention Pond 1 in the Available Reservoirs list box.
6. Click on Settings.

The Reservoir Plot Settings dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-82 Reservoir Plot Settings Dialog Box
7. Click on OK.
8. Click on Insert.
9. Select a point in CAD at which to place the Reservoir Storage vs. Discharge graph.
10. Click on Close.
Use the display controls in CAD to examine the graph that has been placed in the CAD graphics.
Figure 17-83 Reservoir Storage vs. Discharge
Regional Hydrograph Results for Stream Flow

To estimate the 100-Year stream flow, the regional hydrographs will be routed and combined. The
method for computation of the hydrographs will be the Santa Barbara Urban Hydrograph, assuming a
developed condition of 38% impervious surface.

Create Regional Hydrographs
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Manage Scenario.
2. Select Regional in the edit field to make it active.
3. Click on Close.
The Manage Hydrographs command will now be used to create five Santa Barbara Urban Hydrographs
that represent the off-site sub-basins.
As done previously, you now set the insertion point for symbols that represent the hydrographs.
The Hydrograph Symbol Settings dialog box (Figure 17-47 on page 514) displays.
6. Using the Pick in CAD icon or by typing the coordinates, enter a point located close to N =
50400 and E = 420200.
7. In the Subsequent Symbol Displacement drop list, change the Direction to Below.
The Text CAD Settings dialog box (Figure 17-48 on page 515) displays.
12. Click on OK.
13. Click on OK.
15. Type EX_001 in the Name edit field.
16. Set the Type shown to Santa Barbara Urban.
17. Click on Apply.
19. Click on Apply.
21. Set the Type shown to Santa Barbara Urban.
22. Click on Apply.
24. Click on Apply.
Modeling
26. Click on OK.

27. Click on Close.
You have created five runoff hydrographs that now need to have the information entered to
determine the runoff hydrograph.

Edit/Create Santa Barbara Urban Hydrographs – Regional EX_001
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Santa Barbara Urban.
The Edit Santa Barbara Urban Hydrograph dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-84 Edit Santa Barbara Urban Hydrograph Dialog Box
2. Set the Edit Santa Barbara Urban Hydrograph Name to 1 - EX_001.

5. Select the WS_EX_001 sub-basin listed.
6. Click on OK.
7. Enter an Impervious Fraction of 0.38.
8. Set the Rainfall Distribution Storm Type to the SCS I.
9. Enter the Rainfall Depth of 160.22 mm.
11. Enter a Time of Concentration Time of 90.66 min.
12. Enter a Hydrograph Time Step of 1.0.
Review the Hydrograph Summary dialog box.
14. Click on Close.
15. Click on Apply.

1. Set the Edit Santa Barbara Urban Hydrograph dialog box Name to 2 - EX_002.
5. Click on OK.

11. Enter a Hydrograph Shape Time Step of 1.0.
12. Click on Apply.

5. Click on OK.
12. Click on Apply.

5. Click on OK.
9. Set the Time of Concentration Method to User Defined. Lesson 17 – Watershed
Modeling
12. Click on Apply.


5. Click on OK.
12. Click on Apply.
13. Click on Close.
The Offsite hydrographs created will be routed and then combined to estimate the 100-year flows
from the off-site sub-basins at a point near a point south of the subdivision.
Summary of Results
Name Peak Flow Time to Peak

EX_001 1.12 613
EX_002 1.69 619
EX_003 0.24 601
EX_004 2.30 601
EX_005 1.55 604
Routing Hydrographs – EX_001 & EX_002

The hydrographs EX_001 and EX_002 need to be routed to, then combined with, EX_004 and EX_005
at the southern point of interest.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Routing " Edit Convex.
The Edit Channel Routing – Convex dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-85 Edit Channel Routing – Convex Dialog Box
2. Click on the Manage Hydrograph icon.


4. Type Routed EX 001 in the Name edit field.
5. Click on Apply.
6. Type Routed EX 002 in the Name edit field.
7. Click on OK.
8. Click on Close.
9. Set the Hydrograph drop list to 6 - Routed EX 001.
10. Set the Inflow Hydrograph Name drop list to 1 - EX_001.
11. Turn on the Estimate by Flow Velocity radio button.
12. Type 0.85 in the Estimate by Flow Velocity edit field.
13. Click on Results.
14. Click on Close.
15. Click on Apply.
16. Set the Hydrograph drop list to 7 - Routed EX 002.
17. Set the Inflow Hydrograph drop list to 2 - EX_002.
18. Type 0.85 in the Estimate by Flow Velocity edit field.
19. Click on Results.
20. Click on Close.
21. Click on Apply.
22. Click on Close.
Combine Hydrographs
To get the total stream flow at the south end of the area of interest, you will combine all the routed
hydrographs and the SBUH hydrographs.
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Edit Combined.
The Edit Combined Hydrograph dialog box displays.
Modeling
Figure 17-86 Edit Combined Hydrograph Dialog Box
2. Click on the Manage Hydrograph icon.


4. Type Combined Regional in the Name edit field.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on Close.
7. Select Routed EX 001, Routed EX 002, EX_004, and EX_005 in the Available Hydrographs list
box.
9. Type 1.0 in the Time Step edit field.
The Hydrograph Summary dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-87 Hydrograph Summary Regional Dialog Box
11. Click on Close.

12. Click on Apply.
13. Click on Close.
Adjust Hydrograph Symbol Locations

1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrograph " Modify Hydrograph Symbol
Location.
2. Select the Hydrograph Name.
3. Click on Apply.
4. Select a location in CAD.
5. Click on Close.
6. Repeat steps 2-4 as necessary to get the symbols in the locations desired.
Culvert Rating Curve

Often you need to just verify the capacity of a culvert or weir without determining the hydrographs. In
this section you create a new scenario and create a discharge simple culvert rating curve.

Create Scenario
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Hydrographs " Manage Scenarios.
2. Click on the New Scenario icon.
The New Scenario dialog box (Figure 17-35 on page 505) displays.
3. Set the Scenario Prototype drop list to Watershed Modeling Metric Defaults.
4. Type Culvert for the Scenario Name.
5. Set the Watershed drop list to <None>.
6. Set the Land Use Group drop list to <None>.
7. Click on OK.
8. Click on Close.
You need to have a scenario defined in order to create the culvert structure.
Edit/Create Culvert
1. From the Watershed Modeling menu bar select Detention " Edit Culvert.
The Edit Culvert dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-88 Edit Culvert Dialog Box
To add a culvert you need to open the Manager for the Outlet Structures and add a new culvert
structure.
2. Click on the Manage Outlet Structures icon.
The Manage Outlet Structures dialog box (Figure 17-64 on page 529) displays.
Modeling

The New Outlet Structure dialog box (Figure 17-65 on page 529) displays.
4. Type Culvert 1 in the Name edit field.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on Close.
Enter the information into the edit fields of the Edit Culvert dialog box.

7. Set the Shape drop list to Circular Corrugated Metal Pipe.
8. Set the Type drop list to Mitered to Slope.
9. Type 900 mm in the Diameter edit field.
10. Type in 30 m in the Pipe Length edit field.
11. Type in 0.02 m/m in the Pipe Slope edit field.
12. Check that the Manning's n value is set to 0.013.
13. Type an Inlet Invert Elevation value of 100.0.
14. Enter a Tailwater Elevation of 101.0.
15. Set the Number of Barrels to 1.
Now you need to define the rating curve limits, starting at a minimum elevation of 100 and a
maximum elevation of 104.
16. Type 100.0 in the Minimum Elevation edit field.
17. Type 104.0 in the Maximum Elevation edit field.
18. Type 0.1 for the Elevation Increment.
The Culvert Stage Discharge Results dialog box (below) displays.
Figure 17-89 Culvert Stage Discharge Results Dialog Box
20. Click on Close.

21. Click on Apply.
22. Click on Close.
The information for the rating curve is now available for printing out as a table of data or placing the
curve in the graphics by using the Output commands.

Summary
! Add an Additional Drawing.
! Create Layer Groups.
! Create and define Watershed Sub-basins.
! Create Land Uses.
! Create Scenarios.
! Create Unit Hydrographs.
! Create Flood Hydrographs.
! Create Computed Flood Hydrographs.
! Create Santa Barbara Urban Hydrographs.
! Combine Flood Hydrographs.
! Perform Channel Routing on Hydrographs.
! Estimate Storage Requirements.
! Create Discharge Structures including Culverts, Stand Pipes, and Trapezoidal Weirs.
! Create Reservoirs.
! Perform Reservoir Routing by Storage Indication Methods.
! Place Hydrographs and Reservoir graphs in CAD.
! Create a Culvert Rating Curve.
Modeling


Civil Tutorial

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil Tutorial

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil Tutorial

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil/Survey Tutorial by Eagle Point

1 Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point ................. 5

2 Lesson 2 – Data Collection Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

3 Lesson 3 – Survey Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

4 Lesson 4 – Data Collection Advanced Topics . . . . . 49

7 Lesson 7 – Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

8 Lesson 8 – Surface Modeling Basics . . . . . . . . . . . 123

9 Lesson 9 – Site Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Table of Contents iii

10 Lesson 10 – RoadCalc Rural Road . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

11 Lesson 11 – RoadCalc Urban Road . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

13 Lesson 13 – Surface Modeling Advanced Topics 297

14 Lesson 14 – Storm Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

15 Lesson 15 – Sanitary Sewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

16 Lesson 16 – Intersection Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Table of Contents vii

17 Lesson 17 – Watershed Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

viii Civil/Survey Tutorial

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 5

Operating System File Path

Figure 1-1 Configure Menu

Figure 1-2 Configure Tutorial Project Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 7

Starting Eagle Point and Creating a Project

Figure 1-3 Eagle Point Tool Bar

Figure 1-4 Open Dialog Box

Figure 1-6 New Project Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 9

Figure 1-7 Open Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 11

Figure 1-9 Formats Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 13

Figure 1-11 Plot Scales Dialog Box

2. Type 100 in the Horizontal Scale edit field.

Default CAD Settings

Figure 1-12 AutoCAD/BricsCad Default CAD Settings Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 15

Figure 1-14 Prototype Settings Dialog Box

Figure 1-15 New Prototype Dialog Box

Figure 1-16 New Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 17

Eagle Point Nodes

Node (Field Code) Library

Figure 1-17 Node (Field Code) Library Dialog Box

3. Click on the New Field Code Library icon.

Figure 1-19 New Field Code Library Dialog Box

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 19

Figure 1-20 Global Modify Dialog Box

New Field Code/Node

Figure 1-21 New Field Code Dialog Box

Figure 1-22 Attribute Styles Library Dialog Box

Figure 1-23 New Attribute Style Dialog Box

3. Type Control Point in the Name edit field.

Lesson 1 – Starting Eagle Point 21

Annotate Settings That Should Be Set to On

Attribute Text Justifi- Delta Delta AutoCAD/ MicroStation Style

Description 2.5 ML 5.0 0.0 PNTCTRLDES 63 Standard

Northing 2.5 BR -5.0 .375 PNTCTRLCOOR 60 Standard

Easting 2.5 TR -5.0 -.375 PNTCTRLCOOR 60 Standard